Chapter 1: Four Hundred Years and Four Thousand Miles Out of Place
Notes:
All Spanish is in italics!
Chapter Text
The rain had begun in earnest when Milo stepped off of the trolley. He stood for a moment while the trolley moved away, watching the water drip off the front of his grandfather’s pith helmet. He was already soaked from Mr. Harcourt’s car splashing him, so he barely noticed the rain as he trudged along the streets until he reached the river’s edge.
Mr. Harcourt’s “suggestion” had been a mockery, Milo knew, but at the moment, Milo hadn’t had any other ideas. He’d silently taken up the coin and his ruined resignation form and gone to the closest trolley stop.
And now here he was, staring down at the Potomac River. The rain was picking up, creating a slight hissing sound when the drops pattered against the flowing water.
Now what? Milo wasn’t going to jump into the filthy water. He was cold enough already, thank you, Mr. Harcourt, and it wasn’t doing anything to clear his head.
Milo looked downriver. Docks jutted over the water a short distance away, where rowboats bobbed at the end of their ropes.
For a frustrated split-second, Milo had the urge to find whoever owned the rowboats and offer to rent one. The museum clearly wasn’t going to fund Milo’s expedition, which left just Milo to find the Shepherd’s Journal himself!
Milo started to laugh at the very thought of crossing the ocean in a rowboat , only to jump at a simultaneous flash and crack of lightning. For a moment, the air -no, the water- seemed to glow blue.
Milo rubbed his eyes and looked again. The illusion was gone. He shook his head, then looked down at himself. He sighed. He was drenched, several miles from his apartment, and he didn’t even have any money to ride the trolley home, never mind rent a rowboat to get down to the coast.
Milo huffed at himself as he turned from the river. He needed to go home, get dried off, and figure out his next plan. He needed more evidence, but at this point, Milo was pretty convinced that the only evidence that the Board would accept would be the Shepherd’s Journal itself. Would they accept even that, or would they claim the Journal was just more fairy tales?
A commotion came from the river, interrupting Milo’s thoughts. Milo frowned, thinking the noise seemed to be voices . But there wasn’t anyone else around, much less in the river.
“Tulio!”
The high, terrified voice made Milo spin. He gaped when he saw a red-clothed figure flailing in the water.
“Hey!” Milo yelled, running back to the river’s edge.
The figure spun around, flapped a hand dismissively at Milo, then scanned the water. If he noticed that he was being dragged rapidly downriver, he didn’t show it.
Milo bolted for the nearby pier, keeping an eye on the figure. He jumped onto the nearest dock just as the stranger dove underwater. Milo ran to the edge of the dock and skidded to a halt to stare in disbelief.
The water was glowing! It was distant and distorted, but a very distinct glow was coming from below!
The water churned fiercely, then the glow cut off as a massive white horse burst to the surface! Milo fell back with a cry of shock, landing on his butt on the waterlogged boards.
The stranger reappeared a second later, dragging a second, dark-haired stranger along with him. The blond-haired man heaved his companion onto the panicking horse’s back, where he slumped, coughing violently.
“Hey!” Milo yelled again. “Over here!”
The odd trio were being pulled rapidly downriver, and Milo was afraid they’d be washed right past.
The blond-haired stranger looked again at Milo, then grabbed reins dangling from the horse’s head and called something. The horse calmed and surged toward Milo.
Milo dropped to his stomach and reached out. The stranger threw the reins to Milo, who scrambled backward on hands and knees, leading the horse to calmer water between the docks. The stranger on the horse’s back moved only to cough, while his companion urged the horse onward from behind.
Milo and the stranger got the horse onto a stone ramp running into the water. The horse’s hooves skittered on the stone and it slipped backward. The blond-haired stranger shouted and pushed, and Milo threw his whole weight backward. The horse regained its footing right as Milo slipped and fell onto his back. The horse kept moving, though. Milo yelped and threw his hands over his face, but the horse calmly walked over Milo to the top of the ramp. Milo rolled onto his elbows.
The blond-haired stranger helped his companion off the horse, fussing briefly over him before getting waved off. The dark-haired stranger tried to take a step, but promptly stumbled and fell. His companion grabbed him and they both half-fell so they were sitting on the ground.
Milo scrambled to his feet. “Hey! Hey, you okay? What were you doing out there?”
Both strangers gave Milo odd looks. Milo hesitated as he drew closer, seeing them both clearly for the first time.
The clothes they wore were loose and light, not at all fitting for being in a boat. Or in the rain, really. They were informal, but sturdy and fit the pair in a strange manner. Milo tilted his head. The clothes were somewhat familiar to him, but Milo wondered why the two men were wearing clothes about four centuries out of style.
The blond-haired man asked his companion, “ Tulio, what’s he saying?”
“Beats me,” said the other through a cough.
Milo startled. They were speaking Spanish?
The dark-haired stranger -Tulio- looked around and frowned. “Miguel, where are we?”
“At the pool…” Miguel looked around. “Uh…”
No, Milo realized. It was Old Castilian , a dialect that hadn’t been used in three or four hundred years!
Combined with their clothes… maybe they were scientists? They wouldn’t be the first eccentric scientist Milo had met, though they typically were older gentlemen who had taken to acting like they were living what they’d spent their lives researching.
“His clothes are strange, too,” Miguel said.
Milo blinked. “What?”
“What?” Miguel repeated.
Milo shook his head. He knew both the old and new Spanish, though he was more used to speaking the modern version. They were similar enough, though…
“Are you hurt?” Milo asked them.
Miguel lit up. “Ah, he does speak our language!”
“Miguel,” Tulio muttered. Having caught his breath, he regarded Milo guardedly.
“Ah, Tulio, he’s our rescuer!” Miguel said grandly.
Milo smiled a bit awkwardly. “I’m Milo Thatch.” He put out his hand to shake.
Miguel and Tulio stared at Milo’s hand for a moment. Tulio said something Milo barely made out.
“See, he didn’t save us for free.”
“What? Uh, I’m saying hello?” Milo said, uncomfortably pulling his hand back.
Miguel elbowed Tulio with a smug look. Tulio just narrowed his eyes at him.
“I’m Miguel.” Miguel thrust out his hand while gesturing at Tulio with his head. “That’s Tulio.”
Milo started to reach out to shake Miguel’s hand, only for Miguel to pull his hand back. Milo said, “People usually… you know, actually shake hands.”
Miguel looked at Milo’s hand, then his own. Offering a cheerfully confused smile, Miguel put his hand back out. Milo took it and shook it lightly.
Lightning cracked overhead, making everyone flinch. Milo pulled his hand back and glanced at the sky. He wondered how in the world he’d gotten there, sitting in the rain and teaching two strangers he’d helped out of the river how to properly greet people. He shouldn’t have even been at the river in the first place!
“Well, nice meeting you,” Milo said, rising to his feet, “But I have to get going. Are you two going to be… okay?”
“Right as rain,” Miguel said, then laughed.
Milo couldn’t help smiling.
“Just one question,” Miguel said. Gesturing vaguely around, he stood. “Where are we?”
“Well, er, the Potomac,” Milo said. Receiving a blank look, he added, “I don’t know what street we’re on…”
“No, no, I mean what town is this?” Miguel asked.
Now it was Milo’s turn to stare blankly. “You’re in Washington D.C.”
“Ah.” Miguel looked at Tulio still sitting on the ground, then the horse, then back to Milo. “Never heard of it.”
“Never-” Milo shook his head. “Washington D.C.? Capital of the United States?”
“Sounds important,” Miguel said.
“Did you hit your head?” Milo asked.
“Uh, no.” Miguel rubbed his head and looked at Tulio. “I don’t think I did, at least.”
“I’ve never heard of it, either,” Tulio said. He gave Miguel a dry look. “Told you we should’ve gone straight back to the coast.”
“Oh, yes, because the rowboat worked fantastic last time,” Miguel said.
“Better than your glowing pool,” Tulio said.
“Better than heatstroke.”
“You almost drowned us!”
“I saved your life!”
Milo looked back-and-forth as the pair fell to bickering, referring to things making less and less sense. A stone jaguar?
“But,” Tulio said, turning his head away, “That’s in the past. We can’t be that far off course. You, there. Milo Thatch, you said, right?”
Milo nodded.
“Which way is Spain?”
Milo blinked. Of course, it made sense that they were from Spain, but they were a little… far from home, so to speak.
“What’s that look? I don’t like that look,” Tulio said. “Miguel, where did you bring us now?”
“It’s just that Spain is… it’s at least 4,000 miles from here,” Milo said.
“...how far by rowboat?” Miguel asked.
The question made Milo snort, largely because he’d just been considering a similarly lengthy voyage in a rowboat himself. Miguel and Tulio seemed confused by the response, but Milo wasn’t quite sure how to explain himself. He looked around until he spotted a small open shed at the water’s edge. He waved for the pair to follow him.
It was a tight fit in the shed, mostly because the horse joined them. Shifting to try and keep some distance from the horse -he seemed tame enough, but he was huge - Milo noticed something on the horse’s back. While he tried to get a good look, lightning crashed and the small critter leaped from the horse’s back to hide in the shadows of the shed.
“Aw, Ladron,” Miguel said, following Milo’s gaze.
“Ladron?” Milo repeated. The critter’s name was “thief”?
“Miguel’s pet rat,” Tulio muttered.
“He saved us, it was the least I could do to give him a home,” Miguel said, crouching to speak to the critter.
Milo looked up at the horse’s snort. “What’s your horse’s name?”
“Altivo.”
Milo smiled when the horse snorted again.
“Altivo’s jealous.” Miguel turned around, holding an-
“Where’d you get an armadillo?” Milo had to ask.
“Oh, is that what he is? He started following us a bit ago.” Miguel asked cheerfully as Ladron tried to burrow into his sleeve. “Now. Spain?”
“There’s an ocean between here and Spain,” Milo said. “Not to mention you’re a bit far from the coast. How- how did you get here, anyway?”
Miguel and Tulio shared a look. Milo knew that look, but it was a little strange not seeing it in the mirror or on his grandfather’s face.
It was a look that screamed, “no sane person is going to believe this.”
Milo had an urge to laugh, but he just said, “I’ll keep an open mind. What happened?”
“Well,” Miguel began, ignoring Tulio slashing a hand in front of his throat in a “be quiet” gesture, “We were exploring this… island, you see. Big island, full of jungles and waterfalls and statues and whatnot. And we found this pool that seemed to lead somewhere. Seeing as how some of the statues and whirlpools we’d seen in this ‘island’ lead to each other, we decided to see where it went.”
“Miguel slipped and Altivo and I jumped after him,” Tulio condensed.
“And then the pool started glowing and sucked us down,” Miguel went on. “Next thing I know, it’s raining and we’re in a… potomac river, you say?”
“Potomac’s the name of the river,” Milo helped.
“Potamac the River, four thousand miles away from home,” Miguel said. He looked at Tulio. “Did I miss anything?”
“Just the believable parts,” Tulio said through grit teeth.
Now Milo did laugh. The pair gave him startled looks.
“Well, you’re in luck,” Milo said with a dry and somewhat depreciating laugh. “Because I’m probably the one person in Washington D.C. crazy enough to believe that.”
“So it’s perfect!” Miguel said. He nudged Tulio. “Perhaps even fate.”
“I stopped believing in fate when I was twelve,” Tulio said.
Milo smiled at Miguel’s dramatic pout. He wasn’t sure if he completely believed the pair’s story, but… well, neither man seemed any more insane than Milo or his grandfather. If they were trying to hide something, they’d have come up with something at least a little more believable. Or they would have been frantically trying to provide Milo with evidence, a habit Milo knew he had when it came to explaining the Shepherd’s Journal.
Milo had a thought. “What year is it?”
“You’re asking us?” Miguel said with a laugh.
“Humor me, ” Milo said with a shrug.
“It’s 1519.”
Milo’s thoughts screeched to a halt. He stared at Miguel, waiting for him to laugh off the joke or correct himself but he… didn’t.
The silence stretched as Milo and Miguel stared at each other. Tulio turned his gaze outside the shed, muttering something about the buildings barely visible in the gloom. Altivo stamped and Ladron scrambled to the floor to hide in the shadows again.
“What?” Miguel eventually asked.
“It’s 1914,” Milo said.
Miguel blinked at him. “No, that can’t be right, otherwise that would mean we’re-”
“Four hundred years into the future?!” Tulio finished.
“That’s impossible! ” Milo said, wondering if maybe the two of them had hit their heads and were just stuck in the same delusions.
“Well, so is stone jaguar’s coming to life,” Miguel said, holding out his hands in a placating gesture.
“A what doing what?” Milo asked, amazed.
“Stone jaguar. Came to life, tried to eat us before we sent it down the whirlpool,” Miguel said with a casual shrug, because that was apparently a normal day for him? “Hey, Tulio, you don’t think Tzekel-Kan had something to do with this?”
“Only if he somehow escaped Cortes,” Tulio said, waving his hands. “And if Milo isn’t the crazy one.”
“Hey!”
“You just admitted to being crazy,” Miguel pointed out.
“Crazy enough to believe your story about whirlpools and-and from being from the 1500s!” Milo defended himself.
“Ah, so you do believe us,” Miguel said.
“If you aren’t crazy, then you would’ve come up with something a little more believable,” Milo said.
“So, we might all be crazy,” Miguel said.
“That is… well… I guess… ” Milo gave up.
Altivo threw up his head with a squeal that sounded like laughter. Miguel started laughing, and Milo couldn’t help joining in. Tulio looked at them like they were crazy -and Milo knew Miguel was thinking the same because they both started laughing harder at the same time- then looked away. But not before Milo saw his mouth twitch up.
Milo rubbed his eyes as his and Miguel’s laughter trailed off. It was late and he was soaked and in a shed with two strangers, a horse, and an armadillo, topping off a day of disappointment and mockery. But laughing had felt good and, well, Milo felt like he was thinking clearly for the first time since the canceled meeting.
Milo pulled his resignation paper from his pocket. It was drying and somehow still in one piece. He studied where the ink had smeared in his signature, though his name was still visible.
“What’s that?” Miguel asked, leaning to look over Milo’s shoulder.
“Resignation letter. I’m quitting my job,” Milo said.
Miguel patted his shoulder. “Good choice. Me, I don’t believe in letting a job keep me in one place for too long. That and Tulio and I get kicked out of most towns in about a month.”
“Miguel,” Tulio said through grit teeth.
“For what?” Milo asked.
“Gambling,” Miguel said with a shrug.
“Miguel!” Tulio exclaimed.
“What? Milo doesn’t seem to be the gambling type, anyway.”
“Gambling isn’t illegal and I don’t think it ever…” Milo paused as he caught on. “...well, don’t do it here. If you get caught ‘gambling,’ you won’t just get kicked out of town. You’d probably be arrested.”
Neither looked particularly concerned with the possibility. Milo shook his head and looked at his resignation paper.
He could see nothing would sway the Board, and to keep on trying would only frustrate him at best or cause him to be hauled off to an asylum at worst. He couldn’t stay working at the museum, though. There wasn’t anything keeping him from leaving Washington.
Milo wondered if he could get to the coast somehow. Maybe he could get to Iceland by working for his passage. From there, he could… well, walk to wherever the Journal was hidden. Yeah, it wouldn’t be impossible.
“Is it that interesting?” Miguel asked.
Milo startled. “What? No, I was just, uh… I was just thinking. I need to go now, I have an… expedition of sorts to plan.”
“An expedition?” Miguel repeated. “Where to?”
“Iceland,” Milo said distractedly.
“What’s in Iceland?”
Milo hesitated.
“Come on, we told you our story,” Miguel complained.
“Okay, fine… ” Milo laughed. “My story isn’t much stranger than yours. Have you heard of Atlantis?”
Miguel shook his head, but Tulio turned with a look of interest.
“The city that sank into the ocean?” Tulio asked.
“That’s it.”
“It’s actually Iceland?”
Milo chuckled. “No, no. But I believe there’s a journal hidden in Iceland detailing how to reach Atlantis. I want to find the Journal, find Atlantis, and…” Milo trailed off, the Board’s rejection still a fresh sting. “And, well… you probably think I’m crazy, huh?”
“Sure, but we’ve established that,” Miguel said with a completely non-judgmental shrug. He glanced at Tulio, the pair exchanging another look. “Have you heard of El Dorado?”
“The mythical city of gold? Of course! I’m not as familiar with it as Atlantis because Atlantis was my grandfather’s life’s work, and mine as well, but, sometimes myths overlap or have clues for the others.” Milo cleared his throat, aware that he was rambling. “What about it?”
Miguel grinned. “We found it.”
“You- you found El Dorado? When? How? Why haven’t you told anyone-”
“Because,” Tulio interrupted, “You probably think El Dorado is just some empty city full of gold, right?”
“Well, the legends…” Milo shrugged. “What… did you find? Pottery, maybe?”
“A city of gold,” Miguel said. His gaze turned distant and distracted, but he was still smiling. “But it wasn’t empty. It was full of people, a thriving village of people deep in their hidden mountain.”
“Woah,” Milo whispered, awed.
“Hidden, ” Miguel emphasized. “Except for one crazy priest guy, they were all peaceful and content to stay where they were.”
Milo caught on. “You didn’t tell anyone so they could stay hidden.”
“More than that,” Miguel said, his expression turning slightly pained. “Cortes and his men were being led straight to the city by the Tzekel-Kan, the crazy priest who brought a statue to life and tried to kill us because we weren’t gods-”
“What?” Milo was going to get the entire story from start to finish at some point, but what?
“We destroyed the entrance,” Tulio finished. “A hundred men could dig for a month and not find the city of El Dorado.”
Miguel made a noncommittal sound. “Maybe a week. I’m not sure how much of the tunnel actually collapsed.”
“No one better find it,” Tulio said, his eye twitching, “Because otherwise I gave up all that gold for nothing.”
Miguel patted Tulio’s shoulder, the gesture seeming more teasing than comforting.
“So, we believe your story,” Miguel said.
“Well, that makes two people who believe me,” Milo said with a weak smile.
Tulio frowned. “What about the people in your expedition?”
“Calling it an expedition was a joke.” Milo gestured to himself. “ You’re looking at the whole crew. I don’t have any supplies or transportation or… anything, really.”
“Just a map?” Miguel asked.
“More like a series of clues,” Milo admitted.
He was starting to realize why his proposals had failed so many times. He… really didn’t have much of anything, did he? Just faith in his grandfather and their research… which was plenty for Milo, but everyone else?
“I like those odds,” Miguel said, startling Milo.
“What?”
“Well, how do you think Tulio and I found El Dorado?” Miguel asked. “A map we won in a game of dice, a rowboat, a horse, and a whole lot of time in the jungle!”
Milo smiled slightly. “Yeah?”
“Yeah, and now look at us!”
“No gold and apparently four hundred years away from where we came from,” Tulio said drily.
“Oh, don’t be so negative!” Miguel said positively. “We’ll get back to Spain and… and start over!”
Tulio fazed forlornly at him. Miguel shrugged with a smile that didn’t quite reach his eyes.
Milo looked at the rain still pouring down. It seemed like reality had crashed down on all three of them. Five, if he counted the morose animals. None of them had a place just then, not even a destination, unless Milo counted…
“Want to visit Iceland?” Milo blurted out.
Tulio and Miguel looked at him. Milo shrugged, a little startled by his own suggestion.
“You don’t have anywhere in particular to go, so why return to Spain?” Milo asked. Encouraged by Miguel’s nod, he went on, “You could always travel until you find someplace you like. And you’ll need someone to tell you about the modern world.” Milo briefly wondered if he should be more concerned by the apparent time travelers in his company. “I’m headed to Iceland as soon as I can figure out passage and, well… some company who actually believes me about Atlantis would be nice.”
“Forget traveling to Iceland,” Miguel said.
Milo tried to not wince, but Miguel went on.
“How about we go with you all the way to Atlantis?”
“Really, Miguel?” Tulio asked. “Discovering one mythical city wasn’t enough?”
“Nope! C’mon, Tulio. Just think of the adventure, the mystery! Don’t you want that again?”
“I’ve had enough ocean in my life without diving into it, thanks.”
“What about Iceland?” Milo asked.
Despite his initial surprise at himself, he was quickly warming to the possibility of having company. Especially since the two of them had actual adventuring experience. All Milo had was his grandfather’s stories and an itch to find the missing city.
Milo went on, “Come with me to Iceland. Or, even just the coast. If you don’t want to join my expedition, okay! We can go our separate ways.”
Tulio stepped out from under the shed and looked in the direction of the river. Milo was once again reminded that they weren’t from Washington. Or that century. Maybe they would be more interested in finding a way back.
“Do…” Milo hesitated. “Do you want to go back? You probably have something or someone-”
“We don’t have anything in the world or time or whatever it was we left,” Tulio declared, returning to the shed. “It’s been just Miguel and me since we were kids.”
Altivo snorted and Ladron chittered.
“And Miguel’s pets,” Tulio said, gesturing to the animals.
“Is that a yes?” Milo asked, uncertain.
“It’s a yes!” Miguel declared.
“Great! First we need… well, a way to the coast,” Milo said. “Then we can find passage…”
Miguel looked at the docks. “Why not buy a boat?”
“If I could afford that, I’d have bought a boat a long time ago and would probably have the Shepherd’s Journal by now,” Milo said.
“Right, right…”
Tulio snapped his fingers. “I have an idea. Milo, are you ready to go now or…?”
“Yes- wait, not quite, I need clothes and you could use some, too, some provisions.” Milo rubbed his chin. “I can get what I need at the museum, though. It’s closer than my apartment.”
“You do that,” Tulio said. “Miguel and I will take care of the boat.”
“Great!” Milo started out of the shed, then paused. “You aren’t going to… ‘gamble’ for it, are you?”
“Only if you know how to sail a boat faster than whatever military is around here,” Tulio said. He actually made it sound like an option.
Milo quickly shook his head. “Actually… I’ve never sailed before. And you two won’t have seen steam engines before.”
“A what?” Tulio asked.
Milo shrugged. “But I’ve read about how to use them. We’ll be fine. Okay, boat, next is…” Milo face-palmed. “Clothes and supplies. I’ll be back soon.”
Milo ducked into the rain while the pair waved him away. The wind and rain hadn’t let up and Milo didn’t have any money for a trolley, so he was drenched once again in minutes.
Even better, near the museum, Milo remembered that he’d left his keys to the doors in his workroom. By the time he got back, it would be too late for the museum to be open and all the workers would likely be gone.
Luckily, the doors weren’t the only ways inside. Milo knew of a small window in the corner of the boiler room that never fully shut when the weather became cold and wet.
Shivering, Milo left the street and approached the museum from behind. He carefully pried the window open and dropped inside, relieved he hadn’t been caught by any workers getting out late. Even if they recognized Milo, he’d have a hard time explaining himself.
Milo headed past the boiler to a small room in the back. Some days, the boiler acted up so much that Milo had to spend the night during winter to keep the whole building from freezing. As a result, he’d set up a cot in the back room, and had simply never removed it. He also kept enough extra clothing and personal belongings in the room that the basement was practically his second home.
Milo quickly changed into dry clothes and threw the rest of the clothes onto the cot.
Milo was considering one of his spare shirts, trying to guess if Miguel and Tulio would fit in his clothes, when he saw a wrapped package on his cluttered desk. Distracted as he was, the only reason Milo even noticed was because his small statues and books had been moved aside to make a clear space.
“Weird,” Milo said as he picked up the package. “I didn’t think anyone came…”
The package was wrapped tightly -if a bit messily- with butcher paper and twine. It was heavy and thick, like a book. Then he saw the words scrawled across the paper.
“To Milo with love, Thaddeus Thatch.”
That… Thaddeus Thatch was Milo’s grandfather!
Numb with shock, Milo untied the twine and opened the paper. Revealed underneath was a thick book with a wooden cover and thin metal detailing. It was heavy and smelled musty. The spine seemed to be secured with a rod of metal with a fancy knob on either end, giving the book an appearance of a scroll.
Then Milo realized what was on the cover. Surrounded by a diamond of gray metal was a symbol of gold with a dot in the center. To the average person, it would look like a fancy swirling detail. To Milo, though, the design was an Atlantean “A.”
Milo forgot to breathe as he stared at the rune. He knew now that he’d seen pictures, read descriptions of this very book, and yet-
Milo flipped the book open to a random picture. Atlantean runes covered the page, surrounding a sketch of fish several times bigger than the little human figures sitting on their backs.
Milo turned the page. More runes, more pictures.
“It’s the-” Milo gasped, then went on, his voice rapidly rising, “The Shepherd’s Journal!”
But how? Milo looked back at the butcher paper he’d dropped on the floor in shock. He scooped it up and smoothed the paper, staring at the note.
Milo sat heavily on his cot. He held the Journal in one hand and the paper in the other. All he could do was stare at his name written on the paper.
His grandfather had found the Journal! Why hadn’t he said anything to Milo? Why hadn’t he said anything to the Board, or followed the clues to Atlantis?
Milo exhaled slowly. He remembered his grandfather’s last days, how he’d come back from a long trip, full of exhilaration. Milo had thought at the time that his grandfather was acting like a little kid as he rushed from the train station to the house, then to the museum. He remembered how his grandfather had returned, looking exhausted and one hundred years old. He’d gotten sick shortly after. People had said he’d gotten the sickness from wherever he’d traveled to, and that the trip had been too much for him.
Milo had never believed that sickness had taken his grandfather. Yes, he’d gotten sick, but Grandpa was too strong for sickness to kill him. In the end, Milo believed it was the people of the museum, beating him down. He’d lost his will to fight.
But the Journal. How had it gotten into Milo’s room? Grandpa had obviously wanted it to go to Milo, but why was it showing up just now? Maybe it had been hidden somewhere on his estate, which was now owned by someone else. They could have found the book and tracked Milo down to give it to him. If a courier had brought it for Milo, they wouldn’t have waited for him to return. Or maybe Grandpa had made arrangements for someone to bring it to Milo on some set date.
Except Milo couldn’t think about anything significant about that specific day. Well, aside from dragging two strangers from the river and the Journal showing up in his room, one of which Grandpa couldn’t have known about.
Milo ran a hand across the Journal’s cover. In his hands was his grandfather’s life’s work. He’d put everything into finding the Journal.
Milo could wait until morning, present the Journal to the Board. With evidence, they’d have no choice but to fund the expedition to find Atlantis!
…right?
Milo could envision the conversation, his attempts to explain how he could have miraculously found the Journal without any funding. Even if the Board believed his explanation, Milo already suspected the Journal wouldn’t be proof enough of where to find Atlantis. He’d be fighting the same battle, only with a new destination on the ocean floor.
Milo opened the Journal to a random page and absently stroked the rough page. In all honesty, he had as much chance at finding Atlantis with Tulio and Miguel as he did in convincing the Board to fund the expedition. Probably more so.
Milo took out his resignation paper and carefully smoothed it as much as he could, then set it on the clear spot on his desk. He glanced at his books, but shook his head. He gathered his tools and put them in a toolbelt.
After strapping the toolbelt around his middle, Milo resumed packing his clothes, money, navigation tools he barely knew how to use, his battered camera, paper and pens, and a bit of bread and meats he’d left in his room into two packs. The supplies fairly weighed Milo down, but he knew they’d need everything. Probably more than what Milo held, but Milo was anxious to get moving.
Milo strode to the door, where he again paused. He looked back.
Life at the museum was dull, repetitive, and a little degrading at times, but it was all Milo had known since his grandfather’s death. He was leaving it all, to go running -or perhaps “rowing”- across the ocean for a lost city that few people believed to exist anymore.
After a moment, Milo smiled. “Time to get out of this dungeon and find Atlantis.”
Milo headed up the steps. At the last second, Milo stopped and dropped a pack. He took Grandpa’s picture from its place of honor on the table, then tucked it carefully into a pack.
Rather than take the museum keys and have to find a way to get them back later, Milo exited through the window again, wedging it closed behind him before disappearing into the rain.
Milo returned to the shed where he’d left the foursome. Focused as he was on not dropping anything, he didn’t see the boat until he was beside the shed. He stopped in shock, the bags dropping from his shoulders.
As illogical as a rowboat would have been, that’s what Milo was expecting. Not a boat with an actual engine and paddles and a proper little cabin at the front and a hatch leading somewhere below.
Miguel, standing at the wheel, was the first to spot Milo. “Milo! Over here!”
As if there were two other Spaniards, a horse, and an armadillo on a boat in the river in the pouring rain. Milo smiled and boarded the boat.
“How?” Milo asked.
“We didn’t steal it, if that’s what you’re asking,” Tulio said. He was frowning at the paddles. “Where’s the paddles in this?”
“ You’re looking at them,” Milo said.
Tulio looked at him like he was crazy. “How are we supposed to row with these things?”
“We don’t,” Milo said with a smile.
“It’s a sailboat, then!” Miguel offered.
Milo laughed. “No, not that, either. Hold on, I’ll start the engine.”
“Start it doing what?” Tulio asked.
“You’ll see!”
The hatch on the deck led down to a small sleeping area and a tiny galley with a bathroom. Milo dropped his gear onto a bed and looked around, quickly finding a door under the stairs. It led to the engine room, where Milo spent a few minutes familiarizing himself with the engine. It started up easier than Milo expected, and the boat abruptly lurched forward.
Milo bumped against the wall, then turned to the door, only to fall when the boat sharply stopped. Shouts came from above, and Milo scrambled to get back onto the deck.
“The rope!” Miguel was yelling.
The boat was shaking, straining against the rope tying it to the docks. The paddles were moving steadily, causing the boat to arc slowly toward the stone pathway.
Milo stared. “Uh…”
Tulio scrambled across the deck and fell against the post holding the rope. He tore at the knots until the rope came free and the boat lurched forward, sending everyone thudding to the deck.
“What-” Miguel scrambled to his feet and turned the wheel so they wouldn’t hit the opposite side of the river, then finished, “Was that?!”
“You forgot to untie the boat,” Tulio said.
“Not the rope!” Miguel said. He pointed at the paddles. “How are those things moving on their own? It’s magic, isn’t it?”
“It’s not magic,” Milo said with a laugh. “ That’s the steam engine.”
Tulio studied the paddles with narrowed eyes, then shrugged. “Better than rowing across the ocean, I guess.”
Milo was curious about the statement, but it was hardly the strangest thing Tulio had said, so he didn’t ask as he and Tulio headed into the cabin. Altivo had already squeezed himself against one wall, taking up half the floor. Ladron shook himself on Altivo’s back.
“So, where are we headed, Cap’n?” Miguel asked with an over-the-top salute.”
Milo smiled at the title, then nodded downriver. “We’ll just follow the river to the coast. We’ll stop there for more supplies and… I’ll figure out our destination on our way, but I don’t know how to get to the ocean floor, actually.”
“How wer e you planning to do it before?” Tulio asked.
“There’s ships equipped with submersibles now,” Milo said. At the pair’s blank looks, he said, “Ships that can go underwater.”
Tulio blinked. “You mean…?”
Tulio mimed a submarine with his hands, putting one hand out flat as the ocean and making the other hand go under it, then back up.
Milo nodded. “Yep. But they’re pretty new. I’m not sure if we could even find one to rent on the coast.” He snapped his fingers. “Scuba!”
“Who?” Miguel asked.
“Not who, what. Self-contained underwater breathing apparatus,” Milo said. He got more blank looks. “Sorry. It’s clothes we can wear so we can breathe underwater. I wonder if that could get us to the bottom of the ocean?”
“Breathe? Underwater?” Tulio repeated. “That ’s impossible.”
Miguel lightly elbowed him. “We’re in the future, Tulio! Anything’s possible!”
Tulio rolled his eyes. “Sure. Next you’ll tell me that wagons move by themselves.”
Milo smiled.
“No.” Tulio waved his hands as Milo opened his mouth. “No, no, I don’t want to hear about it yet, not until I understand how this is moving!”
Mr. Whitmore’s fingers slowly tapped the armrests of his chair. He sought to distract himself by watching the coelacanth swimming about their massive aquarium, but not even they could pull his mind from his impatience.
The plan had been perfect, if perhaps a bit more elaborate than strictly necessary. But where was the fun of just calling up Milo and inviting him for tea?
No, Mr. Whitmore had sent Helga to bring Milo the book his grandfather had left and, if everything had gone according to plan, bring Milo to Mr. Whitmore’s estate when he questioned where the book had come from.
The plan had derailed almost instantly, when Milo had turned out to be nowhere to be found. He wasn’t at his apartment and nobody had seen him at the museum for hours.
When Helga had called about the snag, Mr. Whitmore had instructed her to leave the book in the boiler room where he knew Milo spent most of the cooling nights. It created a little bit more of a mystery, Mr. Whitmore thought, a bit of mystery Thaddeus would’ve appreciated.
Except then things had gotten even more out of control when Milo never showed up at the museum. Starting to get worried -Milo was a bit absent-minded and flighty, just like his grandfather, but he took his job very seriously- Mr. Whitmore had told Helga to retrieve the Journal and return to the estate, and they’d find Milo another way.
He’d last spoken to Helga half an hour before, and she hadn’t called back to report she had the Journal as he’d told her. Mr. Whitmore hoped that meant she’d found Milo and was in the process of bringing him to the estate.
Mr. Whitmore contemplated how to introduce himself to Milo. He knew Thaddeus had never mentioned him to the boy, and Milo might have a hard time accepting their connection. Then again, Mr. Whitmore had been the one to provide Milo with the book, and there were several paintings and photos of him and Thaddeus in his study.
And how would Milo feel about undertaking the expedition to find Atlantis when it came down to it? He’d tried to get the museum to fund many expeditions through the years, but none of them had made it to the stage of finding any sort of crew. Would Milo want to go along with the expedition or would he rather stay in Washington D.C. and translate the Journal?
Personally, Mr. Whitmore hoped it was the former. Sure, finding Atlantis would make history and the team would be heroes, yada yada… Mr. Whitmore just wanted a Thatch to be able to stand on Atlantean ground, though. For Milo to finish his grandfather’s work.
The phone rang shrilly, startling Mr. Whitmore from his thoughts. He snatched up the receiver.
“Hello?”
“It’s Helga.”
Mr. Whitmore smiled. “Ah, you got the Journal? Or, even better, you’ve got Milo!”
There was a pause Mr. Whitmore did not like.
“Helga?”
“The Journal is gone.”
Mr. Whitmore pulled the receiver from his ear, frowned at it, then replaced it. “Helga? Is there something wrong on your end? It sounds like you said the Shepherd's Journal is missing.”
“I did, Mr. Whitmore.”
“What?! How?!”
“I don’t know,” Helga said, her voice bearing a low growl that usually preluded someone getting kicked in the face. “We’ve watched who goes in and out of the boiler room, and it’s only ever been Milo. I never saw him today, but he was clearly there.”
“Unless someone else took the Journal,” Mr. Whitmore countered.
“Milo’s missing, but so are all of his spare clothes and a lot of his tools,” Helga said. “It looks like he packed for a trip.”
Mr. Whitmore’s heart dropped to his feet. Yes, he’d hoped Milo would be the sort to join the expedition to find Atlantis with no hesitation, but he’d have appreciated it if Milo had at least waited for the expedition!
“There’s something else,” Helga said.
“What? Come on, Helga, I’m not getting any younger, you know.”
“Someone broke into the boiler room through a window. I found tracks leading in and out.”
Mr. Whitmore frowned. “What? Who climbs into the basement of a museum?”
“Normally, I’d suggest someone wanting to steal from the museum,” Helga said. “But with the Journal and Milo missing, and him packing for a trip…”
“Wait.” Mr. Whitmore leaned forward in his seat. “Are you saying Milo was kidnapped?”
“Unless there’s a good reason Milo would break in and out of the museum.”
“There isn’t,” Mr. Whitmore said tensely. He bounded to his feet, barking into the phone, “Scour the grounds and his apartment building, just in case. I’m gathering the crew and calling the police chief now. We have to find Milo before he's taken out of the city!”
Chapter 2: Zippers and Jaguars
Notes:
While my original plan was to write out the whole story before I started posting, it's become much longer than expected. I shouldn't be surprised. 'XD It's about two-thirds written right now, with most of it decently edited. But I've left people hanging for awhile and everyone's been so nice in their comments that, why not, have a couple chapters. (The second will be posted, say... next week?)
It was too much fun figuring out things that would have changed over four hundred years, and Miguel and Tulio being baffled by it all. XD
Chapter Text
By the time anyone considered sleeping, the sun was rising. But they couldn’t help it; Miguel and Tulio had so many questions and Milo had just as many in return. Most often, the conversation stayed on whatever had changed in the four hundred years that the two Spaniards had apparently just skipped.
Miguel’s mind was spinning with everything Milo had told them. Milo’s job was to heat a museum, which was some building where a bunch of old treasures were stored. Boats with “engines” could cross oceans or go under the water without oars.
But for as many questions Milo answered, Miguel got two more. Why would so many treasures be stored in one building? Was everyone in this time just really rich? How did engines work -even when Milo explained twice, Miguel still didn’t get it. How did people breathe underwater?
And that wasn’t mentioning zippers.
Miguel pulled the zipper of the jacket Milo had lent him up and down. He studied the metal “teeth” above the zipper and again tried to push them together with his fingers. They just slipped apart, yet the teeth that passed through the zipper were connected so tightly Miguel couldn’t pull them apart.
“You can’t tell me this isn’t magic,” Miguel said, fiddling with the zipper.
“It isn’t magic,” Milo said with a laugh. “Magic doesn’t exist.”
“Tell that to the giant stone jaguar that tried to eat Tulio and me,” Miguel said.
“You’ve mentioned a stone jaguar twice now,” Milo said. “What do you mean?”
“Oh, where do I start? Let’s see, we told you about the village, the gold, why we left… okay, there was this crazy priest guy, Tzekel-Kan, who thought he was a speaker of the gods!” Miguel said, laughing a bit at the memory. “So, when Tulio, Altivo, and I showed up, he thought we were gods.”
“He did? Why?” Milo asked.
Miguel shrugged. “There were murals of the gods the people of El Dorado believed had made the world. The murals always showed two guys on a horse-looking animal. So I guess when Tulio and I showed up on Altivo…?”
“If the village was cut off from the outside world, it’s possible they didn’t realize an outside world existed,” Milo mused.
“Most of them didn’t. Or, didn’t seem to think people existed outside their village. Tzekel-Kan definitely suspected something. I think Chief Tannabok and the guards at least knew there were others outside their village. Then again, I think Chief Tanni knew we weren’t gods in the first place!”
“But he let you trick everyone?” Milo asked, shocked.
“What else did you expect? Sacrifice?” Miguel asked in amusement.
“Well…”
“Because that could have happened,” Miguel said. “That’s what almost happened. Thus the stone jaguar.”
“I thought the chief knew and didn’t care.”
“He didn’t, but Tzekel-Kan sure did. Once he figured out we weren’t gods -I still don’t know how he did- he did something that made this giant jaguar statue come to life. It chased us all over the village.”
Milo rubbed his chin. “Could have been a machine.”
Miguel blinked. “Like the machine that moves this boat?”
“Maybe. How did it move? ” Milo asked.
“Magic.”
Milo smiled. “No, I mean, was it smooth or clunky? Noisy? I’m not sure there’s an engine that can do a lot more than push a piston or turn wheels.”
“Oh, no, this thing moved like a cat. A cat the size of a house, but a cat,” Miguel said. “Tzekel-Kan definitely was controlling it. His eyes were weird and glowing.”
Miguel shuddered at the memory. The crazy priest had almost killed him and Tulio.
“How did you get away?” Milo asked.
Miguel grinned. “It’s a bit of a story.”
“I like stories,” Milo said, grinning back. He straightened on the cabin bench, and his back gave a series of pops. He winced, then looked around. “Hey, where did Tulio go?”
“Probably went to look at the engine,” Miguel said. He stretched, grimacing when his back popped louder than Milo’s. “ Ow. Anyway, he likes to know how things work.”
Miguel and Milo left the cabin. The rain had stopped at some point in the night, and Altivo was laying on the bow, snoring in his usual loud gusts. Ladron was missing, probably somewhere below eating the provisions.
Miguel stopped halfway to the ladder below, staring. For the first time, he could clearly see what stood beyond the river.
Buildings, first of all. Taller and straighter than Miguel had ever seen, with many, many windows that gleamed oddly in the sunlight. People moved around the buildings, dressed in strange, heavy-looking clothing. Women wore bright and elaborate hats.
“Looks pretty different, huh?” Milo asked.
Miguel shrugged, even as his eyes darted among the people. “Buildings, people, they’re different but basically the same in all towns.”
Then a… thing came into view. It was dark and shiny, and the four wheels and people riding on a flat spot behind a tiny cabin-looking thing, where a single man with an impressive mustache held onto a smaller wheel. Miguel would have called it a wagon, except the thing was noticeably missing horses.
Miguel looked at Milo, who was grinning. He looked again at the wagon thing, then back to Milo.
“Is that one of those wagons that moves on its own?” Miguel asked.
“Yes and no,” Milo said. “It’s got an engine like the boat does.”
“But it’s moving by itself!” Miguel said, flinging his arms into the air to show how absurd the idea was. “That has to be magic, yes?”
“No!” Milo laughed. “Under the hood -that part sticking out in front- is an engine.”
“Where’s the coal go?” Miguel asked suspiciously.
Milo had explained that the steamboat’s engine “ate” coal. Miguel strongly suspected that the engine didn’t eat like a horse ate oats, but the following explanation made less sense. He’d left trying to figure out the exact details of the engine to Tulio, as there were plenty of other questions to ask.
“It’s not a steam engine,” Milo said. “Vehicles run with combustion engines.”
“I understood two words there, ” Miguel said.
“There’s… hm, there’s two kinds of engine. Steam engines eat coal, and combustion engines eat gas.”
Miguel snickered.
“A liquid called gas!” Milo hastily elaborated. “Short for gasoline. It’s a liquid that’s mined from below the ground.”
“You grow it,” Miguel guessed.
“No, it forms underground, from remains under heat and pressure.”
“Remains of what?”
“Well, dead things.”
Miguel raised an eyebrow. “You run your engines on the essence of dead things, but you still say your engines aren’t magic?”
Milo tilted his head, then he laughed. “Okay, it sounds a bit like magic with the way you put it. Just don’t say that around other people.”
“Because they aren’t crazy enough to realize I’m not crazy,” Miguel said.
Milo looked at him for a moment, then nodded with a somewhat sheepish grin. “You know, you’re taking this pretty well.”
“Taking what?”
Milo spread his arms, indicating… well, everything.
Miguel shrugged. “It’s not the first time Tulio and I fell off something, and ended up in a strange place.”
“Still!” Milo laughed.
“I like it,” Miguel said, shrugging again. “Tulio and I have always lived on the move.”
“On the move or on the run?” Milo asked.
“Both,” Miguel said.
Milo nodded, grinning a bit.
Miguel grinned back, then turned his attention to the riverside again. “I like seeing how towns are different, watching the people, seeing what they’ve done. Wondering what else we might see.”
Granted, seeing the world four hundred years into the future hadn’t ever occurred to him, and Miguel suspected it would take years for him to see and hear everything that had changed in that time. But Miguel lived for seeing new things and people.
“Does Tulio feel the same way?” Milo asked cautiously. “He hasn’t seemed too thrilled.”
“It’s not entirely because of the time traveling,” Miguel said. “He was mopey before we even got here. He’ll be back to his old self soon enough.”
“What happened?” Milo asked.
Miguel glanced around. Tulio was still out of sight, so he leaned forward and whispered, “Heartbreak.”
“Heartbreak?” Milo repeated.
“Yeah, it’s a long story,” Miguel said. He cleared his throat. “One Tulio would probably appreciate me not telling. So, changing the subject, why does that woman have a bird on her head?”
The question was absurd enough that Milo promptly turned to look, as Miguel had hoped. He’d said too much as it was, and hoped Milo wouldn’t ask Tulio about it.
“That’s not a bird. It’s a bunch of feathers,” Milo said.
“Nah, there’s definitely a beak poking out of the top.”
Milo took off his glasses, cleaned them, then put them back on. He squinted.
“Oh. It’s a hat made to look like a bird,” Milo said.
Miguel looked at the bird-hat for a moment longer. “Why?”
“Fashion. That’s one thing I can’t explain,” Milo said. He looked over his shoulder. “I hope we don’t run into anything. I’m going to stay at the wheel, Miguel. Looks like there’s more ships in the river now.”
Miguel nodded. “I’m going to check on Tulio. Even as curious as he is about the engines, it’s strange that he’s stayed down there so long.”
“Lost in thought?” Milo offered as he walked back toward the cabin. “The engine hasn’t died, so he probably didn’t start poking things.”
Miguel flung his arms out. “I thought engines weren’t alive!”
“They aren’t… not like that!” Milo rubbed his chin. “Though the boiler works better when I talk to it.”
Miguel laughed and headed below decks. The space was tiny, and it didn’t take long for Miguel to spot Tulio, asleep on the lowest bunk.
Miguel snickered. “Tulio? Hey, Tulio, you missed Milo explaining everything.”
Tulio grumbled something. The blanket under him was damp and probably cold, but nobody had thought to dry their clothes.
“Tulio!” Miguel called loudly.
Tulio jolted up, yelping, “You can’t swim in-”
Whack!
Tulio fell back down, blinking. Miguel winced.
“Tulio?”
Tulio looked flatly at him.
“Watch out for the bunk above.”
“Miguel!”
Tulio reached for Miguel, but tangled his legs in the blanket. He yelped again as he crashed to the floor. He flailed briefly, kicked his legs free, then dragged himself to his feet with the bunk. He attempted to straighten his vest, then looked at Miguel and opened his mouth. He froze.
“Miguel?”
“Yeah?”
“It wasn’t a dream, was it?”
Miguel made a show of looking around. “No, we are still in the steamboat.”
“Steamboat. Not a rowboat,” Tulio said.
“The last time I checked, no,” Miguel said.
“Okay, good, good…” Tulio again tried and failed to fix his vest. “Miguel?”
“Mm-hm?”
“Why are we in a steamboat?”
“We’re going to the coast,” Miguel said.
Tulio sighed, then gave up on his vest. “What are the chances that if I jumped into the river right now, I’d end up back on that island?”
“Pretty low,” Miguel said.
“Thought so.”
“Also, the water is filthy,” Miguel added, an observation he’d made once he’d looked at the river in the daylight.
Tulio made a face. “Alright, to the coast with Milo Thatch, then off to Atlantis?”
“Only if you’re in,” Miguel said.
Tulio snorted and looked away. Miguel waited while he shook his head, then turned back and smiled slightly at Miguel.
“What’s one more city that shouldn’t exist?” Tulio asked.
Beaming, Miguel put out his hand. Tulio slapped his palm against Miguel’s, then they both turned to the ladder.
“We should stop soon,” Milo said not long after. “We’ve got food, but you two need proper clothes… and Altivo needs proper food.”
Altivo, munching on a crust of bread, gave a low snort.
Milo took a bag out of one of the packs and counted something inside. “I’ll handle the shopping when we stop.”
“Tulio and I can help, ” Miguel said. “We did buy a boat with half a horseshoe.”
Altivo snorted, this time in annoyance. He turned and walked away from Miguel, a bit lopsided as one of his horseshoes had broken in half and fallen off.
“We should probably get those other horseshoes off,” Milo said. “Gold is too soft to walk on them all the time, Altivo.”
It had taken all of a few hours for Milo to talk to Altivo and Ladron like they were people. Miguel thought it was hilarious. He and Tulio did it all the time, but Miguel knew few other people who did.
Altivo snorted again and shook his head.
It helped that Altivo responded to what he was told accordingly, of course.
“Either way, ” Milo went on, “You can’t just walk into a store and use a golden horseshoe to buy everyday things. It would attract attention.”
“And that’s a bad thing?” Miguel clarified.
“It could be.”
“More attention could mean more people on the expedition,” Miguel pointed out.
“You mean thieves, ” Tulio said. Miguel looked at him. “We’re laying low, Miguel.”
“Miguel does have a point,” Milo said. “ I do want more people on the expedition.”
“You need people you can trust, ” Tulio said. “Not someone who’s going to wait until you find treasure, then steal it out from under your nose.”
“Oh.” Milo frowned. “How do I know who to trust?”
“You’re asking a con artist you pulled out of the river, Milo.”
“Well, how do you know who to trust?”
Tulio lifted a finger and opened his mouth to explain, then stopped. Miguel smiled as he watched Tulio try to figure out how to explain. He and Tulio generally didn’t work with other people -cons worked better with fewer people after all- and when they did, the other person was equally cautious about working with Miguel and Tulio.
Milo was the complete opposite. Having listened to Milo passionately explain about his and his grandfather’s life’s work, Miguel knew Milo only cared about finding Atlantis for the things he could learn. Miguel suspected that if there were loads of gold coins in Atlantis, Milo would only be interested in what they looked like and wouldn’t care if he and Tulio took as much as they could carry.
“How were you trying to find people for the expedition before you met us?” Tulio asked.
“The museum funds expeditions,” Milo explained. “They’ve got guides, mechanics, doctors, anyone you’d need for an expedition.”
“You didn’t go to them?” Tulio asked.
“I tried a few,” Milo said, his shoulders slumping. “They don’t want to help without being promised some sort of pay. Atlantis might have gold or remains of their power source, but it might also be a bunch of broken buildings and maybe some pottery.”
Miguel looked at Tulio. Money was usually Tulio’s motivation.
“What’s that about a power source?” Tulio asked.
Miguel smiled. Tulio was into the mystery as much as he was.
“Well, I told you about how the steam engine ‘eats’ coal. There are texts in the Shepherd’s Journal about some kind of power source,” Milo explained. “Something that could light up a city and power some kind of flying invention of theirs.”
“Flying?” Miguel repeated, perking up.
“Supposedly,” Milo said. “Here, I’ll show you.”
Milo darted below decks, then returned with the Journal he’d found. He flipped through the pages, muttering to himself. Miguel had gotten a glimpse of it when Milo had looked through it briefly the previous evening, but they’d both gotten distracted with questions.
“What language is that?” Tulio asked. “Looks like gibberish.”
“It’s not gibberish, just a language that doesn’t exist anymore,” Milo said distractedly.
Tulio raised an eyebrow. “Your map is written in a language nobody can read?”
“I can read it,” Milo said, lifting his head and beaming proudly. Just as quickly, he ducked his head like a turtle, saying quietly, “It’s my life’s work, you know…”
Miguel craned his neck to look at the page of gibberish. “What’s that say?”
Milo scanned the page, then haltingly said something that sounded as much like gibberish as it looked. He looked at Miguel with a sheepish grin.
“I didn’t get a word of that,” Miguel said cheerfully.
“Can that book get us to Atlantis?” Tulio asked.
Milo nodded. “It’s written by someone who went to Atlantis.”
“Before or after it sank?”
Milo blinked. “I… don’t know, actually. I haven’t read much of it yet. The writer knows about Atlantean tech, but he also writes on how to reach the sunk city of Atlantis. Could be someone from around the time Atlantis sank,” Milo mused quietly. He looked up and did the turtle ducking thing again. “You don’t have to go along if you don’t want to, by the way…”
“Are you kidding?” Miguel asked, “Don’t forget, we found El Dorado with a map we won from a random sailor in a gamble! Your book sounds more reliable than that.”
Milo looked at Tulio, who shrugged. “You’re the one who’s spent your life searching for it.”
“Grandpa did, too,” Milo said, rubbing the book fondly. “Grandpa wouldn’t have given it to me if it wasn’t real.”
“It’s real enough for me,” Miguel said. “Tulio?”
Tulio shrugged a shoulder.
“Tulio, come on,” Miguel urged, “Show a little excitement!”
“We’re going to find a city under the ocean,” Tulio said.
“And that isn’t even a little bit exciting? ” Miguel pushed.
Tulio stared at him for a moment, then turned his head to hide the slight smile. “A little. But only if we don’t, you know, drown in the process. We did the ocean voyage once, Miguel.”
“Yeah, but this time we’ll be in ships made to go under the water!” Miguel said excitedly.
“What could go wrong?” Tulio asked drily.
“Ah, here!”
Invested in the book, Milo had missed the conversation. He turned the Journal and pointed to what looked like an oversized lobster creature snapping boats in half with its claws.
“We aren’t going to fight that thing, are we?” Miguel asked. “I’m all for adventure, but one giant beast trying to eat me is enough.”
“The text calls it a leviathan,” Milo said, still studying the page. “It’s supposed to guard the gates to Atlantis, but it’s probably just a statue or something.”
“Probably,” Tulio repeated.
Milo nodded, misunderstanding Tulio’s skeptical statement for agreement. “A way to ward off the superstitious. Hm, if this thing is still intact, we’ll need pictures.”
Milo might have gone on, but a loud, blaring noise made them all jump. Miguel spun toward the noise right as another boat veered away from the bow of their steamboat. The man at the wheel yelled something Miguel didn’t understand, though his tone and shaking fist told Miguel enough. Milo yelped and yelled something back, then ran to the wheel and turned their steamboat toward the edge of the river.
“Someone should probably stay at the wheel,” Milo said with an awkward chuckle. He looked around. “Before we go much further, though, let’s stop.”
“Okay.” Miguel watched Milo fiddle with the wheel. “ You do know how to stop a boat, right?”
“...no.”
Eventually, Milo managed to get the attention of someone on another boat. With a lot of gesturing and yelling, the other boat captain showed Milo how to stop the engine and tie up to a nearby dock. The trio waved their thanks, and the other boat moved off.
“I’ll go get some more food and clothes for you two,” Milo said.
“What’s wrong with these?” Miguel asked.
“They won’t be warm enough,” Milo said, eyeing their clothes. “Plus my coat doesn’t fit you that well.”
Miguel shrugged. The coat sleeves were a bit tight and his shirt was bunched up underneath, but it wasn’t too uncomfortable. It was warm enough. Though Tulio was making do with a blanket hanging over his shoulders.
“And you’ll need spare clothes,” Milo mused. “Let’s see, plus hay for Altivo and… what does Ladron eat?”
“Anything he can get his little paws on,” Tulio said.
“And don’t forget apples,” Miguel added.
Altivo snorted and bobbed his head.
Milo nodded and turned toward the gangplank. He took two steps, then abruptly turned around and hurried below decks. He returned a moment later with an empty pack.
“Stay here,” Milo said.
“Can’t we explore a little bit?” Miguel pleaded.
“Well… the streets are going to be busy, and there’s a lot of cars out there and you two kind of stand out,” Milo said.
“We can be subtle,” Miguel pleaded.
Milo hesitated, then shook his head. “ No, just wait here. I won’t be long. Tulio?”
Tulio nodded. “We’ll wait.”
“Thanks,” Milo said with clear relief. He hurried away, calling over his shoulder, “I won’t be long!”
“Don’t you want to explore?” Miguel asked.
“And get lost in a city where we don’t speak the language?” Tulio asked tiredly.
Miguel looked at him curiously. It had been a rough day, but Tulio was oddly subdued. Even if they weren’t gambling or pulling cons, Tulio wasn’t one to sit idly by. And in a place -and time- that they didn’t speak the language, the best way Miguel knew to start fitting in was to mingle with people.
“Don’t give me that look,” Tulio said.
“You mean this look?” Miguel asked, giving Tulio his best puppy-dog eyes.
Tulio shoved his face aside. Miguel laughed, but Tulio’s tense expression didn’t change. He hadn’t tied back his hair yet, so it dangled in his face and made Tulio look a bit like he’d just rolled out of a fight. The dirt-streaked clothes sure didn’t help the look.
Miguel looked at himself. Well, he wasn’t much better, not with his tattered pants and missing shoes. Maybe Milo was right in being cautious; the two of them would stick out like sore thumbs in the stiff coats and colorful dresses.
“Okay, I won’t leave the boat,” Miguel conceded. “But soon, right?”
“ Sure, sure,” Tulio said.
He rubbed his eyes, then seemed to notice his loose hair for the first time. He dug into his pocket and pulled out a bit of string, which he used to tie his hair into his usual ponytail.
Miguel’s eyes widened in worry. “Tulio, your head!”
Tulio looked at him like he was crazy. “What about it?”
“How long has it been like this?”
Miguel didn’t let Tulio answer, instead grabbing his chin and turning his head. Tulio yelped and swatted Miguel’s hand away.
“What are you talking about?” Tulio asked, reaching up to touch the spot Miguel had been checking. His fingers brushed the dark bruise, and he winced. “Oh, that.”
“Yes, that,” Miguel said, crossing his arms.
“Pretty sure we established at some point that I hit my head when we went down the whirlpool,” Tulio said.
Miguel vaguely recalled it being mentioned, but he’d said in a joking manner the previous night. He hadn’t been serious. No wonder Tulio had gone to sleep instead of asking more questions.
“Go lay back down, ” Miguel said, shooing Tulio toward the ladder.
“You aren’t going to wander off, are you?” Tulio asked. His head must have really been hurting if that was his only argument.
“I swear I won’t,” Miguel said. “Go on, shoo. I’ll make sure nobody steals our boat.”
“Who steals a boat?” Tulio muttered as he shuffled toward the ladder.
“We stole a rowboat,” Miguel pointed out.
Tulio waved a hand at him without response. Miguel frowned with worry, then shook himself. The two of them had gotten into worse scrapes, and came out fine in the end.
Miguel turned his attention to the people walking alongside the river. At least while he was on the steamboat, nobody seemed to pay any attention to Miguel, allowing him to study how people acted four hundred years from when he’d lived.
Really, they didn’t act all that differently. The clothes had changed and few words were in Spanish, but children still ran and laughed and husbands walked with their wife’s hand on their arms and clusters of women still fawned over dresses shown in the shops while men carried tools and crates. A small man with a pointy, rat-like face slipped small pouches from people’s pockets.
Miguel smiled. Some things didn’t change at all.
Time passed quickly, and Milo returned before Miguel could seriously consider leaving the steamboat to explore. He was walking alongside a small, dirty boy, who was leading a donkey hitched to a ramshackle cart with odds and ends piled in it.
Milo spoke to the boy and gave him a coin, then climbed onto the cart. He tried, without success, to lift a cube of hay. After a few adjustments, Milo tried again. The bale didn’t budge. The boy laughed, then climbed into the cart. Between Milo and the boy, they got the hay tossed out of the cart.
Grinning, Miguel walked down the gangplank. Before Milo or the boy could get off the cart, Miguel grabbed the string holding the hay together and hauled it onto the steamboat.
“Showoff,” Milo said with a smile.
Milo grabbed a crate from the cart, then the boy led the donkey away. Miguel peered curiously into the crate as Milo carried it aboard, finding it full of small metal boxes.
“This should be enough food to last us to the coast,” Milo said uncertainly. He shrugged a bit, then set the crate aside and took off the pack. “Hey, where’s Tulio?”
“He’s below,” Miguel said. “He hit his head at some point in the whirlpool after all.”
Milo frowned. “Oh! Does he need a doctor or…?”
“Nah, he’ll be fine,” Miguel assured him. “Tulio’s got a hard head.”
“Oh, good,” Milo said. He held the pack out to Miguel. “I had to guess on the sizes, but I got another set of clothes for you two.”
Miguel took the pack and checked inside.
“I was going to get you two some boots, but that’s not something I want to guess on,” Milo went on. “There’s a cobbler right down the street. Do you think Tulio would be up to it?”
Miguel shrugged. “I don’t know, but Tulio’s shoes survived the whirlpool.”
“Yeah, but they don’t look very waterproof.”
“I’ll ask.”
Miguel went below. Tulio was sprawled on the lower bunk again.
“Tulio?” Miguel asked. “Tulio, wake up.”
“Ten more minutes,” Tulio grumbled, rolling over. “ My head hurts, Miguel.”
“Okay, okay… well, Milo and I are going to get some shoes. Do you want to come?”
“Ask me tomorrow,” Tulio grumbled, taking the pillow and smushing it over his head.
Miguel smiled. “Milo got us some new clothes, too. I’ll put yours on the top bunk.”
A muffled acknowledgement came from under the pillow.
Miguel pulled out the clothes, smiling when he saw a red shirt and a blue one. Both were styled like Tulio’s, but made of a thicker material. Underneath were two pairs of pants and two coats, one brown and the other tan.
Miguel put one set of clothes -the blue shirt and brown coat- on the upper bunk, then changed into the other set. The material was thicker and rougher than he was used to, but instantly warming.
Miguel went up on deck, where Milo was dropping some hay for Altivo. Seeing Miguel, Milo offered him a thick roll. Miguel took the warm roll and cautiously took a bite. He perked up.
“Hey, this is good!” Miguel said before quickly finishing it.
Milo smiled. “I thought you’d like it. Is Tulio up?”
Miguel shook his head. “Still asleep. If you wanted to go to the cobbler now, though, Tulio and I wear the same size shoe.”
There had been a few times when the two of them had only one pair of shoes between them.
“Will… will Tulio be okay alone?”
Miguel nodded. “Altivo will keep an eye on him, won’t you, boy?”
Altivo froze in the middle of sneaking an apple from the crate.
“He’s in good hooves,” Miguel said, smiling broadly.
Milo nodded uncertainly, but followed Miguel to the gangplank. Miguel clattered happily to the dock, then paused. He turned to Milo.
“Which way?”
Milo smiled as he left the boat. He pointed to the left.
Mr. Whitmore watched the sun set outside the window. He turned as the door to his study opened.
“Helga, any news on Milo?” Mr. Whitmore asked.
“There’s no sign of him anywhere,” Helga said.
Mr. Whitmore scowled as the crew filed in. They’d spent the day searching the city and asking around, but apparently Milo had vanished off the face of the Earth!
“None of the ticket sellers at the train stations remember seeing Milo,” Helga said.
“Same with the boats,” Vinny said. “No Milo and nobody suspicious.”
“Mole and I watched the museum all day,” Audrey piped in. “No Milo. I checked with the director, and he said Milo resigned.”
“I knew that,” Mr. Whitmore said, waving his hand. “Milo has been ready to quit for months. When he didn’t show up for work today, they probably decided to take him seriously.”
“Yeah, nobody seemed to care that much that Milo was missing,” Audrey said, scrunching her nose in disgust.
“Whoever took him is probably long gone,” Mr. Whitmore said.
“Hold up,” Sweet said, “What makes you think Milo was kidnapped?”
“Why else would he vanish without a trace?” Helga asked.
“I was asking around his apartment building,” Sweet said. “Nobody really knew Milo there, either, aside from a boy across the hall who feeds his cat when Milo stays overnight at the museum. From the sounds of it, he didn’t have any friends in the museum. Nobody’s believed him about Atlantis existing, even when Thaddeus was alive. So why are we assuming Milo would tell anyone where he went?”
“Because he’d be crazy to go off on an expedition alone,” Mr. Whitmore said.
“Are we forgetting who Milo’s related to?” Sweet asked, smiling. “When did Thaddeus ever care about what was logical? When he knew what needed to be done, he’d find some way to do it. Thaddeus raised Milo, and Milo’s probably just like him.”
“But Thaddeus still told me what was going on, no matter how excited he got,” Mr. Whitmore said. “And from what we’ve gathered about Milo’s proposals, Milo only ever planned to join the expedition as a linguist. He knows about engineering, but not about navigation or boats.”
Sweet shrugged. “It’s a possibility.”
“Whoever Milo is with, they’ll be headed to the coast,” Mr. Whitmore said. “They could be halfway to the coast by now.” He groaned. “I’ll contact the chief of police to keep looking in the city. In the morning, we’re all heading to Calvert.”
“The lab?” Rouke asked
Mr. Whitmore nodded. “Work on the sub is almost done. If need be, it can be finished on the ship. Milo’s undoubtedly out of the city by now, and could well be on his way to the ocean.”
“How do we know where to search, then?” Rouke asked. “Thaddeus was the only one who knew how to read the Journal, and that’s missing with Milo, anyway.”
“Thaddeus had a few guesses,” Mr. Whitmore said. “Why do you think the lab is in Calvert?”
“It’s still a big ocean,” Rouke pointed out.
Mr. Whitmore scowled again, annoyed at Rouke’s insistence on being difficult. And at himself. If he’d waited until meeting Milo to give him the Journal, they wouldn’t be having this discussion.
“There aren’t that many submarines made yet,” Mr. Whitmore explained after a moment. “I’m getting a list of the submarines along the Maryland coast. We’ll figure out who took one out recently, and if someone meeting Milo’s description was on it. Simple!”
A few of the crew looked skeptical, which Mr. Whitmore pretended to not see. He wasn’t entirely sure of the plan himself, but it was better than nothing.
And it was better than admitting that he might have lost the beloved grandson of his best friend.
Chapter 3: A Copper for a Submarine
Notes:
Fun fact: even though Miguel and Tulio use the term peseta in terms of their money, the pesetas are from the 18th century! During the time from of Road to El Dorado, their money was called, as well as I can tell, simply coppers.
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Tulio didn’t move as he woke up. He silently took in the splashing of paddles barely audible through the hull, and of voices trickling below decks.
His head hurt.
Tulio reached up and rubbed his forehead, stifling a groan. He opened his eyes and was grateful for the dim room.
Tulio remained still for a bit longer, thinking about the last couple days. He’d gone from lost in the jungle to lost in a whirlpool to lost in a city apparently four hundred years in the future. Before that, he’d been safely pulling cons with Miguel in docks along the coast.
Well, relatively safely. Their last con on the docks had led to the flogging and being thrown in the brig. It had led to them finding El Dorado… though they’d come out of that with nothing more than they’d started with, unless Miguel counted his horse and armadillo.
Now they were heading down to an unfamiliar coast to try and hunt down another city that nobody really believed to exist.
Tulio sat up, wincing as he did. From the sound of it, Milo had the map. Tulio and Miguel needed a plan. Would they continue with Milo beyond the coast or not? They would, if Miguel had any say in it.
Tulio did have to admit that the idea was tempting. A lost ancient city? It was bound to have gold in it, and what were the chances that a second ancient city full of treasure would be inhabited?
But that still left them without a plan. Or, much of one. Milo had the map, and not much else. Tulio wondered if sneaking onto a ship that went underwater was as easy as normal ships.
Tulio swung his feet off the bed, then carefully stood. He staggered against the bunk as he took a step, but straightened and told himself the boat had rocked.
Miguel descended the ladder at that moment. “Tulio!”
“Yes, Miguel?” Tulio said, thinking it was too early for Miguel’s level of cheer.
“Are you feeling better today?” Miguel asked.
Tulio grunted. “I’ll feel better when I know where we’re going.”
“Atlantis, Tulio! Or have you forgotten?” Miguel teased. “Oh, here, try these on.”
Tulio took the offered clothes. He remembered Miguel mentioning them the previous day, though he hadn’t felt up to changing at the time. Miguel left, calling over his shoulder to meet him on deck.
Tulio changed slowly, grateful when the headache eased.
“Oh, and-” Miguel said suddenly.
Tulio jumped and spun with a yelp. Miguel held up a pair of boots with a grin.
“Milo got us these, too.”
Miguel tossed the boots to Tulio, then clomped up the ladder. Tulio shook his head, then sat to put the boots on. He went to the ladder, took a breath, then climbed up.
Tulio took a moment on deck, wondering if the light or noise was worse. Squinting, he followed Miguel’s voice to the cabin, where Miguel and Milo were hunched over the Journal.
“So, where are we headed?” Tulio asked.
Milo jumped, dropping his pencil. “Tulio! I didn’t hear you come up. Are you feeling better today?”
“Just fine,” Tulio lied. “So? A plan?”
“I’m working on the exact place,” Milo said. “But we’re getting close!”
“Milo is,” Miguel said.
Tulio leaned against the wall, tilting his head to see the page of runes. “You can really read that?”
Milo nodded. “Well- I think so. It’s not an exact map, more like hints and puzzles. See, this part? There’s a tunnel beyond the gates to Atlantis. The text says that’s where the leviathan rests, but it could also mean that the leviathan is blocking the gate. We’ll have to pass the leviathan somehow to reach the gate.”
“And this leviathan isn’t going to… you know, try and eat us, will it?” Tulio asked.
“Oh, I’m sure it’s a statue,” Milo said. “And even if there was some beast guarding the gates to Atlantis, it would be long dead by now.”
“Unless it had a bunch of little baby beasts that grew into a bunch of giant beasts,” Miguel said.
Milo shook his head. “One leviathan might’ve gone unnoticed to the rest of the world, but a nest of them couldn’t. Fishermen would have seen something by now.” He tapped his mouth with the pencil. “Unless they were seeing the leviathan, but nobody believed them, so word never got out.”
“So there could be a leviathan down there?” Tulio asked.
“I mean, there could be anything down there,” Milo said, sounding overly excited about the possibility. “Animals unknown to mankind. Can you imagine?”
Tulio tried to not imagine. “Tell me about these sub… uh, the ships that go underwater.”
“Submarines? Well, I’ve never seen one in person, just pictures,” Milo said. “It’s like a big… hm, imagine you surrounded a ship with a barrel.”
“A barrel,” Tulio repeated flatly.
Milo nodded. “A barrel. But it’s made of metal and there’s these big barrels inside the bigger barrel full of air that we can breathe. There’s not a ship’s wheel… well, I guess there is, but more of them, so the ship can go faster or slower, and up and down. The whole thing is run by a big combustion engine, like the kind in that truck.”
Tulio glanced up, then did a double-take of the… horseless… wagon? He blinked and looked at Miguel, who just grinned, then at Altivo. The horse didn’t look impressed.
“That thing runs on coal?” Tulio asked.
“No, it’s a different kind of engine that eats a liquid gas that comes from dead things underground,” Miguel said with an overacted air of boredom.
“You’re making things up,” Tulio scoffed.
“No, he’s more or less right,” Milo said, grinning.
Tulio looked between them. “Okay, say it again, but slower.”
Tulio sat with his back against the cabin’s outside wall, watching the forest slip by. At least trees and sunsets hadn’t changed over four hundred years.
Eventually, Tulio stood up. He moved slowly, not wanting the headache to return. He walked into the cabin, prompting Milo to look up from the Journal.
“Are you reading or steering?” Tulio asked rhetorically, even as he took the wheel Milo had abandoned.
“Oh, er, sorry,” Milo said, wincing.
Tulio waved off the apology. After a moment, Milo went back to the Journal and book of notes he was taking.
“Milo,” Tulio said after a bit, “Why do you want to find Atlantis so badly?”
“It’s my life’s work,” Milo said.
“Sure, but why? Why chase after something that everyone else says doesn’t exist?”
“Grandpa knew Atlantis existed,” Milo said promptly. “There’s evidence, if people are willing to look. Myths start out somewhere. And the Journal proves that Atlantis is out there, just waiting to be found!”
“Okay, but why?” Tulio pressed. “Why Atlantis? Is there treasure you’re looking for?”
“Not really, no. Well, unless you count the knowledge,” Milo said. He turned the book to show an image of what looked like large fish being ridden by people. “Atlanteans had some sort of technology that lit their city and powered machines that could fly! If we could find the knowledge of how to build these things, how the Atlanteans powered their machines, well, just imagine what we could use them for in the modern world!”
“So, recognition? Fame?” Tulio asked.
“No.” Milo closed the Journal. “Why are you asking?”
“Everyone’s got an angle,” Tulio said. “ What’s yours? Why bring Miguel and me, two complete strangers, to find this city?”
“I don’t have an angle,” Milo said, brows furrowing. “And for you and Miguel, well… I don’t know. I’m as surprised as you are. But you two believed me and you agreed to it.”
“Supposing we’re both crazy, though,” Tulio said. “Or thieves.”
“I know you’re thieves,” Milo said, “You said so yourself.”
“And yet you let us come along! Why?” Tulio pressed.
Milo tilted his head. “Same reason you two are trusting me, I guess.”
Tulio opened his mouth, then hesitated. “Well, you haven’t given us reason to distrust you. And you wear your emotions on your sleeve. You’re like Miguel in that way. You couldn’t trick us if your life depended on it.”
“Could you?” Milo asked.
Tulio thought of all the mock fights he and Miguel got into over the years. Then he remembered the whole “god” con in El Dorado.
“Hang on,” Milo said before Tulio could speak, “I think I answered my own question.”
“Uh, so… how much did Miguel tell you about El Dorado?” Tulio asked.
“Only that you tricked a whole city into thinking you were gods,” Milo said. To Tulio’s relief, he sounded only amused.
“It was that or execution,” Tulio said. “Then it was kind of fun for a while. Harmless fun, you know. Miguel got a real kick out of it.”
“So the answer is yes, if your life depends on it,” Milo said.
Obviously, yes. Tulio was literal living proof, but that wasn’t the point Tulio wanted to make.
Tulio wobbled a hand. “Not every con is a life or death situation, Milo.”
“What are you talking about?”
“I’m saying that if Miguel and I start arguing and punching each other, don’t worry about it.”
Milo looked confused. For his part, Tulio couldn’t believe he was admitting so much already. But he’d meant what he said. Milo couldn’t pull the “pretend to throw a stick but actually hide it behind his back” trick because he’d feel bad for tricking the dog. So Tulio was pretty confident that he and Miguel would have plenty of time to cut and run if Milo even considered tricking them.
But he still didn’t understand why Milo was so dead set on Atlantis.
“You remind me of Matthias,” Milo suddenly said.
“Who?”
“Matthias. Grandpa met him playing dice on the docks. Matthias had trick dice, and fooled Grandpa out of five dollars. Grandpa saw right through the trick after the fact, but he thought Matthias was so intriguing that he brought him home for coffee.”
“He what?”
“Matthias is one of the more normal people that Grandpa brought home,” Milo said, laughing at some memory. “Grandpa was always bringing people home. Everyone from the wealthy to the man who wore newspapers like a cape because he couldn’t afford a coat. There was always something interesting about them, a story they had to tell or the way they could pull a penny out of your ears.”
Milo smiled distractedly. “Grandpa always said some people collect things, but he collected people.”
Tulio didn’t know how to respond to that.
“Grandpa could read anyone, and he could make friends with everyone, too. It’s the only reason he wasn’t locked up for supposedly being crazy. He made friends with all the doctors who showed up and proved to them he wasn’t crazy. Not that the Board ever believed Grandpa’s theories, but nobody could ever declare him insane.”
“It didn’t bug him,” Milo went on. “Me, it’s enough to drive me insane, to have all this evidence, but the Board refusing to accept it. I don’t know how Grandpa did it, but he passed the drive onto me.”
Milo looked at Tulio and said slowly, as if just figuring it out, “That’s why I want to find Atlantis. Not for fame or money. I just want to see with my own eyes what Grandpa searched so hard to find.”
“I don’t know,” Tulio said quietly. “It sounds like he just enjoyed the search.”
Milo smiled. “Oh, he did sometimes say that once he found Atlantis, he and I could find Arcadia so he could retire.”
“So, what led him to stop searching?” Tulio asked.
“He died.”
“Oh.” Tulio knew he should have expected the answer, but he felt an unexpected disappointment that he’d never meet the man. “I’m sorry.”
“He died doing what he loved,” Milo said, again with a distant look in his eyes. A moment later, his brows furrowed. “But here’s what I don’t understand. I believe Grandpa found the Journal on his last journey. He said he’d been to Iceland, but he’s gone to Iceland multiple times to search and didn’t give me the details of this particular lead, so I didn’t think anything of it at the time. But, he found the Journal… why didn’t he tell me? Or the Board? Or anyone else in his expedition, because he couldn’t have traveled so far alone.”
“What happened?” Tulio asked against his better judgment but, man, the guy was growing on him.
“He got sick. Everyone assumed he caught something in Iceland. Even claimed he was delusional when he got back, and that’s why he was so excited.” Milo’s mouth twisted. “It’s the only time they got away with calling him delusional. It got so bad that he was taken to a hospital, then he just… died.”
Milo rubbed his eye. Tulio looked aside, waiting while Milo collected himself.
“Sorry, I… it’s hitting me all over again, now that I have the Journal. I wish I knew who left it for me,” Milo said. “They might have the answers I want.”
“They didn’t leave a note or anything?” Tulio asked.
“No. Only Grandpa’s note on the paper, and he didn’t leave any clues as to why he couldn’t give it to me himself. Well, if I believed ghosts were real…”
“I mean, they could be.” At Milo’s look, Tulio shrugged. “Magic is real. Why not ghosts?”
Milo smiled. “Yeah… Grandpa’s ghost left the Journal for me. Why not?”
The two stood in silence for a bit longer, then Milo spoke.
“ What about you? Why Atlantis?”
“Because it’s where you’re going,” Tulio said. He shrugged. “If you’d said you were looking for El Dorado, I’d go along with it. Miguel and I don’t have anywhere else to go…”
“What if there was a way to go back?” Milo asked.
Tulio shrugged. “Didn’t leave anything behind, either. Don’t worry about us, Milo. We’ve always gotten along.”
“Yeah, in the 15th century,” Milo said. “Grandpa never left anyone he could help, and neither will I.”
“Okay.”
“No, really. I might as well say it now.” Milo looked seriously at Tulio. “I don’t care whether or not Atlantis has any treasure, but you two must. The three of us are equal partners in whatever we might find.”
“Really? Are you sure? What if there’s stacks of gold, or nothing?”
“If there’s stacks of gold, then there will be plenty for us all to do whatever we want to do with the rest of our lives. If there’s no treasure,” Milo shrugged, “It won’t change much for me. Finding Atlantis is all I care about.”
Tulio studied Milo. His initial impression of Milo still stood, and Tulio knew instinctively that there was no risk of Milo tricking him and Miguel. He was so sincere that Tulio knew he wouldn’t try any tricks with Milo. Miguel was pretty unlikely to; he might’ve been the one to push Tulio into pretending to be gods, but their lives had kind of been on the line at the time.
“Okay, deal. Partners,” Tulio said.
The trip passed quickly, largely uneventfully. Tulio continued to be shocked by all the things that had changed in the last four hundred years, but nobody had challenged their passage. For the most part, Tulio spent his time on the deck observing or under the deck, trying to figure out how the engine worked.
And studying Atlantean. Miguel gave up trying after the first hour, but Tulio was intrigued by the Journal, written by someone long before Tulio’s time. He was going to trust Milo’s interpretations and guidance for the trip, but he was admittedly curious about reading the Atlantean runes.
Milo turned out to be an excellent teacher, both in the outside world and with Atlantean. Tulio had wondered at first if Milo would actually teach someone else in such a rare skill, but Milo had been thrilled by the request. He was clearly passionate about Atlantis, providing Tulio with just more proof that Milo really was looking for Atlantis just for the sake of finding it.
“Ocean ho!” Miguel called late on the fourth day.
Tulio looked up, baffled, then saw the river had opened into a bay that widened abruptly into the ocean.
“ Perfect timing!” Milo said, closing his book of notes. “Because I just figured out where we need to start searching. I’ve got coordinates here, and all we have to do is find a ship that can take us there!”
“A ship with a submarine,” Tulio reminded him.
Milo wilted briefly, but resolutely perked himself back up. “A ship with a submarine. Well, at least that narrows down who we can ask. Should we start now?”
“Sure, why not?” Miguel asked.
They found a place to tie up their steamboat and headed out, leaving Altivo -and Ladron, according to Miguel- to watch it. Milo led the way from the river docks and down a street. Miguel almost got left behind when a truck honked nearby and he stopped to stare, but Tulio grabbed his arm and tugged him along.
The bay docks were huge, and Tulio was confident they’d easily find someone with a submarine they could hire. It might take a bit of time, but time was one thing they all had plenty of. With three and a half golden horseshoes, buying their passage would be easy once they found a captain and crew that looked trustworthy enough.
What he didn’t expect was for the first ship’s captain to listen to Milo, then start laughing and walk away.
“What’s so funny?” Miguel asked.
Milo, staring after the captain, said, “I don’t know. But he told me there’s a ship with a submarine just this way.”
“You mean he didn’t have one?” Tulio asked.
“Well, not that I saw.” Milo scanned the docks, his brows furrowing. “I don’t see any, actually. They aren’t very common, after all. Come on, maybe the captain with the submarine won’t laugh.”
“Hey, don’t let it bug you. He probably just thinks there’s nothing out there,” Miguel tried to soothe.
“Nobody does,” Milo grumped.
“That just means we’ll be the first there,” Tulio pointed out.
Milo smiled slightly.
“Now come on, there’s still time before night falls,” Tulio added.
“I don’t get it,” Milo said.
“At least only the one called you crazy,” Miguel said.
Milo stared moodily at his sandwich. “Yeah, everyone else just laughed or gave me a weird look. And I didn’t even mention Atlantis!”
Tulio leaned back and let Miguel comfort Milo while he looked around. After three futile hours on the docks, they’d given up to go to a nearby tavern to eat and figure out the next step.
There were a lot of captains and crews in the tavern, drinking and gambling. Tulio watched them warily, but nobody paid the trio sitting in the corner any attention.
Tulio’s ears picked up the familiar clatter of dice on a table. He turned toward the sound, where three men were playing. Coins and paper money Milo called dollar bills were piled beside each of them.
Tulio stood up. Milo didn’t notice, though Miguel did. Miguel followed Tulio’s eye, smiled, then returned his attention to Milo. Tulio wandered over to the table and sat down. The men looked at him, then resumed their game.
After a few rolls, the winner collected his winnings, then said something to Tulio.
“Didn’t catch that,” Tulio said, smiling.
The man rolled his eyes, then picked up the dice. Tulio held up seven fingers. Realizing what Tulio wanted, the man rubbed his thumb and forefinger together.
Tulio smiled. People didn’t need to speak the same language to gamble. He took out a copper and put it on the table. The man made a face and shook his head.
“Come on, money is money,” Tulio complained.
The men resumed their game, ignoring Tulio. Crossing his arms, Tulio leaned back and looked around the room again. Nobody else was playing dice, and none of the other games looked like they could be played without a translator.
“Tulio!” Milo was suddenly at Tulio’s shoulder. “What did I say about gambling?”
“Technically, I’m not gambling,” Tulio pointed out. He picked up the copper and waved it. “They don’t like my money.”
“It is four hundred years out of circulation,” Milo pointed out.
Tulio made a face and stood up. He and Milo rejoined Miguel at the table they’d claimed.
“I thought we were laying low,” Miguel teased Tulio.
“All I wanted to do was play a little game of dice,” Tulio defended himself. “ I wasn’t even going to use my lucky dice.”
Tulio patted the pocket where he’d stashed his dice, then hesitated. He quickly patted his other pockets, but the dice were gone!
Before he could say anything, it occurred to Tulio why Miguel was so smug. He held out his hand, and Miguel returned the dice.
Milo looked between them. “Really? What did you do, Miguel? Are we going to have to run?”
“Don’t be dramatic,” Miguel said, laughing. “I bet the dice, I didn’t use them.”
“You bet my dice?” Tulio demanded.
“I didn’t lose them, now did I?” Miguel asked. “I used them for my wager, that's all.”
“So, how much did you win?” Tulio asked, ignoring Milo dropping his head on the table in a dramatic show of exasperation.
“No money,” Miguel said. “I guess they didn’t want to bet money for dice. I got this instead.”
Tulio looked at the little disk Miguel held out. It had a thin metal cover and a cord through a hook on top. Milo tilted his head, then lifted it.
“Oh, a compass,” Milo said. “Hey, that might come in handy later.”
Miguel just looked more smug.
“But you still shouldn’t gamble,” Milo said. “If you’d lost the dice, what would you have gambled next? Your boots?”
“I’ve done that,” Miguel said.
“ Lost them and I had to win them back, ” Tulio added.
The conversation ended when someone sat at their table. Tulio looked warily at the grizzled man in a dark coat and captain’s hat.
He pointed at the copper Tulio still had sitting on the table and said something. Milo responded, looking suddenly wary.
“What’s wrong?” Tulio asked.
“Uh, he…” Milo smiled awkwardly, “He knows where this coin came from.”
“My pocket,” Tulio said, returning the copper to said pocket.
Milo shrugged and said something to the man. The two went back and forth for a bit, then Milo suddenly got excited and said the coordinates he’d been repeating all evening. The captain gave Milo a strange look, but at least he didn’t laugh or sound mocking when he spoke.
“Ohhh,” Milo said, drawing the sound out. “That’s why everyone laughed.”
“Why?” Miguel asked.
“The coordinates I’ve got for the gate is a section of ocean that everyone believes is cursed.”
Now it was Tulio’s turn to drop his head to the table.
“I guess a lot of boats sink unexpectedly around there,” Milo said. He spoke to the captain, then hesitantly said, “Nobody knows why. Sometimes the area is safe to pass through, and sometimes all ships are mysteriously sunk and there’s never been any survivors.”
There was a moment of silence.
“Sounds right,” Miguel said.
“It does?” Milo asked.
“Sure,” Tulio said, lifting his head. “If the city was easy to reach, it wouldn’t be a myth.”
“That’s a good point,” Milo said slowly. He took a breath. “But I still want to go.”
“You’re crazy,” Tulio informed him. “And how are you planning to get there now?”
“Tomas said he’d take me. He’s got a submarine with his ship.”
Well, that was convenient.
“And he’s not concerned about his ship being destroyed?” Tulio asked.
“ It’s actually been awhile since there was a wreck,” Milo said cheerfully, before trailing off, “Of course, that could be because nobody goes out there anymore.”
Tulio glanced at Miguel, already knowing he’d be ready to take Tomas up on his offer. He sighed, but asked, “What does he want in return?”
“Your copper.”
Tulio raised an eyebrow. “My copper? To go out into a part of the ocean that might lead to us all dying? That’s it?”
“Your copper is four hundred years old and in almost perfect condition,” Milo pointed out. “Do you have any idea how much that would be worth in this time?”
“Huh.”
Tulio took out the coin and pretended to study it in thought. If he agreed too quickly, Tomas would become suspicious and either change his mind or push for information.
“I’ll figure something else out if you don’t want to go anymore,” Milo said.
“That’s not what I’m thinking about. Can Tomas understand us?” Tulio asked.
“No.”
“Good. Pretend you’re trying to convince me.”
Milo’s brows furrowed. “Convince you of what?”
“To accept his deal,” Tulio said, crossing his arms and leaning back.
“I don’t get it,” Milo said.
“Come on, Tulio, don’t keep him in suspense,” Miguel teased.
“I’m not agreeing so easily,” Tulio said.
“Come on,” Miguel wheedled, “You’re the one with the coin.”
“Don’t think I don’t know about the two coppers you still have in your pockets.”
“Oh, yes, because one four-hundred year old copper isn’t odd enough. Nobody would ever be suspicious of three of them!”
“Unless he thinks we found our own treasure.”
“And if we found our own treasure, we wouldn’t need Tomas’ ship!”
“But we do, so could you stop pretending we’re not going!”
Tulio and Miguel’s voices rose, grabbing the attention of the people in the tables around them. Tulio briefly wished he and Miguel had swords; it had been too long since they sparred.
Tulio mock glared at Miguel, then raised his hands in seeming defeat. He smiled at Milo’s shocked expression.
“I told you to not be concerned if Miguel and I start throwing fists at each other,” Tulio said. He reached into his pocket and took out the copper. “That also applies to verbal fights. Tell Tomas we accept his offer.”
Notes:
A whole lot of convenient moments in this chapter, but I'm ready to get this expedition in the water. XD
Chapter 4: Facing the Leviathan
Notes:
Great news! I've decided to use TTWB for a part of my NaNo project this year! This fic currently contains 62,000 words (50,000 of which were written last NaNo) and I'm hoping to be able to wrap it up in the next 25,000 words, give or take. This is easily one of my largest projects, so many thanks for everyone's patience! I'll be posting a couple more chapters over the next few weeks as well. :D
Chapter Text
“Milo, my friend, you’re positively green.”
Milo clutched the railing, trying to keep his eyes fixed on the horizon. “I know.”
“Did you know you would get seasick?” Miguel asked. He sounded sympathetic, at least. Tomas had just laughed when Milo first lost his breakfast an hour after leaving the docks.
“Never been on the sea,” Milo said. He took a deep breath, and the nausea churning in his gut briefly eased. “Are we almost there?”
Miguel looked at the sky. Milo had forgotten to show him how modern clocks worked, and Miguel most often guessed how late in the day it was by the sun.
“Looks about midday,” Miguel said. “We should be there soon. Are you sure you want to get into a submarine?”
“I think it’ll be easier down there.”
Milo swallowed thickly, wondering why his mouth tasted like carrots; he hadn’t even eaten carrots on the three-day voyage. He turned and leaned against the railing.
Tomas’ ship was relatively small. He had only two men on his crew besides himself. The captain had explained that he’d come into a small fortune late in life, and had spent it on a submarine, hardly the strangest purchase he could have made as far as Milo was concerned. He spent most of his time giving rides to rich, curious folks who wanted to see the bottom of the bay.
The submarine was tucked away in the hold. Tomas had shown it to them on the first morning -Tulio had insisted on it before handing over the copper- with the promise of showing them in more detail on the day they reached their destination.
Milo pushed off from the wall. He hadn’t eaten all day, so he could -hopefully- avoid throwing up again when it came time to search. Of course, it didn’t help that his stomach was also churning in excitement. They were so close!
“Where’s Tulio?” Milo asked.
“Looking at the engines again,” Miguel said.
Milo smiled. When Tulio wasn’t learning Atlantean, he was in the engine room, watching the engineer. Charles had long since given up on shooing Tulio away.
Miguel, on the other hand, seemed content to leave the running of the ship to the crew. Most of the time, he was perched on the bow or taking care of Altivo. He didn’t seem too interested in reading Atlantean, but he liked to speculate on the meaning of the pictures.
Milo went to the cabin he shared with Miguel and Tulio before pulling the Journal out of the inside pocket of his coat. At Tulio’s suggestion, Milo kept the Journal with him at all times and never took it out around the crew. He absently flipped to the page about the gate to Atlantis and pulled out the sketch Tulio had made.
Tulio learning Atlantean had led Milo to looking more closely at the text to help Tulio understand what he was reading. Between their efforts, the three of them had a pretty clear picture of what they were looking for.
After a moment, Milo replaced the sketch and put the Journal away. Milo doubted the crew of Tomas’ ship cared about the Journal, but had to admit that the Journal was worth a lot of money if the right person saw it. And the three of them had, at some point, come to the silent and collective decision to find Atlantis alone.
Milo got halfway to the door before a sudden wave of nausea made him gag. He clamped a hand over his mouth and waited for it to pass. Miguel watched sympathetically.
Once he no longer felt like throwing up, Milo and Miguel continued out of their cabin and along the halls until they reached the ship’s small bridge. Tomas turned from the wheel as he did.
“Ah, Milo, I was about to come looking for you,” Tomas said. “Take the wheel, Eddi. I’m going down to the hold.”
“To see the submarine?” Milo guessed hopefully.
Tomas nodded as he passed. The older man walked with a limp, but it didn’t slow him down any. Milo had to jog to keep up on their way to the hold.
Along the way, they stopped at the engine room. Tomas rapped on the open door, drawing Tulio and Charles’ attention.
“Come on, Tulio,” Tomas said, waving to him.
“Where are we going?” Tulio asked, following.
“To see the submarine,” Milo said.
“Finally,” Tulio grumbled. “I was starting to think he was lying about the submarine.”
“But you saw it,” Milo said.
“I saw a big metal machine,” Tulio stated. “That doesn’t mean it was actually a submarine.”
Tomas unlocked the door to the hold and threw it open. Milo stared at the submarine, still awed by it.
The submarine was roughly the size of two trucks end-to-end. Glass windows revealed a cockpit with four seats and a bench. The center of the submarine had two doors swung upward on hinges, one door being the entrance and the other opening to a small hold area with two more benches. A massive coil of fabric hosing rested on the floor near the submarine’s tail and a clamp held the machine over a hatch on the ship’s floor.
Inside the submarine’s hold was half of the trio’s supplies. Before leaving, they’d all agreed that it would be wise to bring supplies in case they had to do some searching for Atlantis. Using another one of Altivo’s horseshoes, they’d bought enough food for two months, in addition to tents, blankets, two more sets of clothes for Miguel and Tulio, rope, and climbing tools.
After a moment, Milo noticed something odd about the submarine. “Where are the air tanks?”
“Don’t need them,” Tomas said. “They would normally be stored in the back half of the submarine, but I can get more passengers in by leaving them out.”
“So, how do we breathe?” Milo asked.
Tomas pointed to the tubing. “Fresh air is pumped into the submarine by engines inside the ship, and stale air is pumped out.”
“So, uh,” Milo rubbed his neck, “What if those tubes… break?”
“Then water will flood the submarine, sinking it, and we’ll drown,” Tomas said, then added cheerfully, “But that won’t happen, so don’t worry about it!”
Milo wasn’t sure what his face did, but Tulio nudged his elbow and whispered, “What’s wrong?”
“Not much, just that if something tears those tubes, we’ll drown,” Milo said.
“So, let’s not run into any rocks,” Miguel suggested.
Tulio closed his eyes and shook his head.
“Last chance to change your mind,” Milo said.
“I’m starting to think you’re the one who doesn’t want to go down there,” Tulio said.
Milo raised his hands, smiling sheepishly. “No, it’s not that! I don’t want to force you to do anything you don’t want to.”
“Well, you’re not,” Tulio said. “Let’s go.”
“Mr. Whitmore.”
Mr. Whitmore looked up from the newspaper. “Helga.”
“We might have found Milo.”
Mr. Whitmore leaped to his feet. “Really? Where is he?”
“There’s a port near here,” Helga said, not sounding particularly happy about the development. “Three men were looking for captains with a submarine.”
“Three?” Mr. Whitmore repeated.
“Three. I’ve got a vague description of the two others, but they were standoff-ish and irritable when anyone tried to talk to them. The only person anyone remembers seeing them talk to is Milo, and he didn’t look happy anytime he did.”
Mr. Whitmore groaned. As fervent as he’d been over the years to get an expedition to find Atlantis, Milo couldn’t have been gone for more than a couple days before he realized he needed a proper crew. Unless for some reason these two men were strangers on the street that Milo had enlisted at some point, they were more likely to be part of a larger crew, shadowing Milo to make sure he hired a ship. Though why they’d have Milo do the hiring was beyond Mr. Whitmore, unless Milo was withholding the coordinates from them. It was a bold idea, but dangerous.
“He hasn’t been seen since,” Helga went on while Mr. Whitmore again questioned the wisdom of leaving the Journal in the museum, “But I have coordinates for where he was headed. We can be on the ship and on our way in two hours.”
“Not yet we can’t,” Audrey said, pushing the door open.
Mr. Whitmore raised an eyebrow at the eavesdropping trio. Vinny cleared his throat and fiddled with a clock while Mole became very interested in the floor, but Audrey was unrepentant.
Mr. Whitmore smiled. He liked the girl.
“Why not?” Helga asked.
“The sub isn’t ready,” Audrey said. “The boilers have been overheating and we can’t find the problem, and the launch hatch keeps jamming. Plus Mole’s digger needs some tuning since he dropped it off that cliff last time.”
“Through the cliff,” Mole muttered. “ Through the cliff. It was only a measly twenty feet; it’s been dropped from higher.”
“Exactly why we’re repairing it every couple of months,” Audrey said.
“Those can be finished on the go,” Mr. Whitmore said. “Helga, gather the crew and get everyone loaded. Oh, and send Jenkins to see me.”
“The chief’s busy trying to figure out the boiler problem,” Audrey said. “What did you need done? I’ll take care of it.”
“Just send Jenkins,” Mr. Whitmore said irritably. “He was having problems with one of his engineers, and I want to ensure that everything has been sorted out before we leave.”
Audrey nodded and filed out with the others, closing the door behind her. Mr. Whitmore leaned back to wait for his old friend, fervently hoping that the request he was about to make would prove to be unnecessary in the end.
Milo stared, wide-eyed, at the stone columns around the submarine. They’d been riding for hours with Tomas at the wheel, but Milo couldn’t get over the twisting stones and colorful fish darting among them. He watched a shark meander through the water nearby, no longer worried about it biting through the air tube, which Tomas had assured them was sturdier than it looked.
Thunk.
Milo turned in the seat, grinning. Miguel was rubbing his forehead, having knocked his face against the glass as he tried to look below the submarine for the tenth time in the last hour. In the front seat beside Tomas, Tulio was staring out the window in front of him, feet clamped together and arms crossed in a clear effort to avoid leaning sideways and hitting the glass with his own head. His forehead was already bruised.
“This is…” Miguel stopped rubbing his head, distracted by something outside. “Tulio, look at-”
Thump!
Milo laughed and turned back around. Tomas glanced back, grinning. He was proud of the submarine, and didn’t seem to mind that they’d spent half a day searching without result.
After another half hour of searching, Tomas declared that the straight back of the pilot’s chair was hurting his back and it was time to head back. Milo stifled his disappointment as he nodded.
Milo scanned their surroundings as Tomas piloted the submarine toward the ship. He didn’t spot anything new -well, besides fish- by the time they surfaced in the hold. Milo climbed out with the others, his shoulders sagging.
Chitters came from the hall, bringing Milo’s head up as Ladron skittered into the hold. He was holding half an apple, the apple’s source quickly becoming clear as hooves clattered on metal. Milo winced at the squeal Altivo’s hooves made as he skidded to a clumsy halt. He muscled his way through the narrow doorway and clomped after Ladron, who squeaked and hid behind Miguel’s feet.
“Aw, Altivo, it’s just a bit of apple,” Miguel said through his laughter.
Altivo looked about as offended as a horse could get, but there wasn’t room for him to get to Ladron without knocking Miguel into the water. As if sensing this, Ladron quickly gobbled down the rest of the apple, then jumped into the submarine and scrambled out of sight.
“He’s not going to chew on anything in there, is he?” Milo asked Miguel.
Tulio was the one to answer, though. “As long as it’s attached to something and not food, he won’t care about it.”
“That’s a fine horse,” Tomas commented. “Not many horses would take to walking through a submarine as well as he has.”
“I think Miguel and Tulio has taught him a few tricks,” Milo said, smiling.
Altivo edged past Miguel and peered into the submarine. He lifted a hoof, hesitated, then stretched out and put it inside the submarine. The clamps were holding the submarine in place, so it didn’t wobble. Encouraged, Altivo stepped halfway into the submarine!
“Hey, Altivo, a submarine is no place for a horse!” Miguel scolded, grabbing Altivo’s mane to pull him backward.
Milo winced, but Tomas just laughed.
“He acts like he’d like a ride,” Tomas chuckled.
Milo tilted his head. “Miguel, would Altivo actually ride in the submarine?”
“Oh, probably. He’s ridden everything from ships to rowboats to turtles!”
Milo blinked. “He rode a what?”
“A giant turtle. El Dorado has big canals running through the city, and traveling by turtle is pretty common.”
Tomas raised an eyebrow at the “El Dorado,” but otherwise didn’t comment. Miguel had mentioned the hidden city several times and Milo, helped out by Tulio, had claimed to Tomas and his crew that Miguel just liked mythical cities.
Milo sometimes wondered how the crew would react once the trio revealed that they were instrumental in the finding of Atlantis. Milo hoped they’d be too happy to be upset over the small lies he’d had to give to cover their true intent. While Milo wanted to tell Tomas the truth of their mission, Tulio insisted that they couldn’t trust just anyone. Miguel had agreed, so, outvoted, Milo kept their secret.
“Altivo’s ridden in the ship, so I don’t see why he wouldn’t ride in the submarine,” Milo said, a bit awkwardly avoiding Tomas’ plain curiosity.
Altivo snorted and climbed fully inside.
“Altivo, the apple is long gone,” Tulio said.
“It’s the principle, Tulio,” Miguel said.
Tulio rolled his eyes, then got back into the submarine. Smiling, Miguel followed. Stepping to the side, Milo saw Altivo was standing over the bench, apparently just realizing how small the cockpit was.
He’d be able to get back out, Milo knew. Once, on their way to the bay, Altivo had gotten curious about what was below decks of the steamboat and had gone down. He’d found out the hard way that the area below was too narrow for him to turn around, and it had taken Miguel an hour to coax him into going up the stairwell backwards .
“I don’t suppose you three want to keep looking,” Tomas said.
“I’d search all day if we could,” Milo said.
“Good.” Tomas nodded toward the submarine. “Tulio will pilot.”
Milo’s mouth fell open. “T-Tulio? Drive the submarine?”
Tulio hadn’t even heard of submarines a week ago, and now Tomas was wanting him to drive one?
“Do you not trust him to drive?” Tomas asked.
“He doesn’t know how,” Milo said.
Tomas shook his head. “Weren’t you paying attention to who was driving down there?”
Milo hesitated from promptly saying he had been. He’d been pretty focused on the outside of the submarine.
“Tulio is clearly curious about these machines,” Tomas said, gesturing to the submarine and ship as a whole. “So I offered him the wheel. Let me tell you, Tulio is a natural!”
Milo chuckled a bit, mostly in surprise. Tulio? Drive a submarine? But he must have done a good job if Tomas was offering to let Tulio drive again.
Milo shook himself from his thoughts. “Yes, yes!”
Tomas nodded with a smile. “I thought you would. Go on, then.”
“Aren’t you coming?” Milo asked when Tomas moved toward the door.
“I’m folded like a pretzel by now,” Tomas said, waving his hand. “You three have an hour in the submarine before we pull you back by the air hose. Radio if you run into trouble.”
“Okay, thanks!” Milo called, darting into the submarine. “Miguel! Tulio!”
“Altivo will be out soon,” Miguel said without looking at him.
“That’s not what I was going to say,” Milo said. “Tomas said the three of us could take out the submarine for an hour! Tulio, I didn’t know Tomas showed you how to drive it.”
Tulio shrugged, a dismissive look on his face. “I don’t understand how it works yet, but the… wheel?”
“Controls,” Milo supplied.
“The controls aren’t complex,” Tulio said.
But there wasn’t any missing the satisfaction in Tulio’s face when he sat in front of the controls. He didn’t even comment on Ladron crouching near his feet.
“Once we get Altivo out, we can go,” Milo said.
Altivo snorted and twitched his ears. Primly lifting his head, Altivo folded his legs under him. He’d somehow managed to perfectly balance himself on the bench.
Miguel perched on the corner of the bench. “Why wait? Let’s go now!”
“Okay, but we might have some explaining to do when we get back,” Milo said, shrugging. He was too eager to keep searching to argue.
Milo sat in the seat beside Tulio. Tulio flipped a switch that closed the door, then lowered the submarine under the water with ease.
Tulio pulled the nose of the submarine up and moved slowly forward, following along the edge of the shadow of Tomas’ ship. Fish scattered before them and strands of seaweed waved in the ocean currents, but that was all Milo saw.
Milo stared so hard at the sandy ocean floor that his eyes began to ache. He took off his glasses and rubbed his eyes, then replaced his glasses. He looked out the window, then startled.
“Tulio, do you see that?”
“What?” Tulio asked, stopping the submarine.
Milo pointed. “There’s something poking up there. It doesn’t look like a rock, I don’t think.”
“I see it.”
The submarine edged closer. Startled fish sped away, swirling up eddies of sand. Milo waited impatiently for the sand to settle, then lurched forward with a gasp.
Two pieces of algae-covered boards arched out of the sand!
“Part of a boat?” Miguel asked.
“Maybe,” Milo said, trying not to get too excited. “Keep going, Tulio.”
The submarine moved forward. More pieces of the ship began to appear, then Milo spotted a whole rowboat. Beyond that was a rubber dingy. The ocean floor dipped, and hidden from view was a ship older than even Miguel and Tulio’s time!
“Milo,” Miguel said, sounding more subdued than Milo had ever heard, “Look!”
Milo lifted his gaze, then could only stare. More ships rose from the sand, some nothing more than rotten skeletons. A metal ship was mostly buried. A carved mermaid figurehead rose from the sand, perfectly intact, beside what looked like a stone hammerhead shark.
“There’s ships here from every era,” Milo muttered in awe.
Milo couldn’t even begin to guess as to how many ships laid in the sand. The variety itself awed him and, for a moment, Milo forgot their mission.
“What sank these ships?” Tulio asked into the uneasy silence.
Milo looked around. Stone columns rose from the sand, multiplying in number the further they went, forcing Tulio to slow down to avoid snagging the air hose on any of them. The columns were tall, but not tall enough to pierce the hulls of ships. Besides, how could so many ships be so careless as to run into the columns?
Suddenly remembering their mission, Milo pulled out the Journal. There hadn’t been any mention of wrecks in the Journal, but it did mean they were at the supposedly cursed coordinates.
A strange noise reverberated in the cockpit. Milo winced at the high pitch. Was it the sound of the submarine’s engine, echoing off the rocks a dozen times over?
“Tulio, Milo, look,” Miguel said, reaching between them to point.
Milo squinted. Miguel was pointing at a metal ship amongst the wrecks. Why? Maybe he hadn’t ever seen a metal ship until this one.
“There’s something here,” Tulio muttered. “Can’t you feel it?”
Milo rubbed his arms. Yes, he felt as though he was being watched, but what was there in the water beside the empty wrecks? Not even fish were…
“Guys!” Miguel yelled, his voice pitching upward, “Look what happened to that ship!”
Miguel was pointing insistently at the metal ship. Or, not a ship, but half of one. The center of the ship gaped open, the edges sharply crumpled like aluminum pinched between fingers. But what in the world could crush metal like that?
The odd echo was replaced with a clicking noise, and Milo went cold.
“I think your Atlantean pet is still here,” Tulio whispered.
Milo’s eyes darted to him. Tulio lifted a hand to shakily point. Wanting to do anything but, Milo slowly turned.
Red eyes glowed in the shadows beyond the searchlights of the submarine. They vanished in a flurry of clicks.
“Stop the submarine,” Milo whispered.
“I think getting out of here as quickly as possible is our best shot,” Tulio whispered back.
“Why are we whispering?” Miguel asked, also in a whisper.
“There’s a good chance that thing has extremely sensitive hearing,” Milo continued to whisper. “It might not be able to hear us inside the submarine, but the submarine’s engines are really loud, so stop the submarine before it decides we’re a threat.”
“Not if that thing plans on eating us,” Tulio argued.
“If we’re lucky, it’s just curious and will leave us alone,” Milo whispered.
The clicks faded, leaving them with no indication of where the creature had gone.
“Yes, good plan, that’s a very good plan,” Miguel whispered. “But there’s nothing alive down here for a reason. That thing has either eaten them or chases off anything in its territory.”
“So stop moving and make us look dead,” Milo hissed.
“So it can just scoop us up?” Tulio challenged.
Milo opened his mouth, but a massive tail flashed by. He clamped his mouth shut as he watched the thing pass. The flood lights lit up part of its body briefly. What Milo could see was darkly scaled and bigger than any ship he’d ever seen.
Their submarine suddenly felt very small.
“That’s bigger than Tzekel-Kan’s jaguar,” Miguel said.
A rumbling sound shook the submarine. Milo thought it sounded very much like a growl.
“Great, now it’s offended,” Tulio said. “Listen, if I empty the ballast tanks now, we’ll shoot to the surface.”
“And catch this thing’s attention and lead it right to Tomas’ ship,” Milo countered.
“I’m not sacrificing myself down here,” Tulio said.
“I’m not suggesting that, but there’s no sense in rushing to the surface so it can just kill us there,” Milo said. “Just go back the way we came, slowly.”
“There’s one problem,” Tulio whispered. He pointed up. “Tomas doesn’t know what’s going on.”
Milo gulped, then cautiously reached forward to turn on the radio. He said into the microphone, “Stop the ship.”
“You found what you were looking for?” asked Tomas’ cheery voice, loud enough that everyone winced.
“How…” Miguel trailed off, too busy eyeing the shadows in the water to finish.
“Uh- no. No, something found us.” Milo’s eye was caught by the air hose trailing by. He hissed, “Stop the ship!”
“What’s down there?” Tomas asked.
“I don’t know, but it’s big,” Milo whispered.
“Well, get up here, boy!”
“Yeah, um…” Milo clicked off the radio and weakly said to Tulio. “Up, then?”
“We don’t have much choice now,” Tulio said grimly. “Everyone, get ready to hold your breath.”
Milo moaned at the grim statement. He looked down at a sudden pressure around his ankle, and found Ladron clinging to him. He had a sudden urge to pick up the armadillo and hug him.
The submarine crept forward. The submarine was eerily quiet, aside from a few ominous clicks from outside. Milo was barely breathing.
Metal shrieked and the submarine jerked to a halt. Everyone yelped with shock and fell forward, the engines whining when Tulio slammed into the controls. Altivo squealed when he jammed between the bench and seats. Miguel scrambled out of the way of his flailing hooves while Altivo got himself righted. Milo sat up and found Ladron curled up on his lap.
“Holy ship,” Miguel said in a strangled voice.
Milo looked up and nearly fainted.
A massive red eye peered into the window of the submarine. The eye itself was bigger than their submarine. The eye seemed scratched and oddly glowing, and the eyelids were circular, closing around the eye in a rotating manner of overlapping bits…
“It’s a machine!” Milo squawked, falling backward against his seat in shock.
The eyelid rotated further closed, as if the mechanical beast was squinting at them. In one sudden motion, it tossed them aside.
Milo’s head hit the seat at the toss, then smacked into the wall when the submarine jerked to a halt. He shook off the flashing stars across his vision, scrambling to stand. Halfway to his feet, the submarine lurched and Milo fell again. The cockpit filled with yelps and squeals -only about half of them from the animals.
“ It’s got the air hose!” Miguel yelled.
“Up, Tulio! Go up!” Milo yelled.
“What do you think I’m doing?!” Tulio shot back.
Milo twisted. Tulio was wrestling with the controls, but he couldn’t stand up long enough to get the submarine straightened. The floodlight weaved outside, knocked from its perch when the beast grabbed them. Milo caught glimpses of the beast's body and the air hose snagged in the scales on its back. The beast’s claws snapped dangerously close to the submarine, but they were stuck out of range of its eyes, apparently.
The submarine bucked with the beast’s thrashing. Milo fought a wave of nausea as the beast tried to shake them off.
“Don’t you dare throw up!” Tulio ordered.
Tulio wedged himself into the pilot’s seat and braced his feet. Gripping the controls, he pulled them back, then twisted the submarine. Milo’s vision spun, but the submarine suddenly evened out.
“Okay, we’re free, now to just-”
Tulio broke off as the beast swung around. Two oversized eyes glared at them from the shadows.
“I think it’s angry,” Miguel whispered.
“You think?” Tulio shot back.
The beast lunged forward, and Tulio shot upward. Milo hugged his seat as the submarine spun, then straightened. It shot toward a clear patch of water and weaved around stone columns. The beast roared. Something crashed behind them, then the water became cloudy with sand. Milo’s stomach jumped into his throat as the submarine dove sharply.
“It’s blocking the way to the surface! Where’s the gate?!” Tulio yelled. “The gate has to be around here, right? What’re the chances that that thing won’t fit through them?”
“Given our luck?” Miguel asked.
“Never mind, just-”
“There!” Milo cut in. “Look, a crevasse! That could be the entrance!”
“But if we go into the gate in the submarine when the beast is chasing us, what happens if it cuts our air hose?” Milo asked.
The submarine twisted away from an oversized claw, then tilted toward the fractured sunlight above. Tulio pushed the submarine toward the sky, only for it to lurch to a hard halt a moment later. Everyone was again thrown from their seats.
Milo’s face hit the console. Everything went red and jarringly loud, and Milo shook his head before realizing it wasn’t in his imagination. The cockpit light had turned red and an alarm was blaring. Tulio grabbed the controls and yanked himself to his feet. The submarine shot backward between giant lobster legs, and ice raced down Milo’s spine as he spotted a fat tube flopping between its claws. A deep rushing sound filled the cockpit.
“The air hose has been severed!” Milo yelled.
Chapter 5: Entering Atlantis
Notes:
And so, NaNo begins! With any luck, TTWB will be done by the end of November and I can start a weekly posting schedule!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Before anyone could do more than look up at the hole where the air hose attached, a loud thunk sounded. A metal cover slid smoothly over the hole. The blaring noise ended, but the light in the cockpit was still red.
“Hold on!” Tulio yelled.
Miguel braced his feet against the back of Tulio’s seat, but the submarine whipped to the side and he was sent tumbling along the floor. His head cracked painfully against the corner. Miguel shoved himself up to stare dizzily out the window. His vision was tilting a bit, but he was fairly certain they were dropping.
“Tulio, we’re supposed to be going up!” Miguel said.
“That thing is blocking our path!” Tulio shot back.
“The crevasse!” Milo said, pointing. “It should give us cover from that thing!”
“Or we’ll be trapped in a hole,” Tulio said.
Another twist of the submarine sent Miguel tumbling against Altivo. “Would you rather take your chances out here?”
Tulio responded by diving. Milo snatched up the small machine Tomas’ voice had come from, and both exchanged frantic words.
Tulio swerved around a stone column, then shot down a crevasse that suddenly parted the ocean floor. The crevasse looked massive to Miguel, but seconds after they entered, there was a loud crash and scrape of stones from behind. Tulio continued to push the submarine down the narrowing tunnel.
Miguel laughed. “It’s too big! It can’t reach us, Tulio!”
Miguel’s joy was short-lived, however. A blue bolt of light struck the crevasse wall beside them. Stones exploded outward, clattering against the submarine. Miguel flinched as one of the pieces of glass cracked.
Tulio shoved the controls forward, rapidly picking up speed. More of the light hit the tunnel wall. The submarine was jostled with the nearest strikes, but kept going and gaining speed.
“Floor! ” Milo squawked.
Tulio yanked back on the controls and Miguel fell backward against Altivo. When he looked up, the submarine was angled upward. The broken light illuminated an empty tunnel, and there were no more of the light attacks.
Tulio slowed and, for a moment, nobody moved or spoke. The red light began to flash slowly. Miguel panted, his heart still racing, but air didn’t seem to be coming to him.
“Tulio?” Milo said slowly. “Tulio, move the submarine! Go up!”
“Huh?” Tulio wheezed.
Milo all but threw himself across the controls, thrusting the handle up. The submarine rushed upward, bouncing off the wall. Tulio swatted his hands away.
“What’re you doing?” Tulio asked, struggling harder to breathe.
“We have to get up!” Milo repeated. “Before we… before we run out of air!”
Miguel blinked blankly, but Tulio grabbed the controls. The submarine vibrated concerningly as they raced upward.
“There’s an air pocket up there, right?” Tulio asked.
“There was,” Milo wheezed.
Miguel coughed. Why was breathing so hard? It seemed like no matter how much air he sucked it, it wasn’t enough. He wobbled dizzily.
Water splashed suddenly, and Milo slammed a hand onto the controls. The door opened with a cranky clunk. Cold, damp air filled the cockpit, and Miguel found he was finally able to breathe again. He panted as Milo stumbled out of his seat and toward the door.
Splash!
The splash, accompanied by a yelp from Milo, was enough to get Miguel to drag himself to his feet. He slumped over to the door and stuck out a foot.
“ Wait! ” Milo sputtered. “Miguel! Guys, we’re in a pool in here!”
Miguel blinked, then pulled back his foot. He chuckled awkwardly, wondering how he’d forgotten that they were literally in the ocean.
“We made it?” Tulio asked, joining Miguel. He made a face. “Not very impressive, is it?”
Miguel looked around. The floodlight hung limply down, illuminating only enough of the water for him to see Milo treading water nearby. He reached out a hand to Milo, and pulled him back into the submarine.
“We need light,” Milo said, staggering down the short hall to the hold.
“What happened?” Miguel asked.
“A metal sea beast attacked us and drove us into the crevasse, what more is there to explain?” Tulio asked. “You were there.”
“No, I mean…” Miguel fumbled for the words. “I was breathing, but it didn’t feel… right. It’s like I was… I don’t know, drowning for air, but there wasn’t any water in the cockpit.”
Milo looked at him. “It was the air going bad.”
Miguel frowned. “It went bad?”
“Yeah, without any way to get fresh air, there wasn’t any oxygen to breathe.”
“Oxi-what?”
Miguel looked at Tulio. His friend seemed confused as well, but nodded.
“What? Don’t tell me you understand,” Miguel complained.
“Not entirely,” Tulio said slowly. “But it’s like you said. We were drowning in open air?”
“Sort of,” Milo said. He waved a hand. “Guys, where did we put the flashlights?”
“They’re, uhhh, well, they were beside the door,” Miguel said. “Since you said we’d need those first.”
“Milo,” Tulio said, intercepting Milo with his arm, “You have a way to contact Tomas, right?”
Milo clapped a hand to his forehead. “Tomas! I hope his ship escaped!”
Dashing to the cockpit, Milo picked up the small machine he’d used earlier to hear Tomas’ voice. He started to speak, then frowned and squeezed it a couple times. The only sound it made was a light clicking.
“What’s that mean?” Tulio asked.
“It’s… broken.” Milo slowly lowered the machine. “We have no way to contact the ship. Do you think they-”
“The beast got stuck in the crevasse behind us,” Miguel interrupted. “I’m sure they’re fine.”
“Yeah… yeah, I warned them, I’m sure they left,” Milo said, nervously fiddling with his fingers.
Tulio swatted his arm. “Whatever happened on the surface, we can’t change now. Come on.”
The hold was a mess, though, thanks to the creature’s attacks. The trio searched through the chaos until they were able to pull out their packs and set them on the floor.
Each of the packs held two changes of clothing, torches, two days’ rations, and matches in waterproof tins. Strung on the bottom was a rolled blanket. In addition, Milo had his notebook and a camera whose purpose Milo had only mysteriously smiled about, and Tulio had his own notebook.
The three of them carried their packs to the open door. Milo pulled out his flashlight first and turned it on. Everyone gasped as one, the noise echoing hollowly all around them.
Milo’s torch lit up a curved stone ceiling a hundred feet high, at least. The light reflected prettily all around them off the water. Milo lowered the light, illuminating a stony shore nearby.
Miguel left his pack on the floor, then jumped in. He shivered at the cold water, then paddled to the shore. He pulled himself out of the water and hopped to his feet and looked around.
“Wait there,” Miguel said. “There might be a way for you to get over here without swimming and getting wet.”
“I’m already wet,” Milo pointed out, shivering.
“Shall we fly?” Tulio asked sarcastically.
“No.” Miguel bent and picked up a board he’d seen in Milo’s torchlight. “You’ll walk!”
The submarine wasn’t far from the shore, so Miguel laid his board down. Tulio and Milo walked carefully across, carrying the packs. Miguel and Tulio turned their torches on and added their lights to Milo’s.
The stone floor swept out across from them to a high stone ceiling. A huge staircase was directly across from them, leading to a platform and tunnel that led out of sight. A few battered statues littered the floor, covered in moss and spiderwebs.
“Cozy,” Miguel said after a moment. His voice echoed back to him.
Milo was already walking away, enthralled with something beside the steps. Miguel turned to get Altivo out of the submarine- he could see the horse was frozen inside the submarine. He took one step, then paused beside Tulio.
“Tulio?” Miguel glanced at Milo, who was oblivious to them. “Are you alright?”
Maybe it was the lighting, but Tulio looked very pale. Miguel was soaked and feeling chilled, but Tulio was visibly shivering.
“Tulio?”
“It feels like a crypt,” Tulio said, his voice so quiet it didn’t even echo.
Miguel startled. Neither of them liked to be trapped -who did?- but it was worse for Tulio. Still, it had been years since being underground had affected Tulio so strongly.
“It isn’t,” Miguel said.
“Atlantean runes!” Milo yelled, his voice echoing so loudly that Tulio winced.
Tulio rubbed his ear, then looked over at Milo. Miguel was relieved to see him focusing.
“What’s it say?” Tulio asked, his voice betraying only a slight quiver.
“It says… fish-face.”
Miguel snorted. “Graffiti from… how long ago?”
“About 8,700 years ago,” Milo said absently. “It’s carved into the side of the steps here. Oh, look at this statue!”
Dashing away from the steps, Milo ran his light up and down a carved fish that was longer than he was tall. The tail was broken off, though a chunk of carved stone nearby looked like it was the missing tail.
Miguel glanced at Tulio. He was steadier, but still looked queasy.
“Milo,” Miguel said.
Studying something on the side of the statue, Milo didn’t seem to hear him.
“Milo,” Tulio said, his voice cracking.
Milo looked quickly over. Tulio coughed into his fist. The cough was clearly fake to Miguel, but Milo quickly pulled out a canteen and held it out. Tulio took the canteen and took his time sipping.
Milo looked around the cavern as if seeing it for the first time. The excitement faded a bit in his eyes and his shoulders fell.
“Okay, well, we’re where we want to be,” Milo said. He turned and shined his light on the tunnel at the top of the steps. “Should we keep going?”
“I mean, we came all this way,” Miguel said. Despite their damaged submarine, Miguel was excited to have found the entrance. “Why not?”
“We don’t have much of a choice,” Tulio said, glancing at the submarine. “Milo, is this… Atlantis?”
“No, just the gate,” Milo said. “The Journal describes a journey we’ll have to take first, remember?”
“I kind of expected it to be on the surface,” Tulio muttered.
Milo didn’t appear to have heard. He knelt and rubbed a hand across the floor.
“ This doesn’t look carved,” Milo mused. “It’s so smooth. Maybe it was formed by water.”
“If it was water, the steps would have been smoothed away, too,” Tulio pointed out.
“It’s possible if enough people walked on it…” Milo looked around. “I’m checking out the tunnel.”
“Let’s all go,” Tulio said promptly. When Milo looked at him, Tulio said, “The last thing we need to do is get separated.”
“Hold on,” Miguel said. He ran back to their makeshift gangplank. “Altivo! Come on, boy, we’re going to explore!”
Altivo snorted and didn’t move.
“Altivo,” Miguel sighed. Then he smiled and reached into a pocket in his coat. “Oh, Altivo, look what I have!”
Altivo glanced back, then scrambled to his hooves when he saw the apple Miguel was holding. He left the submarine and crossed the gangplank without hesitation. Miguel smiled and let Altivo take the apple from his hand.
“Where was he keeping that?” Miguel heard Milo ask Tulio.
Smiling, Miguel went up the gangplank and to the cockpit. He found Ladron hiding under the controls, and picked up the armadillo. He carried Ladron outside, and unceremoniously dumped him into Tulio’s arms. Tulio gave Miguel a sharp look, but didn’t put down Ladron.
“He’s going to get lost running around here,” Tulio said at Miguel’s grin.
Never mind that he was currently hugging a very confused Ladron.
“Okay, let’s go check out that tunnel!” Miguel declared.
The group tramped up the moist steps, slipping every few steps on the moss and puddles collected in the grooves worn in the center of the steps. Altivo grunted, then bolted past them. He skidded up to the top, then turned back with a self-important toss of his head.
“Show-off,”
Miguel said.
Milo slipped with a yelp. Miguel caught him with barely a glance, focused as he was on his own feet.
“Eyes off the Journal, Milo,” Miguel said.
“Sorry,” Milo said. He closed the Journal with a hilariously conscious effort and looked around. “It’s just… we found it.”
“We found the gate,” Tulio said, logical as ever.
“ I- yeah, but… this is still more than anyone believed possible!”
They reached the top of the steps, where a massive tunnel loomed. As one, they all turned their torchlights into the darkness. A dark, smooth tunnel greeted them. Miguel couldn’t see anything beyond the torchlights.
The three of them didn’t know how far Atlantis was from the gate, only that a journey would be involved to get there. As such, they’d packed food and camping supplies. The plan had been to set up a camp at the entrance or surface, then explore the tunnel leading to Atlantis at their leisure.
Now, however…
Miguel didn’t know machines, but he didn’t think there would be any returning to the surface in their submarine. And would anyone dare to explore the “cursed” waters when the five of them didn’t return? Tomas would probably assume they were dead, especially if…
“Guys,” Miguel said, “Do you think Tomas and his crew are safe?”
Milo hesitated, but Tulio spoke up.
“Sure, why wouldn’t they be? We were the ones zipping around the water.”
Milo smiled slightly as he followed Miguel’s gaze to the submarine. “I feel a bit bad about losing Tomas’ submarine…”
“That’s what he gets for telling us that we’d die if the air hose tore,” Tulio scoffed.
“You know,” Miguel said, “He probably tells everyone that, to keep his submarine safe.”
“Huh?” Milo said, tilting his head.
“No, Miguel’s right,” Tulio said, suddenly putting the pieces together. “If someone else is driving his submarine, all Tomas has to do is say that if anything happens to the hose on top of the submarine, everyone inside dies. Nobody would try to steal it.”
“Or be reckless driving it,” Miguel said, thinking of Tulio’s driving.
Tulio shook his head. “Would you rather I’d sat us down nicely so that thing could eat us?”
“I don’t think it would eat us,” Milo said thoughtfully. “It was a machine.”
“Steam engines eat coal and combustion engines eat gas,” Tulio said. He’d memorized that information almost instantly. “Who’s to say the giant cranky guardian doesn’t eat intruders for fuel?”
Milo opened his mouth, then got an extremely excited look on his face. He pulled out his notebook and flipped to a random page to scribble something.
Tulio shook his head and started back down the steps.
“Hey, Tulio!” Miguel yelped. “Don’t you want to go find Atlantis?”
Tulio stopped and turned. “You’re forgetting the plan, Miguel. We set up camp first, then we start exploring.”
“Yes, but that was when we thought we were going to be able to get out,” Miguel said.
Too late, Miguel realized how poorly his timing had been. But Tulio just rolled his eyes and set down Ladron.
“As long as we’re down here, we should start looking,” Tulio said. “Milo, you said the journey to Atlantis would take at least ten days, right?”
Milo nodded as he absently flipped to another page full of notes. “There’s no telling how big each of the sections of the tunnel described in the Journal could be, but probably.”
“We have half the food we bought in the submarine,” Tulio said, fully in planning mode. “While we wait for rescue, why don’t we just load up our supplies and start walking? We can go for fourteen days before we even have to think about turning back around. We’ll probably be at Atlantis by then.”
“Yes, let's!” Milo said, lighting up like a small child being offered a kitten.
“Then get down here,” Tulio said, “The sooner we’re ready to go, the sooner we can leave.”
Leaving turned out to be a bit trickier than they’d initially thought. Since they all planned to have Altivo during the expedition, the plan had been that Altivo would haul a majority of their supplies in a cart. But even disassembled, the cart took up most of the hold. It had been left behind for a future trip to the entrance.
Tulio soon came up with the idea of taking apart a few of the crates holding their supplies, and using the boards and nails to connect several of the crates. It made a sort of rough sled Altivo could drag behind him as long as the ground remained smooth. Luckily, Altivo’s harness had been packed into the hold.
Which led to another problem.
“There’s no way Altivo can haul all the food he needs for a full month, and our food,” Tulio said, looking between the two stacks of food they’d sorted. “Not even just his food.”
“There might be a way,” Miguel said.
“He’s not eating our food, and besides, we still have the same problem,” Tulio said.
Altivo snorted.
“He only wants the apples,” Miguel said.
“And there’s the problem with water,” Milo added. “We were going to figure out how to transport enough water for the five of us for a month later, with smaller travels first…”
“Guys!” Miguel yelled, waving his hands.
Tulio and Milo looked at him. Ladron chittered from between his feet, then wiped his snout with damp paws.
“Ladron found a stream of drinking water beside the stairs,” Miguel said.
“Okay?” Milo said unsurely. “But we’ve got drinking water.”
“But the stream came from the tunnel!” Miguel said. “As long as we follow the stream, we’ll have water!”
Milo brightened and scribbled in his notebook, where he was listing the things they needed to pack from the submarine.
“ As long as the stream follows our path,” Tulio pointed out.
“We’ll go as far as the stream does,” Miguel said. “If it ends, we can turn back around.”
“Okay, then we’ll do that,” Tulio said. He thought for a moment, then looked again at Miguel. “You said you had a solution for Altivo’s food?’
“Altivo does,” Miguel said, pointing.
Everyone turned. Altivo was standing on the edge of the torchlight, munching and ignoring them. Clumps of moss fell from his lips.
“Of course!” Milo face-palmed. “We’re underground, surrounded by stone and water! There must be moss growing all over this place!”
“Maybe,” Tulio said. He tilted his head. “But as long as there’s water, there’ll be moss.”
Miguel smiled and crossed his arms proudly.
“ Okay, so that’s water for everyone and food for Altivo and Ladron,” Milo said. “Now all we’ll need is our food, and that will be easy!”
Miguel looked at their food supplies. Luckily, they’d packed the lightest and easiest to travel food first in the submarine. Dried beans, flour, dried meat, and sugar were the primary food supplies. It meant nothing but beans and meat on bread for the whole month but it would pack easily inside the crates for transport. In addition was a pot and a pan, along with eating and cooking utensils.
Miguel picked up his pack. He’d added a cup along with the previous supplies, as had the other two. He carried a waterproof tin of matches, brushes for Altivo, and a tin of the “coco” Milo had introduced them to. Milo had the first-aid kit, as he was the only one who knew how to use everything inside. Tulio had a sewing kit, cloth patches, and a knife he’d convinced Milo would come in handy while they’d been in town. The tent would have to be left behind for the sake of weight, but if the path remained underground, the tent didn’t make much difference.
“Okay, then, Altivo!” Miguel called. “Come over here, boy!”
Altivo looked at Miguel, then the sled. He turned and walked over to the steps.
“Altivo,” Miguel said warningly.
Altivo twitched his tail, then trotted up the steps. Miguel’s shoulders slumped. Milo chuckled.
“We might as well load the sled up there,” Milo said. “There’s no way Altivo could drag the sled up the steps.”
“Nah, he’s not strong enough for that,” Miguel said, his voice echoing through the cavern.
An offended whinny answered him. Miguel smiled as Altivo descended the stairs again and ran over to them. He positioned himself in front of the sled and tossed his head importantly.
“Oh, so you’ve decided to help now, have you?” Tulio asked. “Hold still.”
Miguel got Altivo harnessed, then attached the sled to the harness. Everyone quickly agreed to leave the sled empty until it was at the top of the stairs. When Altivo snorted his offense, Miguel soothed him by telling him that they didn’t want the supplies to fall out from bouncing up the stairs.
Altivo dragged the sled to the top of the stairs, and the three men brought up the supplies and carefully loaded the sled again. Miguel turned his torchlight toward the tunnel.
“Hold on,” Milo said.
Miguel and Tulio looked at him.
“We might have enough batteries for all three flashlights for a full month,” Milo said. “But just to be safe, maybe we should use just one or two at a time.”
“Good plan,” Tulio said. “You two, put your torches away for now. The tunnel is narrow enough for one torch to be enough.”
Miguel nodded at the wisdom of the suggestion and put his torch away. He smiled as he glanced around the mossy tunnel, and to the side where water trickled by. He strode purposefully forward a few steps and thrust out a finger.
“Let’s follow that trail!”
“What trail?” Milo asked eagerly.
“Don’t ask,” Tulio said.
Miguel laughed and walked forward. A moment later, Tulio’s torch turned off, leaving Miguel striding confidently into the pitch black.
Notes:
Aaaand, off they go! Surely absolutely nothing can go wrong now!
Chapter 6: Monster
Notes:
Alrighty, this is the last of the fully edited chapters, so there's going to be a little bit of a gap since I have to get my daily writing done at least before I can work on edits of the earlier chapters.
Time to find out what's going on with the crew!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
“We’re nearing the location,” Rourke said.
“It’s about time,” Mr. Whitmore said, leaping from his seat to follow. “Lead on, lead on!”
Rourke paused. “Lead on?”
“To the sub!” Mr. Whitmore huffed. He waved his walking stick. “Shoo, go!”
Rourke raised an eyebrow, but did as he was ordered. He walked slowly along the hall of Mr. Whitmore’s massive ship, listening to the small man follow.
Mr. Whitmore had been acting odd since the Atlantis venture had begun. Well, more odd than normal. It was strange enough that he’d joined the crew on the ship. Anymore, Mr. Whitmore seemed to prefer pictures after the expedition over joining them.
But since the Atlantis expedition had begun, Mr. Whitmore had become quiet. He spent a lot of time in his office on the ship. When Rourke entered the room, he could only describe the man as “brooding.” In years past, Mr. Whitmore had openly expressed his thoughts on the expeditions -on anything, really- but now he wouldn’t explain what had captured his attention.
Rourke pushed his thoughts aside as they entered the hold of the ship. Or perhaps “hangar” was a more accurate term.
Up above, suspended by massive chains and hooks, was the submarine for the expedition. Crew members in harnesses scurried across the surface like spiders, making last-minute adjustments for the submarine’s maiden voyage.
Rourke paused and gazed up at it, locking his hands behind him. Soon, he’d be away from Mr. Whitmore and below the sea. Milo and whoever had taken him couldn’t be much further ahead, especially as reports had told them that they had taken out a single, relatively small ship with a single, two-roomed sub. Surely they couldn’t fit many people and supplies in that, slowing them down as multiple trips would have to be made for their expedition.
“So, it’s ready?” Mr. Whitmore asked.
“The crew is loading as we speak,” Rourke said.
From below came the sound of Helga yelling at Vinny, who’d dropped another piece of dynamite. Rourke winced a bit. Dynamite on a submarine… that was just asking for trouble. And Vinny was hauling a large amount of other explosives as well. Hopefully Mr. Whitmore wouldn’t think it was odd.
Audrey’s voice rose above the whine of machinery and shooting sparks. She was butting heads with Jenkins again, probably. The two of them were absolute geniuses and worked amazingly together… but all working together had to include a fair amount of yelling at each other as well.
Rourke shook his head. As long as they were keeping the sub running, that was all he cared about.
“Is something wrong?” Mr. Whitmore asked.
Rourke smiled. “No, sir. Just listening to Audrey and Jenkins fight again. It’ll be a wonder if they don’t sink that sub from their yelling.”
Mr. Whitmore laughed at the statement. He looked down, then sobered. Rourke tensed. Mr. Whitmore wasn’t a man who was solemn often, and Rourke was wary anytime it happened nowadays. He was too jumpy, he knew, but if Mr. Whitmore even suspected what he was planning…
Mr. Whitmore began to descend the walkway toward the submarine. Rourke fell in step beside him, letting Mr. Whitmore have his silence. His own mind was wandering to what they might find below.
“I’ll be going with you to Atlantis.”
Rourke stopped cold at the statement. Mr. Whitmore stopped as well and turned. Rourke barely cleared the shock and frustration from his face in time.
“Why, Mr. Whitmore, I thought you swore off our expeditions years ago,” Rourke said, sounding carefully surprised and calm.
Mr. Whitmore nodded seriously. “Yes, I suppose I did.”
“Well, why now?” Rourke asked. “I don’t suppose Atlantis will be right at the ocean floor. All expeditions have some measure of walking and climbing, you know.”
Mr. Whitmore lifted a bushy eyebrow. “I suppose you think I’m too old for such things, hm?”
“Well, I mean, no, sir,” Rourke fumbled.
Mr. Whitmore’s mouth gaped in a loud laugh. “Oh, you can say it! I’m an old man, after all.”
“So…. forgive me for being blunt, but why do you want to go this time?” Rourke asked.
Mr. Whitmore’s amusement faded. He looked at the floor, then up at Rourke.
“I failed my old friend, Thaddeus, by not finding Atlantis in his lifetime. And now his grandson, sharing his same dream, has gone missing. I couldn’t forgive myself if anything happened to Milo. I dare say, Thaddeus would find a way to haunt me from the afterlife if Milo was hurt because I wasn’t there.”
“It wouldn’t be your fault,” Rourke said.
Rourke kept his voice level and tried to sound soothing. In reality, his mind was racing and it was all he could do to not grit his teeth while he spoke.
Mr. Whitmore, joining the expedition? Now, of all times?
“No?” Mr. Whitmore asked. “Thaddeus entrusted the Journal to me, and I’m the one who gave Milo the Journal in the most mysterious way possible. I should have taken him to my estate and given it to him there. I knew what a valuable object he was receiving!”
Rourke didn’t react aside from a darting glance at Mr. Whitmore. So, he’d known where the Journal was all along? Why had he hidden it for so long, only to all but throw it away?
“You’re used to how Thaddeus operated,” Rourke said. “He would have been rushing into the house as soon as he laid hands on it. He did, if I remember correctly.”
Mr. Whitmore chuckled and shook his head. His expression turned pensive and wistful, probably remembering the old days when it had just been Thaddeus and Mr. Whitmore, before they’d compiled a crew of experts to aid them in their expeditions.
“Besides,” Rourke said, “If you’re worried about Milo, so are all of us! Most of the crew worked with Thaddeus before his untimely death. We were all fond of him, and want to see his grandson safely home. I’ll watch over him myself if I have to.”
Mr. Whitmore chuckled again, though the sound wasn’t amused.
“No, no,” Mr. Whitmore said. “I’ve made my decision, Rourke, and you know better than to argue with me.” He tapped the captain's hat sitting tilted on his head. “I’ll be on the bridge if you need me.”
“Yes, sir,” Rourke said.
Rourke didn’t move as Mr. Whitmore walked the rest of the way to the hangar floor. More than a few odd looks were thrown his way as he boarded the submarine. Sweet smiled and went over to Audrey, managing to extract the girl from the argument and hustle her aboard.
Rourke sighed heavily. Leave it to Mr. Whitmore to complicate the biggest job he’d ever taken on.
“What’s going on?” Helga asked. She’d joined Rourke without him noticing, so distracted he was. “A last second check of the submarine by Mr. Whitmore?”
“No. He’ll be joining us,” Rourke said.
“That might… complicate things,” Helga said carefully.
“Chances are, he’ll stay on the sub,” Rourke said. “If not, stick close to him. Someone needs to protect him from the dangers down there, you know.”
Helga sighed heavily. Rourke’s mouth quirked up. He knew the order would feel a bit like babysitting the old man, but Rourke would have enough to handle without wondering where Mr. Whitmore was and what he was seeing.
Rourke and Helga went their separate ways, snapping out orders for people to load up. They were leaving in an hour, and anyone who wasn’t on board would be left behind.
After making sure his crew was aboard and trusting his sargeants to make sure all the soldiers were on board, Rourke boarded. He headed immediately to the bridge, where Mr. Whitmore was right where he said he’d be. Rourke hadn’t thought much of the seat installed in a central, raised platform in the center of the bridge, but now that Mr. Whitmore was perched on it, Rourke realized grimly that Mr. Whitmore had been planning on joining them for some time. But for how long, and why?
Rourke shook his head. It had been a couple years since the last official expedition. Mr. Whitmore was probably just feeling nostalgic. And, as he’d said, guilty about the danger Milo was potentially in at that moment.
Helga entered the bridge. Rourke gave her a hard look -she was supposed to be sticking with Mr. Whitmore- but was ignored. Helga checked with a few of the sailors, then nodded to Rourke and, after a split-second of hesitation, Mr. Whitmore.
“We’re ready to dive.”
Rourke glanced at Mr. Whitmore, who waved a hand at him to take command. Rourke linked his hands behind him.
“Give the orders to dive,” he told Helga.
Helga nodded, then turned to face the full bridge and snapped out orders that were echoed back as the officers passed them on. Metallic thunks came from overhead as the Ulysses was released from the clamps.
The Ulysses submerged in a flurry of bubbles. Rourke felt the submarine sinking in the water and braced his feet against the rocking of the submarine. Crewmen piped up from across the bridge and their tinny voices rattled through the pipes.
Eventually, the voices subsided and everyone stood still, staring into the water. After a beat of silence, everyone cheered.
The submarine’s maiden voyage was underway.
“Excellent! Magnificent!” Mr. Whitmore exclaimed, clapping his hands like an excited child. “Atlantis! Here we come!”
“We’ll reach the coordinates we got from the dockworkers in six hours,” Helga said.
Rourke nodded. They had determined there was a chance of someone following them to Atlantis. A small one, given most people’s skepticism on Atlantis existing, but Mr. Whitmore’s crew had been on many successful expeditions over the years. If word had slipped out that they were after an actual legend… well, Rourke knew there were a few who would try and follow. As a precaution, they’d take out the submarine well ahead of time and would make a sharp turn to the north while the ship proceeded southeast.
“The captain’s cabin is up there,” Helga went on to Mr. Whitmore. “Would you like to rest until we arrive?”
Mr. Whitmore flapped an impatient hand at her. “What? You, too? Look, I might be old, but I don’t need an afternoon nap!”
A bowman lifted a hand, not quite muffling a quiet laugh.
Helga stared at Mr. Whitmore for a moment, then excused herself quietly and walked out. Rourke watched her leave, then his attention was drawn back to Mr. Whitmore muttering to himself.
“I was there when they designed the submarine and I know where the captain’s cabin is. Trying to push me around my own sub like a doddering old man.”
“Mr. Whitmore, please, Helga meant nothing of the sort,” Rourke tried to calm the old man. “We’re all tired from the pace we’ve set to get here and the submarine ready on time. Most of the crew are going to be resting as we speak.”
Mr. Whitmore ducked his head, looking abashed. “Oh, yes, Rourke. I suppose I shouldn’t snap at Helga like that. She’s only trying to be helpful, after all. You go on, Rourke. I can watch the bridge while you get your rest.”
Rourke stared at the sly old man, then conceded with a nod. “Aye. Thank you, sir.”
Rourke turned on his heel and left the bridge. All the way, he felt Mr. Whitmore’s gaze on his back.
Once he was off the bridge and out of sight, Rourke scowled. He couldn’t shake the feeling that Mr. Whitmore was up to something… but what? If he suspected what Rourke planned upon finding Atlantis, he’d never have allowed Rourke onto the ship.
Rourke shook his head at himself. Mr. Whitmore was a strange man, that was all. It was more likely that he was acting out to mess with Rourke. It certainly wasn’t the first time Rourke had lost in a game of words with Mr. Whitmore. He did love to talk circles around people.
Deciding that Mr. Whitmore was clueless to the true intent of his mission, Rourke set out to find the rest of the crew. He wanted to inform them that Mr. Whitmore would be joining the expedition… and that nothing had changed.
Some time later, Rourke walked toward the bridge. He was in a sour mood, as Mole had somehow managed to take over an entire room with his dirt and had chased off three of the soldiers who were supposed to bunk in the same room. Luckily, Sweet had stepped in. He was one of the few people who could work with Mole without getting bitten.
Rourke made a mental note to check in with Sweet and make sure everyone was updated on their shots. The last guy Mole had bitten had gotten a weird swelling that had forced the expedition to end early.
On top of that, he’d also learned that Jenkins wasn’t on the sub. He’d chosen to remain on the ship! Audrey insisted it wasn’t her fault, but most likely, the head engineer had gotten tired of arguing with her, no matter the results.
Rourke sighed as he re-entered the bridge. Engineers!
Mr. Whitmore was still in the chair. Rourke vaguely wondered if the man had left. Probably not, and he looked just as excited to be on the bridge as he had been before.
Rourke turned to look out the main port. A smile spread across his face. Yes, he didn’t have much opportunity to enjoy nature, but the dark sea full of fish was a sight to behold.
Helga walked up to his side and quietly reported. There were some adjustments being made to the equipment that still wasn’t completed. The vehicles had been loaded into the smaller subs in the hold, and adjustments were being done there. If need be, they could potentially be finished once they reached the entrance and unloaded.
If they could be so lucky as to find the entrance so easily.
Rourke’s smile faded as he remembered that morning. They’d come across a ship returning to port. The elderly captain, a man by the name of Tomas, had told them that he’d had three men -and a horse and armadillo for some reason- on board to go to the coordinates they’d been given at the docks. They’d taken his sub down when something had caused their air hose to tear. The man also claimed to have seen a massive beast in the water shortly after his submarine vanished, though Rourke suspected he’d seen a whale or something of the sort.
Rourke surveyed the ocean floor as it appeared through the gloom. This deep, the water was pitch-black. The floodlights on the outside of the sub lit up a fair amount of the ocean floor, but there was nothing unusual about it.
“Sir,” said one of the pilots, “Look at that!”
Rourke followed the point of his finger. Broken timbers littered the sand.
“It’s an old wreck,” Rourke said.
“Look at how it’s split,” the pilot persisted. “It looks like something crushed it!”
Murmurs ran across the bridge. The crew entered at that moment. Vinny took one look at the wreck before offering his thoughts.
“Something blew up that ship.”
Rourke shook his head and repeated, “It’s an old wreck.”
Nobody responded. Several of the pilots shifted uncertainly. Rourke felt another surge of annoyance. Someone had spread rumors of the “cursed” water to the sailors and soldiers. The encounter with Tomas had apparently solidified the theories in people’s minds.
“Commander?”
Rourke looked at the speaker, then followed his pointing finger. Two more wrecks were illuminated. The first was little more than timber, but the second was intact enough that the gaping hole on the port side was clearly the cause of her sinking.
“Looks like we’ve arrived,” Rourke said calmly.
“Lucky us,” Audrey muttered.
The sub kept moving forward, passing over more and more wrecks. Before long, there were too many wrecks to see the ocean floor. Columns of stone appeared from the darkness, each column holding more wrecks on top.
Rourke looked slowly around. Wrecks and ruins didn’t faze him, but something felt very off about the water.
“Where’s the fish?” Vinny asked.
Rourke looked again. The dark water was absolutely empty of life. No fish swam and no plants grew anywhere in sight.
“Could be all the wrecks buried the plant life and the fish didn’t stick around,” Sweet volunteered.
Everyone seemed to give a collective sigh. Rourke glanced at Helga. Even she looked a bit spooked by the empty water.
Rourke scowled and said, “Helmsman, begin the search pattern.”
Helga snapped back to herself with a scowl. She glanced around and said, “Everyone, keep an eye out.”
Most of the crew, soldiers, and sailors walked to the perimeter of the bridge to peer out of the giant orb of glass surrounding the bridge. Mr. Whitmore and Audrey left the bridge, climbing a ladder to one of the torpedo mounts.
“What are we looking for?” a sailor asked after a few minutes had ticked by.
“A giant beast,” Vinny said, widening his eyes and wriggling his fingers in a mock spooky manner.
Rourke gave the man an unimpressed look. He was almost glad when Packard’s monotone drifted up from where she sat beside the hyrdophone with her mug of stale coffee full of old cigarettes.
“Commander, I’m picking something up on the hydrophone. I think you should hear this.”
“Put it on the speakers,” Rourke said.
With a look of “it’s your funeral,” Packard flipped a switch on her console. From the tubes all around the bridge came a crackly, squealing sound. Rourke rubbed his ears at the grating sound as he and Helga descended the steps to Packard’s station.
“What is that?” Rourke asked the bridge in general. “A pod of whales?”
“Nuh-uh,” Packard droned. “Bigger.”
Bigger than a whale or a pod of whales? The latter was absurd, yet the searchlights had just landed on the remains of a metal ship with a massive dent taking up half the hull.
“It sounds metallic,” Helga pointed out. She reached past Packard to fiddle with a knob. “It could be an echo coming off the rocks.”
“You want to do my job? Go ahead,” Packard droned, leaning back.
Helga glanced at her, then gave up on the knob. She and Rourke returned to the bridge, where they had a better vantage point. Rourke could feel the tension in the bridge building as the sound grew louder and louder…
Then stopped.
Everyone seemed to be holding their breath. Rourke looked askance at Helga, who seemed more annoyed than spooked now.
“Whatever it was,” Helga said with a careless shrug, “It’s gone now.”
Rourke silently hoped so. “Helmsman, bring us about! Slow us down and tighten the search-”
Rourke was interrupted when the entire submarine jolted to a hard stop, throwing everyone against railings and controls. Rourke thrust himself up and spun around, eyes scanning past the orb to figure out what they’d hit.
“Watch it!” Helga snapped at the helmsman.
“It wasn’t me!” the man yelled. He thrust out a finger. “Look!”
The submarine’s stern jerked down, throwing everyone backward. Rourke managed to grab the railing, but everyone else hit the floor. As such, he was the only person to see the massive creature pass through the searchlights.
Dark brown and scaly, the creature resembled a lobster, but bigger than anything Rourke had ever seen. It was practically a mountain!
Rourke didn’t dare hesitate, though. He turned quickly to Helga, who was rubbing her jaw as she stood.
“Tell Cookie to melt the butter and break out the bibs, I want this thing served up on a silver platter,” Rourke said.
Helga glanced at the creature as it made another pass, already snapping orders. “Load the torpedo bays! Sub pod crews, battle stations!”
The Ulysses was struck again, throwing everyone to the floor yet again. As Rourke hauled himself up, he glimpsed Audrey drop to the base of the ladder and race toward the back of the sub.
Rourke focused on the sailors and soldiers running toward sub pods. Fear was clear on their faces, and stark panic on some.
“Steady, boys,” Rourke said into the intercoms. “Don’t panic.”
Although, panicking was sounding more and more realistic as the creature snagged the Ulysses in claws bigger than the submarine. The whole of Ulysses jolted so hard that everyone was thrown from their seats. Red lights flashed and alarms blared.
“Launch sub pods!” Rourke roared.
“Subpods away!” an ensign, hands and feet braced on his crooked console, yelled.
Rourke looked up. Twenty sub pods raced away from the Ulysses, then swung back around. He grabbed the intercom he’d dropped when he fell and gave the order to fire.
Underwater missiles rained down on the creature. It flinched and gave a hollow, echoing roar. Lifting its head, the claws opened as the creature focused on the sub pods.
“We’re free,” Rourke said. “All ahead full!”
The Ulysses raced free, then turned at Rourke’s order. The sub pods had freed the Ulysses, but were paying the price. The creature's claws carelessly batted two sub pods away. One hit a stone column and exploded. The other drifted down, then drove slowly toward the cover of the rocks. The creature turned toward another cluster of sub pods.
“Fire torpedoes!” Rourke ordered quickly.
The torpedoes launched and struck the creature. Like the sub pods’ missiles, the torpedoes only slowed the creature and drew its attention. Rourke prepared to give the order to retreat, but the creature didn’t attack. Blue light crackled around the pincers on the corners of its mouth.
“Dive!” Rourke bellowed, a second too late.
Blue light tore through the water. The Ulysses was shoved to the side like it was nothing. The alarms blared louder and the submarine shook even after the attack ended.
“Commander.” Packard’s monotone cut through the chaos of panicking sailors and officers frantically trying to regain calm. “It’s engineering on three.”
Wanting to do anything else, Rouke flipped the intercom to the third channel. Audrey’s voice screamed at him, making him wince.
“Rourke! We took a big hit down here and we’re taking on water fast! I don’t want to be here when it hits the boilers!”
“How much time do we have?” Rourke asked with forced calm.
“Twenty minutes, if the bulkhead holds,” Audrey said.
From somewhere toward the stern came the muffled sound of an explosion.
“Better make that five,” Audrey said grimly.
Leaving on the intercom, Rourke gave an order to the bridge at large. “You heard the lady. Let’s move!”
“Packard, sound the alarm!” Helga yelled. Rourke didn’t hear her response, but Helga leaned over the railing and snapped, “ Packard! ”
Packard’s voice filled the halls, sounding thoroughly bored as she stated, “All hands, abandon ship.”
Already, power was failing throughout the Ulysses. The bridge crew rushed toward the hold, their path lit only by flashing red emergency lights. Helga reached the Aqua-Evac she and Rourke had been assigned to ahead of everyone else and began yelling immediately.
“Move it, people! Sometime today would be nice!”
Helga shoved Sweet ahead of her. Rourke was on her heels, sealing the hatch behind them.
“Everyone, grab a seat and buckle in!” Helga continued to snap as she ran toward the cockpit of the Aqua-Evac.
“Rourke!” Audrey, in a seat but unbuckled, grabbed Rourke’s coat. “Mr. Whitmore! I haven’t seen him since the creature showed up!”
“He heard the call to abandon ship,” Rourke said.
“But he’s not here! ” Audrey said.
“Lieutenant!” Rourke snapped over his shoulder. “Is everyone accounted for?”
“All Aqua-Evacs are nearly loaded and ready to go!” Helga said, struggling with something near the console. “Last of the sailors from the torpedo bays are boarding now, with two others missing!”
“And Mr. Whitmore?” Rourke asked, darting to the cockpit.
Wrestling with the lever that released the Aqua-Evacs, Helga didn’t answer. Rourke felt a slam of alarm when he realized Jenkins hadn’t managed to fix the jammed lever. What had he been doing the whole time?!
Another voice answered him over the intercom. “No sign of him, Commander!”
“We’ve got a few minutes!” Audrey said, leaping for the hatch.
Audrey was fast, but Rourke’s longer legs brought him to her side before she could leave. He roughly shoved her back toward the seats.
“Stay here and wait for us,” Rourke growled.
Rourke opened the hatch and leaped out. He ran out of the hold, silently cursing the old man for not obeying the order to abandon ship. Or, at the very least, being too slow about it.
A few steps down the shaking walkway, listening to the low rumble of explosions and seeing the creature dart past a window, Rourke almost turned back around.
But he ran onward. He passed the missing men, a sailor helping support a staggering engineer. Rourke shoved them toward the hold and kept moving, knowing they couldn’t launch as long as there was still time for Mr. Whitmore to get to an Aqua-Evac. And once that happened and Mr. Whitmore learned Rourke hadn’t done what he could to protect him -the entire crew, really, though the old man was now the only one missing- then he’d definitely never trust Rourke to watch out for Milo.
The Ulysses tilted and Rourke, caught off guard, lost his balance and slammed into a wall. He shook the pain from his shoulder and ran onward, bursting into the bridge.
And there was Mr. Whitmore. He laid at the base of a ladder leading to the torpedo bay at the back of the bridge. In the chaos of the attack, Rourke hadn’t noticed that none of the soldiers had climbed the ladder. Mr. Whitmore might very well have been the one firing the torpedoes, though, as the attack had caught them off-guard and soldiers hadn’t all had time to get to their posts.
Mr. Whitmore looked up as Rourke stepped onto the bridge. He rose to his knees, looking dazed. He grabbed the ladder and struggled to use it to stand on one foot, the other twisted awkwardly under him. His cane was out of sight.
“Rourke,” Mr. Whitmore said in clear relief.
Rourke stepped toward him, wondering why he hadn’t called for help over the intercom. A glance told him a ruptured pipe spewing steam had broken the intercom tubes.
Mr. Whitmore got upright, only to promptly crumple back to his knees. He glanced nervously over his shoulder at the sound of another explosion, then over at Rourke.
The man was always jeopardizing the mission. It would be so much easier if…
Rourke stopped. Mr. Whitmore’s eyes narrowed, and Rourke realized there wasn’t any shock in Mr. Whitmore’s face.
“Rourke!” Mr. Whitmore called, thrusting out a hand, “Come on, man, the Ulysses isn’t going to hold for us much longer!”
Rourke took a step.
Backward.
Everyone else was in the Aqua-Evacs. Soldiers, sailors, and engineers loyal to Rourke.
Except for Mr. Whitmore. He’d never approve of Rourke’s plan, and his power and influence over the expedition’s crew was strong enough to sway many of them if it came down to choosing between Rourke’s plan and Mr. Whitmore’s morals.
“Rourke!” Mr. Whitmore yelled. “Come back here!”
“Sorry, sir,” Rourke said with a sardonic salute, “But I’ve got a pod to catch.”
Notes:
...so! When I was writing all of this, it struck me that Mr. Whitmore had to have suspected or even known something wasn't right about the expeditions Rourke was leading. He's too smart to not to, so in the interest of protecting Milo from Rourke, he decided to join along, and, welp...
Chapter 7: The Deepest Darkness
Notes:
So, I've hit 100,000 words for this fic, making it officially the longest single project I've ever written! I've also got a tentative chapter count! I'm working on chapter twenty right now, but there's still a chance of rabbit trails lengthening the whole project. (After all, Audrey ended up hijacking an entire chapter and upping the count already. XD)
Anyhoo, you've waited long enough after my evil little cliffie, so here you go!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
“Rourke!”
Rourke closed the hatch to the bridge. For a second, he just stared at the handle. He’d once been so close to Mr. Whitmore and Thaddeus, sharing their love for adventure.
Rourke pushed away from the hatch and ran, the floor shaking with explosions that were growing louder and more frequent. His friendship with the strange old men had ended years ago, when Rourke had realized just how valuable their finds were. He’d bided his time when Thaddeus died, then gradually became more bold as Mr. Whitmore had grown less and less nosy about the expeditions. He’d thought the man was long past interfering with the expeditions, but Mr. Whitmore had proven him wrong and, well, Rourke had run out of patience.
Nearly to the hold, Rourke rounded a corner and collided with a small frame. He staggered, but Audrey was knocked off her feet.
“What’re-”
Rourke didn’t bother finishing the question and hauled the teen to her feet by the back of her jacket. He spun her around and gave her a shove.
“Back to the evac!” Rourke yelled.
“But, Mr. Whitmore-”
“Go!”
Rourke ran onward, grabbing Audrey’s arm and yanking her along. Audrey tried to pull away as they reached the Aqua-Evacs, still calling Mr. Whitmore’s name.
Boom!
The entire submarine rattled. Rourke lifted a writhing Audrey for the last few steps. Sweet, halfway out of the Aqua-Evac, had Audrey thrust into his arms. Rourke shoved the pair inside and slammed the hatch of the Aqua-Evac.
“Lieutenant, get us out of here!” Rourke roared.
The sliver of the cockpit that Rourke could see was enough for him to glimpse Helga lift a foot and kick the stuck lever. The launch doors opened with a heavy thunk .
“We’re out, Commander!” Helga yelled.
Rourke headed toward the cockpit, but Sweet grabbed his arm. Audrey fought Sweet’s other arm wrapped around her waist to no avail.
“Where’s Mr. Whitmore?” Sweet asked urgently.
An explosion rocked the Aqua-Evac, so loud that the metal pod seemed to thrum. The Aqua-Evac rocked, and Rourke grabbed the restraints of a nearby seat to balance himself. Helga got the Aqua-Evac stabilized, then shouted from the cockpit.
“That was the Ulysses! Commander, get up here!”
Sweet was still holding his arm, his eyes pleading with Rourke to disprove what everyone on the Aqua-Evac knew to be true. Audrey was still fighting him, reaching for the closed hatch.
“I searched for him as long as I could,” Rourke said. He couldn’t hesitate, not with the creature still out there. Not when his face could still betray him. “Buckle up, both of you.”
Sweet let go of Rourke, shock and horror in his eyes. He pulled Audrey closer, closing her in a hug that Audrey normally would have fought. Now, though, she kicked once before going limp, a choked sob coming from her throat.
Rourke turned sharply away and went to the cockpit, dropping heavily into the seat beside Helga’s. Helga glanced at him, shock on her face.
“Drive, Lieutenant, if any of us are going to make it out of here alive,” Rourke said grimly.
Helga grabbed the radio. “Close ranks and follow me.”
“Are we making a break for the surface?” someone asked.
“No, dive and- I said dive! ”
A blast of blue light shot from the creature’s mouth, cutting through an Aqua-Evac that had turned toward the surface. It exploded, clouding the water with sand and oil.
The rest of the Aqua-Evacs dropped close to the ocean floor. The sub pods fell in rank alongside them, a few of them launching missiles at the creature when it turned to follow. The creature shrieked and its light attack sliced through two of them.
“We’re getting killed out here!” someone yelled over the radio.
“We need cover,” Rourke said. Spotting a dark line in the ocean floor ahead, he quickly pointed. “There!”
Helga squinted at the line quickly forming a crevasse, then said into the radio, “All craft, make your mark twenty degrees down angle.”
Confirmation came over the radio from the other pods. More attacks of light crashed around them, and screams and bursts of static over the radio told of more pods being struck. Rourke braced his feet against Helga’s evasive maneuvers and didn’t let himself listen too closely.
Seconds ticked by, feeling like years. The crevasse opened suddenly in front of them, and the Aqua-Evac dove on the tail of another. The creature roared behind them. Rourke looked reflexively back, but he couldn’t see anything past the hull.
The crevasse narrowed in front of them. Helga struggled to keep the pod on course, then the pod in front of them bounced off the ceiling and onto the tunnel floor. It exploded, and there wasn’t any time to slow and no way to turn. Their pod barreled through the debris, then the tunnel abruptly turned. Helga yanked up on the controls and the evac swung upward amid a barrage of light bolts.
The tunnel turned sharply up, taking them out of view of the creature. Helga wrestled with the controls, the evac moving too fast for the narrowing tunnel. The floodlights in the front lit up nothing but black water, seemingly unending-
Then the tunnel walls opened. Rourke gasped as they found themselves in open water. Helga didn’t slow, then they were suddenly on the surface. The evac leaped from the water, then splashed down.
Helga cut the engines.
For a long moment, nobody moved. Rourke realized that his heart was racing and he was panting, whether from the run through the sub or the chase, he didn’t know. Probably both.
Rourke took a level breath, then looked at Helga. Her hands were locked on the controls in a death grip, her eyes fixed on the view port.
Rourke turned forward again. The floodlights in front illuminated the pool they now floated in. Before them was a tiny, dented sub barely bigger than a sub pod. Beyond that… was statues, an ancient staircase, and the dark opening of a tunnel.
The gate of Atlantis.
Moments before…
Mr. Whitmore stared in shock and horror as Rourke slammed the bridge hatch closed. His chest ached at the betrayal, but he felt no surprise.
He knew Rourke wasn’t trustworthy. He’d known it for some years now. It was why he’d insisted on joining the expedition, to ensure his best friend’s grandson was safe from Rourke’s greed.
Overhead, the alarms continued to blare. Betrayed or not, Mr. Whitmore couldn’t sit around if he wanted to live. He hauled himself back upright, crying out when his left foot dragged across the metal floor. He’d fallen awkwardly on it, and now it wouldn’t take his weight.
Mr. Whitmore couldn’t walk. He slithered down the walkways on his hands and knees, sped along by the increasing tilt of the sub. He all but fell into the captain’s cabin and slammed the door shut. He clutched the chair bolted to the floor and dragged himself into it.
Gasping for breath and trying to not pass out from the pain in his ankle, Mr. Whitmore flipped open a hidden compartment on the chair arm, revealing controls. Staring at the empty bed across from him, Mr. Whitmore slammed a hand on the launch button.
The door gave a low thunk as locks slid into place. Explosions rattled the cabin, and Mr. Whitmore held his breath. It was going to be close.
A sudden pressure pressed Mr. Whitmore against his chair. His broken foot pushed hard against the floor, and darkness rose from the pain.
Mr. Whitmore wasn’t sure how long he was unconscious, but when he managed to rouse himself, the cabin was steady. A glance at the controls in the chair arm told him he was slowly rising, and he desperately hoped the creature wouldn’t have any interest in his little escape pod.
Mr. Whitmore wasn’t an idiot. He knew what Rourke was up to, though he wondered how long ago Rourke had begun sneaking artifacts from their research sites and selling them. Mr. Whitmore had never had any solid proof, and didn’t even know who else was in on the thefts. As ashamed as he currently was to admit it, he’d turned a blind eye on Rourke’s thefts because they were old friends.
Old friends. And now Rourke had left him to die.
Mr. Whitmore had known that Rourke likely didn’t feel the same loyalty to him anymore. He’d expected a betrayal, and he’d had Jenkins convert the escape pod into a captain’s cabin on their way to the coordinates.
Mr. Whitmore’s eyes again moved to the empty bed. Hidden under the blankets was another set of restraints, there for the safety of the bed’s occupant when the escape pod was shot from the sub. He hadn’t planned on needing the escape pod so soon into the expedition… or to be alone.
No, he’d ensured there was an extra spot in the escape pod for a reason. If Milo was anything like Thaddeus, he wouldn’t be too happy when he learned that Rourke planned to take the crystal they’d all seen in the Journal and sell it. Sell it to the highest bidder, no matter which country made the offer. Mr. Whitmore had planned to confront Rourke if -when, really, he had to admit- it happened. And he’d planned on having a quick way out for himself, Milo, and the crystal when Rourke inevitably chose money over friendship.
Mr. Whitmore slumped in the chair, lost in his thoughts and a daze of pain. Eventually, a series of cheerful chirps told him that his escape pod had surfaced. Moving only one hand, Mr. Whitmore flipped a switch on the control panel. A muffled whumpf came from the ceiling, a flare sent into the sky.
Jenkins had stayed behind for a reason. He’d stayed with the crew most loyal to Mr. Whitmore, who Rourke had intentionally left behind. Jenkins was watching and waiting near the coordinates they planned on finding the entrance. Watching for a flare from Mr. Whitmore to signal that he needed to be picked up.
Mr. Whitmore sighed and closed his eyes. Hopefully, Jenkins would still be nearby. Neither of them had expected the escape pod to be used so soon.
Darkness pressed down on him, heavier than his grandmother’s quilt covering his face and body. It was thick and heavy, making it hard to breathe. His lungs begged for air he couldn’t seem to find, no matter how much he panted.
He longed to lift a hand, to tug the quilt away. Maybe then, he could breathe again. He needed air. He needed the light.
But there was no air. No light to chase away the darkness and fear. All that stood above the quilt was the unforgiving stone, cutting him off from the sky.
He panted harder, his cheeks growing wet as he told himself to not move. Begged his body to lay still, to not twitch. He didn’t dare move, not now. Not ever again.
He couldn’t move. He couldn’t breathe. He was dead, even though his heart still beat.
Dead. Dead just like-
Tulio snapped awake with a shout he barely muffled. He sat quickly up, wide-eyed in the darkness. He fumbled for the torch he’d left beside his blanket and turned it on. The light pierced the pitch black and Tulio twisted to reassure himself.
Altivo was laying just behind him, acting as a pillow to the three men. Altivo looked at Tulio, half-awake, snorted, then laid his head back down. Miguel was using one of Altivo’s legs as a pillow, and Milo slumped on Altivo’s other side.
Tulio rubbed his face, then looked down at the ball of armadillo on his lap. He whispered, “Do you mind?”
Ladron chittered. He uncurled and rubbed his drowsy face, then blinked up at Tulio.
Tulio raised an eyebrow. He didn’t know how Ladron kept ending up on his lap in the night, though he suspected it was Miguel’s fault. At least he didn’t have a habit of grabbing things in his sleep, as Miguel did. At that moment, Miguel was clutching his half filled pack to his chest, softly snoring away.
Tulio sighed, then stood. He walked quietly away from the others to crouch beside the remains of their campfire. He sat down, then poked the embers back to life with a spoon. He put on a handful of dried moss, then leaned back on his hands.
The moss made for a weak fire, but it lit up their temporary camp well enough. Tulio turned off his torch and looked to where he could see the carved walls at the edge of the firelight. He wondered if he could take the torch over to study the carvings. He knew very little of Atlantean, but he liked to inspect the runes on the wall, anyway.
Anything to distract him from the dream.
Tulio leaned his head back. He couldn’t see the ceiling above him, which suited him just fine. He felt a flash of annoyance with himself. He’d always been fine going underground, through tunnels, or confined to the occasional brig. So what was bugging him now?
It had started at the gateway. The desperate chase, then the darkness. Seeing the ceiling arch over his head, and knowing that there wasn’t any way for him to simply turn and walk out.
Tulio shivered and put more dried moss on the fire. He wasn’t cold, not really, but the light was comforting.
The dreams had left him alone for over ten years now, and he shuddered to think of the possibility that they might be returning. He’d left those days behind.
Tulio breathed out slowly and studied the flames. His heart calmed and Tulio was able to look up at the dark ceiling with nothing more than curiosity.
Where had the tunnels come from? Who had carved them? If Atlantis had sunk into the sea eight thousand years ago and everyone was killed, why would there be tunnels leading to Atlantis?
Milo hadn’t had an answer when Tulio had asked. Milo had suggested that the tunnels had been built before Atlantis had sunk. When Atlantis fell, it had nested into the underwater tunnels carved centuries beforehand.
It was the only theory they had, and it made sense. But it still seemed odd to Tulio. Then again, he was used to crowded towns and caves where people camped. Maybe the idea of empty tunnels was all that was strange to him.
Tulio sat for a while, then looked over at the clock Milo kept near him. He was figuring out how to tell time on the clock, as he could no longer sense when it was day or night. Three days in eternal darkness did that. At least the thought didn’t give Tulio another sense of panic.
According to the clock, it was close to dawn. Tulio quietly retrieved the pot from their supplies and crept over to where water trickled from a hole in the ceiling nearby.
They’d been cautious about drinking the water at first, but all the streams they’d encountered had been fresh water. It all tasted cleaner than anything Tulio had drunk, too.
Tulio filled the pot and returned to sit beside the fire. He set up a rack over the flames and put the pot on it. He hugged his knees as he waited for the water to boil. Even if the water tasted fresh, Milo had said they should boil it whenever they had the chance. Something about bacteria in the water possibly making them sick. Tulio didn’t understand it, but if boiling the water meant they’d stay healthy during the expedition, he’d do it.
The water was just starting to boil when Milo stretched. He rolled over and peered over Altivo’s back, squinting in the direction of the fire.
Tulio took the pot away from the fire to cool, then got up and went to their packs. Milo was practically blind without his glasses. During the night, he left his glasses on his pack, far away from Altivo in case the horse moved in the night. He grabbed Milo’s glasses and went over to give them to the linguist. Milo took them, thanking Tulio through a yawn.
“What time is it?” Milo asked.
“Dawn,” Tulio said. “Rise and shine.”
Milo rubbed his eyes and stood. He got halfway before he suddenly froze with a yelp. He didn’t move for a long moment.
“Need a little help?” Tulio asked.
“Uh… yeah, I could,” Milo said sheepishly.
Tulio went behind Milo and wrapped his arms around Milo’s chest.
“Remember,” Milo said nervously, “Easy does-”
Tulio yanked Milo upright, causing Milo’s back to loudly pop. Milo’s yelp echoed through the tunnel and startled Altivo awake. Altivo lurched to his hooves, dumping Miguel on the ground.
Tulio let go of Milo, ignoring his dramatic stagger, and looked down. Miguel grumbled at being disturbed, but didn’t really rouse. Tulio nudged him with his foot.
“Do you have to do it so hard every time?” Milo complained.
Tulio shrugged with a nonchalant grin. “You really should get out more.”
Milo rubbed his back with a grimace. “I’m a scholar, not an athlete.”
“Well, you’re both now.”
For some reason, Milo looked proud at the statement. He started to draw himself up, then paused with a grimace and resumed his slight slump. It wasn’t easy for him to walk so much and carry the heavy pack, Tulio knew. He tried his hardest, but he was still slow. No matter; it wasn’t like Tulio or Miguel were going to complain about the easy pace.
Miguel rolled over, then sat slowly u p . He blinked at Tulio. “Tulio, it’s still dark out.”
“It’s always dark down here,” Tulio said. “Rise and shine, it’s time to get moving.”
Miguel flopped backward with a grumble. Tulio started to walk away, then spied Ladron’s rump poking out of the bag of dried beans. He pulled Ladron out, then dropped him onto Miguel’s stomach. Miguel’s legs and arms jerked up and he gave a dramatic cough.
“I said to get up,” Tulio said.
“Ah, you’re no fun. Tulio, think fast!”
Tulio twisted on his heel, hands coming up just fast enough to catch a curled-up Ladron. After giving Miguel an unimpressed frown, Tulio abruptly grinned and threw Ladron toward Milo. Milo yelped, fumbled Ladron, then dropped him. Ladron hit the ground with a muffled squeak, then uncurled and scurried to hide behind Miguel.
“I’m sorry!” Milo yelped. “Did I hurt you?”
“He never gets hurt,” Miguel assured him as he patted Ladron’s head. “Tulio and I once played half a game of ball with him.”
“You… what? Why?” Milo asked.
Miguel opened his mouth, but Tulio grabbed his blanket and threw it into Miguel’s face.
“We can explain later, once we get movi ng,” Tulio said. “Come on, guys.”
“Okay, okay,” Milo said.
Tulio rummaged in their supplies. Breakfast consisted of an apple -the last of the apples before they started eating dried fruit- a piece of jerky, and a small biscuit they’d made the night before. Everyone collected their share, then reloaded their packs and the sled. After hitching up Altivo, they got moving again.
“Okay, what’s this about playing ball with an armadillo?” Milo asked.
Miguel began to recount the tale of their playing ball in El Dorado. Tulio tuned them out. He squinted at the runes barely visible. Milo was in charge of the torch today, so Tulio had to make do.
After a few minutes of trying and failing to read the runes, Milo stopped and turned the light toward the wall.
“What is it?”
Milo asked.
“Huh? Oh, nothing,” Tulio muttered. “Just trying to read the runes.”
“Oh, right!”
Milo promptly perked up and hurried to the wall.
The tunnel was clearly carved. Though stalactites hung from the ceiling and the occasional stalagmite had to be dodged as they walked, the walls had been carved to appear to be columns along the path. The columns had a simple design of lines from top to bottom, with a section in the middle that was clear of lines to make room for runes. Having stopped and looked more closely, Tulio now realized the runes were the same in each “column.”
“What’s it say?” Tulio asked.
“Uh, it says… it says ‘sunrise.’” Milo frowned, then turned and ran to the other side of the tunnel. “Sunset?”
“So they would always know east from west,” Tulio guessed.
“Probably, but why? The tunnel is straight and hasn’t split off in any way,” Milo said.
“Maybe the carvers were bored,” Tulio said.
“Uh, this would probably be why,” Miguel said from ahead.
Tulio jogged over to where Miguel stood. The tunnel had split. The new series of tunnels had the same mock columns carved into the walls, but none of the runes.
“So when they were traveling through the tunnel, they knew if they should turn left or right!” Milo exclaimed.
“Uh-huh,” Tulio said, understanding the logic. “So which way do we turn?”
“Oh, right, right,” Milo said.
Milo took the Journal from his pack and flipped a few pages. Tulio glanced at the page, trying to follow the words as Milo ran his finger along the runes, but he quickly gave up.
“Ah!” Milo jabbed a finger onto the page. “You see this word here, Tulio?”
Tulio looked at the unfamiliar runes. “Yeah? ”
“That’s Atlantean for sunrise,” Milo said, grinning broadly. “That means we’re moving east!”
Altivo bobbed his head, then turned…. West.
“Altivo,” Tulio said, “Let the experts lead.”
Altivo snorted, then turned and trotted past them, his head held high.
“Aw, Altivo, don’t be like that,” Miguel said, following him.
Tulio snorted as he followed behind them. He watched Miguel take out the apple he hadn’t eaten yet and offer it to Altivo. The horse smugly munched it up.
Milo laughed a bit. “Altivo’s a bit spoiled, isn’t he?”
“Oh, you’re just figuring that out?” Tulio joked.
“I think he got half the apples we packed,” Milo laughed.
Tulio smiled distractedly.
“What?” Milo asked.
“Shouldn’t the path have changed?” Tulio asked. “According to the map we made, there should be other landmarks by now.”
Milo shrugged, his cheer slipping. “Your guess is as good as mine, honestly. If I had a week or two to really work on decrypting the Journal, I might figure it out.”
Tulio hummed.
“Why? Are you worried about getting lost?” Milo asked.
“No, not at-” Tulio’s eyes widened and he raised his voice. “Miguel, wait for a minute!”
Miguel paused. “What is it?”
Tulio answered by turning and walking back the way they’d come. He stopped at the fork in the path and pulled off his pack. He dug out the hunting knife he’d bought in the shops near the dock. After strapping the sheath around his waist, Tulio took a step into the tunnel they’d come from. Picking a clear spot on the wall at about eye level, Tulio used his knife to make an arrow pointing back the way they’d come.
They’d have to backtrack eventually, they all knew. While they could work through the Journal backwards, Tulio didn’t want to accidentally get turned around. As precautions, Milo was mapping their route in his notebook as they walked, assisted by Miguel’s compass. Tulio regularly cut an arrow in the wall, and planned to do so anytime they had to choose between multiple paths.
“Okay, we’re set now,” Tulio said, putting his knife away.
They walked on. Milo pulled out his notebook and scribbled in the change of path, rather than wait for when they stopped at the end of the day, as he’d been doing for the last three days. Of course, it was also the first time they’d encountered a fork in the path.
Tulio wondered how many more they’d pass before reaching Atlantis. He hoped it wasn’t too many… and that they wouldn’t be walking much longer.
After a bit more walking, Milo stopped. Everyone stopped behind him, and Tulio watched as Milo’s torchlight slowly rose. As it did, Tulio realized the ceiling had vanished!
“Guys, check this out!” Milo said, awe clear in his voice.
Tulio stepped up beside him. His mouth fell open.
The path led a bit beyond them, then turned. It descended a large space -so large that Milo’s torchlight barely touched the far side- in a sharp, zigzagging pattern. Milo swept the light around, and Tulio saw the paths even crossed over each other in places!
“Okay, I remember this in the Journal,” Milo said.
“So do I,” Tulio said. “Isn’t this the place with two routes?”
“Yeah,” Milo said.
Miguel took out his torch and went to the edge of the path to shine his light down. “Woah.”
Miguel’s voice echoed around them. Listening to the echo, Tulio realized the zig-zagging path led much further down than they’d guessed from the Journal.
“Think we can get down there today?” Milo asked. “It looks like a long way.”
“So we’ll take the short way,” Tulio said, marking the wall with an arrow.
“But we can’t,” Milo said. “The tunnel is too narrow.”
“For one of those trucks you wanted to get down here,” Tulio pointed out. “But if it’s wide enough to walk, it should be wide enough for three men and a horse.”
Ladron chittered.
“You don’t count.”
“Aw, Tulio,” Miguel said, scooping up Ladron. “ Don’t be mean.”
“If you keep treating that rat like a child, it’s going to think it’s one,” Tulio said blandly.
“Armadillo,” Milo said.
Tulio looked at him.
“Sorry, keep going,” Milo said, smiling.
Milo was quickly adjusting to the mock arguments Tulio and Miguel got into. He’d even joined sometimes, much to Tulio and Miguel’s amusement.
“It’s a rat,” Tulio said, looking again at Miguel.
Miguel tilted his head, then went to their supplies and got out a piece of dried fruit. He fed it to Ladron, meeting Tulio’s eyes the whole time.
“Mature,” Tulio said. “He’s going to get fat.”
“More for you to cuddle with at night,” Miguel said.
Tulio wished they had swords. “We should keep moving.”
“He’s not denying it!” Miguel exclaimed to Milo.
Milo, the traitor, laughed.
“Don’t encourage him,” Tulio said. “He isn’t as funny as he thinks he is.”
“But, he’s right,” Milo said between laughs. “You hug Ladron like a teddy bear.”
Tulio’s brows furrowed. “Who in their right mind hugs a bear?”
“Not a bear bear,” Milo snickered. “A toy bear. It’s soft and fuzzy.”
“Everything Ladron is not,” Tulio said, refusing to find the joke funny.
“Okay, okay,” Milo said, dropping the subject, if not his smile. “So, the shortcut it is, then?”
“Agreed,” Tulio said, looking at Miguel.
“Shorter sounds good to me,” Miguel said cheerfully. “Lead the way!”
Tulio gestured for Milo to go first, as he was most familiar with the Journal’s directions. Milo trotted along the path until it split, then chose the upper path. Tulio and Miguel walked behind Altivo, shifting the sled each time the path changed directions.
They’d climbed about twenty feet when Milo stopped in front of a tunnel cut into the wall. Tulio looked critically at the tunnel, then the sled.
“Looks like it will fit,” Milo said, having done the same.
Milo coaxed Altivo into the narrow space. Tulio took out his torch and used it while he and Miguel straightened the sled to fit into the tunnel.
“Keep the light on,” Miguel said. “ Don’t want the sled to get caught, hm?”
“Yeah, good plan,” Tulio said.
He walked along beside Miguel, shining the torchlight around to avoid obstacles. From ahead, Milo called back warnings of jutting rocks and the occasional stalactite that hung particularly low.
Tulio looked up at the ceiling, then at the bare walls. At least the walls didn’t feel like they were closing in on him.
“Tulio?” Miguel asked.
“Hm?”
“Were you having those nightmares again?”
Tulio looked quickly at Miguel and made a slicing motion across his throat.
Milo’s voice drifted hesitantly back, “You were calling out in your sleep.”
Tulio rubbed the back of his neck. “Okay, so I had a weird dream… I don’t really remember it.”
And what little he did remember was enough to clue him into what the missing pieces had been. And Tulio wasn’t ready to dredge up those old memories.
“Okay,” Miguel said quietly.
The three walked in silence for a bit longer. Tulio’s shoulders crept up. He could practically feel Milo’s silent questions. He was a scholar. He’d already proven how persistent he could be when it came to things he wanted to know. What if he decided to push Tulio for answers?
“Heads up,” Milo said, his voice making Tulio jump. “Or, down. There’s a stalactite up here. Oh, and the floor is starting to slope down.”
Tulio tilted his head, but Milo didn’t say anything else. As they pushed on, Milo only spoke to warn them of obstacles at first. Gradually, he began theorizing out loud about how the tunnels had formed. Tulio’s shoulders relaxed.
“Lava tubes, these have to be lava tubes,” Milo said. “It would make the most sense. If the path in the big shaft was built, this tunnel could have formed naturally and connected up with it. Or the tube was always here, and was found by the carvers of the path.”
“No lava’s going to be flowing through here while we’re in here, right?” Miguel asked.
“Probably not,” Milo said. “There weren’t any signs of volcanic activity outside. My guess would be that these belong to a volcano that went dormant long ago.”
Tulio inspected the floor. He didn’t know enough about lava tubes to make any of his own theories, so he accepted Milo’s. All he needed to know was that the lava tube would get them to the bottom of the shaft and wouldn’t fry them to a crisp.
“Holding up back there, you guys?” Milo asked.
“Oh, yeah, fine,” Tulio said. “What about you? Need to rest?”
“Nah, I can keep going,” Milo said. “I’d rather get out of the tubes, at least…”
The lava tube went on. Tulio guessed it was moving in a downward spiral. There were a few steep sections, where Miguel and Tulio had to tie ropes to the back of the sled to keep it from sliding into Altivo’s legs, but for the most part, it was a steady, slight slope.
By midday, the lava tube opened up. Everyone decided to stop to eat and rest near a large clump of moss. Milo wasn’t good at walking for long distances, and none of them wanted to push Altivo too much. While Altivo munched on the moss, Miguel collected extra moss to burn once it dried.
The trio put their rolled blankets on the ground to sit on. They pulled out their midday rations, which was the same as their morning meal. They also refilled their canteens and the pan with water from the tank they kept filled with clean water in the sled.
Tulio munched on his dry biscuit, watching Miguel pile some dried moss. “What are you doing?”
“Making a fire. Could you pass the matches?”
Tulio did so, saying, “We boiled enough drinking water this morning.”
“Yeah, but we forgot something.”
Tulio bemusedly watched Miguel fill the pot with water, then take a tin from his own pack. He measured some of the powder from the tin into the pot, then stirred it for a bit. Once he was satisfied, Miguel took everyone’s mugs and filled them.
“We forgot the coco,” Miguel said.
Tulio accepted the warm mug, wrapping his fingers around it and breathing in the sweet smell. Milo had introduced the treat to Miguel after picking up the tin on the docks, and he’d been hooked. For Tulio, the drink brought back memories. Good memories of warm hearths and singing filled with laughter and listening to his father read stories.
Tulio drifted in the memories for a bit, willing them to replace the bad memories he’d been woken by that morning. He blinked himself back to the present some time later, and found Milo giving him a worried look.
“Hey, Milo,” Tulio said before Milo could speak.
“Yeah?”
Tulio raised his mug. “To finding Atlantis. If we have to walk to the center of the earth to find it.”
“Here, here!” Miguel said, cheerfully lifting his mug as well. “To finding Atlantis!”
The biggest, happiest grin Tulio had ever seen spread across Milo’s face. He lifted his mug as well and clinked it against theirs.
“To finding Atlantis!”
Notes:
Mr. Whitmore's still alive, woo!
I couldn't actually kill him off, he's too fun!And I have given Tulio and Miguel backstories, and I'm so excited to share them with you~
Chapter 8: Strange People in Strange Places Doing Strange Things
Notes:
I'm still cracking myself up over the title. XD Titles were interesting to figure out for the "travel montage" part of the story because there's a handful of mini-plots during that time.
There'll be another chapter on January 1st! I'm nearly done with the fic entirely, too! Once I get done, I'll start a posting schedule soon after!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Audrey had a crick in the center of her back. Whether it was from trying to escape Sweet’s grasp during the evacuation or from how stiffly she was standing, she didn’t know. She didn’t want to think about which it could be, either. Both thoughts were too painful just then.
Fixing her eyes on the flickering candle, set adrift by Sweet in an upside-down helmet, Audrey tuned out Rourke’s solemn words. She rubbed her eyes, determined to not cry.
Sweet’s big hand settled on her shoulder. Audrey didn’t shrug it off like she normally would have, instead letting his hand steady her.
Mr. Whitmore was gone. More than two-thirds of the crew was gone. The Ulysses was gone. They had no way to get out the way they’d come in, not unless they wanted to face that creature again.
Audrey’s eyes clenched as a tear slipped out. She couldn’t stop thinking about Mr. Whitmore. Why hadn’t she thought of him before running to the Aqua-Evac? He didn’t always act it, but Mr. Whitmore was an old man. He couldn’t have moved as fast as the others when the call to abandon ship had come.
Then again, maybe he had made it into another Aqua-Evac. They’d never know, though. Only one of the four Aqua-Evacs had escaped the creature. Two of the sub pods had made it as well.
Forty-nine of them stood on the stone shore, but a hundred and eighty-three crew and friends now laid on the bottom of the ocean. Lost forever, because of that strange mechanical beast.
Another tear followed the first. Audrey quickly wiped it away, even though many of the other survivors were crying. She didn’t like crying; it made her feel small and young when she was already the only teenager on the crew.
Audrey sniffed, then let the next tear fall. She’d first met Mr. Whitmore when she was five years old, when Papi had taken her on one of the expeditions. Mr. Whitmore hadn’t batted an eye at the girl showing up, instead showing her around the site and letting her drive the truck when Papi wasn’t looking… Mr. Whitmore had become a bit of a grandfatherly figure to her over the years, even if she rarely saw the strange old man.
But now she’d never see him again.
Rourke turned away from the water. Audrey started listening again as he solemnly told everyone that they were still pressing on. Everyone would take on more tasks during the expedition.
Rourke began to delegate tasks. Nothing had really changed from their original assignments, though the sailors who were originally going to stay with the Ulysses were mostly doubled up with the soldiers assigned to drive the trucks. The supplies and vehicles had been carefully divided between the Aqua-Evacs. It was both for the convenience of having the proper equipment if only one Aqua-Evac was taken from the Ulysses to the shore… and to prepare for the possibility of the very disaster that had befallen the expedition.
Audrey slipped away from Sweet’s hand and headed toward the oil tanker. She didn’t trust many people to drive the tanker, not when all it would take was a stray spark to set it ablaze or a sloppy maneuver to upend it.
Audrey climbed into the seat and put her hands on the wheel, but didn’t immediately start it. Around her, vehicles rumbled to life. Helga and a small group of soldiers began to ascend the stairs on foot.
“Want some company?”
Audrey looked down at Sweet. Anyone else, she would have told to find another ride, but for Sweet, she slid over to the passenger side. Sweet climbed up and started the tanker. He didn’t try to get Audrey to speak, though he quickly started up a one-sided conversation about the strange statues around the chamber.
Audrey looked outside the tanker while Sweet waited for his turn to join the line of vehicles driving up the stairs.
On the edge of the stone shore were their subs, plus the one taken by Milo and his kidnappers. The thing was tiny, barely bigger than a sub pod. The hold was still half full of supplies. There was a note pinned to the driver's seat for apparently whoever came to join them, explaining that they had moved out already. They planned to go and find Atlantis or travel for two weeks, whichever happened first, before returning to their sub and trying to reach the surface again.
Audrey wondered, not for the first time, who could have kidnapped Milo. From what she’d heard, nobody had ever given any credit to the existence of Atlantis. To say so was to be crazy.
Yet, here she was, on a search for Atlantis.
Audrey’s eyes followed the trail of headlights up the staircase. Mole’s digger had reached the top, and his floodlights illuminated a massive statue. It was carved so the tunnel leading away from the entrance was entering the statue’s mouth. It was interesting, if a bit creepy.
The last of the trucks joined the line. At a gesture from Audrey, Sweet waited until the last truck had reached the statue before moving. Sweet pulled the tanker forward, joining the line with a good distance between them and the rest and the rest of the fleet.
After all, if the tanker exploded, there wasn’t any sense in taking any other vehicles with them.
Tulio, Miguel, Milo, and Altivo walked for the rest of the day, having to only pick their way down the shaft a bit further. There they found another tunnel. Tulio walked in the front now with his torch out, illuminating the tunnel. It was more broad than the ones higher up, though the walls were dull and bare.
Tulio glanced back. Milo and Miguel were behind him, with Altivo bringing up the rear. Ladron rode on Miguel’s shoulder, clutching his jacket with his tiny claws. Milo was studying the Journal as he walked, often veering off to the side. Miguel kept an eye on Milo, and pulled him back on course whenever he wandered too close to the wall.
Tulio slowed his pace to walk on Milo’s other side. Milo didn’t notice, engrossed as he was in the Journal. He was muttering nonsense under his breath as he struggled to read Atlantean out loud.
“What’s that mean?” Tulio asked.
“Hm? Oh, nothing,” Milo said. He closed the Journal.
“Come on, show me,” Tulio nagged. “I want to read Atlantean, too, you know.”
“Okay, okay.” Milo reopened the Journal to a marked page near the end of the book. “It’s this text that I found last night. I’ve been trying to figure out what it’s talking about.”
“Okay, what’s it say?” Tulio repeated.
Milo put his finger under a set of runes. “Have I shown you this one yet?”
“Hm… no, I don’t think so,” Tulio said. They had mainly focused on the directions near the beginning of the Journal when they studied together.
“It says ‘Heart,’” Milo said. “At least, I think it does. It’s mentioned a few times in the Journal, but I’m not sure what it is…”
“You mean the Shepherd didn’t explain it?” Tulio asked.
“Well, he probably did when he first mentioned it.” Milo gave a sheepish shrug. “But I’ve been jumping all over in the Journal. I can’t help it! A few pages back, the Shepherd is talking about their flying vehicles! And before that, there’s this fish-”
“Milo,” Tulio interrupted. Milo could get distracted and go on very long tangents if someone didn’t help him to focus.
“Oh, right.” Milo looked again at the page. “Anyway, this text seems to indicate something about a method of healing with the Atlanteans. The Shepherd mentions a pool, something he calls the Tears of Atlantis.”
“Tears?” Tulio repeated, studying the next set of runes Milo pointed to.
“I think so. It could also mean water,” Milo said.
“Water of the heart,” Miguel said musingly. “Sounds like blood to me.”
“But how could blood from the Heart heal anyone?” Milo asked.
“The Heart could be a plant,” Tulio said. “You know, crush a plant and get the sap? It could be described as either blood or water.”
Milo perked up. “You’re right!” Just as quickly, though, he frowned. “Except, the other texts make the Heart sound like one object, something big and sacred.”
“Plants sometimes grow only around specific stones,” Miguel said.
Milo perked right back up again. He had some serious mood swings, Tulio thought in amusement.
“That could be it, too!” Milo said, then pulled out his notebook and scribbled the thought. “If the Heart was a stone or object, and the Tears were plants, spread out enough for the Shepherd to call it a pool maybe…”
“What sort of healing is it used for?” Tulio asked.
“Ah, that’s what I-” Milo fumbled with both books until Tulio took the notebook. “That’s what I’m trying to figure out. There’s some sort of ceremony that’s described, something that the king does. The patient is presented by the king to the Tears of the Heart. If they’re judged worthy, they’re healed.”
“Sounds like mystic mumbo jumbo to me,” Tulio said skeptically.
“Maybe,” Milo said. “But sometimes ceremonies make sense when you look at them scientifically.”
“Think the Tears will still be in Atlantis?” Miguel asked.
“I’m not sure. I hope so,” Milo said. “I’d love to study what could be so special about the Tears. If we knew how they worked or what made the Tears… just think what that would do for modern medicine!”
Tulio shook his head. “Maybe, maybe not. I’m more curious about treasures left behind.”
Milo shrugged, more focused on the Journal than Tulio at the moment. “Not all ancient cities were made of gold, you know.”
Tulio grunted noncommittally. Gold or precious stones would be nice, especially after all the trouble they went through to get to Atlantis in the first place!
Milo was again absorbed in the Journal. Tulio kept walking, leaving Milo to puzzle out the text. He was picking up Atlantean fast, but not enough to keep up with Milo when he started jumping between pages on various trails of thought.
The tunnel began to slope down ever so slightly. Tulio peered ahead, hoping it wouldn’t get too steep again. Luckily, it straightened before long, only to vanish!
“Hold up!” Tulio said, throwing out his arms.
Milo bumped into his arm, the impact making him look up. “What’s wrong?”
“The ground just stopped,” Tulio said. “Just wait a moment.”
Tulio walked carefully forward. Sure enough, the tunnel led right to another shaft, one of a sheer drop and wasn’t full of convenient paths. Tulio shined his torchlight down, but couldn’t see the bottom.
“Didn’t the Journal mention a shaft with teeth at the bottom or something?” Tulio asked, joining the others again.
“Oh, yeah. I think they’re stalagmites,” Milo said. He opened his notebook. “Yeah, that’s probably right. I assumed it was the shaft back there.”
“Yeah… I don’t think it was.”
Miguel gave an impressed whistle. “This one goes down a ways, doesn’t it?”
“I wonder how… oh, I think I know how we can figure out!”
Milo dropped his pack without explaining. He dug into it, then pulled out a red stick. Milo had called it a flare when he bought it on the docks.
“Stand back,” Milo warned them. “I haven’t used one of these before.”
“You’re using this stick that just bursts into flames for the first time down here?” Tulio asked, incredulous. “I thought you knew about that thing.”
“I do!” Milo moved the stick back-and-forth a bit. “Well, I’ve read about them…”
“Tulio, don’t be so dramatic!” Miguel said. “It’s just a little fire! What could go wrong?”
“Do you want the full list?” Tulio asked drily.
“No, no, come on.”
Tulio let Miguel push him back a few steps, though he still wasn’t going to trust the flare. Milo closed his eyes -that was reassuring- and yanked off the tip of the flare.
Instantly, it burst into flames, startling them all. Milo almost dropped the flare, juggling it for a bit before getting his grip back. Altivo squealed and tried to back up, only to step onto the sled. His hoof skidded and he balked. Miguel hurriedly grabbed his halter and spoke soothingly.
Once Altivo was calmed, nobody moved for a minute.
“So,” Miguel said, “What’s the flare for?”
“Oh, right, I almost forgot!”
Milo leaned over the shaft again, then dropped the flare. He stared intently down for a few seconds, then turned around. He took out his notebook and flipped to an empty page to scribble. Tulio glanced at the numbers, but couldn’t understand Milo’s process.
“What’s that for?” Tulio asked.
“Hm,” Milo said distractedly.
Recognizing Milo’s working face, Tulio crossed his arms and waited silently. Eventually, Milo looked up.
“If my math is right, the shaft is about two hundred feet deep,” Milo said.
“How do you figure that?” Miguel asked. He raised his hand as Milo opened his mouth. “Never mind, I’ll trust your math.”
Milo smiled. For some reason, he always got so happy when Tulio and Miguel took his word without questioning it.
“Two hundred feet,” Tulio said. “We’ve got fifty feet of rope.”
“Um…” Milo swapped to the Journal. “There should be a path leading down.”
Tulio edged back to the drop and shined his light down. Quickly, he spotted the path.
“There it is,” Tulio said.
Milo grimaced. “I was hoping there was another path.”
“Why? It’s wide enough to walk.” Miguel studied the path. “Barely.”
Tulio shrugged off his pack. “Wait here. I’ll check it out.”
“Shouldn’t we all…?” Milo asked.
“Not yet. The path is old and might be unstable or broken away. I’ll make sure the path is wide enough for Altivo and the sled.”
Tulio stepped down the short ledge to where the path began. Keeping a hand on the wall and his torch in the other. Tulio took a few steps.
“Feels sturdy enough,” Tulio said.
“Wait,” Milo said suddenly. Milo ran back to the sled, then came back with the rope. “Tie this around your waist. It’s not long enough for the whole shaft, but at least if you slip in the first fifty feet…”
“Good plan,” Tulio agreed, not wanting to think about what could easily happen with one misstep.
Tulio tied the rope around his waist, then resumed his cautious walk. The path was smooth, but damp in places. Tulio stopped after a few minutes of walking, then crouched. He took out his knife and scraped the moss off the stone and dropped it down the shaft. He told himself that he didn’t hear it land because the soft moss would land silently.
“Maybe if I drop enough moss, it’ll cushion my landing if I fall,” Tulio muttered.
“Are you alright, Tulio?” Miguel called down.
“Just fine!” Tulio called back.
Tulio kept going. The path remained the same, sturdy and mostly clean.
All too soon, Tulio reached the end of the rope. He paused, then untied the rope and dropped it.
“I’m at the end of the rope!” Tulio called up. “It’s all clear so far, but keep waiting!”
“Okay!” came Miguel’s response.
Tulio paused after a bit. Nobody had been down this route in eight thousand years. How come it wasn’t more broken down or dusty?
Shrugging, Tulio kept walking. He wasn’t going to question a sturdy and clear path.
Tulio guessed he was near the bottom when the hand trailing the wall ran across grooves. He looked at the wall and found Atlantean runes. The only set of runes he recognized signified danger or a caution to turn back.
Tulio smiled a bit at the warning. It was a bit late for him.
Grooves appeared in the stone a few steps further. It was strange at first, but then Tulio realized the grooves made it easier to walk.
Soon after, the path stopped descending. Tulio walked along it, sighing with relief when the path straightened. Stalagmites jutted up beside the path. The path continued into another tunnel into the wall, much more broad, though there was still a bit of a drop alongside the path.
Tulio put his hands on his hips, satisfied, then turned. His shoulders slumped. Now he just had to go back up .
“How long have you known Tulio?”
Miguel glanced at Milo. “We met when we were both twelve.”
“I didn’t know that… guess I haven’t asked a lot about you two. How’d you meet?”
Milo tended to ask questions when he was nervous, Miguel had discovered. Probably because understanding something would distract him… and Miguel could use a distraction, too.
Since letting go of the rope, Tulio hadn’t said anything. Miguel had almost called out a couple times, but was afraid of startling Tulio and making him slip.
“Well?” Milo asked when the silence stretched on.
“We were both living on the streets,” Miguel explained. “Tulio had just gotten caught swiping an apple in the market. I did some fast talking, distracted the merchant, grabbed his arm and just ran.”
Miguel was startled to find he felt a little bad for giving Milo the well-practiced lie. While Miguel had saved Tulio from losing his hand for an apple, that had happened a month after they first met.
But the thing was, not even Miguel and Tulio discussed the first day they met. Ever.
“You lived on the streets?” Milo asked.
“We didn’t exactly meet up in the theaters, if that’s what you’re asking,” Miguel said with a slight laugh, shaking off the guilt. “Why do you think we’re so good at cons? It was gambling or swiping, unless we wanted to starve.” Miguel paused briefly. “We got by alright, though, the two of us. We didn’t get hungry very often, even if Tulio was terrible at cons or swiping in the beginning. He always chickened out at the last second and got caught.”
“Really?” Milo asked. “Tulio?”
“Yeah, Tulio.” Miguel chuckled, then realized what was about to follow. “Me, I was conning people as a baby.”
“You’re making that up,” Milo said with a grin.
“No, really! I never knew my parents. They left me in a trash heap when I was only a few days old. At least, that’s what old Juan told me,” Miguel said, fully honest about his past.
“Old Juan?”
“A trickster and a cheat,” Miguel said fondly. “ He took in kids and set them on the street corners begging for coins or food scraps to bring to him. If you were bright and quick with your hands and on your feet, he’d teach you some more tricks when you got older.”
“And I guess you were one of those kids,” Milo asked.
Miguel grinned. “That I was! But I was too good, and started palming the coins I was supposed to be handing over. Well, old Juan figured it out eventually and booted me out onto the street to take care of myself by the time I was nine. I spent some time traveling and such, stopping when I liked a place and moving on when I got bored.”
“You mean when people started figuring you out,” Milo said.
“Hey, now,” Miguel joked, “Don’t be figuring me out so easily. I gotta have a bit of an air of mystery.”
“Can’t do that when you keep talking.”
“Tulio!” Miguel yelped, spinning at his friend’s voice. “You’re back!”
“And the path is good,” Tulio said. “It’s a bit narrow in places, but Altivo should be able to make it. He can’t take the sled, though.”
Milo’s face fell. “But we can’t carry enough supplies without the sled.”
“And we’ll have it,” Tulio said. “But Altivo won’t be the one taking it down. We’ll have to figure out some way to get it down ourselves.”
“I’ll unhitch him,” Miguel said.
“And take off his harness,” Tulio said. “It would be just our luck if it caught on a stone or something halfway down.”
Miguel nodded and went to do as Tulio had suggested while Milo and Tulio kept planning.
“Let’s put the flour and beans into our packs to carry down,” Milo suggested. “ Put the clothes and rope into the sled.”
“Yeah, in case the sled decides to jump,” Tulio said drily. “At least we can collect the clothes from the stalagmites, but the flour and beans would be impossible.”
“Let’s fill canteens, then empty the water tank,” Milo said.
Tulio nodded. “The less weight we have to carry, the better.”
The three of them set to rearranging the supplies, putting anything that could survive being a bit battered into the sled. But then they ran into another problem.
“If Altivo can’t drag the sled, how are we supposed to?” Milo asked.
“ I have an idea,” Miguel said. “You’re not going to like it, though.”
“Take everything down ourselves?” Tulio guessed with a wince.
“Take it down ourselves,” Miguel confirmed.
“Well, the path is easy enough to walk,” Tulio said, sighing. “It might take all day, though.”
“I’d rather walk up and down a few times over risking losing any of our supplies,” Milo said, even though they all knew he had the hardest time walking.
“Well, the sooner we start, the sooner we’ll be done,” Miguel said.
“Take down Altivo first,” Tulio suggested. “There’s stalagmites down there to tie him to, and we won’t have to worry about him slipping while he’s up here alone.”
Miguel nodded. The three of them stuffed their packs, then Miguel took Altivo’s reins and led the wary horse to the shaft. Altivo took one look at the path and snorted, his ears going back.
“Oh, come on, Altivo,” Miguel soothed. “We’ve walked along more narrow paths on our way to El Dorado, you know. This will be easy!”
Altivo snorted and didn’t budge.
“Don’t you want to see Atlantis?” Miguel asked.
Altivo huffed out a horse-sized sigh.
“He’s a ruthless war horse, and he’s afraid of a few rocks,” Tulio commented drily.
Altivo tossed his head and walked off the ledge to the path. Miguel walked quickly in front of him.
“Woah, boy, take it easy,” Miguel soothed. “Don’t rush it. One hoof in front of the other.”
Altivo looked down the shaft. His ears went back, but he seemed determined to keep walking. Miguel kept pace with him, keeping up a stream of calming words. He fought his own tension as they slowly made their way down the winding path, moving painfully slowly.
Eventually, they made it to the bottom of the shaft without any problems besides Altivo balking a few more times. Altivo shook himself as soon as the path was wide enough to do so.
“Good boy, what a good boy,” Miguel praised him. “You did good. Take it easy now.”
Miguel led Altivo to a patch of moss and looped the reins over a stalagmite. He trusted Altivo wouldn’t wander further down the path alone, but wasn't so sure he wouldn’t try to follow once they left.
The trio returned to the top of the shaft. They moved just as carefully, but were able to go faster since Miguel didn’t have to coax Altivo into moving. They reached the top and refilled their packs. Miguel watched Milo glance at the remaining supplies and grimace.
“Another trip down and up,” Miguel said ruefully.
“Well, come on,” Tulio said, marching determinedly to the path. “The sooner we go, the sooner we can finish.”
“We know that. Just let us be dramatic first,” Miguel said as he followed.
“Oh, was that you being dramatic? I couldn’t tell,” Tulio said in mock confusion.
“If we weren’t walking on a razor’s edge right now,” Miguel said in mock warning.
“Guys, is this really the time?” Milo asked nervously.
“For the sake of our honor, the time is always right!” Miguel declared, his voice echoing quite dramatically around them.
“The cost of your honor might be slipping,” Tulio said. “Focus.”
“No, I’m not letting you change the topic so easily,” Miguel said. He took up a fencing stance. “En garde!”
Tulio glanced over his shoulder. “We don’t even have swords, Miguel.”
“Oh, you’re no fun,” Miguel sighed, lowering his hands.
“Walking along a path barely wide enough for a horse’s butt does that to me,” Tulio said. “Come on, hurry up.”
“Why did you use a fencing stance?” Milo asked as they continued downward.
“Didn’t we tell you?” Miguel asked, smiling at the memories. “We might fight with our words, but we do it with blades anytime we can.”
“I didn’t know you were swordsmen,” Milo said, intrigued. “How’d you learn about it?”
“Tulio taught me,” Miguel said. He focused on a slick bit of stone. “Most of it’s made up, though. Whatever looks good to the crowd.”
“Always putting on a show, eh?” Milo asked.
“Where else is the fun?” Miguel asked.
“Who taught you, Tulio?” Milo asked.
“Hey, how about we focus on the fun part of not slipping and falling?” Tulio insisted.
“Ah, you’re still no fun," Miguel said.
But Miguel focused on his steps. They made it to the bottom without incident.
“Can we stop for a break?” Milo asked, sounding sheepish.
Miguel nodded. Milo sat in clear relief, wiping his pale forehead. Tulio joined him, and Miguel went to check on Altivo. All of them were glad for the break. Despite his jokes, Miguel had been tense the entire time they traveled through the shaft. All it would take was a single misstep or brief distraction and… whamo!
Miguel rubbed Altivo’s ears until Tulio said it was time to get back up to the top. The day was more than half over, and all of them wanted their supplies down the shaft by nighttime.
They returned to the top of the shaft and stored the last of their supplies in their packs, then turned to the matter of getting the sled to the bottom.
“Too bad we don’t have enough rope,” Miguel said.
“I’ve got an idea,” Milo said. He winced. “Nobody will like this one, either. Unless we can carry down the sled by hand, we can lower it down, bit by bit.”
“What?” Tulio asked.
“We tie the rope to the sled,” Milo explained. “Two of us lower the sled as far as the rope will go. One of us goes down and pulls the sled onto the path while the two on the ropes walk down. We do that over and over until we reach the bottom.”
Tulio winced. “You’re right, I don’t like it.”
“The sled isn’t too heavy,” Miguel mused. “But I don’t think it would work on the path. The stone walls stick out too much.”
“Altivo had enough problems navigating some of the turns,” Milo said by way of agreement. “So? What do you think?”
“I think we’d better get moving before we realize how bad of an idea this is,” Tulio said. “Milo, you should lower the sled with one of us.”
Milo looked at his feet, as though they’d fault him for being the weakest.
“I’ll grab the sled from below,” Miguel volunteered. He smiled. “It sounds easier than lowering the sled.”
Tulio rolled his eyes, but nodded his agreement. Miguel was the strongest of them, so it would be easiest for him to pull the sled onto the path and hold it while the other two descended.
“Let’s do it,” Tulio said.
The trio took out the rope and found the best way to tie it to the sled with as little rope as possible while also being secure. They carried the sled to the shaft and laid it up against the wall.
“Call up when you’re about forty feet down,” Tulio said. “I don’t want to hold that sled for too long.”
“Got it!”
Miguel had walked up and down the shaft enough times to guess how far down he needed to walk. He called for the sled to be lowered, then put his hands on his hips when it stopped five feet above his head.
“Lower!” Miguel called up.
“We can’t!” Milo yelled back.
Miguel, already walking up the path again, didn’t answer. He reached the sled and pulled it closer, leaning it against the wall while Tulio and Milo came down the path.
The process was repeated eight more times before they finally reached the bottom. Miguel was only too glad to lay the sled down. When Tulio and Milo joined him at the bottom, they all looked at their stacks of supplies, then dropped their packs and collapsed on the ground.
Miguel stared up at the dim ceiling, suddenly aware of how much he hurt. He could feel an ache in every part of his body.
“Why does everything hurt?” Miguel grumbled.
Milo rocked his head over to look at him. “Because we’ve been walking for five days?”
“Walking has never hurt like this,” Miguel said.
“How about we make camp here for the night?” Tulio suggested.
“Agreed,” Miguel and Milo said at the same time.
Rourke sat with Helga on the truck tailgate in the headlights of the truck behind it. In front of them, camp was being set up. The crew called out to each other as stakes were struck into the ground and tents raised. Audrey was waist-deep in the engine of the digger, her voice echoing as she scolded Mole for running the machine too hard. Mole himself was halfway across the camp, busily inspecting the dirt.
Rourke glanced over at Helga. She was leaning over sideways, resting her head on one fist and her elbow on the side of the truck bed. She was scowling hard, looking just angry to most people who weren't used to her.
Rourke could tell she was trying to stay awake, though, having spent the last two days scouting for the expedition crew. If she stayed on the tailgate much longer, she was bound to doze off and fall.
“No sign of them, hm?” Rourke said.
“None,” Helga said in a low growl. “I haven’t remembered anything else in the last ten minutes, Rourke. There’s traces of a campfire occasionally and arrows on the walls, but that’s all. Now, if you’ll stop asking, Sweet set up my tent.”
“Dismissed,” Rourke said.
Helga dragged herself from the truck bed and tramped her way to her tent. Everyone gave her a wide berth.
Rourke scowled at their poor luck. Yes, Milo and his kidnappers had three days’ head start, but it didn’t appear they’d brought any vehicles. It was unlikely that anyone else was with them. With the creature standing guard, Rourke highly doubted their sub could have entered the crevasse more than once.
Rourke pushed himself to his feet and stormed off to his own tent, ignoring when everyone scattered in his wake.
Kida knelt on the path, worn smooth from centuries of feet. Her fingers brushed a narrow crack in the stone and followed it off the path. She leaned over, tracing the crack half her arm’s length.
Kida frowned. The crack was spreading. Once upon a time, the stone could have been repaired with the power of the crystal that hung around her neck. But now, so far from the Heart, the crystal’s power was dim and weak. Even when she held the crystal in her hand, it was cool to the touch.
“Princess Kida!”
Kida raised a hand in silent warning. The approaching scouts stopped and waited, though their feet scuffed impatiently.
Kida rose and pointed to the crack. “We’ll have to watch this crack. It’s spreading.”
Salus sighed at her side. “Another path. If this one becomes unsafe, we’ll have no way to reach the split paths on the upper walks.”
“We’ll use the lower,” Kida said.
Salus looked aside. He was an older warrior, and often preferred the upper walks, though no enemies stalked them. Well, the Colossus who guarded the split paths would try to take a bite from them, and Kida did prefer to have the space between them and the ground.
“Princess Kida,” said one of the scouts, Salus’ sister Sunzu.
“Yes?” Kida asked. “What is wrong?”
“Strangers,” Jaius said.
Kida startled. “Strangers? What are you talking about? Nobody can reach the gateway.”
Jaius removed his mask. Underneath, his eyes were wide and frightened. “Someone has.”
Kida glanced back the way they’d come. All scouting trips had been boring for years, but now, something had changed. How?
“How many? And where?” Kida asked.
“We found them just beyond the split paths,” Sunzu said, pointing back to the narrow tunnel from which they’d come. “Three men and two creatures.”
“What kind of creatures?” Kida asked.
Sunzu shook her head. “I don’t know. One is big and strong, but the other is small.”
Kida looked at Salus. She was technically the highest ranked of the gathered scouts, but she trusted her father’s captain to make the best call in this strange situation.
“We should investigate,” Salus said promptly. “To determine if they are a threat.”
Kida nodded her agreement. The old law came to her mind, that all intruders to the gateway were to be killed. But the law had been made years ago by her father, and they had never had the need to enforce it. Only because there had never been intruders since the city sank, but Kida wondered if they would have to enforce it now.
She hoped not, if she was being honest. She was curious about these strangers and where they had come from. Many of her people thought the world above had vanished in the Great Flood, that their city was all that was spared. Now, she could see proof that it wasn’t true!
“Lead us to them,” Kida said to Sunzu. “Jaius, would you rather wait here?”
Jaius quickly shook his head. Kida smiled. He wasn’t much younger than her, but it was only his fifth trip outside the city.
“Then let us go.”
They set off, Kida in front with Sunzu, and Salus in the back with a comforting hand on Jaius’ shoulders.
Notes:
Kida and the scouts! :D
I had so much fun with this chapter, getting all three parties moving and on their way to meet each other! (Plus the hinting at Miguel and Tulio's past. >:D)
Anyway, that's all for now, have a Merry Christmas everyone!
Chapter 9: Tears of the Kings
Notes:
Here's to a new year!
Forgot to mention this in the last chapter, but the Atlanteans are speaking English! Atlantean speech will be written in bold. Since it might not come up in the story to be explained, all Atlanteans speak Atlantean and English. Since the Great Flood, Atlanteans started shifting away from speaking Atlantean, symbolic of them trying to leave their surface lives behind. (The same sort of logic is used in how an entire civilization forgot how to read.) They primarily use English among each other, but will use Atlantean in more formal settings or, as you'll see in latter scenes, to keep others from understanding them.
This chapter has some of my favorite scenes. :D
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Beyond the shaft, the tunnel widened until they could barely see the walls by the light of their torches. The path became cobbled and marked with low walls. It was run down and collapsing in areas where bridges spanned dips in the ground, but remained fairly sturdy. Outside the pathway, the ground had the lava tube appearance. More stalagmites and stalactites appeared, some so big that they connected and formed a thick column from floor to ceiling. There were no more runes, but Milo was impressed by the pathway. Eight thousand years, and it was still intact!
Distracted with studying the Atlantean architecture, Milo didn’t realize the others had stopped until he bumped into Miguel. He looked past them, then blinked and went to Miguel’s side.
Milo swung his torchlight back-and-forth. The path split in two, each of them arcing to lead into the “eyes” of a giant statue carved into the wall.
“Looks like it’s crying,” Miguel commented after a moment.
Milo startled. “Oh, I saw this in the Journal!”
Milo opened the Journal and flipped to the page he’d bookmarked. At the bottom of the page was a sketch very similar to the statue in front of them. Beside the sketch was a warning about following the wrong path in the eyes of the ancient king. Milo had thought the warning was metaphorical the first time he read it, but considering the Leviathan had been literal, he wondered if the “Colossus” standing guard was something more real than the statue itself.
“Which path, Milo?” Tulio asked.
Milo hummed in thought as he rotated the Journal. Sometimes the Shepherd’s clues were obscure or angled around sketches. In this case, squeezed in between the sketched paths was instructions to go left.
“We go left,” Milo said confidently.
“Our left or his left?” Tulio asked.
Milo and Miguel exchanged confused looks.
“Who else is there?” Miguel asked.
“If I remember correctly, the warning said something about the eyes of the king, right?” Tulio asked.
Milo nodded.
“Well, suppose the Shepherd means to take the path that’s left if you’re looking from the king’s perspective?”
The three of them stared at the statue for a long minute.
“I don’t know,” Milo eventually said. He held up the Journal again, angling it to reread the instructions. “There isn’t anything to show… hey, wait a minute!”
The instructions were angled in such a way that Milo had to turn the Journal upside-down to read the entire thing. As such, the left path had become the right, and vice versa.
“I think you’re right,” Milo said. He showed the Journal to Tulio and Miguel. “See? To read the instructions, the Journal has to be upside-down, and now it almost looks like it’s from the perspective of the statue! We take the right path!”
“Right,” Miguel said.
Milo nodded. “Right.”
Miguel looked confused. “Right what?”
“What?” Milo asked.
Tulio stepped between them, putting a hand in either of their faces. “We take the right path.”
“Oh.” Miguel smiled. “Right.”
Altivo snorted and pushed past them all, heading down the right path, Ladron riding on his back.
“Let’s go,” Tulio said, looking amused despite his efforts to hide it. “Let’s keep walking.”
Milo couldn’t help feeling a bit nervous as they headed up the path. What if his and Tulio’s deduction was incorrect? Assuming the warning was as literal as the Leviathan, there was some creature waiting behind one of the statue’s eyes.
They reached the rim of the eye, then stepped through. Milo exhaled as they passed into another tunnel that took a sharp turn to the left. Nothing jumped out at them. They were safe.
A scream woke Milo.
He snapped upright, head whipping back-and-forth as the scream cut off as quickly as it had come. Altivo scrambled to his feet, and Milo rolled away from his hooves. Everything was pitch black as he tumbled against the packs, and he fumbled for his torch.
A torch lit up nearby. Milo stilled and squinted, trying to figure out what was wrong and who could have screamed.
“Tulio? Miguel?” Milo asked.
“We’re fine,” Miguel said, sounding too cheerful.
Milo squinted, then grabbed his glasses, grateful to have rolled right to his pack. He put them on and looked over at the others.
Tulio had his back to Milo, hunched over in his blanket. His body was heaving like he was about to be sick. Miguel was rubbing his back, watching Milo with uncharacteristic wariness. Altivo looked between them, appearing as baffled as Milo.
“What’s wrong?” Milo asked.
“Nothing’s wrong,” Miguel said, the cheer in his voice breaking. He offered a weak smile instead. “Just a bad dream.”
“Sounded like someone was attacked,” Milo said, rubbing his neck.
Miguel scowled at him. Confused, Milo raised his hands defensively.
“You’ve never seen someone have a nightmare before?” Tulio asked, turning slightly.
“Well, sure, but… are you alright?” Milo asked worriedly. Tulio looked a little… for lack of a better word, haunted .
“Everything’s fine,” Tulio said, his face saying otherwise. “Just… let my heart stop racing for a minute.”
Milo shifted uncomfortably. He’d dealt with nightmares before -didn’t everyone?- and wanted to help get the shell-shocked look off of Tulio’s face. The two Spaniards were trying to play off the situation, but Miguel couldn’t hide his worry. Tulio’s hand tightly gripped the blanket like he was afraid he’d be pulled away if he let go. There wasn’t any erasing of bad dreams and Tulio could hardly open the window for some fresh air, but what else-
“Did I tell you about moving pictures?” Milo asked abruptly.
He got twin looks of confusion in answer.
“It’s like a picture, but there’s a lot of them,” Milo tried to explain. “They move over each other, really fast, so it looks like the picture is moving.”
More blank looks. Even Altivo had joined.
“You’ve seen my camera,” Milo said. “I point the camera at things and it takes pictures.”
“How does it ‘take’ pictures?” Miguel asked. “I thought pictures were painted or sewn.”
“No, we’ve got pictures like… oh, hang on!”
Milo took out the picture of him and his grandfather from his pack. He carefully opened the back of the frame and took out the picture. He handed it to Miguel.
“Like this. It’s not painted,” Milo said.
Miguel looked curiously at the picture, then ran a finger down it. He passed it to Tulio, who studied it closely.
“How did you make that?” Miguel asked.
“I didn’t. A camera did. I don’t know how it works,” Milo admitted, “But there’s a technique that’s used where a bunch of pictures kind of like that one is taken and shown on a screen or wall. The pictures change, and they tell a story.”
His audience’s expressions didn’t change. Tulio turned fully to face him, revealing Ladron in his lap. He handed the picture back to Milo.
“Think of it like… oh, like a play in the theater,” Milo said as he replaced the picture in the frame.
Tulio perked up. “A play?”
“Yes, like that! But cameras can be used to take pictures of the play, then show it on a screen when there are no people on the stage.”
“But that means there’s no people,” Miguel said.
“Oh, there is! It’s just…” Milo groaned. “I shouldn’t have mentioned it. I don’t really know how it works, but I’ve seen a few moving pictures.”
“What are they about?” Tulio asked.
Milo opened his mouth, then closed it.
“Well? You’re the one who brought it up.”
“Comedies,” Milo said, ignoring the dramatic tragedies that usually played.
“Was that so hard?” Tulio asked.
Miguel elbowed him. Tulio ignored him, looking around.
“What time is it?” Tulio asked.
Milo found the clock. “Two in the morning. Do you think you can sleep now?”
“Too bad we don’t have a moving picture here,” Tulio murmured. His shoulders slumped in a sigh, but he just said, “I can sleep.”
“We can see a moving picture once we’re out of here,” Milo promised.
Milo waited while Tulio carved another arrow in the wall, then they moved onward. The tunnel gradually widened around them, until they were again walking through a broad cavern with a meandering path through it.
Milo gaped at a statue that was carved alongside the path. It was a leaping fish, arcing halfway over the path.
“How is this statue still intact?” Milo asked nobody in particular.
Tulio, leading the way with his torch, glanced back. He stopped without prompting and turned. Milo grinned his thanks, then climbed over the wall beside the path. He knelt at the base of the statue and turned on his torch.
The base was plain and rectangular. Having hoped to see some runes, Milo leaned back. He gazed up at the fish.
“I wonder why the Atlanteans were so obsessed with fish,” Milo mused aloud.
“They’re under the ocean,” Miguel said.
“Not always, if the myths are right,” Tulio pointed out. “But they were still in the middle of the ocean, Milo.”
“Yeah, yeah.” Milo took out his camera and snapped a picture of the statue. “But still.”
Tulio shrugged. They moved onward without speaking. Tulio hadn’t said much since waking up that morning. Even Miguel was quieter than normal.
Milo glanced back as the fish statue vanished into the darkness. They’d been traveling for six days towards Atlantis. Maybe they were rethinking going to Atlantis?
“Do you hear that?” Tulio asked.
Everyone stopped. Milo tilted his head, then he heard what Tulio was talking about.
“Water?” Milo said in question.
Tulio nodded and kept walking. Milo shrugged and followed.
Before long, Tulio’s torchlight lit up a stream of water flowing down the cavern wall. The path swerved around a small pool collecting against the wall. Milo traced the stream they’d been following to the pool, then another stream leading along the path in the other direction.
“This almost feels deliberate,” Milo said, gesturing to the two streams.
“I mean, they might’ve,” Miguel said. “Before Atlantis sunk, you know.”
Tulio hummed noncommittally. “Now’s a good time to wash. You both stink.”
Milo laughed. “Well, you don’t exactly smell like a bunch of flowers yourself.”
Tulio turned to look at him, clearly unimpressed. Milo’s smile froze, wondering if he’d insulted Tulio.
After a moment, Tulio’s lips lifted in a slight smile. “Could be worse, I guess. I could smell like rat.”
Ladron chittered scoldingly.
“He wasn’t talking about you,” Miguel said, picking up the armadillo.
“Nope, I was talking about you,” Tulio said drily. “You spoil Ladron too much, carrying him everywhere.”
“Says the man who cuddles with Ladron every night.”
“I’m blaming you,” Tulio said, then marched toward the pool. “Come on, let’s not take all day about this.”
Milo kicked off his boots and sat down to pull off his socks. He put a toe in the water, then stepped back with a shiver.
“You, too, Milo!” Tulio ordered. He was wading deeper into the pool, where it rose to his knees. “It’s not so bad once you get used to it.”
Milo made a face and edged further into the water. “ You m-mean when you g-get n-numb?”
Milo was shoved from behind. He tripped over the edge of the path and belly-flopped into the water. He shoved himself onto his elbows, whooping in shock of the icy water. He staggered to his feet.
“Miguel!” Milo yelled, wrapping his arms around himself. “Now my clothes are soaked, too!”
“Quickest way to wash your clothes is to wash yourself and your clothes at once!” Miguel said cheekily.
Milo looked at Tulio pleadingly. Tulio, shivering and knee-high in the water, nodded. The two of them charged!
Miguel realized his mistake of standing nearby to gloat too late. Milo grabbed one hand and Tulio took the other. Together, the two of them managed to get Miguel into the water, boots and all. Miguel yelped as the water passed over his boots, writhing so hard that Milo’s hands slipped. He lost his balance and toppled backward, again drenching himself. He sat up and spit out water, unable to stop the laughter that bubbled out of his chest.
Tulio got Miguel into a headlock, then let himself drop. Miguel staggered at the sudden weight around his shoulders, tripped, and finally joined them fully in the water.
“Woah!” Miguel wailed. He thrashed away from Tulio and leaped to his feet. “That’s cold!”
“You’ll get used to i-it,” Milo said through his shivers.
Miguel laughed and kicked water at Milo. Milo splashed him back, while Tulio waded out of splashing range.
Eventually, Milo had to leave the pool. His fingertips were turning blue and he’d long since lost the feeling in his toes. He staggered from the pool, wondering how Miguel and Tulio were still largely unaffected by the cold.
“First out makes the fire,” Tulio said.
Shivering so hard his teeth chattered, Milo just gave a thumbs up. He stumbled over to the sled, where Altivo was still harnessed and watching the men with an aloof look.
Milo grabbed a handful of moss and his box of matches. He struggled to pull out a single match, then had to sit and blow on his fingers until he could maneuver them well enough to light the match. He dropped the match into the moss, then held his hands over the flames until he could feel them again.
Milo built up the fire some more. Gradually, he stopped shivering. He used the rope from the sled and strung it up between two stalactites so it hung near the fire. He retrieved the bar of soap from his pack and, taking Miguel’s joking advice to heart, Milo scrubbed the clothes he was wearing without taking them off. As he went to retrieve all his other clothes -all of which did in fact smell exactly like he’d spent the last six days hiking in them- Miguel and Tulio had caught on and were retrieving their bars of soap and clothes.
For a bit, the cave was quiet aside from the splash of them washing their clothes. When they couldn’t stand the cold any longer, they huddled around the fire. Milo hurriedly grabbed their blankets, and the men scrambled to get their soaked clothes off and over the improvised clothesline.
Tulio’s blanket slipped as he turned from his clothes. Milo opened his mouth to ask Tulio to get the pan to boil some water, then lost his train of thought when he saw the scars.
Milo had an old scar on his wrist, from the day the boiler was being particularly cranky, so he knew what burn scars looked like. But he’d never seen one the size of the scar across the lower part of Tulio’s stomach. Another scar, long and thin, appeared from over Tulio’s right shoulder and arched down to end at his sternum.
Tulio yanked the blanket back into place. “What were you saying?”
“Um.” Milo blinked and tried to remember what he’d been about to say, but couldn’t. “I was just… Tulio, where’d you get those scars?”
Miguel, digging through their supplies, froze.
“What, these?” Tulio’s voice wasn’t nearly as nonchalant as his shrug. “They’re just from… a con that went, uh… let’s say, badly.”
“How b-” Milo broke off and shook his head. “Sorry, that’s none of my business, is it?”
“You have a right to be curious,” Tulio said, looking away.
“And you have a right to privacy,” Milo said, awkwardly clearing his throat. He quickly changed the topic, “Miguel, grab the pan so we can boil some water, could you?”
“Got it!”
The following silence was a bit awkward. Milo blamed himself for staring, and was relieved when both Spaniards started arguing over whether or not to fix some coco. Milo relaxed and got up to go to their supplies, thinking coco was a good idea.
Once everyone was warmed and dried, Miguel went and unharnessed Altivo, since they couldn’t get moving until their clothes were dry, anyway. By silent agreement, it was decided to camp beside the pool. Tulio and Milo raised the sled on its side and hung some of their clothes on it, closer to the fire, in the hopes of getting dry clothes to wear sooner rather than later.
Milo retrieved his torch and shined it around. He smiled at the strange surroundings, reveling in being on his way to Atlantis. He wished he knew how far away they were, though. Were they close, or would they have to turn around before they reached Atlantis?
“We’re past the halfway point, aren’t we?” Tulio asked.
Milo shrugged. “Maybe. We’re halfway through the instructions the Shepherd gave, but who knows how long each passage will take to pass through. It took three days for the first passage, but it’s barely been a day for each passage that’s followed. Are you…”
“I’m not calling it quits,” Tulio said, waving his hand. “I’m invested in this. But there better be gold out of this.”
Milo smiled. Tulio was serious about the gold, he knew. But he was sure Tulio enjoyed the search just as much as Milo and Miguel did.
“Woah, boy,” Miguel suddenly said.
Milo turned. Altivo was stamping, his ears swiveling.
“What’s wrong?” Milo asked.
“I don’t know,” Miguel said, stroking Altivo’s nose. “I think he heard something.”
Milo perked up. Despite the Leviathan, he was eager to see any other creatures on their way to Atlantis. Maybe the next one wouldn’t be so keen on trying to eat them.
Milo shone his light in the direction Altivo was staring. The torch lit up only an empty wall. He moved the light toward the ceiling. The wall was bare, though.
“Maybe it was the dripping water,” Milo said.
“Maybe. Easy, boy,” Miguel soothed. “Or an echo of our voices.”
Once Altivo was calmed, Miguel joined them around the fire. Everyone put on their warm, damp clothes and sat closer to the fire to get them to finish drying.
Milo’s eyes were drawn to the wall now in darkness. Altivo had been unfazed during the entire trip, aside from the narrow shaft. He didn’t seem like a horse that spooked easily. Milo suspected there had been something on the wall.
And from Miguel and Tulio’s glances, they felt the same way.
Rourke watched the oil tanker maneuver around the final turn of the zig-zagging shaft. The headlights lit up a rough arrow carved in the wall, the only indication that they were still heading in the same direction as Milo and his kidnappers.
“Rourke,” Helga’s voice came.
Rourke turned to her, wondering what could have brought her back from scouting ahead yet again.
“What is it?” Rourke asked.
“Another shaft,” Helga said. “Come on.”
Helga and Rourke walked along the tunnel to where the other trucks were making their way deeper into the stone. They hurried to the front truck, which stopped and let them in to ride.
After a bit of driving, the digger stopped, leading the other trucks to stop behind it. Rourke stepped out, wondering why Mole would have stopped. It was probably the shaft Helga had mentioned…
Rourke came alongside the digger, and realized just why Helga had turned back around.
“How deep is it?” Rourke asked.
“Roughly two hundred feet deep,” Helga said. “There’s a narrow path leading down the shaft, barely wide enough for a person.”
“And you’re sure they came this way?” Rourke asked, though there weren't exactly any other paths.
Helga nodded. “There’s another arrow at the bottom.”
Rourke turned to survey the line of vehicles. They could and had lowered their vehicles down shafts before. They always traveled with enough rope and chains to do it safely, though the longer the shaft, the greater the risk. The trucks would be relatively simple. Nobody would dare sneeze while the oil tanker was being lowered. The digger, though…
“What are the chances we’ll need the digger?” Rourke asked Helga.
Helga shrugged. “Who knows? But Mole won’t come with us if we leave the digger, and neither would Audrey. You know she doesn’t trust anyone else with that thing.”
Rourke rubbed his temple. Without the Journal and Milo to translate it, they were heading in blind. Anything Thaddeus had translated about the route to Atlantis, he’d taken with him to the grave.
“Send the digger down first,” Rourke decided. “It’ll take the whole fleet to support it, and there aren't enough chains to lower it from below.”
Helga nodded and turned to holler, “Get the chains unloaded and trucks turned around! Four trucks to a chain! Chain up and get out of the way, move it!”
Rourke sighed, then moved to help with the chains. It was going to be a long day.
The path was gone.
Miguel looked from the fractured ground to Milo with his nose buried in the Journal, then back. The ground looked like someone had taken a massive hammer to it. The stone was broken and sat in big, uneven chunks. Some of them leaned on others, and there were a few chunks stacked twenty feet high. Bits of the path were visible everywhere, pieces of cobblestone and wall littered across the ground.
“Maybe it was an earthquake,” Milo muttered, scanning the Journal page for the fifth time.
“What’s supposed to be here?” Miguel asked.
“The Hall of Kings,” Milo said.
“Hey,” Tulio said from where he was poking around the stones, “I think I found one of the kings.”
Miguel ran over with Milo. Tulio’s torchlight was illuminating a carving. It had once been the carving of a face, though half the carving had been broken off sometime before. What remained was a nose, eyes, and hair carved in straight lines and sharp corners.
“Murals!” Milo exclaimed. “I thought they would be statues, but they must have been murals carved directly on the floor!”
Milo dropped to his knees and examined the carving. Miguel shrugged at Tulio, then climbed a nearby chunk of stone. He took out his torch, but the light didn’t reach a wall in any direction.
“Do you know how we get out?” Miguel asked.
Milo, engrossed in the carving, didn’t answer. Tulio climbed up beside Miguel and peered into the darkness.
“I think the instructions were to follow the succession of kings across the hall,” Tulio said.
Miguel stared the mess in dismay.
“But they also say to go north,” Tulio went on.
Miguel took the compass out from his jacket and opened it. With some maneuvering, Miguel found that north was in the same direction of where they were heading. From his elevated spot, Miguel could even see a winding path heading northward.
“Not much of a puzzle, is it?” Miguel asked.
“I don’t think it’s a puzzle,” Tulio said. “Maybe it was how they recorded their history.”
Miguel shrugged. He didn’t pay too much attention to history. That had always been more of Tulio’s thing. But he did have to admit that having his story carved in stone in El Dorado had been immensely satisfying. Even if the people of El Dorado had the wrong idea about him having powers or anything god-related.
Miguel smiled as he wondered if the carvings were still there. If he, Tulio, and Altivo found some way to return to El Dorado…
“No,” Tulio said, climbing down.
“You don’t even know what I was thinking about!” Miguel protested.
“No, but I recognize that look,” Tulio said as he wandered away.
“You’re no fun!” Miguel called after him. When Tulio ignored him, Miguel slid back down to Milo. “Hey, are we going to keep going?”
Milo jerked upright. He grinned sheepishly and busied himself with putting away the Journal.
“Right, right, we’ve got an expedition to finish,” Milo said to himself, a bit harshly.
“We’ll be coming back,” Miguel assured him.
Milo visibly perked up and hurried onward. Miguel watched him go, somewhat regretting not letting Milo get lost in his studying the mural for a bit longer. He was so keen and eager to learn things about Atlantis.
Miguel walked slowly after Milo, who stood at the start of a path between chunks of stone. Altivo gave a huge sigh and walked delicately after them. As they continued, Milo stared at each of the murals that became visible. He slowed, but never stopped.
“Do you know who these kings are?” Miguel asked. Partially because he was curious and partially because he felt a bit guilty for making it seem like Milo shouldn’t study the murals.
“I don’t,” Milo said. He smiled. “Yet. There’s a history of Atlantis given in the Journal, but I haven’t had time to translate that part yet. I bet all these kings are listed there.”
“But I did translate earlier a bit of how their royal system worked. The kings ruled, obviously, but typically alongside their queen. The title passed down through the generations, unless the Heart chose someone else? I haven’t figured out the Heart yet, but however that worked, it was rare.”
Milo kept going, his words picking up speed as he continued, unchecked, “The queen held just as much power as the king and, historically, no major decisions could be made unless the king and queen agreed on it. There’s mention of a sort of group of advisors, chosen by both the king and queen, who assisted in all decision making.”
“And the heirs!” Milo exclaimed, fully in his element, “ They were raised by the king and queen as well! There was a sort of nanny, because you can’t expect, you know, a toddler to accompany the king and queen everywhere. Oh, side note, there was a royal court in Atlantis where the king and queen would announce their decisions and see visitors and held council with their advisors or whoever the time called for, but Atlantean royalty were known and expected to mingle with everyone else, the ‘commoners,’ you might say. The Atlanteans had no nobility, either.”
Tulio raised an eyebrow.
“Maybe the advisors and their families were a bit like nobility, but there wasn’t any record of them holding any sort of power. All in Atlantis were considered equal, even if their roles were vastly different.”
“Back to the heirs,” Milo continued, “Traditionally, the king or queenship passed onto the eldest child. All the children would spend more and more time in the royal courts as they aged, learning all they needed to know. It was common for younger children to remain close to the royal court, as advisors or soldiers. Even for the older children. If the heir was of age to make a decision and they didn’t want to become the next king or queen, the title could pass onto a younger child who did. If none of the royal children wanted the title, a new heir was chosen by the Heart. Which, again, I still don’t know about.”
Milo’s shoulders slumped as he wound down over his confusion about the Heart. He looked at Miguel and Tulio.
“I’m not boring you, am I?”
“Not at all!” Miguel said sincerely.
“No, it’s interesting,” Tulio said.
Milo beamed. Miguel smiled at how easily Milo was pleased. He wondered, really wondered, for the first time, why nobody had ever believed Milo about Atlantis.
“Have you figured out why Atlantis sank into the sea?” Tulio asked.
Milo shook his head. “I haven’t seen any record of it in the Journal so far. I’m hoping there will be answers in Atlantis, though the chances of finding anything after eight thousand years… well, it’s not too likely, but there may be something. Depending on how quickly Atlantis sank, maybe someone made a record and sealed it somewhere safe. Or there were early signs about Atlantis, something the people of the city would have seen but not told anyone about, it would be recorded on their walls, if the murals and writings we’ve seen so far are any indication!”
“Atlanteans did like to write things in stone, it looks like,” Tulio said, gesturing to another broken mural they were passing.
Kida stood on a high path over the shattered Hall of Kings, gazing down at the lights below. Her own light was hidden, tucked away under her wrappings, to avoid giving herself away. She followed the whisper-thin path by touch, eyes on the lights below.
There was no doubt that the strangers were heading toward Atlantis, but there was no reason as to how they’d gotten down there in the first place or what they wanted to do when they reached Atlantis.
Kida thought again of the rules about outsiders. Once, the strangers would be dead by now. But now, Kida was too curious. And hopeful that, maybe, these strangers could mark a change for Atlantis. A good change, maybe one where she could stand again under the sun she’d nearly forgotten.
A light scuff of stone brought Kida’s head around. A slight glow appeared where the upper path slid into stone. Kida recognized the mask’s eye markings as Jaius’ and went to join him.
“Salus and Sunzu have returned,” Jaius said.
He sounded more nervous than ever, and Kida knew she’d made the correct decision by having him stay with her while the elder Atlanteans went to see if they could find clues as to how the strangers had come.
Kida pulled her crystal free and nodded for Jaius to lead. He turned and walked along the path, taking the one that led deeper into the stone, where their lights and voices would be hidden.
Salus and Sunzu were sitting when Kida approached, but quickly stood. Kida stiffened at the clear tension in their shoulders.
“I don’t know how they got inside,” Salus reported, “But there are many more strangers headed this way as well. At least forty of them, and they bring strange vehicles.”
Kida mulled over the new information. “Are they dangerous, do you think?”
“I don’t know, but they don’t act like the first three strangers,” Salus said. “The three are quiet and slow, and leave almost no trace behind. The only destruction they leave behind are the arrows.”
Kida nodded. The scouts were assuming it was so they wouldn’t get lost.
“But these other strangers,” Sunzu took over, “They’re loud and bright. Their lights fill the tunnels and caverns. They break statues and pillars in their way with a vehicle as big as a house!”
“If they have big vehicles, they might not have any choice,” Kida said, trying to give the strangers the benefit of the doubt.
Sunzu shook her head. “They leave their trash behind, too. Old food and broken parts of their machines. And tools, I think.”
Sunzu held something out. It did appear to be a tool, made of metal so rare in Atlantis. It was a flat-ish rod that widened and curved at the end to create a half circle.
Kida reached out and took the tool. Something black and slick covered the tool. Kida’s nose crinkled. It didn’t smell natural.
“All their machines smell like that,” Sunzu said. “There’s a liquid they seem to use to power their machines.”
“How close did you get to them?” Kida asked sternly.
“We kept our distance,” Sunzu assured her. “We watched them put something into their machines. Once, some of the liquid spilled, so Salus and I waited until they were far ahead and investigated the liquid.”
Sunzu and Salus’ screwed up faces told Kida all she needed to know about the liquid.
Kida’s hand went to her crystal. Once, the crystals could be used to power their own vehicles. But the method had been lost in the early years of pain and forgetting. But Kida did remember the Atlanteans were the only people who could harness the power of the crystals.
“Not everyone has the magic of the crystals to power things,” Kida said in reminder. “These strangers cannot help it if their machines are loud and smelly.”
Sunzu nodded, but Salus didn’t look overly convinced.
“Come,” Kida said, “We’ll follow the three strangers for now.”
The trail had split.
Audrey stood alongside the rest of the crew, glancing between the two paths. Helga and the other scouts had stopped at the fork in the path, and had been looking for some sign when the rest of the envoy had shown up.
“Nothing,” Helga reported. “There’s an arrow pointing backward where the paths split, but all that tells us is that they went this way.”
Vinny shrugged and said through the match in his mouth, “Have you checked where the paths go into the wall?”
Helga shook her head. “We were about to.”
“Let’s just try the left,” Rourke said, impatiently waving Mole forward. “If there’s no arrows after five miles, we turn around and try the right.”
“Alright, let’s go, move it!” Helga called to the soldiers and sailors in the trucks. “Mole, get that digger moving!”
“I thought we would be digging!” Mole yelled down. His thoughts on the lack of digging had become increasingly frequent as the days passed.
Helga gestured for him to get moving. Grumbling, Mole yanked the digger into gear with a screech of gears.
Audrey broke away from the crew and ran to the digger. She leaped and caught the handrail, then climbed into the cab.
“Mole!” Audrey snapped.
Mole shied away, claiming, “It was an accident!”
“Sure,” Audrey retorted. “If you keep up with these ‘accidents,’ you’re going to be down a digger, because there’s no spare gears big enough in any of the trucks to fix the digger if you keep grinding them, understand?”
Mole grumbled. He drove the digger forward with exaggerated caution. Audrey rolled her eyes, then sat back and kicked her feet up on the dashboard. As long as Mole was going to be in a mood, she’d stay in the cab to make sure he didn’t completely ruin his digger.
The digger rolled forward, taking the left path. Audrey popped her gum and absently wondered when they were going to catch up with Milo and his kidnappers. Then, how much further was Atlantis? She was ready to be home and paid. Already, this job was taking longer than half the expeditions she’d been on in the past.
Audrey was yanked from her thoughts by a loud screech, echoed by a shriek from Mole. Audrey looked sharply up.
The path was blocked by some sort of giant bug. As in, three-times-the-size-of-the-digger-giant. It’s too-many legs reached for the digger as it ground to a halt. Its rounded head with pincers the size of a person swooped down and grabbed onto the digger’s drill.
Audrey couldn’t hold back a slight scream as the bug lifted the digger, then dropped it. The impact rattled her to the floor, and she bit her tongue when her head bounced off the seat.
Mole yanked on the gearshift. Gears shrieked, then the digger lurched backward. The creature stretched forward, pincers reaching. Mole’s foot hit the throttle, then the digger jerked to a halt with a loud crash.
Realizing what had happened, Audrey rolled to the side. Her feet dropped out of the digger, and she only grabbed the railing to slow her descent to the ground. She kicked off and landed hard, but ignored the jolt to her knees as she ran toward the back of the digger.
Vinny and Sweet, the former driving the truck closest to the digger, gave Audrey a confused look. Audrey didn’t give him a chance to speak.
“Back up!” Audrey yelled. She waved her hands at the other trucks. “ Back up! ”
The creature, apparently deciding the digger didn’t taste good, pulled itself alongside the digger. Everyone caught sight of it at the same time, as all the trucks jerked into reverse. More than a few bumpers and tailgates collided, and Audrey winced at the sound of smashing metal.
“Audrey!” Sweet yelled. He was waving at Audrey. “Get in here!”
Audrey glanced back, then darted forward, barely dodging the digger backing up. “Mole!”
“Get out of the way!” Mole shouted back.
The digger and Vinney’s truck collided. Sweet reached out, grabbing Audrey once she was close enough. Audrey half-crawled and was half-thrown over Sweet, colliding with Vinny.
“You okay?” Sweet asked.
“I’m fine,” Audrey said to Sweet. Then, to Vinny, “Get out of here!”
“I’m going, I’m going,” Vinny said.
Luckily the creature didn’t seem keen on leaving the cave it was guarding. The vehicles retreated back to the fork, then stopped.
Audrey didn’t move at first. Neither did anyone else. Eventually, Rourke appeared beside the passenger side door.
“Another creature guarding the way to Atlantis?” Sweet asked.
Rourke shrugged with an irritated sigh. “Your guess is as good as mine. What do you think? Plow past this thing or try the right path?”
“Well, I wouldn’t want to take the wrong path,” Vinny said, straight-faced.
Audrey groaned and elbowed him.
“I’m not sure even the digger could get past that thing,” Sweet said. “I say we try the right path first. If there’s no creature, we look for arrows. If there’s no arrows, we figure out what to do about the creature.”
“Anyone up for a little bug soup?” Vinny asked, pulling a small bomb with a clock wired to it from under his jacket.
“Vinny, what did I say about explosives while you’re driving?!” Audrey demanded.
“Hey, I’m just carrying it,” Vinny said.
“Yeah, but one big bump and we’re all carrying you ,” Audrey said.
Vinny made a face at the visual, but he deserved it. Audrey took the bomb and climbed over the seat to stash it in the coils of chains in the very back of the truck. The bomb was small enough that even if it did explode by accident, all it would do was destroy some chains.
The digger inched up the rightmost path. Nothing came out to attack them, and the envoy crept into the tunnel.
A few minutes in, Sweet suddenly said, “Look!”
Audrey turned. He was pointing to an arrow in the rocks. She slumped in relief. They were heading the right way.
“Would you look at the size of this thing?!”
Milo gaped up at the massive pillar. Their combined torches barely illuminated the top of the cavern. The pillar nearly touched the roof, and Milo could only estimate its size.
“It’s got to be half a mile high, at least!” Milo put his hands on the pillar, feeling the detailed etching all across the surface. “It had to have taken hundreds -no, thousands- of years to carve this thing!”
“What’s it for?” Miguel asked.
Milo shrugged, happily baffled. It was nothing like the statues or murals they’d passed through the previous day.
“Maybe a marker,” Milo suggested. He waved the Journal. “We’re getting close to Atlantis. This could have been a way to let travelers know they were a day away or something.”
Milo walked around the pillar. It was wider than a truck, and the etching continued all the way around it. As far as Milo could tell, the etching continued all the way to the top!
“How did they get all the way up there?” Miguel asked, following Milo’s gaze. “Rope and ladders?”
“Atlanteans had flying vehicles, remember?” Tulio answered.
“ I remember Milo said it could be possible,” Miguel said. “ But, how?”
Milo shrugged. “That’s what I want to find out. Hey, can you hold my torch a second?”
Miguel took the torch. Milo pulled out the camera and took pictures of the pillar from various angles. Once he was done, he took a moment to just stare up at the marvel.
Milo could have studied the pillar all day, and he got the sense that Miguel and Tulio felt the same, even if there wasn’t any gold involved. But if he was right about it being a marker and the Journal clues getting close to the end, then they didn’t have much further to go.
“Come on,” Milo said, smiling. “Let’s keep going.”
The path passed beside the pillar before apparently vanishing into the ground. Tulio’s torchlight found where the path reappeared twenty feet below.
Miguel unharnessed Altivo and left the horse to pick his way down the steep wall. The three of them lowered the sled carefully with ropes.
The drop turned out to be a short chasm roughly a half mile across. Milo couldn’t tell if the ground had collapsed, or if the path had intentionally been made to drop into the chasm.
Whatever the reason, it didn’t slow them for long. Finding the path across the chasm clear and level once again, Altivo was harnessed back to the sled and they pushed onward.
One day later…
Audrey looked at the path, then leaned past the edge of the chasm. It wasn’t a far drop and the chasm was relatively narrow, but it would take all day to get the vehicles across!
Beside her, Rourke groaned under his breath.
“Hey,” Vinny said, appearing at their sides like magic, “I know how we can get across.”
“Chains and a lot of time,” Audrey said with a grumble.
“I mean, that’s one way.” Vinny gave a dangerous looking grin as he held up a piece of dynamite. “But I’ve got another one.”
“What are they doing?” Jaius asked in an undertone.
“I don’t know. Be still,” Kida ordered gently when Jaius shifted again.
Kida watched the stranger tie red sticks together and put them at the base of the Marker. Everyone seemed to be giving him a lot of space, going so far as to back their vehicles away. Their caution made Kida wary. What were they up to?
When the stranger had put the sticks all around the base, he ran a rope of some kind from the sticks to a box a short distance from the Marker. He knelt beside it, and the strangers backed further away.
“Get down!” Kida hissed, shoving Jaius behind a boulder.
Boom!
The explosion rattled Kida’s teeth and made her ears roar. A muffled thud came to Kida’s ears. She wretched her head out of cover.
The Marker was fallen! The stranger with the red sticks stood in front of where the Marker had fallen over the chasm, arms spread wide in pride. Behind him, the other strangers cheered.
“What…” Jaius gasped. “What did they do?”
“They made a way for their flightless vehicles to pass,” Kida said.
It was a clever solution and Kida knew getting the Marker to fall so perfectly would have been difficult, but… but did these strangers have no respect for the histories and works of the people who had come before them?
Kida shook her head. They couldn’t, and she didn’t understand. Maybe her people had left the surface for so long that people no longer cared about what they had done.
Confused and disheartened, Kida took Jaius’ arm and led him away.
Altivo wasn’t budging. Neither was Miguel.
“I’m telling you, I heard an explosion back there,” Miguel insisted.
“It was probably some falling rocks,” Milo suggested, then realized what that potentially meant. “I hope none of the path is missing now.”
Altivo’s nostrils flared. He stared intently back the way they’d come, hooves splayed to resist Tulio tugging on his reins.
“Come on,” Tulio grunted. “Whatever it was, we’ll figure it out on the way back. But we’re losing daylight speculating about it.”
“There’s no daylight down here,” Miguel said cheekily.
Tulio opened his mouth to retort, but Altivo suddenly swung his head forward. Tulio stumbled and fell backward on his butt. Altivo flicked his ears, staring down at him.
Tulio stood, pushing Altivo’s head away. “Dumb war horse. Come on, let’s keep going.”
Altivo’s head darted down. Tulio jumped away, twisting and hands going down.
“Your horse bit me in the butt!” Tulio yelled at Miguel.
“Well, don’t insult him,” Miguel said, as if it was perfectly logical.
Tulio groaned and looked at Milo, who quickly schooled his features. Tulio rolled his eyes.
“ I see the horse is the favorite here,” Tulio said with an over-the-top sniff.
“No-” Milo started.
“He is,” Miguel interrupted.
“Oh, go on,” Tulio said, waving a hand at Altivo. “Favorites go first.”
Altivo looked at the dark tunnel ahead, then back at Tulio. For a second, he looked like he would back down. But then he raised his head haughtily and walked calmly away. Miguel watched him for a moment, then took out his torch and lit the way.
Milo looked at Tulio, unsurprised to find him wearing a smug grin.
Notes:
They're getting so close to meeting each other~
Audrey, Mole, and the digger against the bug was honestly one of my favorite scenes to write.
Also, I've had to Google so much random info for this story, but one of my favorite searches was to figure out how long a truck was because I didn't have a truck and tape measure handy. XDAnd, yep, I gave Tulio scars! I intentionally positioned the scars so they would've been covered by Tulio's clothes while they were playing gods in El Dorado and the slightly simplistic style of the movie means no scars are drawn in. :D
Chapter 10: Milo is Rescued (Against His Will)
Notes:
Thank you, my amazing readers, for your patience. I'm excited to announce that Trail We Blaze is nearly complete! All I have left is a handful of edits, a closing scene for the final chapter, then to wrap up the epilogue! So, starting the 24th of this month, I'll be starting weekly updates!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
“So this is what it meant by still waters,” Tulio said slowly.
“Huh, I really thought it would be an underground lake,” Milo said.
“Snow?!” was all Miguel had to say on the topic.
“Where’s it coming from?” Tulio asked Milo, ignoring Miguel’s dramatics.
“I don’t know,” Milo said, looking around. “There has to be some explanation…”
“How long is this going to take to cross?” Tulio asked.
Milo startled, clearly having forgotten that detail of the trip. “Oh… I don’t know.”
“Can we make a fire while we think?” Miguel asked, shivering.
Tulio and Milo agreed, and a fire was quickly built. They sat around the flames, all staring at the snowy passage ahead.
“The Shepherd made it across,” Tulio said after a moment.
“Yeah, and he’s very vague on the details of how,” Milo said.
“Why are you even arguing against it?” Tulio asked.
Milo opened his mouth, then hesitated. “I don’t know.”
Tulio looked at the snow across the passage, then said, “One of us could take Altivo and see how far it is to the other end.”
Altivo snorted.
“Or we could wander lost out there,” Tulio said.
Altivo whuffled and looked away.
“Thought so.”
“But, what if something happens to whoever rides out there?” Milo asked.
“ What’s going to happen?” Tulio asked. “The Journal doesn’t mention anything about dangers out there, just that we have to cross the still waters.”
“Okay, true, but there’s still ice and snow out there. What if Altivo slips?” Milo asked.
“Altivo? Never!” Miguel said. “He’s as nimble as a mountain goat! I’ve seen him climb mountains and cross chasms on the top of stone columns no bigger than your two hands put together!”
“See?” Tulio said. “We’ll be fine.”
“We?” Miguel looked quickly at him. “Altivo’s my horse. You always say so.”
“Yeah, but we both know I’m the better rider. The two of us will get across the snow and back in half the time it would take you.”
Miguel looked at Tulio, then the snow. “But maybe we shouldn’t separate.”
“We don’t know how long it will take to cross,” Tulio said. “What if we start, then get too far out before realizing we have to turn back? No, Altivo and I will do it. If it seems too far, we’ll turn back around.”
“When do you want to start?” Milo asked, looking resigned.
Tulio looked at Altivo. “Altivo needs to be rested. We’ll go in the morning.”
The following morning, Tulio packed food for him and Altivo for the day. Milo made sure he had extra batteries, and Miguel got Altivo ready. Tulio put on the thickest shirt he’d packed, then the jacket over it and zipped it all the way up.
“Wish we’d thought to bring hats, ” Milo said as Tulio finished getting ready.
“I’ll be fine,” Tulio said.
Miguel solemnly led Altivo over. Tulio took the horse’s reins. He was about to mount, but Miguel stopped him.
“Take the compass,” Miguel said. “Milo said that a path going straight north should bring you to the other end.”
Tulio accepted the compass and put it around his neck. “Thanks.”
“I still think we shouldn’t be separated,” Miguel said.
“It’ll be fine,” Tulio said. He grinned. “If I see gold on the way, I’ll leave some for you.”
“So that’s your motivatio n?” Miguel asked, grinning weakly.
“It got me down here in the first place, didn’t it?” Tulio asked. “Come on, Altivo.”
Altivo gave a mighty sigh, but seemed to resign himself to the trip. Tulio climbed onto his back, then lightly kicked back his heels. Altivo broke into a trot onto the snowy landscape.
The snow wasn’t as bad as it had initially looked. It was only a light covering, thin enough that Tulio could easily see obstacles and turn Altivo away from them. Even the low walls of the path remained visible, keeping Tulio on course.
The cold was biting, though. Tulio turned up the collar of his jacket and hunched down as much as he could. The tips of his ears were like ice.
Tulio reached up with his torch hand to touch his ears. His ears were numb, so he couldn’t feel his fingers on them.
At the same time, Tulio found that his hair was frozen stiff. He looked up at the dusting of snow drifting from the unseen ceiling. He really wondered how that worked, but tried to not get distracted.
Tulio shook his head in an attempt to get off the snow piling into his hair, but only succeeded in dropping snow down the back of his jacket. He grunted and shifted, trying to get the snow to fall out, but couldn’t take his light off the path for long.
Altivo’s ears pricked. He tried to speed up, but Tulio kept him in check. While he was confident in Altivo’s stability, he didn’t want to take any unnecessary risks.
Tulio took out the compass. Even with the path, Tulio checked to make sure he was heading north at all times, in case the path ended or they started following a false track by accident.
For the most part, though, Tulio was alone with his thoughts. It didn’t happen often, not with a chattery friend like Miguel. He found himself wondering if there really was gold in Atlantis. If there was treasure of any kind, he wasn’t letting it go this time. He and Miguel needed gold if they wanted to find a place to live in this strange time.
Not for the first time, Tulio wondered how they’d gotten to the strange time. Magic was the obvious answer, but why the four of them, and why to this time? And was there a way to go back?
Tulio didn’t have any answers, though, except maybe whatever spirits controlled the magic really hated Miguel and himself. Or wanted to give them a second chance at the treasure.
Tulio scoffed. “Whatever the reason, we’re stuck here for now.” He squinted. “The other side had better be soon. We can’t keep going that much longer before it’s time to turn around.”
Altivo snorted in agreement and again tried to speed up. This time, Tulio let him, trusting Altivo to choose his footing and keeping his torchlight on the path. Sometimes it was best to just trust the horse.
Minutes ticked by. Altivo alternated between a trot and canter, depending on how rough the path was. Tulio kept his torchlight on the path, but turned his head when the occasional stone rose up from the snow. Some appeared to have fallen from the ceiling, and others were carved animals Tulio didn’t recognize.
Tulio’s teeth clattered together. A breeze had kicked up from the same nowhere, dumping snow. Tulio huddled in the jacket.
“There’s no way we can cross this with the sled and on foot,” Tulio muttered. “What do you think, Altivo?”
Altivo’s ears flicked back.
“Great, I’m talking to the horse,” Tulio said. “I wonder if the hypothermia’s set in already.”
Altivo snorted and broke into another canter.
“Okay, just a bit longer,” Tulio said.
He was keenly aware that if he misjudged his and Altivo’s abilities and turned back too late, they’d die. But if the other side didn’t show up soon, he was going to have to admit that they couldn’t cross the snow to continue the journey, not unless there was some way to keep warm for the whole trip.
“Altivo,” Tulio sighed, “I think-”
Altivo squealed, then skidded to a halt. Tulio slid forward, then lifted his torchlight in shock.
The dark passage of another tunnel greeted him. He stared in disbelief, then whooped happily. Altivo squealed and trotted out of the snow and into the tunnel.
The air noticeably warmed as they left the snow. Tulio slid off Altivo and led him a bit deeper into the tunnel. He noticed moss growing on the wall where the drifting snow had melted and ran down the corner of the tunnel.
“Eat up, Altivo,” Tulio said.
Altivo eagerly did so. Tulio took off his pack and set it down, then rubbed the ice and dampness from Altivo’s hide with a handful of moss. He drank the last of his water and set the canteen under a persistent drip of the ceiling. He didn’t have a pot to boil the water, but didn’t think it would make much difference.
Tulio took out the moss he’d packed in preparation of him and Altivo eating out in the snow. He piled it up. The matches had remained in his pack, and he quickly lit a fire. He sighed in relief as the small flames thawed out his fingers and face.
Once he could feel things again, Tulio stood up. Altivo had finished eating, and he moved to the mouth of the cave, eager to get back to camp.
“Let’s go,” Tulio said, mounting. Then, because Miguel wasn’t around. “Let’s follow our trail back.”
Tulio grinned to himself, then was almost tossed from Altivo’s back when the horse leaped forward.
The digger stopped unexpectedly. Rourke leaned out the window to see if he could see why, but nothing was in the way.
Then Helga and the scouts came around the side of the digger. Rourke waited impatiently for Helga to walk up beside the truck.
“We found them,” Helga said in clear satisfaction.
Rouke straightened. “What?”
“The tunnel leads to a cavern of snow, and they’re camped right outside it.”
Rourke tried to puzzle out the snow part when they were hundreds of feet underground and underwater, then pushed the question aside for the moment.
“How many of them are there?” Rourke asked.
Helga shrugged. “One, from the looks of it. There could be others nearby, though.”
Rourke nodded slowly. “Could be Vinny’s explosion yesterday tipped them off that they were being followed.”
“Hey,” Vinny said as he joined them with Audrey in time to hear the comment, “How else were we going to get across?”
“What’s done is done,” Sweet stepped in. “Did you see Milo?”
Helga nodded. “He was tending a fire while the guard patrolled the camp.”
“We’ll go in on foot,” Rourke said. “Observe from a distance and figure out how many kidnappers we’re dealing with. What kind of weapon was the guard holding?”
“He didn’t have any,” Helga said. “None that I saw, at least.”
“Okay, Helga, you take care of the guard once we’re all in position,” Rourke said, as Helga was the most skilled of them in hand-to-hand combat. “We’ll figure out the best way to get Milo to safety once we get there.”
“Hold up,” Sweet said. “Was Milo being threatened?”
“What part of ‘guard’ didn’t make sense to you?” Helga asked.
Sweet shrugged. “I’m just saying. We’ve never had any evidence that Milo was kidnapped, now have we?”
“Besides him leaving with no notice and no funds?” Rourke asked.
Sweet looked at him, then the others. He shrugged again. “Alright. I’ll get Milo when it’s time. He might be hurt, you know.”
Rourke wasn’t particularly convinced by the mischievous glint in Sweet’s eyes, but he nodded in agreement. From what they’d learned about Milo, he didn’t have any experience in combat. Keeping the doctor close to him was the best idea.
“Miguel, would you stop pacing for a bit?” Milo pleaded. All the pacing was making him even more nervous.
“I can’t help it,” Miguel said without slowing. “I’m worried. How long has it been?”
“Two minutes longer than the last time you asked.” Milo picked up the clock. “Eight hours.”
“Too long. It’s been too long,” Miguel said. “I’m going to go look for him.”
“Miguel,” Milo said, “Tulio will be careful. For all we know, he reached the other end. Maybe he had to stop and warm up before he returned. Man, would a radio be handy right about now.”
Miguel didn’t comment. He kept pacing in a large circle around the camp. He had Ladron in his arms and was stroking the armadillo with a speed bordering on frantic.
Milo looked back at the snow, straining to see a light from Tulio. He regretted not having some sort of way to signal him. If only he’d brought some kind of gun flare!
Stones clattered, making Milo perk up right before he froze. He turned in the opposite direction of the snow. Aside from Miguel’s pacing form, nothing moved in the shadows cast by the fire.
Milo sighed and poked at the fire. He worriedly rubbed his forehead. His anxiety and fear was building with every minute that Tulio was missing. Had he made it across? Was he on his way back now, or was it simply too cold? Was he or Altivo hurt in some way? Or, worse, what if Tulio had gotten lost or Milo had misinterpreted the instructions?
Milo fretted as he put more moss on the fire.
“You seeing that?” Tulio asked Altivo, hoping he wasn’t imagining things.
Altivo’s ears pricked and his head bobbed.
Ahead, from behind a pile of boulders that had rolled over the path at some point, was a dim glow.
“I hope that’s the camp and not some new creature wanting to eat us,” Tulio muttered. “Come on, boy.”
Instead, Altivo stopped.
“Altivo? Come on, camp’s right over there and you’ve got to be as cold as I am,” Tulio complained.
Altivo snorted and scraped the ground with a hoof. Tulio slid down and looked Altivo up and down. He was quivering and his hide was shiny with flecks of ice, but he wasn’t moving for the warmth of camp. His ears were pricked toward camp, with his legs spread wide like he was ready to charge.
Tulio reflexively stiffened. He looked again at the light, then went and climbed up the boulders, wincing at the snow against his hands. They were already nearly numb without any help.
“If you’re imagining things,” Tulio told Altivo, “I’m leaving you behind.”
Tulio reached the top of the boulder. The light was in fact the fire. Milo was hunched over it, and Miguel was at the edge of the light, pacing.
“There’s camp,” Tulio muttered. “What’s up with…”
At the edge of the light, opposite of the camp from Miguel, something moved. Tulio stared at it, wide-eyed, as something moved closer. The shadows were too dense for him to see what it was, but the thing was moving with caution and looked hunched over. Whatever it was, it had to be trouble!
Tulio slid down the boulder and grabbed Altivo’s reins. “Okay, you were right, there’s something there.”
Altivo proudly lifted his head.
“Yeah, yeah, good boy,” Tulio said, rubbing Altivo’s nose absently while he thought. “ We’ve got the advantage of surprise, but we’ll have to be fast.”
Tulio took Altivo’s reins and turned the horse to go around the boulders. He edged Altivo -who was very willing now that Tulio was on the same page as him- to the edge of the boulder, then he paused again.
Tulio peeped around the boulder. If he wanted to maintain his surprise, he couldn’t use the torch once they were around the boulder. And they’d have to move fast.
Tulio mounted Altivo. “Well, here goes nothing.”
Milo heard a brief scuffling, then a sudden shout.
“Milo, look out!”
Milo jumped at Tulio’s voice, shocked to find Altivo galloping into the firelight. Instinctively, Milo looked behind them, but there wasn’t anything. He backed away, twisting when Altivo galloped by. As they passed, Tulio flung himself off Altivo’s back…
And right into a huge man standing right behind Milo?!
The dark-skinned man was twice Tulio’s size, but surprise and Altivo’s speed was in Tulio’s favor. Both men went down, Tulio tumbling off to the side with a pained wheeze.
“Bad idea,” Tulio gasped. He staggered to his feet and sucked in a breath and yelled, “Miguel!”
Another shout came from the shadows, then a teenage girl ran into the light, swinging a monkey wrench that Tulio barely ducked. He scrambled away, but the dark-skinned man grabbed his jacket before he could get far. Tulio spun, swinging his fist, but the man, with no apparent effort, lifted Tulio into the air by the back of his jacket. Tulio flailed like a cat.
Altivo screamed, and Milo whipped toward the noise. The horse barreled through a trio of men wearing some sort of mask -where those gas masks?!
“Milo,” said the dark-skinned man, “We’re here for you!”
“Yeah, you’re safe now!” said the girl who was still wielding a monkey wrench!
“Milo!” Tulio yelled, “Get onto Altivo!”
Recognizing he couldn’t defend himself -not that either of the strangers were advancing on him- Milo flailed his arms in frustration. “What about you?! I’m not leaving you to these… these… well, whoever they are!”
The dark-skinned man looked at the girl, utterly ignoring Tulio still struggling. “Is that Spanish?”
“Oy, no wonder he doesn’t get us,” the girl muttered.
“No, I-” Milo flailed his arms again, then exclaimed in English, “I don’t know who you are, but put my friend down!”
For some reason, the man looked smug as he told the girl, “Told you.”
Tulio’s gaze suddenly fixed on something behind Milo. “Miguel!”
Milo spun. Miguel was flat on his face, pinned down by a woman wearing a dangerous scowl on her face and a pistol on her hands pointed at the back of Miguel’s head. Miguel flailed, as if he didn’t have a gun pointed at the back of his head!
“Miguel, don’t move!” Milo pleaded. He looked desperately around. “Please, just leave us alone!”
“Okay, okay, everyone calm down,” said the dark-skinned man.
“Us?! You’re the ones holding my friends at gunpoint and- and- whatever that is you’re doing!”
Ladron’s head poked up from behind the woman. He bared his fangs, then sank them into the woman’s ankle. She jerked with a shout, distracted just long enough that Miguel was able to squirm free and run toward Milo.
Bang!
Milo flinched and Miguel froze at the sound of a gunshot. The shooter was another big man, with pale skin and graying hair. He had a no-nonsense look on his face as he turned his pistol to point at Tulio.
“Hold up, Rourke,” said the dark-skinned man. “There’s been a misunderstanding.”
“What’s happening?” Tulio muttered.
“And what made that noise?” Miguel whispered. He was frozen in an awkward position, with one foot still in the air and his body leaning forward.
“I don’t know,” Milo told them. “And those are guns. Just- just don’t move right now.”
“What are you talking about, Sweet?” a scrawny, mustached man asked as he joined them in the light.
The dark-skinned man -Sweet?- slowly put Tulio down so he could stand. Tulio spun and backed toward Milo, trying to keep his gaze on everyone at once.
“Milo,” Sweet said.
Milo looked quickly at him. He requested, almost whimpering, “Please just leave us alone.”
“Milo, we came here to rescue you,” Sweet said.
Milo stared at him. His confusion and panic at its peak, he couldn’t help it when a sarcastic response came out.
“Is that what you’re doing? Looks a lot like you’re trying to shoot us!”
“Wait, so this guy isn’t kidnapped?” asked the scrawny guy.
“No?!” Milo exclaimed. “Unless that’s what you guys are up to!”
“Milo,” Tulio muttered.
“These guys think I’ve been kidnapped!” Milo exclaimed.
“What? By us?” Miguel burst into laughter.
“I don't see what’s so funny,” muttered the girl in Spanish.
“Besides the fact that you guys are the ones trying to kidnap Milo?” Miguel asked.
“Hey, this is a rescue mission,” the girl said.
“And I don’t need to be rescued!” Milo exclaimed. “Not until you guys showed up, anyway! What’re you doing here? How’d you get down here?”
“We’re looking for the grandson of Thaddeus Thatch,” Rourke said.
Milo gaped at him. “...why?”
Rourke gestured to the others. “We’re part of the crew that helped your grandfather find the Shepherd’s Journal.”
Milo couldn’t react. They were… what? How? When?
“Did… did you give me the Journal?” Milo asked.
Rourke nodded and gestured to the woman with a gun. “Helga delivered it to your room at the museum. Our employer, Mr. Whitmore, planned to have you brought to his estate to explain everything.”
Milo slowly shook his head. “He could have phoned.”
“Mr. Whitmore was a bit extravagant sometimes,” Rourke said. “Now, can we all sit down and explain things calmly?”
“Milo!” Tulio hissed.
Milo hastily recapped what Rourke had just told him.
“ So he knows about Atlantis?” Miguel asked.
“We do,” said the girl.
“Great. Competition,” Tulio muttered.
“Hey, Mr. Whitmore put a lot of money and time into getting supplies and vehicles ready for the expedition,” the girl said.
“And we got here with a rented submarine and a horse.” Tulio flinched. “Where’s Altivo?”
“Where’s our horse?” Milo asked.
Sweet smiled and jutted his thumb off to the side. “Looks like Cookie’s making friends with him with a few apples.”
“You’re telling me he’s got fruit in that wagon and he won’t use it?” asked the scrawny man drily.
“Altivo’s fine,” Milo told the Spaniards. “He was bribed to the other side with apples.”
Miguel looked genuinely betrayed. Tulio, utterly unsurprised.
“Okay, so if they know about Atlantis and the Journal,” Tulio said, “ Then they’re looking for Atlantis.”
“And rescuing me against my will,” Milo said wryly.
“Hey, you weren’t supposed to leave Washington DC,” the girl said. “Everyone knew you didn’t have funding, and you didn’t have friends to go with.”
“Ouch,” Miguel said flatly.
Milo didn’t respond, because it was true. He didn’t have any free time outside of his work and research. And being known as the Atlantis nut didn’t exactly draw others to him.
He wasn’t normally so bold as to take off to find Atlantis alone, either. If he hadn’t met Miguel and Tulio, who knew where he’d be? He might’ve just given up on Atlantis altogether, Journal or no Journal. Either way, he had more pressing questions.
“You said you knew Grandpa,” Milo said. “This expedition -all of you- were preparing for this journey? With all this equipment and people, it must’ve taken years, right?”
Milo received nods in response. His hands curled into tight fists.
“Then why,” Milo said, his voice getting quiet and hard, “Did Grandpa die with just me by his side, telling me that Atlantis could never be found?”
Notes:
I've been wondering that very question for ages but the movie never addresses it! Milo, I feel, would have questions about this, and Miguel and Tulio have corrupted him enough to actually be angry about this! Go Milo!
Also I had too much fun with Sweet "scruffing" Tulio. XD
Chapter 11: Building (and Breaking) Bridges
Notes:
Weekly posting, here we goooo! Next week, I'll be posting on Wednesday, but other than that, it'll be weekly updates on Thursday!
I've been so excited to share this chapter with you. It jumps around a bit (still in the travel montage bit, after all XD) but it's got some of my favorite scenes!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
“We didn’t know.”
The expression Milo gave Sweet in response was nothing short of tortured. It only lasted a moment before Tulio nudged him. Milo looked at the ground, then at Tulio. The two of them whispered.
Rourke started to step forward, but halted when Sweet hurriedly gestured for him to stay put. Milo was the one with the map. The expedition needed to be on good terms with Milo, and Rourke making demands would only worsen the already bad situation.
Milo looked again at Sweet. When he spoke again, he was shaking, but the intensity hadn’t left his voice.
“You were on the expedition with Grandpa to Iceland, weren’t you?” Milo waited only long enough for Sweet’s nod to pose his following questions. “Why didn’t any of you show up afterward? Did you even know he was sick?”
Sweet shook his head slowly. “We found out two weeks after he died.”
Milo stared at Sweet, then turned his head sharply away. He and his companions spoke quietly for a few minutes. Audrey, the only person in the expedition who spoke Spanish, looked insulted at something they said, but thankfully didn’t comment.
“We need to sleep on it,” Milo eventually said, his voice tired. Beside him, Tulio’s glare dared anyone to argue. “We’ll give you our answer in the morning.”
“Of course,” Sweet said.
Sweet didn’t look at Rourke, not wanting to draw the trio’s attention to the man. He knew what Rourke would be thinking, and that at least one of the three would be able to see it on Rourke’s face.
Sweet wound his way through the camp, bag in hand. With heavy machinery and a day of walking, he was kept busy most evenings with cuts, bruises, and strained muscles. And with the snowy passage to cross the next day, he wanted to make sure everyone was ready.
Once he was done, he went to the edge of camp, where the three newest members of the crew were sitting around their own campfire. They all looked up with varying levels of caution, not that Sweet blamed them. It had been a day of misunderstandings, and Sweet knew several members of the expedition had already been arguing with them about joining the expedition.
“Just checking in,” Sweet said, lifting his bag slightly. “Any injuries that need tending? I know Helga took Miguel down pretty hard.”
Milo frowned and looked at Miguel. They spoke briefly, ending with Miguel shaking his head.
Sweet wasn’t convinced. He’d been on enough battlefields, expeditions, and in enough hospital rooms to see the signs. He’d been watching Miguel long enough since their meeting to notice him shielding his left wrist.
But Sweet let them pretend. Their first meeting had gone about as badly as possible without anyone being shot; he didn’t blame them for being wary.
Sweet set down his bag and sat across the fire. Milo seemed welcoming enough, but Tulio was practically glaring. Miguel was actually smiling, as if he hadn’t been the one held at gunpoint.
“I have something you might want to see, Milo,” Sweet said.
Milo looked curiously at him. After his initial anger, Milo was startlingly welcoming to the crew. It was a little like Tulio was the only one of the trio with common sense.
Then again, Sweet wasn’t going to complain if the pair had already forgiven the crew. Maybe Tulio would be swayed in time, too.
Sweet opened his jacket and took out a wallet where he kept a few pictures. He took out the picture from the Iceland expedition and held it out.
Milo looked uncertain, but took the picture. As soon as he looked at it, Milo’s tense shoulders relaxed. Miguel and Tulio leaned to look over his shoulders. Milo pointed to Thaddeus and spoke to them.
“You were with Grandpa when he found the Journal?” Milo asked Sweet.
Sweet nodded. “We all were, aside from Audrey. That man in the left corner is her dad. He retired from the expeditions a few years ago, and Audrey joined the crew.”
Milo hummed thoughtfully, then lifted his head. “You found the Journal with him.”
Sweet nodded. “In Iceland.”
“I knew it,” Milo said with a satisfied grin. His smile faded after a moment. “I wish Grandpa had told me, though.”
Sweet didn’t comment. The crew had explained about Mr. Whitmore and Thaddeus being old friends, and Mr. Whitmore funding the expeditions for decades up to the most recent one. But nobody knew why the Journal had ended up hidden away.
Sweet didn’t know about the others, but he wished he’d tried to connect with Milo when Thaddeus was still alive. Or even after that. Somehow, Sweet had gone all this time assuming Thaddeus’ grandson had friends like Thaddeus did. The assumptions had led to Milo hundreds of miles underground and underwater, woefully unprepared.
“Tell me, Milo,” Sweet said, “How did the three of you meet?”
“Uh…”
The question hadn’t seemed complicated to Sweet, but when Milo asked the Spanish pair something, there was a long pause. Miguel eventually responded with something that made Tulio shake his head with loud protests. He waved a finger around his head in the universal symbol for “crazy.”
Sweet watched the threesome discuss with growing bemusement. He was fluent in the Arapaho language, Tamil, and, of course, English. Others in the expedition had their own expertise in various languages. But just then, Sweet was wishing he’d learned Spanish at some point.
Eventually, Milo gave his answer.
“We just met.”
Sweet waited. As the silence grew, he raised an eyebrow.
“Just met as in, say, a few months ago? Weeks?”
“Week and a half,” Milo shrugged.
A beat of silence passed.
“That’s about the time you left Washington DC,” Sweet commented.
“The day of, actually,” Milo said, his expression daring Sweet to point out the obvious.
Unaffected, Sweet did so. “You went to find Atlantis with two strangers?”
“They believed in Atlantis.” Milo’s defiance faded, his eyes going to the flames. “Ever since Grandpa died, nobody’s believed in Atlantis. Or me.”
Tulio spoke quietly to him. Milo nodded and waved him off with a few words.
“It was a spontaneous decision for all of us,” Milo said, lifting his shoulders. “But we’re here now, and we’re going to find Atlantis.”
Miguel nudged Milo’s shoulder and said something that made them all smile. Milo looked at Sweet with a mischievous glint in his eyes.
“I suppose you’ll want to join us?”
Everything was spinning. Fracturing. Crumbling all around him. He struggled to push back the darkness, but heavy hands pushed back.
“Be still.”
He flailed for the light, pain searing his skull until he thought it would crack in half. The darkness vanished like a cast off blanket, and he could see all.
Hulking men of shadows and smoky armor rode sky-high war horses that trampled wood and stone under hooves of flames. Fire crackled and reached toward him, pushing him back against unmoving stone.
Heavy cloth swept back over him, muffling the stamp and crackling flames. Heavy hands and heavier words pushed him down.
“Lay still. It will be over soon.”
Tulio snapped awake, clamping his hand over a pained cry. He jolted upright, heart thundering.
Lights from somewhere nearby illuminated Miguel sprawled on his stomach nearby, his blankets in a tangle and bandaged hand sticking straight up in the air. Milo slumped against a sleeping Altivo, the Journal open in his lap and his head hanging.
And Ladron was in Tulio’s lap.
“Seriously, why do you keep doing that?” Tulio whispered. Ladron had been missing since the eventful afternoon.
Ladron chittered at him, then climbed off Tulio’s lap before he could be shooed away.
Tulio stretched with a groan. He was tired, but didn’t want to try to go back to sleep. Not with the nightmares waiting. He wondered what time it was.
Clattering brought Tulio’s gaze past his companions. He frowned when he saw the much bigger camp of the soldiers.
Sorry. The crew. Though there were a lot of soldiers for an expedition. Maybe they’d expected more beasts on the way to Atlantis.
Tulio didn’t particularly care about their reasons. The crew’s appearance had been an unwelcome one, because everyone knew the more people on the treasure hunt, the less there was to share.
At first, Tulio thought he was the only person awake, but then he noticed Audrey passing through the tents. She had her toolbox in hand.
Curious, Tulio climbed to his feet and walked after her. He caught up with her when she stopped at the biggest vehicle. She was pulling open a panel on the back.
“What is that?”
Audrey startled and spun. Tulio took a quick step back from the wrench she had pointed at his face and raised his hands defensively.
“I come in peace,” Tulio said.
Audrey rolled her eyes and returned her attention to the panel. Tulio side-stepped to peer at the engine, incredibly curious about the machine.
“Go on, get out of here and leave me alone,” Audrey said, waving a hand at him.
“Why? I just want to watch.”
“So you can tell me what I'm doing wrong?” Audrey asked, crossing her arms and glaring at Tulio. “No thanks. Get!”
Tulio stared back at her. “ No? Why would I do that? I know nothing about engines.”
Audrey’s crossed arms loosened a bit and her brows rose ever so slightly. Tulio had surprised her.
“Really?” Audrey asked.
The girl was as suspicious as Tulio himself.
“Really,” Tulio said. “I’m curious about engines, that’s all.”
“Uh-huh.”
“Why are you so skeptical?” Tulio asked.
Audrey looked Tulio up and down, then said, “By now, most guys have said girls shouldn’t mess with engines because I might ‘hurt myself.’”
Tulio shrugged. “Well, I’m not going to say that.”
Audrey huffed and turned back to the engine. She didn’t comment again when Tulio continued to watch. After a few minutes, Tulio dared to ask something else he’d been wondering about.
“Since when have women started wearing pants?”
This time, Audrey threw the wrench at him.
Driving a truck was only slightly harder than a submarine.
As irritated as she’d been with Tulio’s questions and hovering, Audrey wasn’t about to have any of the machines damaged due to an unknowledgeable driver. So she’d reluctantly shown Tulio how to drive when he had insisted that the trio have a vehicle if they had to join the rest of the crew.
All their supplies took up very little room in the back of the truck. Compared to the eleven other vehicles in the envoy -not counting the oil and water tankers, digger, and Cookie’s truck- the trio’s supplies were laughably small. But Tulio was a bit proud of how far they’d gotten toward Atlantis with their simple supplies.
The envoy set out early the next morning. Tulio drove the truck in the front, leading the way since he was the only one who had crossed the snow. Milo was hunched in the passenger seat under his blanket, scouring the Journal for the next leg of the journey. Miguel insisted on riding Altivo, and did so directly behind their truck. Ladron was somewhere in Milo’s blanket.
A short way into the drive, Tulio glanced over at Milo. Audrey had made Tulio promise to stay in “second gear” so they were moving at a snail’s pace. Milo was scowling at the Journal.
“What’s wrong?” Tulio asked.
“Hm? Oh, nothing, ” MIlo said in a distracted tone.
“You’re pretty intent there. If you don’t look away, the Journal might catch fire.”
Milo smiled weakly, but that was the only response he gave. Tulio frowned worriedly.
“Hey, Milo,” Tulio said. He reached over and nudged Milo’s arm. “Seriously, what’s wrong? Don’t tell me one of them actually hurt you yesterday.”
“No, it’s not that.” Milo glanced up, then back at the Journal. “...what do you think of them?”
“There’s too many soldiers for a scientific expedition and they’re a bunch of treasure hunters.”
Milo finally looked up with an expression of bafflement.
“Miguel and I spent a few trips with treasure hunters. There’s a certain look in their eyes.”
Milo still looked confused. “But we’re looking for treasure, too.”
“So we’re in good company,” Tulio said, though he was still wary. “I don’t like all the soldiers.”
“There was the Leviathan guarding the gateway,” Milo said. “And that bug creature where the path split. I guess the crew ran into that one…”
“...how’d that turn out?” Tulio asked.
“Nobody was hurt, if that’s what you mean,” Milo said.
Tulio laughed. “That’s what they get for not having the expert to lead them.”
Tulio expected Milo to laugh, but his frown only deepened. He returned to the Journal, and it suddenly became clear to Tulio what was bugging him.
“Are you worried they’re judging you?” Tulio asked.
“Everyone always has,” Milo muttered.
“Miguel and I don’t,” Tulio said, a bit offended.
Milo was quick to say, “I mean, you two don’t. And Grandpa didn’t! It’s just…”
Tulio thought about when Milo talked about the Board. “It’s because they’re important.”
“Don’t say it like that,” Milo said. He fiddled with the page. “I don’t know. Some of them seem alright. But Rourke…”
“Nah, I get it,” Tulio said. “I’m not sure I’d turn my back on Rourke.”
Milo again looked baffled. “Huh? He can’t be that bad. He worked with Grandpa.”
Tulio grunted. “Sure, I guess not. And I’ve never been fond of soldiers, anyway.”
“No?”
Tulio glanced at Milo. “Nope. Been arrested a few too many times.”
Milo smiled, accepting the response.
Altivo pulled up alongside the door, providing a thankful distraction.
“Hey, how far are we going?” Miguel asked.
Tulio shrugged. “It’s faster in the trucks.”
Altivo snorted.
“And we’re following Altivo’s hoofmarks,” Tulio said, pointing at the marred snow ahead. “That will make it easier when the path turns off.”
Miguel looked around. “Everything looks the same out here. You’re lucky you didn’t get lost.”
“Impossible, I had your compass,” Tulio said.
“Sure.” Miguel looked across to Milo. “What’s wrong, Milo? You’ve been moping for the last hour.”
“See?” Tulio said.
“I’m not moping. Just working,” Milo said.
“You don’t have anything to prove to them,” Tulio said, jutting a thumb over his shoulder.
“I wasn’t-” Milo said.
“You were,” Tulio said.
Miguel shook his head. “Prove what to them? You’re the only one who speaks Atlantean! Tulio can only read it.”
“Let’s not mention that to them,” Tulio said thoughtfully.
“Why not?” Milo asked.
“I’m not that good yet, anyway,” Tulio said evasively. “But listen to us. You have nothing to prove to them, and especially not to Rourke. He needs you to find Atlantis.”
Milo smiled at that and returned to the Journal, though less intently as before. Tulio glanced at Miguel, and knew he was thinking the same thing.
They both knew how treasure hunters thought. Tulio and Miguel could take care of themselves just fine, but until they knew how these hunters operated, it would be best if Milo remained important to the mission.
“Milo. Milo, come on,” Tulio said, taking Milo’s arm.
“But I'm not done!” Milo protested as he was pulled along.
“Tell that to the expedition leader,” Tulio said. “ The convoy is leaving us behind.”
Milo sighed and moved on.
Tulio smiled sympathetically. One thing he could say for the crew, they were determined to reach Atlantis as quickly as possible. It did mean, unfortunately, that Tulio and Milo couldn’t study any of the carvings they passed on the walls.
“We’ll look at them later, right?” Tulio said. “Let’s go, they’re leaving us behind.”
Milo looked up. The rest of the trucks had moved on ahead without them. The oil tanker, driven by Audrey and with Sweet in the passenger seat, was slowing down behind them. Sweet waved a hand at Audrey, and she stopped the oil tanker. Sweet spoke to Milo, who shook his head.
“He’s asking if something’s wrong,” Milo said, turning to walk quickly back to the truck.
“If we miss any clues, we can blame Rourke for setting too fast a pace,” Miguel said.
Milo gave a short laugh as he climbed into the truck. Miguel offered a jaunty salute, then mounted Altivo and kicked him into trot after the trucks. Tulio turned to follow Milo as Audrey shook her head and Sweet gave the same bemused smile he often got when he tried to figure the trio out.
Tulio started up the truck and headed along the tunnel. It had widened and smoothed out so there was room for two trucks to drive side-by-side, the only reason the rest of the envoy had passed them.
As they caught up, Tulio realized the other trucks had stopped.
“Looks like they realized they lost their guide,” Miguel joked, then kicked Altivo to go faster.
Tulio slowed the truck to a stop behind the last truck. He squinted ahead. An advantage of the envoy was the number of headlights illuminated the tunnel for miles.
“Is it just me, or does the roof get really low?” Tulio asked Milo.
Milo squinted. “I think you’re right. Maybe that’s why they stopped.”
Altivo galloped back into view. “Hey, hop on!”
Tulio and Milo climbed out of the truck and up behind Miguel, Milo in the center. Unimpaired by the threesome on his back, Altivo galloped back to the head of the line of trucks.
Tulio found he was more or less right. A section of the ceiling had collapsed, and the tunnel now ended at a flat wall.
Rourke, Helga, and a few of the soldiers were inspecting the wall. Rourke turned as they rode up and said something that made Milo shrink.
“What’re they saying?” Tulio asked.
“If I’m sure this is the right way,” Milo said.
“Because there’s all sorts of paths down here,” Tulio said, rolling his eyes.
“No, but we did leave the path back there at the snowy area,” Milo said.
“Which the Journal clearly said to do,” Tulio said.
Miguel pointed at the corner of the tunnel. “Just look. The wall was damaged when that pillar fell.”
“It’s the right way, then,” Milo said. He spoke to Rourke with more confidence.
Vinny and Cookie joined the group. Rourke turned to him, and Vinny took some red sticks from his bag and waggled them.
“What’s that Vinny’s got?” Tulio asked.
“Dynamite. It can be used to blast through stone,” Milo said.
“And is nobody worried about how close the ocean floor is to us?” Tulio asked.
“Vinny says he doesn’t have enough to blast it, anyway,” Milo said.
“Too bad, I wanted to see him blow it up,” Miguel said, disappointed.
Milo abruptly stilled. “You don’t think they’ve blown up anything down here yet, do you?”
“I don’t know,” Tulio said. “Why?”
“If they’ve destroyed any statues or carvings…” Milo trailed off, looking positively thunderous.
“That’s another mystery we can solve later,” Tulio said. “What’s the plan for now?”
Milo twisted and pointed to Mole’s digger beside them. “Miguel, we won’t see the dynamite at work yet, but Mole’s going to use the digger to dig through.”
Miguel leaned forward excitedly. Rourke called to them, though, pointing back.
“Rourke said to back up some,” Milo said.
Miguel turned Altivo around and walked him to where the closest truck had backed to a supposedly safe distance. Milo jumped down and went to Vinny, pointing to his bag.
The digger roared to life. The drill on front began to spin, faster and faster, then the digger eased forward. Sparks flew when the metal touched the wall. Stone broke away in chunks.
Then, something jolted in the machine. It shuddered, then an explosion of black smoke billowed out of the cabin and back part. The drill slowed to a stop with a strange sort of grinding sound. As the machine stopped fully, a loud horn filled the tunnel when Mole hit his face on the driver’s wheel.
“Is that how they fix their machines?” Miguel asked curiously.
Milo, storming back to their side from talking with Vinny, said, “No… neither does the name calling he’s doing right now. Could you get Audrey? From what I’ve heard, she’s the only engineer here.”
Miguel nodded and turned Altivo to gallop back to the end of the truck line. Sweet was leaning out of the cabin. Audrey had a look of annoyance on her face, as if she knew exactly who was honking their horn.
“Something’s up with Mole’s digger,” Tulio reported.
“What? I tuned that thing up this morning.” Audrey grabbed her toolbox and jumped to the ground. “What did Mole do to it now?”
Miguel put out a hand. “Need a lift?”
Audrey skeptically eyed Altivo. “I’ll walk.”
“Don’t tell me you’re afraid of horses,” Miguel teased.
Audrey glared.
“I’ll miss you when she murders you,” Tulio whispered.
Audrey shoved her toolbox up at Tulio. “The quicker the digger gets going, the better, I guess.”
Tulio and Miguel pulled Audrey up, wisely not commenting that she was so small that barely any effort was required to do so. They also didn’t comment on how tightly Audrey was holding onto Miguel’s shirt with her free hand.
Well, aside from Miguel saying, “You should practice riding Altivo before the expedition is over.”
Audrey’s shoulders drew up, but Altivo moving forward silenced whatever remark she might’ve made. Tulio subtly positioned his hands to catch Audrey if she slipped, but they quickly reached the digger without incident. Audrey tossed her toolbox down to Vinny, knocking the man back a few steps, then jumped down without waiting for anyone to help her down. She stumbled a step, then went to the digger and opened the smoking panel.
Audrey climbed into the compartment in the back, all but her feet vanishing. She dug around for a bit, then backed out with a disgruntled look on her face. Milo edged closer as she said something and turned away. Milo said something to her, and Audrey snapped back to not touch anything.
Tulio watched Audrey walk over to retrieve her toolbox from Vinny, then looked back at Milo… touching the engine. Tulio silently dropped off Altivo’s back and walked over to Milo.
“What are you doing?” Tulio asked.
“I know how to fix the boiler.”
Thinking back to the conversation he’d had with Audrey that morning, Tulio said, “I wouldn’t advise that.”
“It’s that or she pulls parts from another truck, and we lose a truck,” Milo said as he twisted knobs.
The engine began to make a thrumming sound. Tulio glanced over his shoulder just as Audrey spun around. Her expression turned murderous.
“Milo?”
Milo didn’t acknowledge Tulio, focused on the boiler that was rapidly starting to shudder. Audrey grabbed a wrench from her tool box.
“Duck,” Tulio advised.
“What?”
Audrey’s hand drew back.
“Duck!”
Tulio shoved Milo down. The wrench sailed over his head and hit the center of the engine.
The shudder stopped with a roar. Black smoke billowed from pillars on the digger, then the engine’s noise turned back into a smooth rumble.
“What did you do?” Audrey demanded, stalking forward.
Miguel slid between them, seemingly out of nowhere. “It was a team effort!”
“The boiler’s the same kind we use back at the museum,” Milo rapidly said.
Audrey crossed her arms, still glaring. “Museum?”
“Yeah, where I work? Er, worked?”
“I know that, but why- ugh, don’t touch my engines,” Audrey growled.
“I was helping you!” Milo complained.
“If I need help, I’ll ask for it,” Audrey said. She swapped her glare to Miguel. “What are you smiling about?”
Miguel pointed. They all turned to find half the crew watching them with various levels of confusion and a fair amount of alarm.
“I think they’re wondering if they need to break anything up,” Miguel said cheerfully.
Milo snickered at their expressions, his defensiveness vanishing. Audrey huffed, but her posture relaxed.
Then she drew back one fist. Milo flinched away and Tulio winced in anticipation.
“Two for flinching,” Audrey muttered, then lightly punched Milo twice on the arm.
Milo jumped away and grabbed his arm with an awkward grin. As soon as Audrey turned back to the engine compartment, he grimaced and rubbed his arm.
“Let’s go before you get in more trouble,” Tulio said.
“Hey, Milo,” Audrey said.
Milo turned back.
“Thanks anyway,” Audrey said.
Milo smiled, but before he could speak, Audrey slammed the panel back down and grabbed her toolbox. Milo’s smile turned into a confused frown. Tulio grabbed his arm and tugged him away as the digger began drilling again.
“What just happened?” Milo asked.
“You made a friend,” Miguel said with a teasing smile as he remounted. “I’m so proud of you.”
Laughing, Miguel kicked Altivo into a gallop. Tulio and Milo were left in their literal dust, Milo still confused.
“But she punched me,” Milo said. “That’s usually a bad thing. As in, a sign someone doesn’t like you?”
“I think,” Tulio said, “That if Audrey really didn’t like you, she would’ve actually hit you.”
“But she did hit me!”
“I tried to pick up her toolbox this morning,” Tulio said. “That thing must weigh as much as her. So trust me, she could have hit you way harder.”
Audrey, Milo, Tulio, and Miguel were getting along like, as Vinny had put it, fire and gunpowder. Sweet hadn’t decided yet if that meant he should separate them before something exploded for real.
“What are they doing?” Vinny asked, gesturing to the foursome huddled together near the fire.
“Remember how Mole put a whoopie cushion on Milo’s seat?”
Vinny’s chuckle answered Sweet.
“Well, I’m pretty sure they’re plotting revenge.”
“Audrey, too? I thought she didn’t like them after their nosing around her engines,” Vinny said.
“She’s following orders,” Rourke said.
Vinny glanced at the man. “Audrey? Following orders? Since when?”
“Maybe she’s finally calming down and learning to listen to authority,” Rourke said.
Sweet watched Audrey pull a crowbar half her size from the back of a truck, her grin downright evil. “Uh-huh.”
Rourke realized Sweet wasn’t looking at him and turned. “What’s she doing with the crowbar?”
“With Audrey, I’ve learned to not ask.” Sweet took a drink from his canteen. “Half the things she says flies over my head. That’s why she’s the engineer, not me.”
Rourke turned back to the fire, missing when Miguel pulled out a jug of axle grease.
“What do you think of them?” Rourke asked Sweet.
“They’re keeping up, and Milo’s kept us on the right track so far,” Sweet said.
“I’m talking in terms of the mission,” Rourke said.
“Which part?” Sweet asked evasively.
Rourke took a page from his boot. It had come from the Journal ten years ago, just before Thaddeus had suddenly died. The page was tattered and creased, but the runes and picture were still visible.
“I’ve only known them for two days, but I don’t think Milo’s going to approve,” Sweet said.
“Yeah, he didn’t like when I told him about my bridge, and that pillar was just a big carved rock,” Vinny said. “Nothing special about it.”
“If that crystal in the picture is something the Atlanteans worshiped or was a source of power, he’s not going to appreciate us moving it,” Sweet said.
“And the other two?” Rourke asked.
Sweet shrugged. “Hard to say. Tulio has mentioned a couple times that he’s just on the journey for the money. Same with Miguel.”
“And Milo didn’t comment on that?” Rourke asked.
“Milo’s assumption there is that the three of them would sell pictures and maybe artifacts that he decides can be removed,” Sweet said. “I’d suggest getting Tulio and Miguel on the payroll, if you know what I mean. They could convince Milo or, at the very least, keep him distracted.”
Rourke didn’t look impressed. “Pay them? For what?”
“Tulio’s driving and Miguel’s running recon on that horse of his,” Sweet said levelly. “That’s more than half your men are doing.”
Rourke raised an eyebrow. He knew that Sweet didn’t approve of the amount of soldiers they took on expeditions, not when the jobs sometimes went sideways and people got hurt. Sweet hadn’t pushed Rourke too far about it, though, knowing he ran the risk of being cut off from the expeditions.
“Okay, fine,” Rourke said after a moment. “Provided they don’t cause any problems, I’ll think about Tulio and Miguel. The money’s being split a lot fewer ways now, anyway.”
Sweet scowled at Rourke’s dismissive way of mentioning how many men and women had died on the way to the entrance. But again, he didn’t comment.
“Milo! Milo!”
Altivo skidded to a halt beside the truck, both horse and rider all but bouncing with excitement. Milo leaned out, frowning worriedly at Miguel.
“Miguel! What’s wrong?” Milo asked.
“Nothing, everything is great!” Miguel exclaimed. “Audrey! Audrey, come on!”
Audrey, halfway out the passenger side of the nearest truck, startled at her name being called. Miguel had taken the initiative of getting the girl used to riding Altivo over the last couple days, though his level of success was up for debate.
“What is it?” Audrey asked with a skeptical frown.
“Come on and I’ll show you!”
Audrey scowled, but she put her hand out. Put off by anyone even thinking she was afraid of horses, Audrey had met Miguel’s challenge face on. At least she was visibly improving and had only fallen off once -after which she’d gotten to her feet and back onto Altivo immediately.
Miguel took Audrey’s hand and pulled her onto Altivo’s back with no effort. Audrey had initially been annoyed by the ease in which Miguel lifted her, until she’d seen him do the same to Milo once. Miguel was pretty scrawny, but he was stronger than he looked. This included being stronger than Tulio, something Miguel never let Tulio forget.
Tulio watched the pair gallop away. “What do you think they found?”
“With how excited Miguel was, maybe it was treasure.” Milo chewed on the end of the pencil he was using in his notebook. “You know, it’s been three days since the tunnel collapse. Either we’re going the wrong way or…”
“Or what? I know we’re going the right way.”
Milo smiled. “We must be coming up on the next landmark soon.”
Now that was a reason to get excited. Tulio could see some of the crew getting restless. Tulio wondered if they were thinking that Milo was leading them wrong or if they were just antsy from being underground for so long. Tulio could understand the latter. His nightmares were increasing in frequency. The last two mornings, he’d been woken too early due to dreams he couldn’t remember, though his pounding heart and sweating body was indication enough.
They drove onward for a bit longer, the only sounds being that of the engine and the scratch of Milo’s pencil. Then hooves gradually became audible, growing louder until Altivo galloped back beside the truck.
“Miguel, you’re going to exhaust Altivo so he can’t even walk at this rate,” Tulio scolded.
Altivo snorted his offense and tossed his sweaty mane. Miguel leaned forward to rub his ears.
“We can’t help it. We’re excited!” Miguel said, as if that was reason enough.
“Sure, sure. What about?” Tulio asked.
“Look!”
Following the point of Miguel’s finger, Tulio only saw the tunnel ahead, lit by the truck headlights. But as he kept looking, Tulio realized one of the lights was a good deal higher than the envoy. And it had a greenish color to it.
“What is…”
Tulio’s unfinished question was answered when the tunnel opened fully. The trucks were pulling off in different directions, illuminating a broad ledge of stone with a wide stone bridge in the center. Overhead, a huge stone carving extended from the ceiling, looking strangely like a beehive. It was covered in holes, and from the holes came the green glow.
Milo stumbled out of the truck, fixated on the beehive. He rapidly opened the Journal and flipped through it, then excitedly turned the Journal to show Tulio a drawing of the beehive.
“This is it! It’s gotta be!” Milo whooped. “We’re almost there!”
Audrey, still on Altivo, raised a hand and waved with a shout. Shouts echoed hers through the envoy. Tulio and Miguel’s eyes met, Tulio’s excitement mirrored in Miguel’s.
Then Tulio spotted Rourke beyond Miguel. He looked as excited as the rest of the crew, but there was something else in his eyes. Tulio looked away before Rourke could catch him staring, shuddering at the predatory glint in Rourke’s eyes.
Milo was exhausted by the time they set up camp. He’d spent half the day walking, then long into the evening studying the Journal. He was still puzzled about how the Journal had cut off just before explaining about the Heart of Atlantis. The rest of the crew teased him about it occasionally, but he was on the journey for the thrill of discovery.
Milo sighed a little internally. He was the only one doing it for science and discovery. Even Miguel, thrilled by each new carving even if he didn’t know what they meant, was mostly motivated by the possibility of treasure. Milo didn’t blame them, but it did mean Tulio was the only one who cared that much about what the Journal said besides directions.
By this time, he, Miguel, and Tulio had joined the rest of the expedition in the center of camp. There had even been spare tents for the trio to use; it gave them some privacy and quiet during the evenings if they wanted to work on their own projects.
Milo unrolled his blanket and flopped down. He felt like he could sleep for a week, but he was also too excited to sleep. It was a terrible combination, but he supposed that if he was still awake when the others went to sleep, he could keep studying the Journal through the night and sleep the next day while Tulio drove.
Milo glanced at Tulio at the thought. He’d gotten quiet for the last few hours of the drive, and he hadn’t even pretended to mingle with the crew like he usually did. As soon as tents had started going up, he’d pitched his tent and all but passed out.
Milo chewed on his lip. He knew Tulio was still having nightmares, and he was always awake before everyone else. Not for the first time, Milo wondered if Tulio was really as okay as he always said he was.
“Aren’t you going to pitch your tent?” Vinny, passing with his sleeping bag, asked.
Milo turned his attention to the slump in the center of his tent and debated if he wanted to get up to fix the poles. “I did.”
Vinny dropped his sleeping bag and tugged the front pole into position. Milo crawled out to watch sheepishly. He supposed he could have asked Miguel or Tulio for help, but hadn’t wanted to bother.
“I guess I’m a little rusty at this,” Milo said, rubbing the back of his neck. “I haven’t gone camping since Grandpa took me.”
“I never got to meet your grandfather. What was he like?” Audrey asked. She was pulling off her boots in the tent across from Milo’s.
“Where do you start?” Milo asked as he put his blanket back into the fixed tent. “He was like a father to me, really. My parents died when I was a little kid, and he took me in.”
Milo fiddled with the edge of his blanket, then chuckled.
“What’s so funny?” Audrey asked.
“Well, I was just thinking.” Milo smiled to himself. “One time, when I was eight, we were hiking along this stream, and I saw something shining in the water. It was a genuine arrowhead. Well, you'd think I'd found a lost civilization, the way Grandpa carried on about it. It wasn't until I was older that I realized that the arrowhead was just some compressed shale mixed with zinc pyrite that had fractured into an isosceles triangulate.”
Mole, passing by in PJs and a stuffed mole toy, laughed. “That is so cute!”
Milo hesitated, then pressed on to say, “Say, Audrey. Uh, no- no offense, but how does a teenager become the chief mechanic of a multi-million-dollar expedition?”
Milo knew very little about his current company, since he hadn’t wanted to be too nosy. Sweet had already explained his background around the campfire at supper. He’d been born and raised in Kansas by his Arapaho mother and army medic father in his mother’s tribe before going to college to learn medicine. He’d also served in the army before becoming part of the expeditions with Milo’s grandfather.
Surprisingly, Audrey didn’t take offense. She answered with an easy smile, “Well, I took this job when Papi retired. But the funny thing was he always wanted sons, right? One to run his machine shop, and the other to be middleweight boxing champion. But he got my sister and me instead.”
“Oh.” Milo straightened the corner of the blanket. “So what happened to your sister?”
“She’s twenty-four and oh, with a shot at the title next month,” Audrey said, smiling in open pride for her sister. “Anyway, I’m saving up money so Papi and I can open up another shop.”
Packard walked by, her face covered in a white paste and still wearing her day clothes.
“Forget your jammies, Mrs. Packard?” Milo asked jokingly.
“I sleep in the nude,” Packard responded without emotion.
Milo’s brows rose in confusion. Sweet threw eye masks over to him, Tulio, and Miguel.
“You’re going to want those. She sleepwalks,” Sweet said.
Tulio was still asleep, undisturbed by the ongoing conversations, but Miguel was still wide awake. He picked up the eye mask.
“What are these for?” Miguel asked.
“Um. Just wear them when you sleep,” Milo said awkwardly. To change the topic, Milo rapidly explained in Spanish what Audrey had said.
Vinny, laying down in the tent beside Milo's, said, “Me, I just like to blow things up.”
Sweet was passing by back to his tent, but stopped to pull Vinny’s eye mask away from his face. “Come on, Vinny, tell the kid the truth.”
Sweet let the mask go, and it slapped down crookedly across Vinny’s face. He stared up at Sweet, then pulled on the mask with an expression of dramatic agony.
“My family owned a flower shop,” Vinny said, sounding pained. “We would sell roses, carnations, baby's breath, you name it. One day, I'm making about three dozen corsages for this prom. You know, the one they put on the wrist. And everybody, they come. ‘Where is it?’ ‘When is it?’ ‘Does it match my dress?’ It's a nightmare.”
Vinny let his hand flop over his face. Milo thought he was done, but Vinny lifted his hand and went on.
“Anyway, I guess there was this leak next door of gas or what. Boom! No more Chinese laundry.” Vinny rolled onto his stomach and waved a hand in front of himself. “Blew me right through the front window. It was like a sign from God.” Vinny lit a match with a flick of his thumb. “I found myself in that boom.”
Milo shook his head, then his attention was caught by scuffling. He looked over to where Mole, ignoring his tent, had burrowed into the ground. A pleased chuckle drifted out of his hole.
“What’s Mole’s story?” Milo asked, somewhat against his better judgment.
Audrey grinned, but Sweet spoke up first.
“Trust me on this one, you don't wanna know. Audrey, don't tell him. You shouldn't have told me, but you did, and now I'm tellin' you, you don't wanna know.”
Sweet picked up the lantern and blew it out, dropping them into darkness. Cloth rustled as everyone settled down, then all was silent.
For about a minute.
“Miguel, want to know why Mole likes dirt so much?”
“Audrey!”
The strangers’ camp had been dark and silent for an hour, aside from a couple of guards who were only watching the tunnel from which they’d come and the bridge. None of them thought to look along the walls, where the Atlantean hunters sat with their crystals shielded in their hands.
“It’s time,” Kida said.
“You should stay here, Princess,” Salus said, for the fourth time since they’d sat to wait.
“I’m not staying here, Salus,” Kida said, also for the fourth time. “The strangers are getting too close to home. We’ve waited too long as it is. We must know if they’re really headed to Atlantis, and how they know the way.”
“Sunzu and I can handle it,” Salus said.
“I know you can,” Kida said. “But I’m curious about these strangers, Salus.”
Salus was quiet for a moment, then said with a smile in his voice, “You’ve always been more stubborn than me, Princess. But let me lead the way.”
“Go,” Kida said. “Jaius?”
“I’ll come,” Jaius said nervously.
The four made their way cautiously down the memorized path. Surrounding the strangers camp, their vehicles stood sentinel. Kida paused to look at them in the dim light of burning lanterns hung around the perimeter of the camp, then moved on.
“P-Princess?” Jaius said.
Kida glanced back, then stopped. “Salus, wait.”
At the back of the group, Jaius was standing, shaking under his mask. Directly in front of him, face inches from Jaius’ mask, was the large white animal the first trio of strangers had used to haul their supplies.
“What is it doing?” Jaius asked in a whisper as the animal’s nostrils flared.
“He’s just smelling you,” Sunzu soothed. “Stay still.”
The animal stomped and his ears went back. Kida got the sudden sense that the animal was guarding the camp as well.
“Pet his nose!” Kida hissed. “Like the animal keeper does!”
Jaius shakily raised his hand. The animal sniffed it, then stiffened when Jaius touched his nose. Kida tensed, but the animal remained silent. Jaius slowly pet his nose. Gradually, the animal relaxed. Jaius gave a soft laugh when the animal sniffed curiously at the stub on the side of his right hand, all that remained of his thumb.
“It worked,” Jaius whispered joyfully.
“Good. Let’s go,” Salus said. “Before one of the guards walk this way.”
“Okay.”
Jaius lowered his hand and backed away. The animal followed, pushing his nose against Jaius’ mask. The action almost pushed Jaius over, but didn’t seem aggressive.
“I think he’s curious about the mask,” Jaius whispered.
Before anyone could respond, Jaius reached up and moved the mask aside. The animal snorted, then resumed sniffing Jaius.
Kida glanced at Salus. “The animal will wake up the strangers if he follows us into camp.”
“I’ll stay here.”
Kida raised an eyebrow at Jaius’ offer.
“Better here than in the camp,” Jaius whispered in explanation.
Kida had to agree. The animal was big and a bit pushy, but still seemed safer than the strangers and their destructive fire. She nodded.
“Okay. Stay here with him, Sunzu. If you hear something go wrong while we’re in camp, return to the upper path and wait for us. If you must, go ahead to Atlantis without us.”
“I’m not about to leave you two,” Sunzu said.
“If we’re spotted inside the camp, there will be nothing you can do,” Salus said firmly. Then, gently, “But we won’t be spotted. Just be careful here.”
Sunzu nodded reluctantly. “You as well.”
Kida and Salus resumed further into camp. They stayed in the shadows, avoiding the lanterns that had been left burning outside some of the tents.
They had to cross most of the camp, but they reached where the original three strangers slept among the others. Kida approached the scholar’s tent first. By the dim light of her crystal, she silently pulled out the scholar’s pack and opened the flap. She took out books and strange tools and set them aside, glancing frequently about.
A low noise brought her gaze darting up. In the tent beside the scholar’s, the dreamer was moving restlessly in his sleep, caught in the dreams that had earned him the nickname.
“Princess,” Salus hissed.
They couldn’t leave yet! Kida needed to find the book the scholar was using to find Atlantis!
Waving Salus back, Kida quickly stepped closer to the dreamer and lifted her mask partially. Salus said her name again, but Kida ignored him. She leaned over the dreamer and gently touched her crystal to his forehead.
Instantly, the stranger stilled. His body went lax and his face relaxed. His breathing evened out as his dreams were soothed as easily as the crystal healed cuts.
Kida turned to Salus. Even behind the mask, she could see the disapproval in simply how stiffly he stood. If the dreamer had woken while Kida was unmasked and standing over him…
But he hadn’t. Kida returned to the pack and reached inside. Her hand found a smooth, flat object. She pulled it out and found a picture of a small boy and an older man, smiling at the artist.
Kida paused in setting the picture aside. She lightly touched the face of the boy in the picture.
There was more rustling, this time from the scholar’s tent. Catching a glimpse of his shadow rising, Kida quickly dropped the picture and darted backward with Salus.
A light came from a small device in the scholar’s hand. Realizing he was awake, Kida quickly gestured to Salus to leave, and the two of them ran for the edge of the camp.
As expected, Senzu and Jaius hadn’t left. Kida ran past, waving for them to follow. The animal followed them, feet thudding hard against the ground.
“Princess, the animal is following us,” Jaius said.
“I know, but there’s nothing we can do. He won’t be able to follow us up to the upper path, anyway,” Kida said.
Kida reached the path and stopped. She glanced back while pointing the others to go up. She saw a light passing through the camp, thankfully not heading their way.
The scouts climbed to the upper path, leaving the animal behind. Kida looked down at it, hoping it wouldn’t sound the alarm.
“Princess!” Salus gasped. He pointed. “The light!”
Kida’s eyes widened. A light from the edge of the camp -the scholar’s device?- was pointing toward the ceiling and waving erratically around the Beacon.
“Be ready to run,” Kida breathed as the first of the fire bugs left their hive.
The dream started with the heat and fear of fire. He’d felt the burning on his neck, pushing him down and smoke choking him. Voices whispered to him through the darkness.
“Be still.”
“Run! Run, son!”
“Be still.”
“Burn them out! No survivors to rise against us!”
“Be still.”
“Find the children!”
Screams and pleadings tore through the smoke and into his heart. Weakness flooded through his veins and he fell to his knees, unable to help or even rise when he heard his mother’s voice.
“Ma! Ma!”
Hands on his shoulders, pushing him down into the darkness and cold. The ever-present voice telling him to be still if he wanted to live.
“Ma! Pa!”
Then it was washed away. Not with the darkness pressing into him, but a soothing, cool blue light. The weight vanished from his chest, and he finally felt like he could breathe. He felt light and calm again, a sense of warm safety filling his heart, the sensation of being cradled in his mother’s arms.
And Tulio breathed for the first time in two weeks. All was calm. He was safe.
Until another scream shattered the silence.
Tulio jerked awake, eyes flying open and sitting up so fast that he collided with the cloth of his tent. He flailed in confusion and rolled over. Milo was yelling something somewhere, and the cave was suddenly bright with yellow light. A crackling noise like-
“Fire!” Audrey yelled.
Tulio lunged to his feet, spinning around. The far edge of the camp was awash with flames. Tulio gaped at it, then dropped to his knees long enough to grab his blanket. Already, the crew was running by with blankets and buckets. Tulio started to join them, but Audrey blocked him.
“Wait, Rourke said we’re to leave camp!” Audrey said.
Tulio looked quickly to the side. Miguel was fumbling to his feet, blinking at the fire in a daze. Milo was missing, though!
“Where’s Milo?” Tulio asked.
“I don’t know, but he’s the one who raised the alarm.”
Altivo skidded to a halt beside them, squealing. Tulio spun to Miguel.
“Take Altivo to the bridge! I’ll get our truck and meet you there! And find Milo!”
Miguel picked up Audrey -who shrieked in surprise and outrage- and dropped her onto Altivo’s back. He pointed toward the bridge.
“Go, boy!”
“Don’t you-” Audrey cut off as Altivo bolted, forcing the girl to grab his mane to avoid falling.
“She’s going to murder you for that,” Tulio said, already running for their truck.
“If we make it out of here alive!” Miguel said with too much cheer.
The fire was getting brighter and the smoke thicker. Tulio pushed back his panic with effort, the nightmare still too fresh on his mind. He barely noticed the bugs until one landed on his arm and burned him! Tulio swept it off with a pained shout and pulled his jacket on to protect his arms.
Halfway to the trucks, Milo came running from between a couple tents and collided with them. Tulio fell back on his butt, as did Milo, though Miguel managed to stay standing. The two scrambled to their feet and kept running.
Mole’s digger had already started across the bridge as they reached their truck. Tulio started the truck and hurriedly turned it around. Other vehicles sped by, rushing for the bridge. Tulio gaped when he saw the bugs land on the tires of some of the vehicles and ignite the tires!
“Hurry!” Milo yelped, pointing at a nearby truck with burning tires. “Once the fire reaches the tank, it-”
“What? It’ll what?” Tulio asked as he forced their truck into the line.
“Explode!” Milo said with a gulp.
“What?!”
Their truck had just passed onto the bridge when a massive explosion tore through the air behind them. The truck shuddered, then something seemed to tilt under them.
“The bridge!” Milo cried. “The bridge is broken!”
If it was broken, then it was falling. Tulio stamped on the gas pedal, pushing the truck further forward. The bridge began to visibly tilt, until they were driving uphill.
The digger suddenly stopped. Tulio’s mouth went dry when he saw it sliding backward, colliding with the nearest trucks and shoving them backward.
“Tulio!” Miguel yelped.
“I see-”
The line of trucks was shoved into theirs. Tulio jolted against the steering wheel, while the impact sent Miguel and Milo sliding toward the opposite side of the truck.
“Careful!” Tulio said.
Then the bridge went vertical. Another truck slammed into theirs from ahead, and Tulio got a glimpse of his friends hitting the opposite door so hard it popped open. Tulio lunged sideways, abandoning the wheel to grab Miguel’s shirt.
Impact slammed through the truck, throwing them all into the air, then crashing back down. Tulio lost his grip when his ribs drove into the steering wheel. He lurched forward with a gasp and lifted his head.
The truck was careening backward down the slope, bumping over unseen rocks. Tulio fumbled for the wheel, trying to get them turned or stopped or anything-
Another bump sent the three of them flying in different directions. Tulio lost track of his friends as he tumbled backward into the bed of the truck. The truck bounced off something else, and Tulio’s head hit the sled, yanking him into darkness.
Notes:
He's fine, they're all fiiiine...
I had so much fun writing Audrey with the threesome. She's got three big brothers now, whether or not she wants them! XD
I did pull some of the dialogue directly from the movie, but only in a few bits. And for the most part when I do, I end up dragging out the scene a little bit since I don't have time constraints.
Chapter 12: Convergence Point
Notes:
The first two scenes overlap a bit because AlicornGem88's comment prompted a bonus Audrey scene. XD
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Audrey didn’t scare easily, and never would she admit to being scared. Except for right now.
Audrey sat rigid, her fingers clenched in Altivo’s mane. Her ears were full of the crash of metal and stone. Her heart was pounding and her stomach was twisted in so many knots that she felt like she was going to be sick.
Gradually, the sounds of twisting metal and splintering stone faded away. Audrey sucked in a breath and looked around at where Altivo had halted for the first time.
The area was still dimly lit by the creepy green glow of the object on the ceiling that Milo had called the Beacon, enough for Audrey to see they were on the opposite side of the bridge. The paved path led into the darkness. Mere feet behind Altivo, the remnants of the bridge jutted out. Across the way, remains of the camp still burned and a few stray bits of light -more of the strange bugs that had ignited the camp?- were flying back up toward the Beacon.
“Is anyone-” Audrey swallowed hard and tried to raise her voice. “Hello?”
Altivo snorted and turned.
“Careful, careful!” Audrey yelped, hugging Altivo’s sides with her legs.
Altivo went to the edge of the bridge. He and Audrey peered down.
The Beacon’s light extended far, but illuminated only broken rock and a few scattered bits of gear too distant to really make out. There were no lights and no signs of movement in the dust.
Audrey jumped as she remembered her bag. Her toolbox was hopefully still in one of the trucks, but she kept a few tools in her bag in her tent because Vinny liked to mess with some of his explosives inside his tent, and sometimes Audrey needed to be able to dismantle bombs he somehow forgot and left laying around. But more importantly, she had her flashlight!
Incredulous that she’s managed to forget it, Audrey grabbed the light and flicked it on. The beam didn’t extend much further than the Beacon’s light, but was wider and broad enough to illuminate what appeared to be a rough path leading down the wall of the crevasse.
Altivo’s ears flicked forward. He stepped toward the path.
“Wait,” Audrey said, tugging on Altivo’s mane. “That’s… I don’t know…”
Altivo’s scraped a hoof. Audrey swallowed hard, trying to figure out how she was supposed to guide Altivo when his halter and reins were gone. Miguel didn’t use Altivo’s reins half the time, and he made it look so easy…
Then again, Miguel had also bragged plenty of times about how smart Altivo was. He’d also mentioned how he could let Altivo “have his head” when Audrey scolded him about not watching where Altivo was going.
“Okay, Altivo,” Audrey said, forcing herself to stop pulling on Altivo’s mane, “You can get us down, right?” Audrey rolled her eyes. “Great. Now I’m talking to the horse, too.”
But Altivo gave a bob of his head very much like a nod, then stepped carefully forward. He made his slow way down the zig-zagging path, and Audrey just focused on not falling and keeping the flashlight beam pointed toward Altivo’s hooves.
When the Beacon’s light was reduced to a distant glow, Audrey whispered for Altivo to stop. When he obliged, she turned the flashlight from the path to take another look around.
To her surprise, Audrey could see the bottom of the crevasse. More gear littered the rocks, but there weren’t any people or vehicles. Tracing the skid marks on the stone, Audrey realized there was another tunnel at the bottom of the crevasse.
Altivo kept moving along the path. Hoping they were far enough from the Beacon to disturb the fire bugs again, Audrey called out. Altivo gave a high, piercing squeal.
Both stood waiting. When nobody responded, Altivo gave a heavy sigh, then kept walking. Audrey was getting stiff as he picked his way down a particularly steep part of the path down to the bottom of the crevasse.
Though afraid of what she might see, Audrey swept the area with her light. She didn’t know whether or not to be relieved to not see any people or vehicles.
Altivo followed the skid marks on the slanted floor. The tunnel twisted. The tunnel walls were scratched and more supplies littered the floor.
“Wait,” Audrey said.
Altivo snorted, but stopped. Audrey slid off his sweaty back, nearly falling over when she landed. Stumbling on shaky legs, Audrey went to the supplies and picked up the canteen she’d spotted. Nearby was a cracked plastic jug half full of water. Taking the short crowbar from her bag, Audrey pried the top half of the jug off. She and Altivo drank deeply, washing dust and smoke from their throats. Then they returned to following the tunnel.
Altivo was able to move faster on the smoother, wider path, so it wasn’t long before he reached yet another hole. Pointing her light in both directions, Audrey couldn’t see the top or bottom of the shaft. Audrey lowered the flashlight and Altivo backed away from the edge.
“Where are they, Altivo?” Audrey asked, not caring now that she was talking to the horse. “They couldn’t have gone that far, right?”
There was a long pause, not that Audrey was really expecting an answer. Except, then she got one.
A flare shot past her and Altivo’s perch. She jolted forward, watching as the flare exploded against the shaft’s high ceiling.
Surprised as she was to finally have a sign of life, Audrey couldn’t react at first. Then Altivo squealed and stepped to the edge again.
Looking down, Audrey saw the headlights of one of the trucks. She slumped in relief, then raised her flashlight to wave.
When he came to, Rourke was laying on a rough, gravelly ground, his feet raised awkwardly above him. He had no way of knowing how long he’d been unconscious. It could have been seconds or minutes.
Rourke rolled to the side, cautiously lowering his feet to the ground, and reached into his pants pocket. He located a pack of matches he’d taken from Vinny earlier in the evening and lit one, illuminating the area just around him.
The truck was in front of him, his feet resting in front of the tires. The only other thing he could see was a bunch of dirt.
“Alright,” Rourke said, “Sound off. Who’s not dead?”
A chorus of groans answered him. Well, at least some of the crew was still alive. Rourke sat up, but then the match burnt down to his fingers and he had to drop it.
Out of the darkness, Cookie said, “Dag burn bugs done bit me on my sit-upon. Someone’s going to have to suck out that poison.” After a pause, he added, “Don’t everyone jump up at once.”
Rourke got to his knees and felt his way into the cab of his truck. He flipped on the lights, finally illuminating the area.
Several more trucks were in sight, half of them crumpled heaps. The drivers were climbing slowly out, and a few soldiers were staggering out of the back of trucks. Sweet and Vinny were climbing over a mound of dirt. Packard and Cookie were sitting in the cab of a truck missing the back half.
“Where’s Audrey?” Helga asked as she climbed out of the other side of the crumpled truck. “She’ll know if any of these rigs are still drivable.”
Everyone looked around, still a bit too dazed to really start taking a head count. Rourke pulled himself to his feet and looked up.
“What is this place? And how are we not completely dead from the fall?” Vinny asked.
“Pumice ash,” Mole said from where he sat on a mound of the gravelly dirt, his goggles extended to stare at the dirt. He looked up, swinging his goggles right into Helga’s face as he added, “We are sitting at the base of a dormant volcano!”
Helga shoved the goggles from her face and loaded a flare. She shot it straight up. Everyone watched it soar higher and higher.
“That could be our way out,” Rourke said.
The flare hit the ceiling and exploded.
“Or not,” Sweet said. He looked around. “Real fast, has anyone seen Audrey?”
“Last I saw, she was on the horse and headed for the other side of the bridge,” Helga said.
“Hey!”
Everyone looked around, then up at Audrey’s voice. Far above, the light of a flashlight waved.
“We’re coming down!” Audrey yelled.
Sweet yelled back, “Who’s with you?”
“Just Altivo!”
“Be careful!” Sweet looked around. “Has anyone seen Milo, Miguel, or Tulio?”
There was a long pause. More truck headlights came on. Rourke quickly counted each of the soldiers and members of his crew.
But there was no sign of Milo, Miguel, or Tulio.
He was stuck. Arms pinned to his side and fabric pressing down on his face. He could almost hear the words whispered in his ears.
“Don’t move, child. It will be over soon.”
But he couldn’t. He couldn’t just lay there while murderers strutted through the tomb. He had to move, to hide, to get away-
Just a dream, Tulio reminded himself. Dreams and memories, things that couldn’t hurt him anymore. He just needed to wake up-
His back hurt. So did his head. His breath wheezed in his lungs, thick with dust. He coughed, then clamped his lips together.
Silence, he remembered. Silent as the grave.
He clenched his eyes. Don’t think about it, just wake up and move. He wasn’t trapped, he could move and run, he just had to-
He couldn’t. Breath seizing, Tulio realized two things.
He was awake.
It wasn’t just a memory.
He couldn’t move. He really couldn’t move. He was trapped, again, by fabric and fear. He gasped for air that didn’t seem to come, struggling to move. Air surged out of his mouth, half exhale, half shout for help.
“S-someone!”
Nobody was coming for him. Nobody dared. He was trapped, alone under the stone and quilt. Trapped and alone, with nobody to help him, he had to move out of the darkness and shadows where death laid in cold silence.
“Tulio!”
Tulio jerked at the voice. Desperation surged through him, but was the speaker friend or-
No! No, there was nobody left for him now. If they found him, he was dead, but he was already dead, he couldn’t move, he couldn’t breathe, all was lost, his father was there across the tomb, as was his mother and grandmother and he could still smell the smoke-
Fabric tore. Tulio cried out at the noise, knowing it meant he’d been found. He flailed, suddenly finding his shoulders able to move, but his hands were still trapped, he couldn’t escape, he was alone-
Hands pressed against his cheeks, and Tulio couldn’t help crying out again.
“Pa! Ma! Please, somebody!”
The voice was still speaking, soothing but strange, saying words he didn’t understand, but he knew what discovery meant, Pero had warned him to be silent, but he couldn’t help himself and now-
Cloth gently wiped his cheeks, which were hot and wet with tears he didn’t remember shedding. He couldn’t cry, couldn’t move, couldn’t be found, but he could hear them, meaning it was too late.
There was a light and a face he should have known, but didn’t. He flinched weakly away from it, but couldn’t fight when hands grabbed him. Dizzy with pain and loss, he just closed his eyes.
Audrey had barely dismounted from Altivo’s back when Helga yelled at her to start checking the trucks.
“Glad to see you’re alright, too,” Audrey muttered as she walked awkwardly toward the nearest truck, Altivo at her side.
It didn’t take long for Audrey to see that at least two of the trucks were totaled. The others looked intact enough and already some of the sailors had trucks running. The digger appeared to be undamaged, but wasn’t starting yet despite Mole’s attempts.
Audrey frowned as she turned to rig seven. It was one of the totaled trucks, but it was also the truck where she’d left her toolbox. Hopefully it was still inside and in one piece, otherwise she was going to be picking up tools from all over the crash site.
“Audrey. Hey, Audrey.”
Audrey looked away from the truck at Sweet’s voice. He was waving her over to Tulio’s truck, and she felt a surge of fear. She hadn’t seen the trio since Miguel had thrown her onto Altivo’s back. Sweet calling to her couldn’t be good news, especially with the worried frown he had on his face. His subtly was a bit strange, for the energetic and quick-speaking man, and this kept her silent as she joined him.
“What is it?” Audrey asked.
“It’s Tulio,” Sweet said.
Audrey tensed. “If he’s hurt, I can’t really-”
“He’s a bit banged up, but no worse than anyone else,” Sweet was quick to assure her. “That ash really cushioned our fall. No, I need you to translate.”
Sweet ducked and crawled into the truck now laying on its side. Audrey followed him, but couldn’t help her question.
“Why not ask Milo?”
“Because Miguel and Milo are still missing.”
Audrey’s mouth went cotton dry when she crawled into the truck bed. The supplies were scattered around their knees and pieces of the fabric wall had been cut and tossed aside. But that wasn’t what kept Audrey’s eye.
Tulio on his side, curled in a fetal position with his back pressed against the back of the seats. His eyes were vacant as he mumbled something to himself.
“He keeps repeating what sounds like the same thing over and over,” Sweet said. “I can’t get him to snap out of it, and touching him makes him panic further.”
Though she’d rather go back to inspecting vehicles, Audrey crawled closer to Tulio. “Tulio?”
Tulio didn’t react to her voice. Up close, she began to make out what he was saying.
“They’re dead,” Audrey repeated.
Sweet’s head jerked back. “Where?”
“I don’t…” Audrey paused when Tulio’s chant changed. “No… Sweet, he’s talking about his parents? Someone killed them and… he’s not supposed to move? He’s going to be found?”
“Oh.” Sweet’s face fell. “I should have seen this. Audrey, don’t touch him, but try to get through to him with words.”
“What words?” Audrey asked, reflexively backing away and wanting very much to run from the truck.
“Tell him he’s safe. Try to calm whatever he thinks is happening.”
“What do you mean, ‘what he thinks’?” Audrey asked.
“From the looks and sounds of it, Tulio’s having a flashback to some sort of traumatic event.”
“Wait, are you saying he doesn’t know what’s going on now?” Audrey asked.
Sweet nodded. “Either the fall or being pinned triggered it. I thought getting him out would help, but it doesn’t seem to be. Please, Audrey, I don’t know what he’s thinking, but we need him to calm down before he starts hyperventilating again. He’s going to hurt himself if he won’t calm down.”
Audrey grimaced, but edged closer to Tulio. “Tulio? Hey, Tulio, look at me, would you?”
Tulio, staring through her, muttered, “Don’t move, it’s okay, it’s okay.”
“It is okay, Tulio. Everyone’s fine.”
Tulio didn’t react. Sweet had said to counteract whatever Tulio thought was happening, but what did that even mean?
“Tulio, sit up,” Audrey said.
For some reason, this drew Tulio’s eyes. Thinking about how Tulio was saying that he couldn’t move, Audrey realized it made sense. Somewhat. Not really, but she could work with it.
“Sit up. Sweet seems to think I know how to help you,” Audrey said. “But… but I can’t help you, Tulio, if you don’t talk to me.”
Tulio stared blankly. But he seemed to be breathing a little more calmly and his mumbles were slightly less frantic.
“Okay, that’s better. Come on, Tulio, look a little alive so Sweet will stop worrying.”
“Look… alive?” Tulio mumbled.
“That would be great, yeah.”
Tulio blinked and finally looked at Audrey. His eyes tracked around the back of the truck while he slowly put one hand down and raised himself to sit upright.
“What happened?” Tulio eventually asked.
“You had some kind of panic attack, that’s what happened.”
Tulio stared at her blankly, and Audrey wondered if she’d just chosen the wrong answer. Then his eyes moved down to his feet. Tulio huffed out a breath, then looked up at her.
“Where’s Miguel?” Tulio asked.
“I don’t know,” Audrey said. When Tulio’s breathing hitched, she quickly added, “Yet. The vehicles went in all directions when we landed. Everyone’s still finding their way together. Altivo and I were the only ones to actually cross the bridge.”
“How?”
“Altivo jumped,” Audrey said with a shrug.
“Well, what are we sitting around here for? I’ve got to find Miguel!”
Tulio rose to a low crouch. He wobbled, but pushed aside Sweet’s hand when he tried to help. He would have left the truck if Sweet hadn’t put his arm across his path.
“What’s the doc want?” Tulio asked. “I’m not hurt.”
“Sweet, he’s okay now,” Audrey said. “He’s not hurt.”
“Maybe not physically,” Sweet said. “But I need to know what that panic attack was about.”
Audrey was about to translate, but from the defiant scowl on Tulio’s face, he knew what Sweet wanted.
“Tell him we’re wasting time. There’s people out there who are actually hurt, plus Miguel and Milo are missing!”
“Sweet, he insists that he’s fine, and that there’s other people out there who need you more,” Audrey translated.
“Rourke will call if I’m really needed,” Sweet said. “But could you tell him that he’s part of the crew now, like it or not, and my job is to ensure that everyone on the crew is healthy. I should have given the three of them a proper check-up when we first met, but put it off for too long. Now seems like the perfect time.”
Audrey translated for Tulio, who promptly shook his head.
“I don’t like doctors.”
“Neither do I, but Sweet’s a good one,” Audrey defended him. “Besides, he’ll be done in ten seconds if you’ll just cooperate.”
“Does he at least know what could have caused the panic attack?” Sweet asked, probably reading the refusal on Tulio’s face.
“Sweet will let you go if you know what caused the panic attack,” Audrey bargained.
Tulio was quiet for a long moment. His eyes moved between the two of them. He tried to push past Sweet, but the doctor was firm.
“...can you two keep a secret?” Tulio finally asked.
“Sure, I can keep a secret, and Sweet never reveals a patient’s secrets. Spill.”
Tulio waited for a moment longer. Then, staring into Audrey’s eyes, he said, “I was buried alive as a child.”
“You…” Audrey’s throat tightened with sudden horror. “How? Why?”
“It doesn’t matter.” Almost as an afterthought, he said, “Not anymore. Being underground is hard, but I’ll manage, so tell Sweet so we can take care of business.”
“You can’t just-”
“Tell. Him.”
Audrey swallowed against the lump in her throat, then said to Sweet, “Tulio said he was buried alive as a child.”
“Then he was panicking because he couldn’t move, but-” Sweet shook his head. “How? Why?”
“He won’t say,” Audrey said.
“A deal is a deal. Now you know,” Tulio said. “So let’s go.”
“A deal’s a deal, Sweet,” Audrey said. “After all, we’ve got our secrets, too.”
Sweet looked at Tulio. He clearly wanted to push, but lowered his arm. Tulio scurried past, still a little wild-eyed and shaky, but on a mission.
Altivo, standing nearby, nickered and trotted over. The horse sniffed Tulio over until his head was pushed away. Tulio looked around, then walked Altivo over to a fallen boulder. Altivo stood perfectly still -while managing to look as baffled as a horse could be- while Tulio climbed onto the boulder and dropped heavily onto his back.
“Come on, Altivo,” Tulio said, “Let’s find Miguel and Milo.”
The next time they needed to make a quick escape, Miguel was choosing the horse over a truck. Not his brightest moment, Miguel would admit, but it was the decision he’d made in the time to stay with Tulio and Milo.
Except Miguel awakened to find himself alone in the pitch black with an aching head and ankle.
Still. Could’ve been worse. At least nothing was trying to burn or eat him.
Miguel felt the smooth stone beneath him. It was sloped upward, and Miguel had stopped against a tumble of boulders. And a metal box under his back. He’d probably slid down from wherever everyone else had landed.
Miguel sat up slowly, painfully. His back was tender and raw. Even the light touch of his shirt made him wince. When his left foot touched the stone, pain shot up his leg, making him hiss with pain.
Well. That wasn’t good.
Miguel looked around again. He probably wouldn’t be able to walk on his own, so he’d have to wait until the others in the caravan were near enough to call to. Sounds had carried easily through the stone tunnels, so he was pretty surprised to not hear anyone yet.
While Miguel considered yelling, he finally noticed a dull blue light coming from behind the rocks at his back. He grinned and opened his mouth, then hesitated.
None of the caravan lights were blue.
Instantly cautious, Miguel shifted down so he could reach the metal box he’d been laying on. It felt like Audrey’s toolbox. He silently opened it and felt the contents until he found a thin metal pry bar.
Sufficiently armed, Miguel rolled onto his stomach and reached up. His hand found the edge of the stone, and he dragged himself up with the aid of his good foot to peer over.
Miguel quickly spotted Milo, leaning against a rock. He was wide-eyed, hands scrambling against the rock. The light was coming from four… creatures surrounding him!
Forgetting his own injuries, Miguel threw himself over the side of the rock with a wild cry.
“Leave him alone!”
The creatures scattered as Miguel drew near, swinging the pry bar. He stumbled to a halt beside Milo, grabbing the rock for support.
“Are you okay?” Miguel asked.
“I- yes- no. I don’t know.”
Miguel glanced at Milo more closely. He was bruised and bleeding from a cut on his shoulder, but didn’t look too badly hurt. Though he was shaking so badly he couldn’t stand.
“I-” Milo swallowed hard as he darted a look at the cut. He added quietly, his voice ashamed, “I don’t do well with… blood.”
“It’s going to be fine,” Miguel whispered, looking at the creatures.
The creatures clustered together, ten feet away. They had huge, flat faces like masks… actually, the “faces” might’ve been masks after all. Each face had oversized eyes and gaping mouths with flat teeth. Fur lined the faces and thin hands and feet barely visible on the edges of the masks as the creatures went from standing upright to crouching.
“Are you sure?” Milo whispered back.
“Tulio and I have run from worse. Can you run?”
“Do I have a choice?”
Miguel flexed his hurting foot, wincing. “I don’t think so, no.”
“Miguel…” Milo said nervously as one of the creatures started to approach them.
Miguel glared and lifted the pry bar. The creature hesitated for a moment, and Miguel thought he heard the others speak quietly.
Then the creature in front shifted aside what was in fact a mask, revealing a very human face underneath! Miguel started, so shocked to find a woman that he lowered the pry bar.
The woman stared back, seeming as curious about Miguel and Milo as they were of her. She had white hair, but a face that couldn’t have been older than Miguel. The blue glow was coming from a crystal hung around her neck.
The woman stepped closer, and Miguel again tensed. Distracted by the mask and light, he’d somehow missed the spear the woman was holding. It looked like it was carved from stone.
“It’s a person,” Milo whispered, sounding awed.
“Yep.”
“Why do you sound like that’s a bad thing?”
“Did you see that spear? Also, she doesn’t look overly friendly.”
“Well, we did drop out of the ceiling practically on top of them.”
Miguel glanced at him. That made sense, but Miguel still warily waved the pry bar when the woman stepped closer.
“Wait,” Milo whispered.
“For what? To be impaled? Get up. It’s time to go.”
Milo started to stand but, as Miguel had already guessed, his legs were shaking too much to support him. Miguel shifted, putting all his weight on his good foot, and wondered if he and Milo really could run.
The woman stopped a few steps away. She looked between the pair with a small smile that appeared to be amused. She extended her spear toward Miguel, who flinched and held out the pry bar.
Then the woman twitched her spear. Before Miguel could realize what she was doing, she’d hooked the tip of her spear under the hook of the pry bar. It was yanked out of his hands and tossed aside with no effort.
Miguel stared after the pry bar, then back to the spear still pointed at him. He raised his free hand, still using the other to hold onto the boulders.
“We come in peace?” Miguel offered.
The woman nodded once, then retracted her spear and took the crystal from around her neck. Leaning the spear against her shoulder, she reached her other hand out, as if in invitation.
Miguel glanced at Milo, who shrugged wearily. Miguel thought Milo looked more pale than before, though the dim blue light made it hard to say for sure.
“Ah, what’ve we got to lose?” Miguel said with a nervous grin.
Miguel held out one hand. The woman took his hand, her fingers curling around his wrist. Miguel flinched but, while the woman’s grip was firm, it was still gentle.
The woman suddenly grabbed her spear with her other hand and flicked it to the side. Miguel instinctively watched the falling weapon, almost missing when the woman ducked and grabbed his injured ankle. Miguel kicked out with a yelp of surprise and pain, then lost his balance and sat hard. A sudden warmth flared in his ankle, then the woman leaped backward. Miguel scrambled back against the boulder.
“What was that?!” Miguel demanded, leaping to his feet.
The woman rose with her spear back in hand, though her expression remained calm. One of her companions stepped quickly forward, their spear rising.
Miguel stepped closer to Milo, then froze. His eyes slid down to his ankle. The sock had been torn away in the fall, though the skin appeared to be untouched.
“What-”
Miguel leaned his weight on the foot, frowning in confusion when he felt no pain.
“Miguel?” Milo whispered.
“It’s… it’s healed,” Miguel said, looking from his ankle to the woman. “How did you do that?”
The woman only smiled. Miguel was starting to think the strangers didn’t talk after all.
“Miguel!” Milo said, his pained tone bringing Miguel’s attention back.
“What’s wrong, Milo?” Miguel asked worriedly.
“I don’t feel so good,” Milo said, blinking hard. “Where’s Sweet?”
Miguel shrugged. “I don’t… Milo?”
Milo swayed. Miguel flinched when the woman suddenly dropped beside him, in front of Milo. Miguel started to reach out, but hesitated when the woman gently touched the crystal to the cut on Milo’s shoulder. She glanced at Miguel, then, when Miguel didn’t move, touched the crystal to Milo’s forehead. She pressed one hand over the cut and touched Milo’s forehead with the fingertips of her other hand, then light flashed from her hands!
Miguel flinched, but the light disappeared as quickly as it had come. Milo was staring at the woman’s hand as she pulled it away from the cut, then his eyes darted back to his shoulder. Miguel followed his gaze, and both their eyes widened at the same time.
The cut on Milo’s shoulder was healed!
And it wasn’t just the cut, Miguel realized. The paleness was fading from Milo’s cheeks, and he was starting to look more alert. He stood up and, though he still was a little shaky, he was able to stand on his own.
“Milo, did she…? ” Miguel asked slowly.
Milo touched his shoulder again, then looked at Miguel’s feet. “Your leg. Is it…”
The two of them spun to face the woman at the same time. She watched them with the same amused smile from before.
Beside her stood one of her companions, whose mask was raised to reveal an older man. He had short white hair and a crystal around his neck as well. He held the woman’s spear in addition to his own. Though his expression was wary, his grip on the spears were relaxed.
“Should we-” Miguel started.
A rumble cut him off. Everyone turned toward the sound as it grew louder. The ground had begun to shake when Miguel recognized the sound.
“That’s Mole’s digger!” Miguel said.
Stones rattled around Miguel’s feet. He darted a worried look at Milo.
“How bad would it be if we were standing in front of the digger?” Miguel asked.
“Very bad.”
Miguel looked up as the rumble grew even louder in intensity, then at Milo.
“Run?” Miguel suggested.
Milo nodded sharply. “Run!”
Miguel spun, noting as he did that the strangers were already running.
“Hey!” Milo called, starting after them.
Miguel started running, shoving Milo ahead of him. If they lost the light of the crystals, they’d be running blind, and Miguel didn’t want to test their luck any more than necessary.
They’d left the actual tunnel behind, Miguel quickly realized. Fallen boulders and stalagmites covered the floor, so they had to constantly scramble up and down the rough stone.
Miguel slid down a rough slope, keeping an eye on Milo as they ran from the rumbling. Thankfully, though the strangers sprang across the boulders like monkeys, Milo was able to keep up. Always, though, no matter how fast they ran, Miguel could feel the digger getting closer.
“Hurry!” Miguel shouted.
The strangers reached a wall with a narrow crack where reddish light spilled through. They squeezed through without pausing. Milo, upon reaching the wall, slipped for the first time. He started to fall backward, but Miguel caught his shoulders and shoved him through. He scrambled right behind him.
The light became brighter, seeming to shine from every direction at once. Miguel stumbled, blinking in the unexpected light. Milo had stopped as well, shaking his head. The strangers were gone!
Miguel stepped forward as the rumbles grew louder. Milo glanced back before hurrying forward, and Miguel was quick to follow.
Milo stopped sharply. Coming alongside him, Miguel started to ask what was wrong, when he froze as well. He barely heard the crash of stone behind him, or the slowing of the digger’s engines.
He snapped back to the present when he was suddenly grabbed from behind, and Tulio’s voice shouting in his ear.
“What were you thinking?!”
“Like I chose to fall out of the truck!” Miguel yelped, driving Tulio off him with an elbow. “Where were you?! ”
Tulio huffed, then hugged Miguel. Miguel didn’t have time to react before Tulio shoved him back.
“Just don’t do it again,” Tulio muttered.
“Yes, yes, I’ll try to not fall down another cliff,” Miguel snorted.
Tulio shook his head. “Now, what is everyone looking at…”
Miguel grinned at Tulio and the rest of the crew stopping and staring. He turned to get a better look himself.
The ground fell away before them. Far, far below, lava churned in the enormous bowl before them. In the center of the pool was a massive pillar of stone that rose almost level to where the crew stood. Atop the pillar was, somehow, impossibly, a city!
And in the city…
Miguel rubbed his eyes, sure he was seeing things. Because there seemed to be some sort of winged creatures soaring over the decrepit buildings. And between the buildings, where water flowed to continuously pour over the edges of the pillar, there was more movement, too far away to make out clearly.
Miguel was pulled back to his immediate surroundings when half the crew turned suddenly with startled noises. Miguel dragged his gaze from the city to behind them.
The digger sat silent in the rubble of the stone wall. Behind it, Miguel could see some of the other vehicles. More pressing, however, was the four strangers, who now stood between the crew and their vehicles. Every mask was down and every spear was pointed at the crew. Miguel wondered worriedly what had caused the strangers’ friendliness to disappear.
One of the strangers -the woman from before, Miguel thought- stood up straight and said something sharply in a language Miguel had never heard before. Beside him, Milo inhaled sharply.
“That’s Atlantean,” Milo whispered.
The woman spoke again. Mole tugged on Milo’s arm and said something to him. Milo glanced at Mole, then the crew.
"It’s an act,” Miguel whispered encouragingly. “Don’t forget, she’s already helped us both. She wouldn’t have done that if they were just going to attack us.”
Tulio and Audrey looked sharply at Miguel.
“I’ll explain later,” Miguel said. He shrugged. “You know, if they don’t kill us all first.”
Milo took a bracing breath, then said something haltingly. The woman responded. Milo stepped closer, gesturing with his hands at the crew as he continued speaking, his words coming slowly.
The woman reached up and removed the mask. Miguel heard half the crew gasp, and grinned. The woman’s eyes darted to Miguel’s face, then back to Milo as she spoke. Milo responded, more confidently than before.
Miguel’s head moved back-and-forth as the pair exchanged words. Milo began to smile, and the woman’s tense posture relaxed. Giving a mischievous grin, Milo said something that was still an unfamiliar language, but the intonations had changed. The woman responded in kind, smiling.
“That was Latin,” Tulio muttered to Miguel.
“How many languages do these two know?” Miguel asked with a snicker.
Milo again changed languages, holding his hands out in a friendly gesture. A broad smile spread across the woman’s face as she responded.
Mole suddenly exclaimed something. Miguel raised an eyebrow as Mole stepped right up to the woman, speaking in a strange language. He waved a hand down at the woman, who obligingly leaned down so Mole could whisper in her ear.
After a moment, the woman scowled, then leaned back and punched Mole in the face, knocking him over backward. Miguel and Tulio backed sharply away, then jumped when Sweet started clapping with a huge smile on his face.
“It’s about time someone hit him,” Audrey said with a snort. “Too bad it wasn’t me.”
Miguel relaxed as the other strangers removed their masks and stepped forward with friendly smiles. Mole scurried to the back, but others of the crew met the strangers, all of them speaking in strange languages.
“That’s not English, is it?” Miguel asked.
“I don’t think so,” Tulio said slowly, his expression still wary.
“It isn’t!” Milo exclaimed happily. “It’s Latin, Italian-”
Milo trailed off to ramble something in English, then jumped when Rourke put a hand on his shoulder. Miguel couldn’t help tensing at the barely noticeable tension in Rourke’s smile.
Rourke said something in English, spreading his hands as if to indicate he was being friendly.
The woman in front -the leader, Miguel was sure by now- responded in what Miguel recognized as English. She spread her hands and gestured to the city on the pillar, only one word clear to Miguel.
“Atlantis,” Miguel breathed. “Tulio, we found it!”
Miguel spun to his friend, then hesitated. Tulio was frowning and his eyes, fixed on the city, seemed a bit distant.
“Tulio? What’s wrong?” Miguel asked.
“Is he hurt?” asked one of the strangers, materializing at Miguel’s side.
“Ah!” Miguel yelped, startling Tulio so he jerked away. “Wait. You speak Spanish!”
The stranger, who looked barely beyond his teen years, gave a clearly nervous smile. “If that’s what you call this dialect, yes, I do. We speak many languages, some of us more than others. Is your friend hurt?”
Tulio shook his head. “No, I’m perfectly healthy.”
The young man shrugged and looked away. Miguel’s shoulders slumped when he saw Milo and Audrey with Rourke, all of them talking with Helga, Sweet, and the leader of the strangers.
“What’s wrong?” the young man asked.
“We don’t speak English,” Miguel said.
“Miguel,” Tulio hissed.
The young man looked confused for a moment, then looked between the Spaniards and the rest of the crew. He jolted.
“Oh! The princess is asking if they want to visit the city.”
“The who is what?” Tulio asked.
“The princess. Princess Kida.” The man looked between them again. “Do you want to see the city as well?”
Miguel nodded eagerly. Tulio nodded as well, though more slowly, as Milo darted over. His eyes were alight with excitement.
“They’ve invited us into the city!” Milo exclaimed happily.
“We heard,” Miguel said, grinning at Milo’s confused face. He pointed to the young man beside them. “We’ve got another translator… huh, I didn’t get your name.”
“Jaius,” the young man answered. He glanced aside as the crew started to move away, but didn’t seem interested in joining them.
“I’m Miguel,” Miguel said. “That’s Tulio and Milo.”
Jaius offered a small bow and again glanced at the crew. This time, Miguel noticed a flicker of unease in his gaze.
Of course, a city that was underground and underwater didn’t often have visitors.
Jaius collected himself as the lead woman - Princess Kida - walked up and spoke. Jaius responded, gesturing to each of the trio and listing their names. Princess Kida gave what sounded like a greeting, smiling apologetically.
“Unfortunately, Kida doesn’t know this dialect,” Jaius explained. “Few do.”
“Yeah, most of our caravan doesn’t,” Miguel said, shrugging. He tilted his head. “I thought she was a princess, though.”
“She is,” Jaius said, frowning in confusion.
“I’m guessing she isn’t the sort to have everyone bow when they talk to her,” Miguel said.
Jaius laughed. “No, no! The older guards and scouts do, but they’re very formal sometimes. Kida prefers to not even use her titles.”
Jaius and Kida exchanged a few more words, then Kida nodded. Waving to the other two strangers -Atlanteans, real Atlanteans , Miguel was having deja vu of finding El Dorado- Kida walked away with them. Jaius remained at their side.
“Since the others don’t speak this dialect, Kida asked me to guide you three,” Jaius said. He jumped when Altivo nudged his shoulder. “Hello. Your animal, what is he?”
“Altivo’s a horse,” Miguel said. He grinned when Jaius rubbed Altivo’s nose. “Well, you two made friends fast. If I didn’t know any better, I’d think you two had met.”
Jaius’s shoulders twitched.
Tulio slowly raised his eyebrows. “Have you been watching us?”
“Yes,” Jaius admitted. He hesitated, then explained, “The four of us are long-range scouts. We were making sure none of the creatures had strayed too close to the city’s entrance and checking paths, when we first found you. Last night, we… well, we checked out the camp.”
“So that’s how you showed up so quickly!” Miguel exclaimed, ignoring how Tulio’s eyes narrowed.
Jaius nodded, looking sheepish. He pointed at the crew returning to the trucks.
“Come. I can explain more in the city if you want,” Jaius said.
Miguel looked at Tulio, who nodded and muttered, “Yeah, I have a lot of questions.”
Notes:
Welcome to the city of Atlantis~
Poor Miguel and Tulio really can't catch a break in the language department. (Or the nap department.) I got pretty attached to Jaius' character, so I decided to just. Make him a more significant character. XD
Chapter 13: Cultural Exchange
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Tulio was starting to think the universe hated him.
Two different myths. Two different cities that had supposedly been destroyed or lost centuries before. Two different maps that had come from the most inexplicable places. And he and Miguel had managed to stumble across both.
Or maybe they were just really lucky, but Tulio didn’t think so. Not with the impassible stone roof overhead, even if it was hidden in the shadows.
They’d found Atlantis. And now they were going to spend the rest of their lives there.
Tulio shook his head. None of the crew seemed worried about being trapped, even though their submarines had been badly damaged by the machine guarding the gate. They had to have some sort of plan to get back to the surface, though Audrey had remained tight-lipped about escaping and Milo hadn’t had any better luck with the rest of the crew.
Tulio looked at the city on the other end of the bridge, then behind him. Why Rourke thought it was a good idea to drive two trucks across the bridge was beyond Tulio.
Milo sat in the frontmost truck, beside Helga and Rourke. Rourke had insisted Milo ride with him. Tulio suspected it was because he wanted to know everything about Atlantis, though Rourke appeared to be regretting his decision. He had his elbow braced on the door of the truck and his chin on his hand, his eyes glazed while Milo happily rambled in between furious notes in his notebook.
“Tulio, are you alright?” Miguel asked, turning slightly where he sat in front of Tulio on Altivo.
Tulio nodded. He hadn’t mentioned the panic attack, but Miguel knew Tulio well enough to know that something had happened while they’d been separated. He didn’t push, instead looking at Jaius, who was walking alongside Altivo.
“Those crystals of yours,” Miguel said. “They have healing powers?”
Tulio leaned forward. “What?”
“Milo and I were hurt when we fell,” Miguel said. “But Kida healed us.”
Jauis nodded. “They do have healing powers, among other things. We use them for light and to power our globes. Some say the crystals can be used for more, but how has been lost.”
“Lost?” Tulio repeated.
“In the Great Flood,” Jaius said.
“When the city was buried,” Tulio guessed.
Jauis shot him a surprised look. “How did you know?”
“Lucky guess,” Tulio said, waving a hand. “The myths about Atlantis always mention it was swallowed by the ocean.”
Jaius nodded sadly. “I can’t remember what life was like on the surface. Nobody does, except for maybe the king.”
“Why would you remember? And how could the king?” Miguel asked. “That happened thousands of years ago!”
Jaius smiled and touched his crystal. “It’s true, then, that the crystals give us long lives.”
Tulio raised a finger to make a point, then forgot what it was. He settled on, “Huh?”
“I am…” Jaius stared at the ceiling, flickering his fingers like he was counting, then finished, “I’m 8,728 years old.”
Miguel laughed. “Nice, you almost fooled me.”
Jaius looked genuinely confused. “How old are you?”
“I don’t know,” Miguel said, shrugging. “I’m in my twenties, I think.”
“Twenty thousands?” Jaius said, nodding. “Many lose count after ten thousand. I intend to keep counting until I die, though.”
“No, no,” Miguel said, chuckling. “Twenties as in, I’m between twenty and thirty years old.”
Jaius stared at him with wide eyes. “You’re only a baby!”
From behind came snorting laughter from Audrey. Tulio glanced back, surprised to find her walking close enough to listen. Miguel struggled for an answer, but he started laughing too hard to respond in the end. Jaius grinned, looking like he thought they were joking.
Tulio shook his head. “It’s true.”
Jaius blinked. “Twenty… but it’s so little time!”
“And yet so much can happen,” Tulio muttered.
“Very… very long lives,” Miguel said to Jaius between his laughter, having not heard Tulio. “How do you not get bored?”
The “underground in a lost city” went unspoken.
“That’s why I volunteered for scouting,” Jaius admitted. “Most people try scouting for a few thousand years or so. But after the latest mission, I think I’ll stick to making maps.”
“Maps,” Tulio repeated, glancing back at Milo. “Is there a map to the surface?”
“Just the gate where you entered,” Jaius said.
“Great,” Tulio muttered.
“But, you came here looking for Atlantis. Didn’t you plan on getting back out?”
“We did, but the monster guarding the gate broke our way out,” Tulio said. He looked up as Altivo stepped off the swaying bridge.
Instantly, Tulio forgot about the conversation with Jaius. They’d arrived on a broad stone courtyard with tables holding more of the masks and spears. Winding paths paved with carved stepping stones lead in various directions. Several of the paths led to lakes, which seemed to take up much of the city. Atlanteans worked in wooden boats, pulling out nets full of strange-looking fish. Another path led through a row of crumbling stone buildings, many of them with canopies and tables set up outside them. Atlanteans, all of them white-haired and wearing a blue crystal around their necks, stood throughout the city.
While only half of the caravan had crossed the bridge, Tulio realized how visible and noisy they would have been in crossing the bridge with the trucks. Many of the Atlanteans were staring at them, and a few had gathered at the edge of the platform.
“Well, this is a bigger entrance than I thought,” Jaius commented.
Kida laid her spear and mask on a table and spoke loudly. The Atlanteans parted, but nobody stopped staring.
Tulio couldn’t blame them, but he didn’t like all the eyes on him. The only time he liked attention was when a con called for it, usually when he and Miguel were holding one of their mock sword fights. Tulio slid to the ground, using Altivo as a shield from some of the stares.
Kida led the way through the city. Tulio looked past the wide-eyed stares to the buildings. Ivy and vines covered many walls, and many of the stone-carved buildings had at least one wall that was crumbling and in the process of being rebuilt. Curtains were used in place of doors and windows. Interestingly, the least rundown of the buildings were built of wood.
“Where did the wood come from?” Tulio quietly asked Jaius, as he hadn’t seen any trees in the city.
“Some trees grow among the ruins, but new wood is rarely cut. Most of the wood has been here since the Great Flood,” Jaius explained.
It took Tulio a moment to get past the first part of Jaius’ statement. What did he mean by “the ruins,” when the entire city looked like it was built in the ruins of a lost civilization?
“How has the wood lasted so long?” Tulio had to ask.
“They were preserved somehow, long ago. The method has been lost with time,” Jaius said.
Tulio silently wondered just how much the Atlanteans had apparently forgotten. And how had they forgotten what seemed like a very significant technique?
The path began to wind upward, until they arrived at the entrance of a tall stone building with large, open windows high in the walls. The doors were made of wood and looked heavy. Unlike the other buildings, two guards stood outside the doors, both armed with spears and wearing unfriendly scowls.
Kida gestured for everyone to wait, then walked up the steps leading to the building to speak to the guards. Miguel dismounted, lightly bumping Tulio’s shoulder. Milo stumbled out of the truck, putting his notebook inside his satchel. He raised the Journal, flipping through the pages.
Tulio went to Milo’s side. “So, what’re you thinking?”
“Thinking? I don’t know what to think!” Milo exclaimed. “In all my years of research and during this entire journey, not once did I think anyone could live down here! How can they grow crops for foods and medicines? What powers their lights, and where did the wood come from?”
“The wood’s been here as long as them,” Tulio said. When Milo’s head shot up, Tulio said with a grin, “You should’ve crossed the bridge with an Atlantean.”
“I got distracted by the Journal,” Milo mumbled sheepishly, looking away when Kida returned.
Kida spoke to Rourke, who responded with a kind expression. Even without understanding what was being said, Tulio could tell he was putting on an act. He nudged Milo, who had again been distracted by the Journal.
“What are they saying?” Tulio asked.
Jaius joined them with Miguel, looking worried. “Is something wrong?”
Tulio shook his head. “I just want to know what’s going on.”
“Oh.” Jaius’ expression cleared as he explained, “The king doesn’t see visitors very often, even visitors from the surface world. Kida is deciding who will see him.”
“You’d better get in line, Milo,” Tulio said.
Milo looked startled. “Me? I don’t know how to act around a king!”
Jaius smiled. “The king is fond of the old ways, so bow when you speak to him unless he bids you to rise. Just be respectful and honest.”
“And that’s why it needs to be you in there,” Miguel said, poking Milo’s shoulder. “Imagine you’re talking to the… Board, you called them? From your old job.”
“Most likely, Kida will do the talking,” Jaius went on encouragingly. “The king may ask you why you’ve come to Atlantis and… well, how you plan on returning.”
Jaius looked troubled at the thought. But Kida called to him before anyone could respond.
“All the scouts must be there for the report,” Jaius said with an apologetic smile. “I’ll be back soon, and show you the city if the king permits you to stay.”
Jaius, with Milo behind, walked away. Tulio watched them, trying to keep his expression neutral.
“Tulio?” Miguel muttered through a fake smile. “Are you thinking what I’m thinking?”
“That the king won’t appreciate visitors? Yeah,” Tulio muttered back. “Maybe we shouldn’t have let Milo in there.”
“Except Milo makes friends with everyone, and that might save us,” Miguel said.
“Against the chances of Rourke rubbing the king the wrong way, or worse? Rourke came here for treasure. I don’t think the city being inhabited will change his mind,” Tulio said.
Tulio and Miguel exchanged glances. Tulio knew they were both remembering Cortes.
“Don’t suppose it’s too late to collapse the passage here?” Tulio asked, only half joking.
“Too late for that. Besides, where would we get a boat big enough?” Miguel asked with a chuckle.
Tulio just sighed.
“Tulio? What’s wrong?” Miguel asked.
“Nothing.”
Miguel kept staring at Tulio. Sweet and Audrey were starting to glance over at the pair, so Tulio relented.
“I’m just tired, Miguel.”
Miguel’s face betrayed nothing, but Tulio knew him well enough to see the worry in his eyes as he asked, “Are the dreams still getting worse?”
“Yes… but I had a panic attack after the bridge collapsed,” Tulio said, keeping his expression carefully neutral. “Audrey and Sweet saw it.”
Miguel sucked in a sharp breath, brows creasing before he caught himself and smoothed his expression. He gave a very pointed look at the stone bench nearby.
Tulio shook his head. “I’m not letting down my guard. Not yet.”
“Tulio,” Miguel prodded, “If you don’t sit down and drink something, you’re going to pass out.”
Tulio gave him a hard look, but Miguel didn’t back down. Tulio sighed. If they’d been on the surface, away from prying eyes, he knew Miguel would’ve dragged him back to their current hideout to rest. And with the adrenaline all but gone, he could feel himself getting shaky. Tulio sat, if nothing else than to avoid falling.
Funnily enough, the crew seemed to take Tulio sitting down as their cue to sit down or lean against the vehicles themselves. Sweet collected canteens from the back of the nearest truck and began passing them out.
Tulio looked away from the crew, to where the Atlanteans were waiting down the path. They stared up at the crew with open curiosity. Tulio didn’t see any hostility in their eyes; at most, a few were understandably wary.
Miguel followed Tulio’s gaze, then grinned and waved a hand. This seemed to startle the Atlanteans, as they froze.
Then, a boy standing at the front gave a gap-toothed grin and waved back. Smiles and chuckles spread through the Atlanteans and crew. Nobody got closer, each side waiting for word from the king, it seemed, but Tulio could feel the tension ease.
Not that Tulio was about to relax. He was keenly aware that the crew was outnumbered by the Atlanteans. If the king decided he wanted them gone, the crew would have no say in it.
Tulio frowned slightly, frustrated at the lack of treasure. Maybe the universe really did hate him, mocking him with the appearance of lost cities and either no way to bring the treasure out or no treasure to speak of.
Unless he counted the crystals. Milo had already theorized about the Atlanteans having some kind of power source, and Jaius had explained that they powered the city lights and had some sort of healing ability. Those would be worth money, but Tulio highly doubted that the Atlantean crystals were given to strangers.
Tulio shook his head. They’d probably be lucky to escape to the surface with their lives, never mind treasure. He sighed.
As if sensing his line of thought, Miguel looked at him and smiled sympathetically.
“It was fun getting here, right?” Miguel offered.
Tulio raised an eyebrow. “Oh, yes, the almost dying a dozen times was loads of fun.”
“It was an adventure,” Miguel insisted.
Tulio snorted. Maybe once they were on the surface and Tulio could see the sun again, he’d find amusement in their current predicament.
Sweet joined them, offering a canteen and the hard biscuits that, as far as Tulio could guess, had been made months in advance of the expedition. Tulio set about gnawing on it in an effort to keep Sweet from asking questions.
It didn’t work.
“Miguel,” Audrey said, joining them at a gesture from Sweet, “Sweet said he needs to check you out.”
“I’m fine, not a scratch on me,” Miguel said, waving a hand.
Audrey raised an eyebrow. “After that fall? Sure.”
“No, really, I…” Miguel trailed off, but there wasn’t any avoiding explaining, not with Sweet. “The Atlanteans’ crystal, they can heal wounds. Milo and I were both healed by the four we first met.”
“Healing? Milo said the crystals powered machines,” Audrey said.
Miguel shrugged. “Maybe different crystals do different things? All I know is, my ankle was almost broken when we fell, but it feels as good as new now.”
Audrey and Sweet exchanged a few words and a look. Sweet looked eager, which made sense for the doctor. Audrey… Tulio couldn’t read her expression very well. Or maybe he was, but why would she look so regretful?
Tulio slid his eyes over to the door where Rourke had gone through. Rourke wasn’t seriously planning on…
Of course he was. Rourke and his crew were there for treasure. Tulio suspected they’d do whatever it took to get some.
While Tulio was watching the doors, they opened. He quickly stood, drawing everyone’s gazes. They turned to the doors as well.
Rourke and Helga left the building, neither looking happy. Milo trailed behind, his face a mixture of awe and concern.
“Come on,” Tulio said, swatting Miguel and Audrey’s arms. “I want to know what’s happening this time.”
Milo was talking to the crew while they approached. His attention strayed to the Journal, then to Tulio and Miguel. He offered a weak smile.
“The king is allowing us to stay the night, but we have to leave in the morning,” Milo said.
Tulio sighed. “At least he’s allowing us to leave.”
Milo frowned. “Why wouldn’t he?”
“His people have been hidden away for thousands of years. Some people might want to keep it that way,” Tulio pointed out.
Milo cleared his throat awkwardly. Tulio raised an eyebrow. Milo looked everywhere but at him for a moment, then hunched his shoulders at Tulio’s stare.
“The king did mention something about outsiders being killed.”
Tulio, Miguel, and Audrey flinched. Milo hurriedly waved his hands in a gesture to calm down.
“Kida opposed her father when he said that, and the king didn’t really push it,” Milo told them.
“He might want to see how we get to the surface,” Tulio said. He glanced at Audrey. “Rourke did plan on that, right?”
“Of course he did,” Audrey said. “That tunnel where we fell? Mole said it’s the base of a dormant volcano, and it’s possible it goes all the way to the surface.”
“...okay, but how are we going to climb all that way?” Miguel asked, wide-eyed.
“We shouldn’t have to,” Audrey said. “Not as long as the balloon wasn’t destroyed when everything fell, at least.”
The three men stared at her.
“The what?” Milo asked.
Tulio and Miguel glanced at each other. They weren’t familiar enough with modern machinery to know half of what they’d found stashed in the back of the trucks, and hadn’t had time to have Milo poke around and explain them.
“You’ll see it when we use it,” Audrey said.
Their discussion was interrupted by Rourke clapping a hand on Milo’s shoulder. Milo jumped and turned to the bigger man. The two exchanged words, and Milo’s expression scrunched in confusion while Audrey grinned.
“This’ll be good,” Audrey laughed as Rourke pulled Milo away.
“What will?” Tulio asked warily.
“Looks like they decided Milo was going to go talk to the princess and see if he can help sway her into convincing the king to let us stay longer,” Audrey explained.
There was a long pause. Milo looked more and more confused and flustered with each passing second.
“Tell me nobody’s telling Milo to… flirt with the princess,” Tulio said.
“Yep, that is their entire plan right there.”
Tulio rubbed his forehead. “Oh, we are so going to die.”
Miguel bumped his shoulder. “Didn’t I already say that Milo makes friends with everyone? Have a little faith in him!”
Tulio shot him a dry look that had Audrey cackling. Miguel grinned back and gestured to the crew, who were starting up the trucks and heading down the hill.
The sound of the door opening drew Tulio’s attention. The scouts -minus Kida- exited and went down to the crew. Sweet met them halfway, and Tulio had a pretty good guess what he was asking them about.
Jaius dodged past them and rejoined Tulio, Miguel, and Audrey. His expression wasn’t as relaxed as before, putting Tulio instantly on edge. Thankfully, Miguel stepped in.
“Milo gave us the news that we’ve only got one day before we have to go,” Miguel said.
Jaius nodded awkwardly. “Sorry, but it’s an old law. I’d forgotten about it, really.”
“You don’t get many visitors here, I’m sure,” Miguel chuckled. He gestured to the city as a whole. “How did all this get down here, anyway? And the tunnels?”
“The city sank.” Jaius looked troubled. “I’m too young to remember the Great Flood myself, and nobody else talks about it. The tunnels have always been there, though, according to the elders. It was a secret path that led to Atlantis before it sank, and where we kept our histories.”
Jaius glanced over his shoulder at Sweet. “He’s asking a lot of questions about the crystal.”
“I told him about the princess healing me and Milo,” Miguel explained. “And he’s a doctor, so he wants to know how it works.”
“It’s just how it is,” Jaius said, looking amused. “The Heart beats through all of our crystals, keeping us alive and healthy. How does your healing work?”
“You mash some plants, smear it on the wound, wrap it up, and hope you live through the night,” Miguel said.
Audrey grinned. “I’m telling Sweet that.”
Miguel grinned back.
“Your crystals,” Tulio began slowly, thinking of some of Milo’s theories, “Can they power machines?”
“Once, I think. But the method was lost,” Jaius said, shaking his head. He pointed to the trucks. “What makes your machines move? What powers them?”
“An engine,” Miguel said promptly. “It drinks a liquid called gasoline to move.”
Audrey’s brows rose. “That’s… one way to put it.”
“That’s how Milo explained it,” Miguel said with a shrug.
“Milo. Who you first met a couple weeks ago? And you’ve never seen an engine before that?” Audrey asked with clear incredulity. “ Did you grow up under a rock?”
“What’s wrong with growing up under a rock?” Jaius asked, grinning.
“No machines to work on,” Audrey responded.
“And where does-” Jaius stopped and shook his head. “I’m sorry, I’ve been just talking when you all probably need to rest before your journey home. Come, I’ll take you to my house, and you can rest there.”
“I’m out,” Audrey said, waving a hand. “I’m not sure I could handle any more of you guys explaining machines,”
“It’s not that bad,” Miguel said in mock offense.
Tulio just nodded. He’d spotted Rourke signaling Audrey to join him and Helga. He had a pretty good idea of what was going to follow. He briefly worried about leaving Milo in case Rourke decided to attack the city, but if that happened, Milo was probably the safest of them all. Somewhat fluent in Atlantean as he was, he’d probably already made friends with the king and princess. As long as nobody had convinced Milo to do something stupid, because something told him Kida wouldn’t appreciate being used.
“Let’s go. And we can talk while we walk,” Tulio said. “I still want to know about your city, and how things work.”
“Only if you tell me about the surface,” Jaius bargained.
“Naturally!” Miguel said as they started walking. “What’s your first question?”
Jaius opened his mouth, hesitated, then smiled sheepishly. “I never really thought about the surface, I guess. What do you miss the most?”
“The sun,” Tulio said without hesitation. At Jaius’ curious look, Tulio said , “I’m used to the sun being in the sky all day, not the constant darkness.”
“It’s not entirely dark here,” Jaius said, looking genuinely confused.
Tulio shrugged.
“It’s a little hard to explain when you grew up underground. And underwater,” Miguel said. “Have any of you tried to get to the surface?”
“Some have, long ago.” Jaius looked troubled as he explained. “Ages ago, a hundred years after the Great Flood, the soldiers who survived convinced the king that the surface must have been safe by then. They went to the gate and just… never returned.”
Tulio remembered the guardian of the gate. Would the Atlantean beast have attacked Atlanteans? He almost asked, but it was clearly an uncomfortable topic for Jaius.
“So how did you get down here?” Jaius asked.
“Submersibles, a kind of machine that can go underwater. Then we walked.”
Tulio looked at the courtyard they were passing, smiling when he saw a cluster of children around Mole, who was looking more than a little overwhelmed by their chattering in a variety of languages.
“But, how did you get past the Leviathan at the gate?”
“You know about that?” Tulio asked, surprise bringing his gaze back to Jaius.
“Everyone does. The Leviathan was made to protect the tunnels,” Jaius explained. “It is supposed to keep all ships away.”
“Well, it did its job pretty well,” Tulio said. “Our submersible was destroyed. Most of the caravan’s were as well.”
“Why would you have something guard the tunnels that nobody could pass?” Miguel asked.
“It won’t attack anyone holding a crystal,” Jaius explained, touching his.
“That’s one way to keep non-Atlanteans out of the city,” Tulio commented.
As Tulio had hoped, Jaius shook his head. “I’ve heard the elders tell of the ceremonies of giving an Atlantean crystal to a very close ally or friend.”
Tulio and Miguel exchanged a look. So it was possible to get a crystal without being Atlantean!
“So, I have to ask,” Miguel asked with a grin.
Jaius smiled back, but shook his head. “All Atlanteans are given their crystal by the king at their birth. I don’t know where they come from.”
“Well, it was worth a shot, considering how far we came,” Miguel said with a shrug.
“Can non-Atlanteans even use the powers of the crystal?” Tulio asked, intrigued.
“I think so, though I’ve never seen anyone who wasn’t Atlantean use one.”
Jaius looked around, then led the pair to a small wooden pavilion at the edge of the water. He took an orb from where it hung on a hook, then shocked Tulio by removing his crystal and holding it out to him!
“Is that allowed?” Tulio asked, keeping his hands firmly clamped at his side.
“Nobody’s ever told me it wasn’t allowed,” Jaius said, still offering the crystal.
…Tulio wondered if all Atlanteans were as wildly trusting as Milo, or if it was just Jaius. Or maybe that’s why the Atlanteans had allowed the crew to wander the city so freely. Milo would definitely fit in with them.
Tulio carefully took the crystal, unsure of what to expect. The crystal felt like a normal crystal.
Studying the crystal in his hand, Tulio did notice a faint warmth coming from the crystal. Maybe it was just because Jaius had been wearing it, but Tulio suspected it was more than that.
“It feels… alive?” Tulio said slowly, feeling a little foolish.
Jaius nodded eagerly. “Yes, that’s how it is!”
“Alive?” Miguel pressed against Tulio’s side. “Let me try!”
Tulio held it out, and Miguel reverently took the crystal. His expression briefly became baffled as he tried to understand the strange feeling of the crystal, then he simply smiled.
“It does more than that, too,” Jaius said, smiling. He held up the orb. “Touch it to the lightglobe.”
Shrugging, Miguel did as he was told. He and Tulio jumped when the orb began to glow!
“It…” Miguel looked from the orb to the crystal, then back. “How?”
“I don’t know if anyone knows how it works,” Jaius said. “How do you make light on the surface if you don’t have crystals?”
“Candles, where Tulio and I come from. But the surface has electricity!” Miguel said. He paused. “I don’t know how it works, though. Milo or Audrey could tell you, I bet. But it makes bulbs glow in buildings and in vehicles.”
Miguel held out the crystal to Jaius, who shook his head and gestured for Tulio to try. Tulio took the crystal and touched it to the lightglobe, making it glow brighter. Tulio stared at the light while giving Jaius back the crystal.
“It’s like magic,” Tulio murmured.
“Maybe it is,” Jaius said casually.
Tulio looked away from the lightglobe, spotting more along the path. Several of the crew were watching Atlanteans light the pathway, though none of them were allowed to hold a crystal. Sweet with sitting with a trio of elder Atlanteans in another pavilion, Packard was surrounded by a group of young men, and Cookie was at the docks inspecting some sort of creature in a bucket that Tulio really hoped wasn’t going to be lunch. He even spotted Milo, walking further along the shore with Kida, both of them gesturing wildly while they spoke.
Tulio shook his head, again surprised by how welcoming the Atlanteans were. Maybe he shouldn’t have been surprised, since the people of El Dorado had welcomed him and Miguel so readily.
Ignoring that they’d all thought the two of them were gods.
Tulio’s attention was caught by one of the trucks starting across the bridge. He could see Rourke in the driver’s seat, leaning out of the slow-moving truck to look over the city. Was he, like Tulio, grudgingly coming to terms with the fact that there was no treasure for them in the city? Unless there were some spare crystals laying around…
“Tulio?”
Tulio turned back to Miguel and Jaius. “What?”
“Have you heard anything we just said?” Miguel asked.
Tulio didn’t respond, not wanting to admit he’d been zoned out for some minutes. Jaius grew worried again.
“There I went talking again. Come, it’s quiet at my place. You can rest there, and we can talk later,” Jaius said.
“I’ve already said I’m fine,” Tulio protested with no real force behind his words.
Miguel just gave him a worried smile.
“Where’s Altivo and Ladron?” Tulio asked, suddenly aware that he hadn’t seen either for some time.
“Altivo went after Milo and Kida,” Miguel said. He looked up the slope. “I think the kids with Mole are using Ladron to play ball. But stop changing the subject. Come on!”
Tulio turned and followed Jaius without comment. He smiled when he passed Vinny, who was looking cowed. Tulio couldn’t understand what Sunzu and the other Atlanteans were saying, but it sounded a lot like scolding. The crew in earshot were watching with amusement, so Tulio wasn’t worried. He was distracted a moment later by a cluster of children laughing and showing Cookie how to peel some sort of fruit.
“Tulio!”
Tulio blinked and looked at Miguel. “What?”
Miguel tugged on Tulio’s arm, guiding him into one of the buildings. The interior was rather plain, with stone walls and benches carved directly into the walls. Blankets and pillows on the benches, as well as colorful rugs, made the space more homey, and the broken spear under one bench and eating utensils stacked neatly on a shelf were further proof it was someone’s home. A fishing net was strung across the hole in the ceiling -Tulio couldn’t tell if the hole was intentional or not- and a collection of shells and colorful stones dangled from the net, casting shadows on the wall from the light of a lightglobe in the center of the room.
“I don’t get much company,” Jaius said, kicking the broken spear further under the bench.
“I’ve seen worse,” Miguel assured him, clapping a hand on his back.
Jaius smiled and reached up with his crystal to brighten the lightglobe.
“Sit, sit,” Jaius urged.
Tulio sat among the pillows and blankets, which were piled high enough that Tulio could barely tell he was sitting on stone.
“What’s this made of?” Tulio asked, rubbing a corner of the blanket between his fingers.
“Cotton. We grow it on the other side of the city,” Jaius said.
Tulio and Miguel stared at him.
“Oh, is there not cotton on the surface?” Jaius asked.
“No, there is,” Miguel said, smiling. “It just feels so ordinary after hearing about your magic crystals and wood that’s been preserved to last for thousands of years.”
“And those are so commonplace for me,” Jaius chuckled. “Yet, to see the sun… or a horizon.”
Tulio leaned against the wall. “A horizon? …yes, without a sky, I suppose there aren’t any horizons.”
“Exactly!” Jaius took a bucket of water from a hook beside the door. “My grandmother used to say it was like standing at the foot of a steep path and looking up, and the horizon was where the top of the path seemed to touch the ceiling.”
“I never thought of it like that,” Tulio mused.
Jaius nodded as he scooped water from the bucket with mugs that looked to be made of clay, though it was very thin and light when Tulio took the mug.
“And your cups?” Tulio asked.
Vaguely, Tulio wondered if he should be asking about more important things, like the crystals and about the rule about killing outsiders, but… well, Tulio was having a hard time focusing on anything beyond what was in his hand at that moment. Which probably should’ve been a cause for alarm, but the cup in his hand was easier to think about.
“Tulio?”
The cup was taken from Tulio’s hands, breaking his concentration. He looked up, scowling at Miguel’s frown.
“What?” Tulio asked, the word coming out slowly.
Miguel shook his head with a sigh and handed the mug to Jaius. “I told you that you needed to take a break. Come on, lay back.”
Tulio fended off Miguel’s hands trying to slide him sideways. “‘M fine.”
Miguel crossed his arms and raised an eyebrow. Tulio met his stare and tried to sit up straight before realizing moving was too much effort. But that was fine; he could still ask questions and learn more about Atlantis, even if he was slowly, steadily drooping further to the side, and each blink seemed to last longer than the last.
Tulio didn’t know when he fell asleep. Only when the nightmares started.
Notes:
As much as I'd love to say that things will get better soon... -gestures to ten remaining chapters- this isn't just exploring the city.
And I know I keep saying that various chapters are one of my favorites, so let me put it this way instead, the next two chapters have some of my favorite Tulio scenes.Teaser warning~
I didn't have any bits from Milo or Kida's perspective, because their scenes during this time remain unchanged, just with some Altivo-related questions. Once they reach the murals, though, that's when things start to change. >:D
Chapter 14: Let the Games Begin
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Jaius jumped when Tulio finally slumped onto his side, eyes closed. “Is he alright?”
“He’s fine, just stubborn,” Miguel said cheerfully.
Miguel grabbed Tulio’s legs and lifted them onto the bench. Tulio’s position -half on his side and half on his back, with a pillow propping his hip up- didn’t look overly comfortable, but Miguel was worried that adjusting Tulio would wake him up.
“We called him the dreamer.”
Miguel looked up at Jaius’ quiet words. “Who did? When?”
“Kida, Salus, Sunzu, and I. We’ve been watching you three since the statue of the weeping king.”
It took Miguel a moment to piece together what statue Jaius would have meant. When he did, his brows rose.
“For so long? Why didn’t you approach us until we got so close to Atlantis?” Miguel asked.
“We didn’t know if you were looking for the city, or if you’d even get so far. And we needed to know if you were dangerous,” Jaius said.
“Makes sense.” Miguel looked down at Tulio’s face, troubled even in sleep. “So, you’ve seen him dreaming?”
“And heard him,” Jaius said, wincing slightly. “What does he dream about?”
“Tulio wouldn’t want me to talk about it,” Miguel said.
Jaius was quiet. In front of them, Tulio began to stir restlessly. He mumbled, hands twitching.
Miguel winced. Tulio couldn’t get five minutes of rest without the nightmares plaguing him. Between lack of sleep and his earlier panic attack, it was no wonder he’d been on the verge of collapse.
“Can I…?” Jaius trailed off, touching his crystal.
When Miguel didn’t protest, Jaius knelt in front of Tulio and touched the crystal to Tulio’s forehead. The crystal briefly glowed, then the glow faded as Tulio finally relaxed, letting out a heavy sigh. Startled, Miguel looked at Jaius.
“Another use of the crystals is to calm dreams,” Jaius explained.
“Wish we’d had that on the way down here,” Miguel said, shaking his head. “And thank you. Do you know how long it will keep his nightmares away?”
“It should last as long as he’s asleep,” Jaius said, putting his crystal back on. He gestured to the bench opposite of Tulio. “Did you wish to sleep as well?”
“Nah, I’ve gotten more sleep than Tulio has. I have more questions, if you don’t mind answering them,” Miguel said.
Jaius nodded with a smile. “As long as you’ll answer some of mine as well. Come, there’s a bench near the path where we can talk so Tulio won’t be disturbed.”
Miguel quickly agreed and followed Jaius outside. He grinned and looked up the path at shrieks of laughter. Sweet had joined the children, playing a game that seemed to involve a lot of throwing ball-Ladron at Vinny.
“Hey, do you know why everyone’s being so mean to Vinny?” Miguel asked with a snort.
Jaius’ face sobered. “He destroyed the Marker.”
Miguel blinked, confused. Then he remembered Milo’s earlier annoyance with Vinny. “You wouldn’t happen to mean that huge column covered in markings, would you?”
“I do. Using it for a bridge for your vehicles was clever, but…”
Jaius trailed off, but Miguel understood. Jaius had already said that the tunnels were where the Atlanteans had stored their artifacts and recorded their histories. To destroy any of that would be deeply offensive to the Atlanteans, intentional or not.
“I suppose we shouldn’t hold it against him,” Jaius said with a sigh. “Kida was right that it was clever, and none of you knew that it was important…”
“Milo did,” Miguel said. “He wouldn’t have allowed the Marker to be destroyed if he’d been with them.”
“I have to ask why you joined them,” Jaius asked. “Or, did they join you?”
Miguel shrugged. The reality of the trio’s relationship with Rourke’s crew was complicated and nuanced. He wasn’t sure how well Jaius would take an admission that they had sought out the city for treasure.
“We all just kind of got lucky to reach the gate. Milo has a… map of sorts for the tunnel, so he knew the best way to navigate through them.”
Jaius nodded slowly. “I noticed he seemed to lead the way most of the time.”
“From the middle of the crew, that is,” Miguel said, grinning.
“He’s a scholar, is he not? He was always studying the books and the markings. Tulio, too, but not as much as Milo.”
“Finding Atlantis is Milo’s life’s work,” Miguel said. “Tulio and I, we… well, we were a little lost and aimless when we met Milo. Finding Atlantis -or at least searching for it- gave us something to do.”
“And now that you’ve found Atlantis? What will you do when you return to the surface?”
Miguel thought about the question. “I… don’t know. Your king probably wouldn’t appreciate Milo bringing evidence of Atlantis’ existence to the surface, so Milo can’t prove that he found the city everyone thought was just a myth.”
“Atlantis is a myth on the surface?” Jaius asked.
“Well, when people on the surface live for only a hundred years at most, cities from eight thousand years ago are kind of considered myths,” Miguel pointed out.
Jaius nodded reluctantly. “And you and Tulio? Surely you have lives you’re eager to return to.”
“Not really. We’ve never had a place to settle down.”
Miguel almost admitted to being in the wrong century, but stopped himself. Jaius had enough questions about the surface, and Miguel and Tulio had already more or less said that magic didn’t exist on the surface.
Miguel looked at Jaius’ crystal, startled by a sudden thought. Could the magic of the crystals send the two of them back to their time?
“Is something wrong?” Jaius asked.
“No, I just have more questions about the crystals. What else can they do?”
“Nobody knows the limits of crystals,” Jaius said.
“Can you use it to… I don’t know, move through time?” Miguel asked, trying to sound casual.
Jaius gave him a baffled look. “Time travel?”
“Uh… sure.”
“Not that I know of,” Jaius said, and it was all Miguel could do to not show his disappointment. “Then again, I don’t know that anyone’s ever tried.”
Miguel hummed in thought. Maybe he and Tulio should have Jaius try. But only once he could be sure Milo and the Atlantean city would be safe from Rourke and his crew.
“Are there machines on the surface that can time travel?” Jaius asked.
“No, not that I’ve heard of,” Miguel said. “Trucks and submersibles are the extent of my knowledge on surface technology.”
Miguel again considered the crystal before asking, “The healing you do with your crystals. Can it fix everything?”
“No, to both,” Jaius said. “First, the crystals are most powerful in the city. The further they are from the city, the weaker their powers are. Near the gateway, all they do is glow and briefly light up the globelights. In the city, they’re at their most powerful. The crystals can knit broken bones and skin together, and they can cleanse infection from the blood and body. Kida is our best healer and has saved many lives, but the king has-” Jaius started to say something, then seemed to change his mind. “But there are limits. For example, our crystals can’t regrow missing parts of the body.”
“That’s pretty sp-” Miguel broke off when Jaius raised his right hand with a grin. Questioning Jaius' unfinished thought flew out of Miguel's mind. “You- how?”
“It happened when I was young,” Jaius said, tilting his hand so Miguel could see the nub that remained of his thumb. “I was trying to use one of the scout spears to catch a fish, but it was too heavy for me.”
Miguel shook his head in shock. The scars were faded with age, but traced across the back of Jaius’ hand. The wound must’ve been painful.
“Does it hurt?” Miguel asked. “Is it hard to do things with that hand?”
“It hurt for a brief time, and I’ve long become accustomed to not having a thumb. Your turn to answer my question,” Jaius said, and Miguel waved for him to continue with a smile. “You said Milo can navigate the tunnels, right? Is that book he carries a map?”
“No, he calls it the Shepherd’s Journal,” Miguel explained. “It was written by someone who found Atlantis after it had sunk…”
Miguel trailed off. After a moment, he and Jaius exchanged wide-eyed looks.
“Do you… do you think it was written by one of the Atlanteans who escaped the city?” Jaius asked.
“I don’t know,” Miguel said regretfully. “I already asked Milo about the author, and he said the Journal never explains how they found the city. Maybe it was tales passed down from before Atlantis sunk.”
“Maybe,” Jaius mused. He looked quickly back at Miguel. “You said it was written. Milo can read?”
“All of us can,” Miguel said, slightly confused. “Unless you mean reading Atlantean, but only Milo can read that.”
“He what?!”
Miguel jumped at the sudden intensity in Jaius’ voice. “He can read Atlantean?”
“But- that’s impossible! Everyone forgot how to read after the Great Flood!” Jaius said.
Miguel blinked. “What? How?”
“The same way we lost so much knowledge about the crystals and surface world,” Jaius said, standing quickly. “The years following the Great Flood is known as the Forgetting Age. Much was lost during that time, including the knowledge of how to read and write.”
“You didn’t…” Miguel hesitated, wondering if he’d insult Jaius with his question.
“Our writings were mostly lost during the Great Flood. The only things left to read are the murals in the ruins that are about the Great Flood, so nobody really wants to read those. And even the histories in the tunnels, telling of our ages of prosperity before the city sank is… well, nobody wants to read about that time when we’ve settled into our lives as the city is now.”
“But Kida,” Jaius went on, “She’s always been curious about the writings we found through and under the city. She thinks there’s answers for how we can escape back to the surface there.”
“Well, why not?” Miguel asked. “The caravan, we have to get back to the surface ourselves. Why not join us?”
“I’m sure Kida’s already asked her father,” Jaius said, beginning to pace. “Maybe he’ll allow it, maybe not. Many have settled into our lives as they are. I’ll admit, I have, too. It’s a simple, happy life.”
Miguel smiled. “I don’t know, I might wish I had a place to settle sometimes, but it also sounds boring to me.”
“Maybe… if Kida can convince the king… I do want to see the sun,” Jaius said. His thoughtful expression shifted to excitement. “What else is there on the surface?”
Miguel lost track of time as he and Jaius compared stories of their worlds. Miguel’s mind was a jumble of his world and the present world, both on the surface and Atlantis, and he wondered how he’d be able to keep everything straight.
Miguel decided against telling Jaius about the accidental time travel he and Tulio had gone through. Part of him wondered if Jaius would believe him, anyway, but mostly he didn’t want to complicate his stories. He’d settled on telling Jaius that he and Tulio were from another country, and shared memories of his world and his limited knowledge of the present surface world.
They wandered a bit as they talked, making sure to remain in view of Jaius’ house in case Tulio woke up. They eventually settled on a bench at the top of a hill overlooking the lake, still bouncing ideas.
During a lull of questions, Jaius’ attention moved beyond Miguel. He raised a hand in greeting.
Miguel turned to see Milo and Kida coming down the path. They were talking excitedly, seemingly taking turns asking questions as Miguel and Jaius had been trying to do. The pair spotted Miguel and Jaius a moment later, and returned Jaius’ wave.
“Have you ever seen anything so- so-” Milo flailed his hands, grinning so hard it looked like his face might crack. “Amazing!”
Kida said something that made Milo laugh, then abruptly look between Kida and Jaius. Milo laughed again.
“Not fair,” Miguel said drily. “What’s the joke?”
“I didn’t know Jaius was Kida’s cousin,” Milo explained.
Miguel blinked, then looked at Jaius. “Neither did I.”
“You and your brother never asked,” Jaius said with a shrug.
Milo laughed again. Miguel grinned, half at Jaius’ mistake and half at Milo’s utter joy about everything since finding the city.
“No, Tulio and I aren’t brothers, not by blood,” Miguel said.
Jaius shrugged, seeming confused. “What’s blood have to do with family? Kida and I are cousins by blood, but we consider most of the people our age to be like cousins or even siblings.”
Milo translated for Kida, then nodded sagely at her response. He told Miguel, “Kida said it started in the early days after the Great Flood.”
“Many children were orphaned,” Jaius said with a wince. He kept going, “My father died trying to save the city, and my mother is one of the soldiers who tried to escape to the surface. I was mostly raised by my grandmother, alongside two other kids my age who had been orphaned in the Great Flood.”
Milo’s eyes widened. “I’m sorry. I said too much, I know how painful that can be.”
Jaius smiled slightly. “It’s alright; I had family around me. What… what about you two, if I may ask?”
“My parents died when I was little, too. My grandfather raised me,” Milo explained.
Jaius glanced at Miguel, who shrugged.
“I never met my parents. I was raised by the man who found me, and he taught me how to survive.” Ignoring Milo’s smirk, Miguel went on, “ Thinking about it the same way as you… well, Tulio’s the only family I’ve really had,” Miguel said. He smiled. “He’s basically a brother to me.”
“Speaking of Tulio, where is he?” Milo asked.
“Sleeping inside,” Miguel explained.
Milo frowned. “But, we found Atlantis!”
“You know Tulio’s barely been sleeping,” Miguel pointed out.
Milo winced. “Right, right, I’m sorry. I just… Atlantis! I wish Grandpa could see this now. I wish I could wave this in the Board’s faces!”
Miguel glanced between Milo and Kida. “Did you ask if you could?”
Milo looked briefly confused, then he jumped. “I forgot about- no, no, I don’t think the king would approve.”
“I don’t think so, either,” Jaius said with a wince.
“He might surprise us,” Milo said, then said something to Kida.
Kida considered Milo’s words, then reluctantly shook her head. Milo’s shoulders slumped.
“Was that a no?” Miguel guessed.
“It wasn’t a yes,” Jauis answered. “But not a definite no. If your caravan can avoid causing trouble, he might reconsider it!”
Miguel really, really hoped everyone had given up the thought of treasure. He was disappointed by the lack of treasure, and he knew Tulio was even more so. But it wasn’t like it was the first time they’d discovered a mythical city and gave up the chance at treasure to keep the city a secret!
Miguel snorted at the thought. The others looked curiously at him.
“I’m just thinking Tulio and I are either very lucky or very unlucky for discovering a second mythical city that we might never be able to discuss again,” Miguel said.
Jaius’ eyebrows raised almost to his hairline. “You’ve done this twice now? Is that why Milo joined you two?”
“It’s more like Milo invited us onto his personal expedition,” Miguel said with a laugh. “We were definitely hoping to succeed, sure, but it was Milo and his Journal that got us here.”
Milo looked bashful at the praise, but it was the truth. Miguel wondered where he and Tulio would’ve been if they hadn’t met Milo. Probably on the streets or hit by a car, or worse.
Jaius suddenly spoke excitedly to Kida, who smiled and nodded. Miguel realized what they were discussing when Milo opened the Journal and showed it to Jaius. Jaius scanned the page, then his shoulders slumped. Milo said something comfortingly as he returned the Journal to his bag.
“Maybe… do you think the king would be more open to Milo taking a few pictures if he showed you how to read Atlantean?” Miguel suggested.
Milo and Jaius stared at Miguel for a moment, then spun to Kida. An excited conversation followed, ending with an eager nod from Milo.
“Kida thinks it’s possible,” Milo said to Miguel. “I couldn’t teach the king to read Atlantean because he’s blind, unless he could read carvings with his fingers, like some kind of Braille…” Milo trailed off, then shook his head. “There’s other Atlanteans who want to read, but there isn’t much for them to study that’s easily reachable. Most of it is underwater or far down the tunnels.”
“Great!” Miguel said. “Now you just have to convince the king very fast of the plan.”
Milo grinned. “Kida already offered to take care of that. It sounds like she’s one of the most eager to learn to read.”
Milo and Kida spoke briefly, then Kida shook her head and pointed down the slope. Milo nodded, then turned to Miguel.
“She said she’ll try asking later. Right now, the city is putting together a small feast for the crew!”
Miguel blinked, again shocked by how welcoming the Atlanteans were to complete strangers. But he realized it was probably close to morning by now, and the mention of food made his stomach growl. He grinned as the others laughed.
“Well, lead on! ” Miguel said, flinging out a hand.
“Should we wake up Tulio?” Jaius asked, looking at the house.
“No, he needs his sleep,” Miguel said. “Milo, do you still have your notebook? We can leave a note for him in case he wakes up before either of us return.”
Milo nodded and pulled out his notebook. Kida and Jaius curiously watched him write a note, as though they’d never seen someone write before.
…actually, they hadn’t, at least not since Atlantis sank.
Miguel checked on Tulio while Milo left the notebook on the bench near Tulio’s head, where he would hopefully see it as soon as he woke up.
Miguel hoped Tulio could get plenty of sleep without nightmares to wake him up. He’d gone too long on too little sleep, and they had, at the very least, an entire trek back to the surface.
Miguel hesitated in the doorway, then purposefully followed the others away. Hovering over Tulio wouldn’t help either of them, and Miguel knew he needed to try and figure out how the crew felt about no treasure. If they’d been more like Milo, excited about the journey and history of the sunken city, Miguel wouldn’t have been concerned. But Rourke, Helga, and their soldiers at the very least wouldn’t be able to give up the idea of riches so easily.
The foursome soon approached a house that was full of lights and laughter. Miguel smiled as he walked inside to see Sweet, Audry, Vinny, and Mole chatting with the Atlanteans. Rourke and Helga were outside, talking with a few of the soldiers.
Miguel took a seat, wishing he knew English so he could join in with the conversations. But while he couldn’t understand them, Sweet immediately noticed his presence and handed a bowl over to him. Miguel eagerly took the bowl, only to recoil when the contents flinched!
Everyone roared with laughter, Miguel included.
Audrey leaned over to say, “He’s been doing that to everyone. He insists it’s edible, but I don’t trust him.”
Milo looked warily back into the bowl. A fat green creature as big as his palm was writhing inside. It had about fifteen eyes on skinny stalks that swung around the bowl, and definitely too many legs wriggling.
Sweet held up a similar creature with a grin, then bit off the head, eyes and all. Vinny flinched away, one hand over his mouth. Miguel looked between them, then at the creature. He slowly picked it up.
“Don’t you-” Audrey started.
Miguel bit down. He almost gagged at the sensation in his mouth, slimy over crunchy, but managed to swallow. The taste wasn’t horrible, some weird cross of fish and the time he’d eaten grubs during one particularly hungry fall.
“That was…” Miguel ran his tongue over his teeth, feeling tiny scales clinging to them, “...not the worst thing I’ve eaten.”
Audrey flung up her hands with an exclamation of disgust. She jumped to her feet and stalked across the room when Miguel put the remainder of the creature into his mouth to eat.
On Miguel’s other side, Milo looked somewhat concerned by what he’d just witnessed. Kida offered him a bowl with another one of the creatures, and was quickly waved off. Kida laughed, then put the bowl back on the table.
Jaius shook his head at them all, then took two bowls and filled them with purple noodles in a dark sauce. He handed a bowl to Milo and Miguel, along with a strange utensil that was just a thin spiral on a handle.
Miguel considered the strange utensil, then looked at the Atlantean kids eating the noodles with their fingers. He chose to eat with his fingers, leaving Milo trying to figure out how the utensil worked. Milo managed a few of the noodles, but most of them fell into his bowl.
An Atlantean woman held out a bowl with rolls out to Miguel, who took one. She mimed dipping the roll into the bowl, so Miguel did, using the roll to sop up the sauce in the bottom of the bowl.
Satisfied with the noodles and roll -and the fish/bug creature- Miguel returned to watching the others.
Small children had clustered around Milo, all of them laughing with him. It took Miguel a moment to realize Milo was speaking in halting Atlantean. The children laughed after each word.
“He speaks Atlantean well,” Jaius said, sitting beside Miguel. “Although his accent is strange.”
One of the children grinned and tapped his nose. Milo laughed along with whatever the child said, exchanging a look with Kida.
Audrey returned, sitting on a stool nearby. She said, “Sweet’s asking where Tulio is.”
“He’s sleeping,” Miguel said, jutting a thumb in the general direction of Jaius’ house.
Audrey’s brows furrowed. “Sleeping?”
“He doesn’t like to be woken up in the middle of the night,” Miguel said lightly.
Audrey shrugged and muttered something like, “His loss,” then returned to Sweet. They spoke, then Sweet turned and spoke out the window to Rourke. The older man said something that made Audrey roll her eyes.
Miguel pretended to focus on the bowl Jaius handed to him. He cautiously sipped the liquid inside, lighting up at the familiar taste.
“It tastes like coco!” Miguel said.
“Coco?” Jaius asked.
“I’ll show you, if our supplies survived,” Miguel said, wondering for the first time how much of the caravan’s supplies had survived the fall. “But it’s a drink, sweet like this is.”
“It’s a juice made with jaja berries,” Jaius explained.
“You have fruit that tastes like chocolate,” Miguel said slowly. “That’s it, I want to stay in Atlantis.”
Jaius laughed. Miguel took another sip of the juice, wondering just how serious he was being. After all, he and Tulio really didn’t have a place on the surface…
Then again, Tulio would never willingly spend one more day underground than necessary. And Miguel had tried to leave Tulio’s company once for the novelty of a mythical city, and he’d still ended up on the ship beside Tulio on the way out of El Dorado.
Miguel remembered his and Jaius’ discussion about family. He and Tulio had been through so much together. Tulio was his brother in all but blood, and Miguel couldn’t imagine them parting ways.
“What’s with the serious look?” Jaius asked.
“I’m not being serious,” Miguel chuckled. “I’m just wondering what else Tulio and I are going to discover.”
“Yes, discovery!” Milo said suddenly, drawing everyone’s gaze.
He spoke again in English, holding up his bowl. Everyone lifted their bowls in a toast.
“To uncovering mysteries,” Jaius translated, or perhaps simply added.
“I’ll drink to that!” Miguel said, knocking his bowl against Jaius’.
While everyone repeated the toast or added to it, Miguel spotted Rourke shifting out of sight of the window and Audrey slipping outside. Miguel raised his bowl to his lips to hide his smile.
“ Let the games begin,” Miguel thought.
Audrey was the worst person anyone would want to send into negotiations. She didn’t have the patience for squabbling or pointlessly wordy speeches, and she preferred to say things outright.
Unfortunately for Rourke’s crew, she was the only one of them who spoke Spanish.
Audrey sighed when she peered into the third Atlantean house, finally spotting Tulio. At least Tulio seemed to prefer being straightforward like she did. All she had to do was make her point, and let Tulio decide from there.
Audrey glanced over her shoulder. Helga and three soldiers stood where a small shed of tools hid them from the main path. If the conversation went south, she was supposed to signal them and… well, Audrey had seen what happened to people who got in the way.
Audrey stepped inside, trying to not think about the fact that she’d never known the people who got in the way before. A naysayer or seer or village chief, people she’d intentionally never learned the names of.
Audrey shook her head. It wasn’t like anyone was hurt. Hurt badly , at least…
Audrey took a bracing breath, then leaned over and shook Tulio’s shoulder. He jolted awake with a half-asleep mutter about crystals. He blinked at Audrey, then rubbed his eyes and sat up.
“How long was I asleep?” Tulio asked.
Audrey shrugged.
“Where’s Miguel?” Tulio asked.
“With the rest of the crew,” Audrey said.
“Did he send you to get me, then?”
“No.”
Tulio looked hard at Audrey. It took all her willpower to not shift under his intense gaze. She’d never seen him so focused; he usually looked bored.
“Rourke sent you, didn’t he?”
Audrey’s mouth fell open for a second before she snapped it shut. She crossed her arms.
“Lucky guess,” Audrey muttered.
“Far from it.” Tulio swung his feet over the edge of the bench. “Rourke’s the one in charge of this whole expedition, and he’s the one who decides what happens next.”
“What happens next?” Audrey repeated.
“You tell me,” Tulio said, waving a hand in a “go ahead” gesture. “I’m going to guess that Rourke has a plan on getting rich, despite Atlantis being inhabited.”
Audrey stared at Tulio. “How’d you figure that out?”
“Audrey, Miguel and I are treasure hunters, too. We joined Milo to get rich,” Tulio said, casually waving a hand. “Same as the rest of the crew.”
“It’s the first time you’ve said that,” Audrey said skeptically.
Tulio shrugged. “Milo always knew the two of us wanted to get rich if we found Atlantis, but there’s no point in reminding him that we were just in it for the money.”
“Are you still in it for the money?” Audrey asked, keenly aware that Tulio was already way ahead of her.
“Obviously. I’m curious on how Rourke plans on getting rich from the ruins left here,” Tulio said, jutting his chin at the crumbling wall.
“And Miguel? How does he feel about it?”
Tulio smiled slyly. “Unless I miss my guess, he’s making sure Milo doesn’t interrupt us.”
“How…?” Audrey shook her head. “Forget the games. So, you both are okay with getting your hands a little dirty to get the treasure?”
“Depends on the cut we get,” Tulio said.
“Whatever money we get is split equally. Rourke and Helga get two shares, and the rest of us get one.”
Tulio nodded slowly. “Fair enough.”
“Not that Rourke is even sure he needs the two of you,” Audrey warned. “S ince you can’t shoot a gun or talk to most of the crew.”
Tulio shrugged. “Well, we got Milo to cooperate with the crew this far, haven’t we?”
Audrey stared at Tulio for a moment. “How long did it take you to figure it out?”
“I know a treasure hunter when I see one,” Tulio said. “All I had to figure out was how serious the crew was. But you all clearly have your eye on the prize, same as Miguel and I.”
“And you’re sure that Miguel will go along with us, whatever happens?” Audrey asks.
“Miguel will follow my lead, trust me,” Tulio said. “So, Rourke has a plan for getting his treasure then? What is it, the crystals?”
“The crystals’ power source.”
Tulio let out a low whistle. “The Heart? How does Rourke know about that already?”
“He’s got a page of the Journal,” Audrey explained.
“And he’s expecting, what, for Milo to show him where the Heart is if he asks?” Tulio asked.
“Duh, why wouldn’t he?” Audrey asked.
“Because unlike the rest of us, Milo has morals.”
Despite her attempt not to, Audrey winced. Tulio shook his head.
“Don’t look so worried,” Tulio said as he stood. “If we do this right, nobody has to get hurt, right?”
“That’s Rourke’s plan,” Audrey said, focusing on that point. “Intimidated, maybe, but nobody’s supposed to get hurt.”
“See?” Tulio nodded. “When does Rourke plan on getting started?”
“We’ve only got a few hours before we have to leave the city, so it’s starting now,” Audrey said. “There might not be time to warn Miguel-”
“Miguel will play along,” Tulio said confidently. “We should find Rourke, tell him that we’re in.”
Audrey nodded, then hesitated. “Are you sure? Nobody’ll get hurt, but it’s not going to be… well, pleasant, necessarily. The Atlanteans aren’t going to let us just take it.”
Tulio scoffed. “Miguel and I once had an entire city bowing at our feet in less than a day. This job is going to be easy.”
Tulio strode out, leaving Audrey staring. Just who had she recruited for this heist?
Notes:
Aside from the fact that he's stuck underground, Tulio's having the time of his life here. XD
Chapter 15: The Writing on the Wall
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Milo couldn’t get over how the Atlantis expedition had gone so drastically different than they’d planned. Different, but so much better than he could’ve dared to expect!
“You know, Kida,” Milo said as he followed Kida alongside the lakeshore, “The most we ever hoped to find was some crumbling buildings, maybe some broken pottery.”
A firefly was crawling along a leaf beside Milo. Pausing, Milo gently caught a firefly crawling along a leaf beside him. He smiled at the gentle warmth of the bug and its tiny legs tickling his palm.
Milo went on, “Instead, we find a living, thriving society.” He chuckled when the firefly continued to crawl from his hand and down his arm. “These guys are kinda cute when they're not, you know, formed into a fiery column of death.”
Milo cupped the firefly in his hands again and turned to Kida. He sobered when he saw her solemn expression fixed on the orb in her hands.
Kida opened a small door on the top of the orb. Milo gently released the bug inside to join the three others he’d caught while they walked.
“We are not thriving,” Kida admitted softly. “True, our people live, but our culture is dying. We are like a stone in the river. With each passing year, a little more of us is worn away.”
Milo rubbed the back of his neck. “I wish there was something I could do…”
“I have brought you to this place to ask you for your help,” Kida said. “There is a mural here with writing all around the pictures.”
Milo perked up. “Yeah, well, you came to the right guy.”
Milo took the firefly light from Kida and planted the stand in the dirt, casting light on the carved runes over their heads. He squinted at the worn images.
“Let's start with this column right here. Uh, well this, uh, uh, Kida? Uh,” Milo chuckled awkwardly and wondered if he should cover his eyes. “What are you doing?”
Kida turned as she finished untying her skirt and dropped it. Unable to react in time, Milo was incredibly grateful to see she was still covered under the skirt. Trying to not show his embarrassment, Milo averted his eyes.
“You can swim, can you not?” Kida asked.
“Oh, I swim pretty girl.” Milo’s eyes widened and he hurried to correct himself. “Pr-pretty good! Pretty good. Sw... Good, swim good, pretty good. I swim pretty good…”
If Kida noticed his discomfort, she didn’t show it. She walked deeper into the water, and Milo was finally able to look at her again.
“Good,” Kida said, turning to him, “It’s a fair distance to where we’re going.”
“Hey, you are talking to the belly-flop champ at Camp Runamuck,” Milo said.
He waded into the water, trying to regain his composure. His attempt promptly failed when another step into the water caused air to fill his shorts so they expanded around his waist like a pair of waders.
Milo frantically shoved the air from his shorts, turning red while Kida laughed softly. Milo flailed his hands, flustered as he walked deeper into the water.
“Come on, we're... we're wasting time,” Milo stammered.
Milo dove into the water. It was thankfully cool against his heated cheeks, and Milo just knew his face was beet red. He suddenly wished Miguel and Jaius hadn’t gone to check on Tulio, leaving him alone with Kida.
Milo blew out a stream of bubbles, then put his feet against the smooth stone under him. He stood up and turned to Kida, who was grinning so mischievously, much too amused at Milo’s awkward antics.
“Why don't you lead the way because…” Milo gestured at the lake in exasperation, “I have no idea where we're going.”
Thankfully, Kida took pity on Milo and dove under the water. Milo followed quickly.
Between the murky water and the already dim lighting above, it wasn’t long before the only light was Kida’s crystal. Milo wondered briefly if Kida controlled the crystal’s brightness or if it adjusted automatically according to the light, but pushed the question aside to figure out later. Kida was swimming fast, and Milo could barely keep up.
The pair swam close enough to a wall for Milo to see a bit of carving, though none of it was words. Kida moved past the carvings, into a round hole in the wall that looked intentional. As Milo pulled himself through, he realized they’d arrived in a tunnel. Or maybe a hallway? There were carvings below, above, and to his left, while the right wall was a mosaic of colorful tiles. The whole effect gave Milo the impression of floating in a sideways hallway.
Milo was starting to lag, though. Kida hesitated at a turn in the hallway to glance at him, her brows furrowing. Milo put a hand to his chest and gave an exaggerated frown. Kida’s brows jumped up, and she swiftly changed direction to follow the hall that curved upward.
Milo’s chest felt tight with the strain of holding his breath. He could feel himself slowing down. Kida gestured emphatically at him, and Milo put all his might at kicking harder, moving faster.
All of the sudden, his head broke through the water’s surface. His gasp turned into a yelp when his head struck stone almost immediately. He started to sink again, but Kida, surfacing in front of him, tugged him back up.
“Are you alright?” Kida asked, tilting Milo’s chin down to check the top of his head.
“Uh, well-” Milo gulped another breath into his aching lungs. “I didn’t drown, so…”
Milo knew he could hold his breath for a relatively long time, but Kida hadn’t shown a bit of strain. Either she was better at holding her breath than him, or the crystal somehow helped. If it could heal wounds, why not?
“Good,” said Kida, breaking Milo from his thoughts. “Follow me!”
Kida dove again, Milo on her heels. She led Milo to the fork in the hall, then into the downward tunnel.
They swam deeper and deeper. Milo could only get glimpses of the carvings and murals on the hall walls in the crystal’s dim light. Sometimes they passed doorways or rows of windows, though Milo couldn’t see what laid beyond them.
Kida glanced at Milo, then turned sharply into a doorway. She swam up, and Milo followed her into an air pocket. He sucked in a deep breath, feeling an uncomfortable ache in his chest.
“How much further?” Milo asked.
“We’ll have to stop once more,” Kida said, one hand flicking through the air as she thought. “We have to hurry!”
“Why-” Milo broke off as Kida dove again. “Wait!”
Milo sucked in a deep breath and followed. Kida swam faster now, and Milo struggled to keep up as painful seconds ticked by. Milo started flagging, his whole body threatening to give up on him, when Kida grabbed his arm and yanked him through a hole in the floor. They slid through a split in the wall of the next room, then into air.
Milo heaved for breath. He had to grab onto the wall until his ears stopped ringing. He looked at Kida, panting.
“I’m sorry,” Kida said, her expression worried. “I didn’t realize you would have such a hard time getting there.”
Milo shrugged with a wry grin. “Nobody said finding out Atlantis’ history would be easy. It’ll be worth it, I’m sure! But, uh… why do we have to hurry?”
“Your crew is running out of time before Father sends you away,” Kida said.
Milo’s eyes widened at the reminder. “Oh, right! Come on, let’s go!”
Thankfully, the last stretch was shorter. After passing through another hall, they emerged into a large open space. Milo caught a glimpse of writing, and couldn’t help pausing. Kida noticed and obligingly swam closer to the writing so the crystal lit up the writing.
Milo’s eyes ran over the writing. His eyes widened, and he looked quickly at Kida, who pointed up. The two of them shot to the surface, and Milo started talking so fast that he accidentally breathed in the water streaming off his face.
“This-” Milo coughed again, then pushed on, “This is amazing; A complete history of Atlantis! It-It-It's just like Plato described. Well, I mean, he was off on a few details, but-”
“The light I saw,” Kida interrupted. “The star in the middle of the city, what does the writing say about that?”
“I don't know yet,” Milo said, rubbing his face. He grinned at Kida. “But we're gonna find out. Come on!”
The two swam back down to the mural. Milo scanned the faded carvings, searching for a good place to start.
“Arrogance of a king… seeking power of the gods… brought upon… storm which covered the city… Guardians rose… and so Atlantis sank…”
Air burst out of Milo’s lips in shock as he put the pieces together. This was the story of how Atlantis sank!
But how? Kida said the Atlanteans had forgotten how to read and write shortly after the Great Flood, and that nobody had spoken of the Great Flood during the first hundred years. Had someone actually been carving the history during that time, and Kida just hadn’t known?
Milo shot back to the surface, waiting impatiently for Kida to follow.
“This room- this building,” Milo said, gesturing vaguely at their surroundings. “Was it always underwater?”
“The waters have been rising, but this room has always been flooded, yes,” Kida said. “Why?”
“Because I just read a reference to the city sinking!”
“Prophecy?” Kida said softly.
Milo nodded eagerly. “You said yourself that nobody knows everything the crystals can do. Someone must have seen the Great Flood-”
“But why wouldn’t they warn us?” Kida interrupted fiercely.
Milo hesitated, his excitement waning. “I don’t… I don’t know. If they knew about the Great Flood before it happened… I mean, they did carve it into the wall.”
Kida’s expression fell. “I… you’re right, Milo. I’m sorry.”
“No, no, it’s fine,” Milo said quickly. “It’s not every day you find out…”
“That my city’s destruction was foretold?” Kida finished.
Milo nodded hesitantly. He was definitely going to leave out the part that blamed the Great Flood on the king’s -her father’s- arrogance.
“Come on,” Milo said, smiling gently. “There’s still more to find.”
Kida braced herself and nodded. The two of them dove again, and Milo quickly found the spot he’d been reading. Using the wall, he pulled himself sideways, scanning for something about the Heart of Atlantis.
Abruptly, the carvings ended. Milo turned his head sideways to read the tilted carvings.
“...come with fire and death… a new age of light… sacrifice must be given… princess heeds the call… bargains are paid with blood…”
Milo changed position to read the top line, and found a single line carved so deeply that the words were perfectly preserved.
“Royal blood will mingle with Tears of the Heart.”
Milo shoved backward with a garbled shout. Kida looked at him in alarm, and Milo shot to the surface. Sputtering on the water streaming down his face, Milo grabbed Kida’s arm.
“A sacrifice,” Milo gasped. “The-the mural, it describes a sacrifice to-to the Heart? Made with royal blood and the Tears of the Heart?”
“Milo, I still don’t understand, what is the Heart?”
“I don’t-” Milo ran a hand through his hair, his panting breath echoing loudly around him. “We’re so close, I feel it!”
Kida’s mouth tightened. “There’s one more mural you must see. Come!”
This time, the pair dove deep and fast. Kida stopped and held up the crystal to reveal a mural made up mostly of pictures.
The mural depicted a huge diamond shape. Around it were strange figures that Milo couldn’t decide if they were meant to be Atlanteans or… well, they looked mechanical!
Milo swam closer, running his hands across runes that were so faded he could barely make out the words. This writing, it was obviously as old as Atlantis. It had to explain the Heart, it had to!
“Our Heart… binding and shielding us all… standing guard over the city… our power within…”
Milo squinted in confusion, then his eyes widened. This wasn’t another strange prophecy. It was literal!
Milo spun in the water and took Kida’s crystal from her hand. She frowned at him in confusion, and Milo raised his free hand toward the mural. Kida shook her head, not understanding. Milo gestured for her to surface, and they swam to the air pocket together.
“The Heart of Atlantis,” Milo muttered in awe as Kida surfaced.
Kida’s frown deepened. “What?”
“It's the Heart of Atlantis! That's what the shepherd w-was talking about! It wasn't a star, it was- it was some kind of a crystal!” Milo again held up Kida’s crystal. “Like these! Don't you get it? The power source I've been looking for, the bright light you remember; they're the same thing!”
“That cannot be,” Kida said, shaking her head slowly.
“It's what keeping all these things, you, all of Atlantis alive!” Milo exclaimed. He couldn’t help shaking Kida’s crystal. “And the- the Tears, I read, too, they- these must be the Tears!”
“The sacrifice,” Kida said, voice quickening. “A sacrifice of royal blood, my mother! My mother was a sacrifice, but why?”
“I don’t know, so much of it has faded,” Milo said, wishing he could answer the question Kida had held for so long. "But something brought Atlantis under the sea. It must’ve been the Heart!”
“And where is it now? Where’s the Heart?” Kida asked.
“I don't know, I don't know,” Milo stammered, mind racing. “You'd think something this important would be in the Journal, but it-” Milo broke off. The Journal had mentioned the Heart, hadn’t it? “Unless...the missing page.”
“What missing page?” Kida asked.
“In the Journal!” Milo said. “There was a portion that mentioned the Heart of Atlantis, but the page that should’ve explained about the Heart was missing! I wonder… it had to have the same information as this mural…”
“But it’s gone?” Kida asked.
Milo nodded, his mind racing. “When I first found the missing page, I just figured… well, the Journal is so old, there was bound to be damage. I didn’t even think about… no other pages were missing, though, everything else was intact.”
“Milo,” Kida said slowly, “You can see it wasn’t a coincidence, correct?”
“But the Journal hasn’t been out of my sight, not since-”
Milo’s breath caught. When had he first noticed the missing page? On the steamboat, maybe? He and Miguel had been flipping through it.
Milo heaved out a relieved sigh, then winced at suspecting the Spaniards for even a moment. They’d been helping Milo from the very beginning; there wasn’t any reason for them to sabotage the expedition.
“Milo?”
Realizing he’d been silent for several minutes, Milo quickly said, “The page has been missing since I first found the Journal, I’m sure of it. But I don’t understand. At the time Grandpa found the Journal nobody knew how to read Atlantean! Why would someone remove the page?”
“Someone could have found the Journal before your grandfather,” Kida pointed out. “They could have taken the page and left the Journal.”
“Maybe… but how would they know? Information on the Heart has to be the most important part in the Journal, but without knowing how to read it…” Milo trailed off, rubbing his head.
“I can’t read, either, but I knew this mural was important,” Kida said after a moment. “I only thought it was because the depiction of the Heart reminded me of the light I saw before the city sank.”
Milo thought of all the drawings in the Journal. “Someone guessed the significance of that one page. But, again, why tear it out if you couldn’t read it?”
“To control who would,” Kida said.
Milo sighed. “If that’s the case, the page is long gone. Grandpa wouldn’t have torn the Journal, and if he trusted Mr. Whitmore and his crew, I don’t think any of them would’ve. So it must have happened a long time ago.”
The two of them continued to tread water, thinking. What if the missing page had information on how to find the Heart?
“Maybe the mural says more,” Milo said determinedly. “Come on!”
Milo and Kida scoured the murals across the room and connecting halls. Their searching found nothing else about the Heart, though.
Checking the main mural, Milo had a strange feeling about the writing he’d found at the top. It seemed like the lowest carvings were the oldest, and the higher the carvings were, the most recent they were. And while the story of Atlantis sinking had been close to the top, there was still that one story above it.
Or maybe it was another prophecy.
Milo had relayed what he’d been able to read, but Kida hadn’t been able to make any more sense of it than him. She did admit that she couldn’t remember much from the first couple thousand years of the city sinking, of course, so it was possible that she simply didn’t remember. She promised to ask her father about it, both of them knowing that Milo would probably be gone before she could get an answer.
“I think this is as much as we’ll get,” Milo eventually admitted. He was floating on his back in the air bubble, trying to recover his breath. “And by now, someone must’ve noticed we were missing.”
Kida hummed in thought. “It could be that your caravan has already left.”
Milo flailed upright. “You think so?”
Kida shrugged. “Father was very insistent that they leave. If they say that someone is still in the city, he will only make them leave and tell them that if anyone is found, they’ll be sent out as well.”
“Why does your father hate outsiders so much?” Milo asked.
“I don’t think he hates you,” Kida said. “It is the change you threaten to bring to Atlantis.”
“You said the city is dying, though,” Milo said gently.
“The last time Atlantis faced a great change, we were swallowed by the ocean and most of our people were lost,” Kida said. “Our life now, it isn’t perfect. But it’s safe, comfortable. Our people live, and sometimes, that’s all that matters.”
“Is that… is that what you want for your people?” Milo hesitated to ask.
“No!” Kida said vehemently. She quickly reined herself in. “...I don’t know. I remember very little of the surface world, Milo. If my father has decided that it’s best we remain down here, how can I argue with him?”
Milo thought for a moment. “The world on the surface has changed a lot in eight thousand years. Maybe whatever it is your father is…” Milo hesitated, not wanting to imply the Atlantean king was cowardly.
“Whatever drove my people away,” Kida supplied.
“Yeah.” Milo nodded. “Maybe it’s gone now. Maybe the Heart, it… it took the city down here to protect the people, but you all weren’t meant to stay down here.”
Kida was quiet.
“I… well, my grandfather’s friend, he put together an expedition to come under the ocean and find Atlantis,” Milo said. “Do you think your father would be willing to send an expedition of Atlanteans with us, back to the surface? You could look for a place for your people up there.”
Milo talked faster, warming up to the idea. “You wouldn’t even have to abandon Atlantis because the Heart’s still down here and your people could never leave that. But there’s places on the surface where you could live and grow more than you can down here. There’s even islands nobody’s charted, if you wanted to stay away from people on the surface!”
Kida finally looked at Milo. “Milo… what if there’s no place for us on the surface?”
“There has to be!” Milo said. “Or even if you didn’t settle on the surface, could you trade… I’m not sure how people would react to your fish, though. But, there would be something, I’m sure, or you could come with me to Washington-”
Milo broke off, flushing. “I mean- I mean, some of your people could! You could speak to the Board at the museum, they would know how to help you- Atlantis! I meant Atlantis!”
Kida laughed, stopping Milo’s flustered rambling.
“I do want to see the surface, Milo,” Kida said. “I know there’s others who would want to as well. Let’s go back, and I’ll ask my father.”
Milo perked up. “Okay, come on!”
Milo dove under the water and started swimming down, then hesitated. Blowing out a stream of bubbles, he sheepishly swam back to the surface, where Kida was waiting with a grin.
“Ladies first?” Milo said, grinning awkwardly.
Kida laughed and dove. The two of them swam back the way they’d come, though they had to pause after the longest stretch for several minutes before Milo was ready to go on.
As they pulled themselves out of the building, Kida grabbed Milo’s arm and pointed up. He followed her finger and spotted light above. Kida pointed to Milo and up, then to herself and back at the wall, miming searching. Milo, understanding she was going to make one last check for writings, nodded and swam toward the surface. He wondered, baffled, just how long Kida could hold her breath.
Milo reached the surface and gasped for breath. Shaking his wet hair out of his eyes, Milo groped blindly for the shore until he found a rock to grab onto. He pulled himself closer to the shore with one hand, using the other to wipe his eyes clear. When he looked up, he jumped when he found Rourke sitting right in front of him. And it wasn’t just Rourke. The rest of the crew was there, as well as a handful of the soldiers.
Milo’s first thought is that he’d delayed the expedition’s departure and that everyone had gathered to wait for him. He opened his mouth to explain.
Then he noticed the guns.
“Have a nice swim?” Rourke asked, bringing Milo’s gaze snapping back to him.
“Hey, guys,” Milo said slowly, his eyes darting across the crew. “What’s going on? What’s- what’s with all the guns?”
Milo hadn’t even realized the caravan was carrying so many guns. Why would they need so many in the first place, never mind bringing them into the peaceful city, unless…
Milo shook his head, exhaling sharply. “I’m such an idiot. This is just another treasure hunt for you! You’re after the crystal!”
“Oh,” Rourke said casually, a smug sneer on his face as he pulled a paper from his boot, “You mean this?”
Milo stared at the paper. Having just put the pieces together, he was still caught off-guard to find it was Rourke in possession of the missing page. And on the page…
“The Heart of Atlantis,” Milo whispered.
Rourke shrugged. “Yeah, about that, I would've told you this sooner, but it was strictly on a need-to-know basis, and, well, now you know. I had to be sure you were one of us.”
“One of-” Milo’s mutter trailed off, his eyes widening.
Near the back of the group, Tulio had suddenly appeared from behind Sweet. He stared levelly at Milo, clearly aware of exactly what was going on. And while he wasn’t carrying a gun -Tulio had only seen a pistol used once, never mind used one himself- he’d acquired a spear from somewhere.
Milo really hoped none of the Atlanteans had crossed paths with the crew yet.
Rourke thrust a hand down, startling Milo back. “Welcome to the club, son.”
Milo’s face twisted in disgust, both at the betrayal of, well, everyone, and Rourke calling him “son.”
“I’m no mercenary!” Milo spat.
“Milo? Tulio?”
Milo jerked at Miguel’s call. He looked sharply up the path, where Miguel and Jaius had paused, confusion on both their faces.
Jaius was holding a fishing spear.
“Run!” Milo shouted, shoving himself deeper into the water.
Jaius might’ve, if there hadn’t been a splash from behind Milo. Milo spun, gasping when Kida emerged at the far end of the pool, right at the feet of a soldier.
Before Milo or Kida could react, the soldier reached down, grabbing Kida’s hair and yanking her from the pool! Kida’s face twisted in a snarl as she reached up. As soon as her feet were on solid ground, she reached up and grabbed the soldier. She dropped and twisted, throwing the soldier over her shoulder and into the water. Another soldier rushed to grab her, but Kida threw her shoulder into his chest, knocking him onto his back. Kida crouched over him and took a knife from who knew where and raised it over her head.
Bang!
Everyone flinched when Rourke fired, his bullet hitting the blade of the knife and knocking it from Kida’s grasp. Kida looked sharply at Rourke, and couldn’t resist fast enough when two more soldiers grabbed her arms and yanked them behind her, forcing Kida to her knees. She spat out a colorful curse that normally would’ve appalled Milo, but at that moment, he had to agree with her.
“Mercenary?” Rourke questioned, returning to Milo’s earlier statement. “I prefer the term ‘adventure capitalist'. Besides, you’re the one who got us here. You led us right to the treasure chest.”
Jaius started toward Kida, his spear raised. “You filthy-”
Tulio rushed forward, spinning his spear around to strike Jaius’ hands. Jaius flinched, dropping his spear. Several soldiers turned their guns toward Jaius, Audrey following their example a second later.
Jaius glared. Miguel grabbed his arm before he could storm forward, speaking frantically to both him and Tulio.
“What’s going on?!”
“We’re getting our treasure,” Tulio said, his voice hard.
Miguel chuckled awkwardly. “I thought we all agreed there wasn’t any treasure.”
Kida kicked at the soldier holding her, nearly breaking free before she was slammed into the ground. Jaius shouted and would’ve gone to her if Miguel hadn’t grabbed his shirt and yanked him back.
“Let me go!” Jaius snarled. “You tricked us, all of you! How could you?!”
“Hey, now, I’m still on your side, don’t hit me!” Miguel yelped, struggling to keep the furious Atlantean from elbowing his face.
Milo scrambled out of the water, wanting to keep Rourke’s attention on him. He frantically warned, “You don’t know what you’re tampering with, Rourke!”
Rourke, watching Jaius and the Spaniards, shrugged. “What's to know? It's big, it's shiny, it's gonna make us all rich.”
Milo gestured hopelessly, but there wasn’t any way to avoid what he and Kida had learned. “You think it's some kind of a diamond. I thought it was some kind of a battery, but we're both wrong. It's their life-force. That crystal is the only thing keeping these people alive.” Milo waved at Jaius, who’s struggles were slowly ceasing as he processed what Milo was saying. “You take that away, and they'll die!”
“Well, that changes things,” Rourke said, nodding. He glanced at Helga. “Helga, what do you think?”
“Knowing that, I'd double the price,” Helga said with a smirk.
“I was thinking triple,” Rourke said, chuckling darkly.
Tulio, his eyes moving between the speakers, leaned toward Audrey. The girl twitched slightly, then Milo heard her translating.
Milo stared at Tulio, waiting for him to drop the tough act. Maybe he’d run into the crew on their way to the lake, and hadn’t seen any choice but to go along with them. With Jaius and Miguel just a few steps away, surely he’d join the right side?
Tulio noticed Milo staring, and silently met his gaze. He glanced at Miguel, and the two Spaniards scowled at each other.
Milo’s heart dropped. Surely he hadn’t misread Tulio so completely!
“Rourke, don't…” Milo stepped desperately forward, but Vinny blocked him. “Don’t do this.”
“Academics,” Rourke said in exasperation. He was still watching Tulio, clearly not trusting the newest member of his crew. “You never want to get your hands dirty. Think about it. If you gave back every stolen artifact from a museum you'd be left with an empty building.” Rourke returned his attention to Milo with a benevolent smile. “We're just providing a necessary service to the archeological community.
Milo scowled. “Not. Interested.”
Rourke sighed. “I have to admit, I'm disappointed. You're an idealist, just like your grandfather. Do yourself a favor, Milo. Don't be like him. For once, do the smart thing.”
Milo’s mouth fell open. Had he just-
“Well!” Miguel exclaimed in a cheerful tone, making more than a few of the crew jump, “If nobody’s going to explain what’s going on, let’s all stop pointing weapons at each other, hm?”
Audrey rolled her eyes. “‘What’s going on,’ Miguel, is that we’re going to get the treasure we came for, and get out of here.”
“And doom us all!” Jaius snapped, finally breaking out of Miguel’s grasp. Thankfully, he remained where he stood. “You heard Milo! You take the Heart, you’ll have the blood of Atlantis on your greedy hands!”
Audrey didn’t react for a moment, then she turned her eyes away. Tulio snorted.
“Welcome to the real world, kid,” Tulio said. “Sometimes, to get what you want, you have to take it.”
“But you can’t kill others to get it, Tulio!” Miguel shouted.
Milo’s eyes darted between the pair as their voices rose. He’d never seen the two of them so angry with each other. Well, unless he counted the time at the tavern when they’d pretended to fight over-
Oh.
Oh.
The Spaniards were either geniuses or idiots. Milo quickly realized the best course of action for him was to remain silent. Thankfully, Kida and Jaius were following his cue. That, or they, like most of the crew, were confused by the two friends apparently at each others’ throats.
“Look,” Tulio was saying, sneering, “You don’t have to dirty your hands if you don’t want to. Just stand aside, Miguel.”
“Right, because not doing anything is better than actively helping them,” Miguel said, flinging his hand at the crew.
“Now you’re getting it. Now get over here before Rourke decides to not give you a share,” Tulio said.
“You think I still care about the treasure?!”
With a move that was clearly practiced and maybe a little over-the-top, Miguel hooked a foot under Jaius’ fallen spear and flicked it up into his waiting hand. Miguel and Tulio dropped into ready stances for a moment before Miguel charged at Tulio with a shout.
Milo glanced at the crew, but everyone just seemed curious about the fight, not suspicious. He wondered if there was any way Kida could slip free, then she, Milo, Jaius, and the Spaniards could make a break for it.
Tulio dodged Miguel’s spear, spinning on his heel and using the handle of his spear to trip up Miguel. Miguel fell to one knee, but it didn’t stop him from slashing at Tulio, who barely avoided the speartip. As he rebalanced, Milo realized the spear had actually cut Tulio’s shirt!
…they were faking the fight, right?
Miguel was on his feet a moment later, crossing spears with Tulio. The two pushed toward each other, then Tulio fell back a step. Miguel thrust out the spear, still held crosswise, shoving Tulio back further. Miguel swung the spear wide, and Tulio ducked to avoid getting cut on the face. Tulio then lunged forward, spear point out. Miguel twisted with a yelp, avoiding the spear by a mere inch.
Bang!
Again, the sound of a gunshot halted the fight. The Spaniards jumped apart, their fierce expressions faltering for a split-second before they turned to Rourke.
“Audrey, tell the two of them to drop their spears,” Rourke growled, clearly out of patience for the delays.
“Both? But Tulio-” Audrey started.
“Can’t be trusted!” Rourke snapped. “Miguel has clearly chosen his side, and who's to say Tulio won’t as well?”
Tulio looked at Rourke. Even if he’d barely seen a gun used, he had to know that his life was being threatened, yet his expression of disinterest never shifted.
“Tell Rourke to not shoot, Audrey,” Tulio said.
“He’s not going to shoot you,” Audrey hissed.
“Are you sure? He looks like he wants to,” Tulio said.
“Nobody’s shooting anyone,” Audrey said, looking at Rourke.
“I give the orders here, Audrey, not you,” Rourke said, pulling back the hammer of his pistol.
Milo’s breath caught, but Tulio still didn’t seem to care. In one sudden move, he straightened and snapped out the handle of his spear. Miguel, watching Rourke, didn’t have time to move before the spear cracked across his wrists. He dropped the spear with an exclamation of pain. Tulio flicked the fallen spear out of the way with barely a glance at Miguel rubbing his wrists.
“There’s no point in wasting a bullet on Miguel,” Tulio said drily. “Just leave him here with the Atlanteans he cares so much about.”
Jaius seemed about to storm at Tulio, but Miguel stopped him with a frantic shake of his head.
“Well, fine, but Rourke’s not sure he needs you,” Audrey said.
Was it Milo’s imagination, or did Audrey actually sound upset at the prospect of Tulio being left behind?
“Oh, yes, he does,” Tulio said, leaning casually against his spear.
“Yeah, sure, what do you want me to tell him?” Audrey asked with a snort.
“Milo’s not going to help Rourke any more than he already has, which means he’s not going to translate that page of the Journal,” Tulio said. He locked eyes with Milo. “Lucky for us, I can read Atlantean.”
Notes:
Tulio grabbed the plot and ran away with it. I'm not responsible for his actions anymore!
Chapter 16: Heed the Call
Notes:
Buckle up, it's time for some Tulio-centric chaos!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Tulio hadn’t had nearly the practice Milo had of reading Atlantean, but he’d always picked things up fast. If it came down to it, he could bluff, but knew that Rourke’s patience had been worn thin by his and Miguel’s mock fight.
And Tulio… was out of ideas.
Normally, when he and Miguel were surrounded by angry soldiers, they made a distraction and ran for the city gates. Or, during that one fateful day, the docks.
But smoke and mirrors weren't going to work in Atlantis. Even if Tulio, Miguel, and Milo managed to escape, that still left Rourke and a bunch of soldiers to terrorize the Atlanteans until they got their way.
Tulio kept inspecting the paper held by Rourke, who clearly -and wisely- didn’t trust Tulio with the missing Journal page, while he tried to come up with a plan. But the more he read, the more his hopes fell.
Milo hadn’t been lying about the Heart keeping the Atlanteans alive. Tulio had really been hoping it was a lie, because then they had the option of actually letting Rourke’s crew take the Heart. But taking the Heart meant the impossibly rich earth going barren and the waters failing. It didn’t sound like taking the Heart meant the Atlanteans would instantly die -Tulio was guessing based on context that the Heart gave them good health and their abnormally long life spans. Of course, they would still die unless there was a way for them all to get to the surface.
Rourke impatiently shook the paper. Tulio looked flatly at him.
“Hurry up, Tulio,” Audrey said shortly.
Tulio straightened. “It says the Heart lies in the eyes of the king.”
“That’s what it says?” Audrey asked skeptically.
Tulio nodded.
“Come on, there’s too much written on there.”
“It’s saying the same thing as Milo, mostly,” Tulio said, tilting his head toward the scholar.
Tulio briefly entertained the idea of making up a curse for removing the Heart from Atlantis. But treasure hunters and grave robbers rarely cared about curses, and Rourke definitely wouldn’t.
“That doesn’t make any sense,” Audrey said.
“In the eyes of…” Tulio mused, then shrugged. “The simple answer is that it makes sense that the king would be the one to keep guard over something this important.”
Audrey’s eyes widened in realization. She quickly translated to Rourke, who scowled. Tulio raised an eyebrow.
“Rourke wants to know how it can be in the eyes of the king if the king’s blind,” Audrey said.
Tulio stared at Audrey, hoping nobody noticed Milo had rolled his eyes at the question.
“What?” Audrey asked with a scowl.
“It’s a metaphor, Audrey.”
Audrey blinked at Tulio, then spun back to Rourke and quickly explained. Rourke didn’t react at first, then he eventually nodded. Tulio didn’t let himself react, though Rourke’s riddle-solving abilities had him far from impressed. Maybe he shouldn’t have said anything, but stalling beside the lake at the base of the city wouldn’t help anyone.
Now, the throne room , on the other hand. That would be heavily guarded, surely. Even if the king didn’t normally bother with guards, with so many strangers in the city, Tulio hoped the king was wise enough to keep his soldiers close to him.
Tulio slid his gaze across everyone while Rourke started barking orders. Kida was surrounded and now being held by Helga. Miguel, Milo, and Jaius were unrestrained but being watched by two soldiers. The others were gathering around Rourke, faces either expressionless or hidden behind masks.
Audrey and Sweet were the exceptions, as Tulio had hoped. Audrey wasn’t hiding her uncertainty very well, and Sweet didn’t bother to hide the disapproval on his face as he looked between their prisoners and Tulio.
Tulio didn’t change expression under Sweet’s gaze. He silently determined to stay close to the pair, knowing he was going to need back-up if he had to reveal his true intentions before the Atlanteans could take control of the situation.
And if that happened first, Tulio hoped Miguel and Milo could keep Jaius and Kida from killing him for “betraying” them.
Tulio held back a sigh as they set out. Cons were so much easier to pull when there was only him and Miguel to keep track of, and when the final step always included running. The first and only time the two of them had taken on something more complicated, they’d become gods of a city that belonged to myths.
Tulio looked up as they reached the edge of the city. A young boy was the first to spot them. His cheerful smile and wave faltered, then he turned with a shout. Two Atlanteans -his parents, probably- appeared in the doorway of a nearby house. While the mother herded the boy inside, along with a teen girl trying to see outside, the father grabbed a fishing spear from beside the door and shouted what sounded like a challenge.
Rourke halted the march only long enough for Helga to drag Kida forward. While the Atlantean wouldn’t have known what a gun was, the threat of Helga pointing it at Kida was enough to make the father lower the spear. Kida spat something at Helga and tried to wretch herself free, but Helga only shoved her onward.
This happened twice more before a distraught mother’s shout brought more Atlanteans running. Again the march was briefly halted, and Rourke was clearly losing patience. Tulio tensed when he stalked to Miguel and Jaius. Rourke spoke fiercely to Jaius, then shoved the pair away from the soldiers. Jaius glared at Rourke, then darted among the others, raising his voice. Atlanteans ran from buildings and shores. Some were holding spears, but they quickly threw aside their weapons at another shout from Jaius.
Tulio and Miguel locked gazes for a second, then turned away before anyone could notice. Miguel ran to Jaius and spoke quickly to him. Jaius’ eyes darted to Kida, then he nodded sharply once. He called out again, and the Atlanteans stepped aside to line the path, fear and frustration clear on many faces.
The group continued onward, with Kida and Milo kept firmly in the middle. Tulio had hoped Milo would be let go, too, but Rourke probably wanted another translator just in case. Not that Milo would willingly work with Rourke, but…
Tulio glanced at Kida. She’d be the first one Rourke would hurt to get his way, and Tulio knew Milo would do anything to keep that from happening. It’s why he had volunteered himself as an Atlantean translator. Tulio knew how to play the con so Rourke wouldn’t feel the need to hurt anyone to get results.
They reached the top of the path without incident. Tulio could tell the soldiers were getting jumpy as more and more Atlanteans followed after them, and found himself hoping the Atlanteans would just try to overwhelm the soldiers.
Unfortunately, none of the Atlanteans seemed keen on starting a fight. With the princess as a prisoner, it was the safe choice, admittedly.
Rourke strode up to the tall doors leading to the throne room. He pushed on them, but they were barred from the inside.
Tulio expected the closed doors to hold them up for some time, but Rourke stepped back. Vinny came forward and put some of the red sticks, along with a small device, in front of the doors. Tulio had seen him do the same thing to the bridge earlier, and Audrey had explained it was dynamite and that it blew up like the oil tanker had on the stone bridge.
Tulio took a step back.
The dynamite exploded in a flash of light and burst of smoke. Tulio flinched when chunks of wood and stone flew outward, but Rourke and the soldiers rushed forward. Kida was dragged forward, but Tulio didn’t miss Sweet “accidentally” knocking against Milo, pushing him away from the soldiers.
Milo, thankfully, took the opportunity to scurry out of the soldiers’ midst. He didn’t go far, just to the front line of Atlanteans, where Miguel and Jaius were waiting. Miguel grabbed Milo’s arm, stopping the scholar from running back after the soldiers when Kida was forced into the throne room.
Tulio didn’t see what happened next because he, with a scowling Audrey in tow, entered the throne room with the last of the soldiers.
And his heart seemed to drop to his knees.
The throne room was big, largely open with only a few tapestries on the walls and small decorative pots. There wasn’t anything resembling a crystal -not that Tulio really expected the Heart to be so obvious, considering Rourke had been in the throne room before and hadn’t seen the Heart- and there wasn’t anything that could have concealed the Heart, unless it was much smaller than the Journal page had shown.
But besides that, there were only two Atlantean soldiers present. It was the older scouts the caravan had first encountered, holding only spears.
Helga spoke sharply. The scouts drew themselves up, but dropped the spears when the king spoke.
And the king himself. Tulio expected an older man, but none of the Atlanteans he’d seen yet had looked very old. Nothing like the king, who looked shriveled and worn, and held only a staff in his withered hands. His eyes were foggy and white, yet seemed to focus directly on Rourke.
Rourke, unaffected by the king’s blind gaze, waved a hand. The crew split up, searching every corner of the throne room and smashing pots. The Atlantean scouts were roughly forced from the throne room, and Tulio held back a wince. Whatever happened in the throne room, it didn't look like he was going to have any backup unless Kida got free.
Presuming Kida didn’t murder him for betraying the Atlanteans. She was glaring at Tulio with enough venom to tell him that Milo hadn’t had a chance to tell her it was an act.
Tulio turned from Kida -she was still restrained, anyway- to scan the room. The clue in the Journal had led them to the throne room, and Tulio knew they had to find the next clue before Rourke’s already thin patience snapped.
Rourke kicked a pot so it smashed against the wall. Tulio’s head jerked toward him, inwardly wincing at the tension on Rourke’s face as he stalked toward the king.
The king had barely moved as his throne room was torn apart. A soldier stood on either side of him, as though he was actually a threat. Rourke made what sounded like a demand, and the king answered with a shake of his head. Rourke’s jaw tightened and his fists clenched.
Tulio felt an unexpected twist in his stomach. He swallowed against sudden nausea.
This was going to get ugly. Fast.
“Rourke,” Tulio said, too fast and sharp to be as casual as he wanted to sound.
Rourke spun toward him, glaring.
“What’re you doing?” Audrey hissed at him.
“Look, unless I miss my guess, the king’s not about to hand over the Heart to us, right?” Tulio asked.
“So?”
“So, threats aren’t going to work with him.”
Audrey stared at him. “It’s always worked in the past; it’s not like anyone’s going to actually get hurt.”
Now it was Tulio’s turn to stare. She really didn’t know what she’d put herself into, did she? This was just getting better and better.
Rourke snapped at Audrey, who responded shortly.
“Rourke wants to know if you’d like to share your theories,” Audrey said sarcastically.
“I’m thinking, alright,” Tulio said, making a show of pointing toward the king.
“You’re stalling,” Audrey said.
“Of course I’m stalling,” Tulio said with a roll of his eyes.
Audrey narrowed his eyes. “Why?”
“Because I’ve seen how these situations can go, and I’m trying to keep Rourke from beating up the old man.” Tulio chose to ignore the king’s offended look because, oops, it hadn’t occurred to him that the king would understand Spanish.
“What are you talking about? Rourke’s not going to hurt him,” Audrey said. “You’re lying.”
“No, I need my translator to stick around,” Tulio snorted. He looked at the king and Rourke again. “We just need a… wait, Audrey, tell Rourke to go to the top of the dais.”
Almost imperceptibly, the king flinched.
“Why?” Audrey asked suspiciously.
“‘In the eyes of the king,’ Audrey. Where does a king sit all day?”
Audrey’s eyes widened. “On his throne!”
“And what better place to watch over the city’s greatest treasure?”
Audrey spun to Rourke and excitedly explained. Rourke scowled skeptically, but strode up the dais. He stared across the throne room, then gestured in frustration and pulled out his gun to point at the king.
Tulio inhaled sharply. He had a sudden urge to run to the king, forget about his cover, he wouldn’t stand aside and let the murderers win again-
Then Rourke’s eyes fixed on some point on the floor. His gun lowered and his mouth moved quietly.
Tulio looked quickly between Rourke and where he seemed to be staring. His thoughts were spinning too much to figure out what Rourke had seen, or perhaps there was something in the design of the room so the clue was only seen from the dais?
Tulio took a deep, grounding breath. Rourke had seen the clue, and he was coming slowly down the steps past the king. They’d follow the next clue and then-
And then Rourke stopped. He said something, his tone mocking head half turned toward the king, that made Audrey frown and Sweet startle.
Then Rourke’s fingers tightened around the handle of his gun and he spun on his heel to punch the king in the stomach.
Audrey screamed.
Miguel’s head shot up when a scream came from the open doors. “What is-”
Milo’s hand raised quickly, silencing Miguel. He stepped forward, head tilted as he listened.
All sounds had gone eerily silent from within the throne room. Then a single voice rose up. Kida. She was speaking in Atlantean, but there was no mistaking the fury in her voice.
On Miguel’s other side, Jaius went pale. He repeated something Kida had said, and it was taken up by the closest Atlanteans.
Voices rose to a sudden roar, but was sharply silenced by a soldier shooting over the head of the crowd. Many Atlanteans reflexively ducked, but Milo and Jaius seemed frozen in place.
“Milo.” Miguel grabbed Milo’s arm, desperately afraid for Tulio. “Tell me what’s happening!”
“Rourke, he…” Milo swallowed hard before continuing, “He’s attacked the king.”
Sweet was moving before Tulio processed what Rourke had done. In seconds, he was on his knees beside the king, who laid silent and limp on the ground. Sweet gingerly touched the king’s face, then spoke to Rourke, his voice taking on a low and dangerous tone Tulio hadn’t heard in the easy-going doctor. Rourke responded with clear scorn as he stepped over the king and toward the center of the room.
Tulio tore his gaze from the prone king -he was breathing, Sweet was with him, his crystal had flared to life, he’d be fine - to Audrey. He’d only been half bluffing when he’d said he didn’t want his translator to betray Rourke -not yet, at least. But he’d also wanted to avoid Audrey having to witness a defenseless old man being so ruthlessly attacked.
“Audrey,” Tulio hissed, tapping her arm. She flinched. “Audrey, look at me.”
Audrey slowly met Tulio’s gaze, her face pale. “He…”
“Stay with me, Audrey,” Tulio muttered. “You wanted to find the treasure, didn’t you?”
Audrey gave him a glare of burning fury, but at least she didn’t break and run. The time wasn’t right. Not yet.
“Are you really going to focus on that?” Audrey hissed back.
Tulio shrugged. It was better than the barely restrained groans of the king as Sweet swiftly checked him. He told himself the king would be fine, Rourke was ignoring him, he wasn’t being threatened -he wasn’t a threat to Rourke anymore, he was fine-
Tulio breathed out and looked away. His gaze met Kida’s murder-filled eyes.
…after everything, he wouldn’t blame her if she killed him.
“Focus,” Tulio muttered, as much to Audrey as to himself.
Rourke stepped through the streams of water running through the throne room, then onto a slightly raised portion. There was a barely audible click, then the floor rumbled and the platform began to sink!
Rourke gestured to Helga, who dragged Kida onto the platform. Inwardly groaning that the royals weren’t out of danger yet, Tulia tilted his head toward the trio. When Audrey looked blank, Tulio dragged her over, and they both dropped onto the platform as well. Rourke glared at him.
“Tell Rourke he’s still going to need a translator,” Tulio said.
Audrey spoke, somewhat haltingly and without looking at Rourke. Rourke responded slowly, then lowered his voice in a way that was almost threatening. Audrey responded with a scowl and firm nod.
Tulio glanced away, wishing yet again that he could understand what was being said. Tulio found himself hoping that Audrey hadn’t fooled him , but there wasn’t any changing what had happened. Besides, Tulio thought he’d played off the attack enough to make it sound like he didn’t care about the king.
The platform lowered through a round tunnel for some time. Tulio peered at the walls, but couldn’t guess how it all moved. Maybe it was another power of the crystals, or that of the Heart if the Heart really was where the crystals got their power.
Eventually, the tunnel opened up. As it did, everyone gasped.
They were in a cave of stone. Down a short path was a pool of water that appeared to be glowing. Above the pool, floating on and suspended by nothing a hundred feet in the air, was a massive blue crystal, glowing brightly to light up the cave like it was daylight. Slowly circling the crystal -the Heart, Tulio was sure- was massive stone statues, all carved with the likeness of various faces.
Kida whispered something. When Tulio looked at her, he was shocked to find a tear trailing down her cheek. She dropped to her knees and pressed her face to the ground, whispering something that sounded like a prayer.
Helga startled, having been in too much shock to keep a firm grip on Kida. She glanced down at Kida, then at Rourke when the man made a scathing comment. Audrey’s mouth twisted.
Audrey said something in a frustrated tone, and Rourke snapped back. From their gesturing, Tulio had a pretty good guess what they were arguing about.
“Hey,” Tulio told Audrey, “Tell Rourke that as long as she’s busy praying, she’s not going to cause any trouble.”
Audrey’s scowl told Tulio what she thought of his seemingly callous remark, but relayed it to Rourke. As Tulio hoped, Rourke turned away from Kida to study the Heart. Audrey seemed caught off-guard, and Tulio barely restrained himself from remarking.
There was a lot bigger of a problem to deal with at that moment.
Rourke went to the pool’s edge. Tulio followed slowly, keeping a distance between them. He peered into the water, but all he saw was deep shadows.
Rourke kicked a pebble into the water. Ripples spread outward, then the Heart turned red .
Tulio’s flinch was mirrored by the others, especially when a low murmuring sound echoed through the chamber. Tulio at first thought it was rumbling stone or Atlantean at the very least, but…
“...invaders… within the sacred chamber…”
That had definitely been Spanish. And more than a little ominous.
“That’s not freaky,” Audrey muttered, suddenly at Tulio’s side.
“You’re hearing words, too?” Tulio whispered.
“Yeah. In English, Spanish… and a few other languages, too, I think.”
“Can you understand them?”
“No,” Audrey said, clearly lying.
Tulio raised an eyebrow.
Audrey hunched her shoulders. “It’s just an echo about invaders or something.”
Tulio looked curiously up at the Heart. Was it some kind of machine, or something a little more magical in explanation?
Rourke paced along the shore. Warnings or not, Rourke wasn’t deterred from his goal of treasure. Helga, though, remained a few steps from the shore with an extremely guarded expression. Tulio had the impression that if he, Audrey, and Kida made a run for it, Helga would actually join them.
The temptation to try was interrupted when Kida stood. Helga turned halfway toward her before flinching back. As Kida raised her head, Tulio saw why.
Kida’s crystal was glowing brightly and floating at the end of its string. And Kida’s eyes, wide and fixed on the Heart, had begun to glow a bright blue as well! Kida began to walk toward the pool with slow strides.
“Tulio, what is this?” Audrey hissed.
“Why are you asking me?” Tulio asked, incredulously watching as Kida stopped at the pool’s edge.
“You’re the one who reads Atlantean,” Audrey said.
Tulio looked between her and Rourke, who was clearly waiting for an explanation as well. For once, though, Tulio’s mind was blank. He held out a hand to Rourke in frustration, and was handed the Journal’s page.
Tulio stared at the same clue he’d read before. There wasn’t any explanation as to how to reach the Heart or use its power…
Tulio nearly face-palmed as it occurred to him to turn the page over. But he resisted when he saw the other side held a drawing of a person with outstretched arms and the Heart over them.
“Did- did you forget about the other side?!” Audrey demanded.
“Rourke was too busy demanding where the Heart was located, not how to move it,” Tulio snapped back, frantically putting together the Atlantean words. “...oh.”
“Oh? What’s oh?” Audrey asked.
“The Heart, it’s… the Atlanteans control it, it controls them.” Tulio squinted, trying to rapidly put together the meaning of the Atlantean nonsense. “The Heart will seek to protect itself through a sacrifice of…” Tulio lifted his head and finished softly, “Royal blood.”
“Royal- Kida!” Audrey exclaimed.
Forget the con, Tulio wasn’t going to stand by while the Heart did… whatever the text was saying about becoming one. He stepped quickly forward, reaching out.
Kida turned sharply, slapping away Tulio’s hand with shocking force. He recoiled with a grunt, rubbing his hand. He looked down, wondering if the strike had left a mark.
“Child of ash.”
Tulio’s head snapped up at Kida speaking in Spanish. Kida hadn’t known Spanish just hours before. And while it was mostly her voice, there was a strange etherealness about it.
Then there was the name she’d used for him…
“You interfere with matters greater than you can comprehend.”
“I just want to keep Milo’s friend safe,” Tulio said warily. “Nobody needs to be sacrificed today.”
“Sacrifice. It’s a subject you know well, I see.”
Tulio blinked. What was Kida -or, the Heart?- talking about. Or was he asking how it knew?
Tulio shook his head. He was speaking with a giant, apparently sentient, crystal and Tulio was questioning how it knew things.
“What’s she mean?” Audrey asked.
“I don’t know,” Tulio said, only half lying.
“Leave your kingdom of lies, and you shall see,” Kida said.
Tulio blinked and opened his mouth. But Kida turned away from him and stepped onto the pool. Tulio lunged for her arm with a grunt-
And Kida walked out on the surface of the pool.
“Tell me you’re seeing this,” Tulio muttered to Audrey.
Audrey flung her arms out helplessly. She snapped something at Rourke, who finally looked somewhat unnerved.
“It’s not too late to go home,” Kida said, bringing Tulio’s gaze snapping back.
“Wait, what was that?” Audrey asked. “That wasn’t Spanish.”
Tulio shrugged silently. What had she meant?
Kida stopped underneath the Heart, which was glowing brighter than ever. She spread her arms and tilted her head up as the light directly over her grew brighter and brighter. The beam of light began to narrow as well, until a single, blinding beam of light was shining directly over Kida’s head.
Light flashed, so bright everyone had to cover their eyes. When Tulio blinked the dots of light from his vision, he blinked again, his mouth falling open.
Kida’s feet had lifted from the pool’s surface, and she was rising gently into the air. While Tulio gaped, she drew closer to the Heart. The carved statues began to spin, faster and faster, as the Heart glowed ever brighter.
Eventually, Tulio had to close his eyes and turn his head away. The murmur of voices rose into a roar, until it seemed to rattle Tulio’s bones.
Then, with a flash of light Tulio saw through his closed eyes, all the noise stopped. He reflexively crouched, even as his eyes crept open.
The Heart was gone. Kida was gone. In both their place was… was something that was somehow both.
The glowing figure slowly descended. Tulio could make out upraised arms around a head with hair that swirled like some sort of liquid metal. The figure had a body and two legs, all slightly distorted in the same strange liquid metal illusion as the hair. Everything had the unearthly glow of the Heart. The figure alighted on the pool’s surface, only for the water to bow beneath its feet.
“K…Kida?” Tulio said hesitantly.
Glowing white eyes flashed into existence. Tulio and Audrey gasped, while Rourke somehow remained unaffected.
Kida -it was surely Kida, even if her body was something… different and wrong - began to walk across the water. With every step, the water was pushed away from her feet.
The very air rumbled, then the statues dropped from the air one by one. Tulio flinched as they fell around Kida, but the same invisible force that was pushing down on the water was surrounding Kida as well. Though the statues fell close to her, Kida’s steps never faltered and the splashing water cascaded down from around her without touching her.
Tulio backed away a step as Kida’s slow steps brought her to shore. Audrey scrambled away, looking rather ill. Rourke, intrigued, watched Kida pass him.
What had… was it still Kida, Tulio wondered. Or was it the Heart? Or both? Could they be separated?
“Kida?”
Tulio reached out, hesitated, then grabbed Kida’s arm.
“Your choice has been made.”
The words filled Tulio’s head, so loud and forceful that his ears rang. Pain filled his hand, pushing into his bones like a poker, white-hot with heat. He felt a torturous sensation in his head, like a wave breaking over his thoughts and drowning everything out. He barely heard Audrey screaming his name.
“Are you willing to pay the price, child of ash?”
Miguel hugged Ladron to his chest as he stared at the broken doors of the throne room. Most of the soldiers were outside by now, with Vinny lingering in the doorway. Sweet and Audrey hadn’t made a reappearance.
Miguel tried to not worry about Tulio. They’d taken bigger risks before, and Tulio knew when to run.
Not that they had anywhere to run, and Rourke didn’t seem like the sort to let Tulio go so easily, anyway. Once he realized Tulio’s trick, he’d be furious. Supposing he hadn’t already figured it out.
Miguel couldn’t help shuddering as he remembered Audrey’s scream. Tulio wouldn’t have just ignored an attack on the king. Miguel didn’t think so, at least, but with Tulio’s recent dreams, if the past blurred too much with the present, like it frequently had when they were both young…
Vinny recoiled out of the doorway, his mouth falling open so the match fell to the ground. He backed away, looking like he’d seen a ghost.
Milo pushed through the soldiers holding the Atlanteans back. He was shoved back into the crowd, but Milo tried again, determined.
Then something appeared in the doorway, and everyone froze.
Miguel stared at the glowing form making its slow, sedate way down the path. Rourke and Helga were behind it, watching it closely.
Was it… the Heart? Was the Heart alive?
Milo made a tortured sound. Miguel looked at him and was shocked by the horror on Milo’s face.
“Kida,” Milo choked out.
The name floated across the crowd, then Atlantean voices began to rise. The soldiers snapped out of their surprise to push the Atlanteans out of the way of the path, as Kida was still walking.
Miguel’s gaze was dragged away when Tulio and Audrey appeared at the entrance as well. Tulio was pale and grimacing, hunching slightly over his right hand while he wrapped Audrey’s bandana around his palm. Audrey tried to help, but Tulio kept pushing her away.
What had…
Miguel’s eyes darted between Tulio and Kida. He tried to push his way toward Tulio, but a soldier shoved him so roughly that Miguel was knocked onto his back. Ladron went tumbling away, then skittered back to huddle at Miguel’s feet when he stood.
“Tulio!” Miguel called.
Tulio didn't seem to hear. He finished with the bandana and continued walking after Rourke and his men.
“Tulio, why-”
Giving up on trying to reach Tulio, Miguel ran alongside the procession. Atlanteans wailed all around him. The few who attempted to force their way past the soldiers were met with increasing violence, and more than a few were knocked to the ground by ruthless strikes to the head with the soldier’s guns.
At the foot of the path, on the stone platform just beyond the bridge, stood several of the caravan’s trucks. One of the truck’s covers had been removed, and a tall metal structure had been assembled in its place.
Miguel looked between the contraption to Kida, then to the soldier dropping a wide ramp against the back of the truck. He looked again at Tulio in the back, seeming more like himself.
Except for the whole, “working with the bad guys” part.
Miguel swallowed nervously. Tulio was supposed to keep them from finding the Heart! Or, at the very least, stalled them! He wasn’t supposed to be walking calmly alongside the soldiers, silently watching Kida climb into the structure.
Miguel watched Tulio, fervently waiting for some clue as to what Tulio’s plan was. Because if he was still pretending to work along with Rourke, he had to have a plan. If not, then he had the perfect opportunity to slip into the Atlanteans so they could regroup, figure out a new plan to keep the Heart out of Rourke’s hands or, failing that, get the Atlanteans to the surface.
Right?
Miguel became aware of Milo at his side. He glanced at his friend, who was glaring at the group with intense hatred. His own hands twitched with the frustration of helplessness and confusion at seeing Tulio at Rourke’s side like it was where he belonged.
Tulio finally met Miguel’s gaze as Audrey climbed up to start securing the sides of the structure. He gave a jerk of his chin toward the truck.
Miguel twitched, his emotions peaking and snapping with an anger that had him seeing red.
“Enough of this, Tulio!” Miguel shouted, startling several nearby Atlanteans and soldiers. Audrey flinched so hard that she dropped her wrench. “You’ve gone too far!”
“And you’ve not gone far enough,” Tulio said harshly. He stepped toward Miguel. “Come on, Miguel, while there’s still time.”
“Time for-” Miguel shook his head. “What are you doing?”
Tulio stepped closer. The soldiers willingly shifted so Tulio could grab Miguel’s arm. Miguel jerked his arm back.
“Come on , Miguel,” Tulio said sharply. “If you hurry up, Rourke won’t even notice.”
“Notice-” Miguel shook his head and retreated a step. “No, we can’t go with them, not after what they’ve done to this city. After what they’ve done to Kida!”
“Kida made her choice!” Tulio said sharply. Under his breath, he added, “And I’ve made mine.”
“Taking Kida, the Heart, what-whatever she is, it will destroy everyone!” Miguel pushed.
“I know that!” Tulio snapped. “And do you want to be here with them?”
Rourke and some of his soldiers were watching them. The crew, finished with closing up and securing the structure holding Kida, glanced at them, then away. Milo stepped forward, speaking in a low and angry voice to them, and Miguel had the sense that he was giving them a speech similar to the one he was giving to Tulio.
A speech he shouldn’t have to be giving to Tulio.
“Do I- it’s better than siding with a murderer!” Miguel shouted because surely, surely, Tulio wasn’t really going along with Rourke’s plan?
Tulio grabbed the front of Miguel’s shirt and yanked him closer. Miguel flinched, but Tulio’s words came in a hiss.
“The Heart can send us back!”
Miguel stared into Tulio’s near-frenzied eyes, then at the glow coming from a window in the structure. He suddenly saw the blue glow of the whirlpool that had sent him and Tulio into the future and onto the strangest adventure ever.
Had the Heart really brought them here? Why? And could it really send them back?
The thoughts had barely flitted into Miguel’s mind before he brushed them away. The questions didn’t matter, not really. Miguel didn’t want to go back.
“Tulio,” Miguel said, looking back to his friend, “There’s nothing for us there.”
“Would you rather die here, in this dark, stone tomb of a city?!” Tulio spat, his body trembling with… what? Rage? Fear?
Miguel stared at him in shock, then slowly lifted his hands and pried Tulio’s fingers from his shirt. He stepped back, saying one word.
“Yes.”
A half-dozen emotions flashed through Tulio’s face before he closed his eyes. Miguel waited, expecting Tulio to finally drop the act.
Instead, Tulio opened his eyes and stepped back, his face wiped of emotion. He said in a low voice, “Well, I’m not.”
Miguel stared at Tulio. Suddenly, he remembered when he’d told Tulio he’d chosen to stay in El Dorado. That he’d chosen the city and being a fake god over Tulio, who’d been understandably upset. The two of them had argued, then ignored each other, then pulled their routine of fake fighting that hadn’t been entirely fake. No, the slaps and shoves had been a little too hard, Miguel knew.
But after surviving Cortes, after saving El Dorado, after weeks lost in the jungle, after Chel abandoning Tulio like old clothes in favor of the merchant who offered her so much more than two vagabonds with no place to settle, after-
After Miguel had found Tulio starving and half-blind from smoke in a refuse heap when they were kids, after comforting him through nightly nightmares, after teaching him to shuck his old life like a corn husk, after years of watching each others’ backs, after everything, they’d sworn to each other to never let anything separate them.
And what had Tulio chosen now? Going back to a world that had nothing for them anymore. But, hey, he’d be rich.
Miguel expected to be angry. He expected to rage and yell and to throw himself at Tulio for one last fight, this one in earnest.
But in reality, all he could do was sink to his knees and watch the man he considered his brother turn his back on him and walk away.
Notes:
Well, that happened! Aside from all the... you know, angst, I was really excited for this chapter because this is when I really started dropping tidbits from Tulio's backstory, plus I got really excited with exploring the possibility that the Heart would be slightly more sentient than was shown in the movie~
Also may I just say, it's so much easier to write Rourke when I'm using Tulio or Miguel's perspective. I suck at writing villain dialogue, so going with showing him being a villain in actions works out better.
Chapter 17: Finding Reason in the Madness
Notes:
And with this chapter, Trail We Blaze is officially the longest posted fic of mine! And it's not done yet!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Milo barely heard the Spaniards’ argument. It was just another one of their cons, after all, to buy time. He focused on the rest of the crew securing the container holding Kida.
“So... I guess this is how it ends, huh? Fine, you win. You're wiping out an entire civilization, but, hey... you'll be rich,” Milo all but growled. His eyes fell on Audrey. “Congratulations, Audrey, guess you and your dad can probably start that second garage after all.”
Audrey, halfway into the truck, hesitated. But then she scowled, hauled herself inside, and slammed the door shut.
Milo turned on Vinny, climbing into a second truck with Mole. “And Vinny, you can start a whole chain of flower shops. I'm sure your family's gonna be very proud.”
Milo’s angry gaze swept over the rest of the crew. Most of them were watching him speak with some level of regret, but what was the point of such looks when they were dooming the Atlanteans? How could they not see what they were doing?
Tulio walked over to join the crew, finally drawing Milo’s gaze back. He stared at Tulio, then at Miguel kneeling at the front of the crowd with tears in his eyes and a lost expression on his face.
Milo bit out, “But that's what it's all about, right? Money. ”
Rourke shook his head as he approached Milo, saying condescendingly, “Get off your soapbox, Thatch. You've read Darwin. It's called natural selection. We're just helping it along.”
Milo’s lips drew back in a hard line. How Rourke thought he could justify the massacre was beyond Milo, and gave him a sour taste in his mouth.
Helga leaned out of the truck carrying Kida to say, “Commander, we're ready.”
“Yeah, give me a minute. I know I'm forgetting something,” Rourke said, waving her off as he turned his back to Milo. He muttered, “I got the cargo, the crystal, the crew… oh, yeah.”
Milo probably should’ve seen the punch coming.
He barely had a moment to realize Rourke was turning, then Milo found himself on the ground with a sharp pain in his mouth and back of his skull. He sat up, squinting when he found his vision blurry and reached up to touch his mouth. The punch had split his lip, and he could taste a bit of blood on his tongue.
“Look at it this way, son.”
Milo glared up at the blurry shape of Rourke. If he called Milo “son” one more time, he was going to find a spear and stab the man!
“You were the man who discovered Atlantis, and now, you're part of the exhibit,” Rourke said, stepping forward with a crunch.
At first, Milo thought Rourke had stepped on his glasses. But then Rourke tossed Milo’s fallen glasses so they landed on Milo’s stomach. Milo snatched them up and shoved them onto his face, grimacing when his palm hit his nose, which must have taken the brunt of Rourke’s punch.
Then Milo’s eyes landed on the splintered picture frame between him and Rourke. He scrambled onto his knees and reached tentatively toward the frame. The glass had been shattered, and Milo could feel the sharp edges pricking his fingertips as he fished for a corner of the photo inside.
Milo cradled the photo in his palm, staring at the image of him when he was young, sitting on his grandfather’s lap. Life had seemed so simple then, just him and his grandfather going on adventures in the country, with promises of crossing the ocean to visit faraway countries once Milo was a bit older.
But then his grandfather had gotten sick, and Milo had faced a harsh reality about how alone he and his grandfather had been. It had never been him and his grandfather facing the mysteries the world held. It had been the two of them against the world, always.
And once again, the world had won.
Milo squeezed his eyes shut against a flood of tears. He hated this. He hated the greed of Rourke and his crew. The helplessness of the peaceful Atlanteans. The prison holding Kida.
And he hated himself, for bringing the world’s greed to the hidden city.
A hand on his arm pulled Milo from his spiral. He lifted his head, then blinked, sure he was imagining things.
“C’mon,” Vinny muttered, tugging on Milo’s arm.
Still in shock, Milo let himself be pulled to his feet by Vinny. He startled when Cookie and Mole left the trucks to stomp over to join them, then blinked when Packard flicked away her ever-present cigarette to join them, even if she was muttering that they were all going to die.
She was right, probably.
Milo’s gaze slid over to the truck where Audrey and Tulio were still sitting. He could see them through the rear window, both of them facing forward as if unaware of what was going on behind them.
“Oh, you can’t be serious!” Rourke shouted, snapping Milo’s gaze back. “We're this close to our biggest payday ever and you pick now of all times to grow a conscience?”
“We've done a lot of things we're not proud of,” Vinny took his hand off Milo’s arm to count off on his fingers, “Robbing graves… plundering tombs… double parking… but nobody got hurt.” He hesitated. “Well...maybe somebody got hurt, but nobody we knew .”
“Well, if that's the way you want it, fine,” Rourke scoffed, closing the truck door once again. Over the rumble of the engine starting, Milo barely heard him say, “More for me.”
The soldiers loaded into the trucks, keeping their guns pointed on the group and the Atlanteans. All the trucks started, and began to roll away.
A sharp gasp made Milo look at Miguel, then at the trucks. All he could see of Tulio was the back of his head.
Miguel scrambled to his feet. He shoved through the Atlanteans, fleeing toward the city.
“Miguel, wait!” Milo started after him.
Gasps and murmurs rose from the Atlanteans. All of them were looking at their crystals, whose lights flickered, then went out!
“No. No!”
Milo spun on his heel. The last truck had started across the bridge. While Milo’s mind raced for an idea, the front truck reached the other side. The ever-present roar of the falls abruptly ceased, the silence shocking Milo into motion.
“Come on, we can’t let them get away with this!” Milo said.
Milo took only one step before Vinny grabbed his arm and said, “Wait a second!”
Milo looked sharply at him. “We don’t have a-”
Boom!
Milo’s attention jerked back to the bridge as the far side exploded! The explosion spread down the bridge, getting closer and closer.
“Duck!” Vinny yelled.
Milo dove to the ground, throwing his arms over the back of his head and neck. He winced as hot debris bounced off his arms and back.
When the sounds of the explosion died away, he rolled onto his back. He stared at the flaming stakes at the end of the platform, all that remained of the bridge.
“Okay, now you can go,” Vinny said.
Milo didn’t bother replying as he pushed himself to his feet. He stared across the chasm, where the trucks were pulling away into the tunnel Mole’s digger had carved. He turned back around.
The Atlanteans were staring at their darkened crystals. A cry rose up from among the crowd. Husbands clutched their wives and children closer. A woman began to weep, startling the baby in her arms to wail.
“This… this is…” Milo murmured.
“Rourke.”
Milo looked at Vinny. The other man shrugged helplessly.
“Okay, so maybe it wasn’t entirely Rourke’s fault. You should probably blame Helga, too,” Vinny said with a weak smile.
“It’s the fault of all of you!” a man shouted. “You invaded our home, and now you’ve doomed us all!”
Children, frightened by the adults’ fear and anger, began to wail. Atlanteans grabbed spears they’d dropped earlier.
“Oh, now you want to fight?” Packard droned as she lit another cigarette.
“Enough!” Jaius suddenly shouted, shoving his way between the Atlanteans and Milo’s group. He turned his furious gaze onto the Atlanteans. “It isn’t their fault!”
“It is a little bit,” Vinny whispered in Milo’s ear. “Well, except for you.”
“Not helping,” Mole squeaked, looking like he wanted to burrow out of sight.
The man from before was of the same thought. “All who come from the surface bring nothing but trouble! We were happy down here-”
“We were a dying city!” Sunzu interrupted, snatching the man’s spear as she stalked past him. “The scholar came only to learn about our people, our ways. He was tricked by Rourke. None of the blame lies on him! As for the others, well.” Sunzu glanced at Vinny, Mole, Cookie, and Packard. “They stand with us to face our fate, do they not? You’re angry, yes, so am I! But let’s not take out our anger on those who only want to help us.”
A murmur ran through the Atlanteans. Milo swallowed hard, but their anger was thankfully abated. Against the small group, at least.
Sunzu turned back to Milo. “The king wants to see you.”
“The king?” Milo winced inwardly as he realized he’d managed to forget about the king. “Is he…?”
“He lives,” Sunzu assured him. “Go.”
“But- Miguel, he-” Milo started.
“I’ll find him,” Jaius said, then vanished in the crowd.
Milo gulped again. While he was glad the king was alright, the king had clearly disliked the caravan’s presence when they had first arrived. Now, with Rourke having stolen Kida and the Heart? Even if Sunzu had called off the Atlanteans, Milo wondered if the king would be so kind as to spare them.
“Go,” Sunzu said, misunderstanding Milo’s hesitation. “I’ll make sure nobody hurts your companions.”
While Milo would’ve preferred the backup, he walked away from the others. The Atlanteans parted to allow Altivo through. The stallion snorted, then ran up to sniff Milo over.
“I’m alright, boy,” Milo said, rubbing Altivo’s neck. “You should find Miguel.”
Altivo snorted again and placed himself to walk beside Milo as he continued up the path. Maybe Miguel had wanted to be entirely alone, though Milo did notice that Ladron was missing.
Before long, Milo stood before the ruined doors of the throne room. He took a deep breath before striding inside.
The king, pale and his breath rasping, laid on the couch that served as his throne. Sweet crouched beside him, holding his stethoscope over the king’s heart. Salus stood nearby, spear in hand and closely watching Sweet.
Somehow, the king was first to notice Milo’s presence. He pushed away Sweet with one hand and began to sit up.
“Easy, Your Majesty,” Sweet murmured. “Let me help.”
The King Kashekim accepted Sweet’s help, sitting up to recline in a heap of pillows. Once he was settled, he turned his face toward Milo. He didn’t speak, though, and after a moment, he closed his eyes. Sweet checked that he was comfortable, then went to Milo near the door.
“He insisted you come,” Sweet said.
“How… how is he?” Milo asked nervously.
“Stable, but weak,” Sweet said. He clasped Milo’s shoulder. “Rourke hit him. He was… there was internal bleeding. But the king and Salus, they used their crystals somehow to heal him. He’s still weak from the injuries, but I think he’ll make a full recovery thanks to those crystals.”
Milo rubbed his face tiredly. “What a nightmare. And I brought it here.”
“Ah, don’t go beating yourself up,” Sweet said. “He’s been after that crystal since Iceland.”
“And I’m the one who brought him here,” Milo said tightly. He grasped a handful of hair in frustration. “How have I… how did it go so wrong? And Tulio, he’s with Rourke now!”
Sweet’s eyes narrowed. “He what? I was under the impression that he was bluffing, buying time or just staying close so he’d be there when we found the Heart.”
“Me, too.” Milo waved a hand. “I don’t understand. Even when Miguel argued with him, he refused. He tried to convince Miguel to go with them, I think, but…”
Sweet considered the statement, then asked, “Did you know Tulio was buried alive as a child?”
Milo blinked. “He… what?”
“When the bridge collapsed, Tulio was trapped and had a panic attack. He said it had to do with being buried alive as a child. Tulio refused to give Audrey any more details, though.”
Milo thought about all the times he’d caught Tulio staring at the ceiling with an expression that was almost fear, and the times he’d woken up screaming. He’d gotten more and more tired as the expedition went on, too.
“Tulio didn’t betray us because he wanted the money,” Milo murmured, relieved for an explanation. “He’s scared of being trapped underground. But… would he really abandon Miguel like that?”
“Scared people do desperate things,” Sweet said.
“But, Audrey…” Milo shook his head. “Vinny, Mole, Packard, and Cookie left Rourke, but Audrey stayed. Why?”
Sweet frowned. “I don’t know. She’s never liked it when any of the locals got hurt on our expeditions in the past. Rourke always tried to keep her away from the worst of it. I thought for sure she was going to leave when she saw him hit the king.”
“Whatever their reason, they aren’t going to help us,” Milo sighed. “We need to…”
Milo rubbed his face. He was exhausted, both physically and emotionally. He knew he had to find some way to get the Atlanteans to the surface before they all died -and hope that they weren’t entirely dependent on the Heart to live- but strategy had never been a strong suit of his.
“So, what’s it going to be?”
Milo blinked at Sweet’s question. “Excuse me?”
Sweet nodded his head outside. “I followed you in,and I’ll follow you out. It's your decision.”
“Oh, my decision? Well, I think we've seen how effective my decisions have been,” Milo snorted, his frustration bubbling over. “Let's recap: I lead a band of plundering vandals to the greatest archeological find in recorded history, thus enabling the assault on the royal family, not to mention personally delivering the most powerful force known to man into the hands of a mercenary nutcase who’s probably going to sell it to the Kaiser!” Milo gestured helplessly, his voice rising with each sentence. “Have I left anything out?!”
“Well, you did set the camp on fire and drop us down that big hole,” Sweet added helpfully.
“Thank you,” Milo said, flinging his hands in the air. “Thank you very much.”
Sweet smiled slightly and clapped a hand on Milo’s shoulder. “Of course, it’s been my experience, when you hit bottom the only place left to go is up.”
Milo sighed wearily, head drooping. “Who told you that?”
“A fella by the name of Thaddeus Thatch.”
Milo’s head shot up. Sweet smiled again.
“If you want to save Kida and the city, we’re going to have to move fast,” Sweet reminded him.
“I know.” Milo ran a hand through his hair, anger spent and exhaustion sliding back in. “But I’ve never done this before.”
“What? Rescued someone? Participated in a treasure hunt? Faced an army?” Sweet’s persistent smile was too sober for Milo to laugh.
“If I just knew what happened to Kida,” Milo murmured. “Maybe…?”
“She has been chosen,” King Kashekim’s voice suddenly said. “Like her mother before her.”
Milo and even Sweet jumped. The king had somehow joined them across the throne room, silent despite the fact that he was leaning heavily on his staff. Salus stood beside him, looking concerned.
“Your Majesty, you should keep resting,” Sweet immediately said.
The king waved off his hands. “I am more concerned about my daughter.”
“You… said she was chosen?” Milo asked hesitantly when King Kashekim remained standing.
“In times of danger, the crystal will choose a host. One of royal blood to protect itself and its people. It will accept no other,” the king said, lifting his chin slightly with his blind eyes fixed on some point beyond Milo and Sweet.
“W-Wait a minute,” Milo stammered. He had an image flash through his mind of the mural, specifically of the lines talking about a princess heeding a call. He asked hoarsely. “Choose? So this thing is alive?”
“In a way,” King Kashekim said, leaning more heavily on his staff. “The crystal thrives on the collective emotions of all who came before us. In return, it provides power longevity, protection. As it grew, it developed a consciousness of its own.”
King Kashekim coughed and wavered. Sweet and Salus quickly took his arms. This time, King Kashekim allowed himself to be guided back to his couch. He sat heavily for several moments, catching his breath, before speaking again.
“In my arrogance, I sought to use it as a weapon of war, but its power proved too great to control. It overwhelmed us and led to our destruction.”
“That’s why you hid it!” Milo said in realization. “To keep history from repeating itself.”
“And to prevent Kida from suffering the same fate as my beloved wife,” King Kashekim said sadly.
“What do you mean? Wh…What’s going to happen to Kida?” Milo asked, fearing the answer.
“If she remains bonded to the crystal, she could be lost to it forever.” King Kashekim’s face clenched. “The love of my daughter is all I have left.”
“She’s… she’s not gone yet,” Milo said, gathering his own feeble resolve. “There’s still time. We can still save Kida. We can save the whole city!”
King Kashekim didn’t immediately respond to Milo’s words. His face remained turned to the side. Milo wondered if he’d even heard him, then the king removed his crystal. Salus startled.
“Your Majesty,” Salus said in quiet protest.
“The further the Heart goes from the city, the less power the crystals will hold,” King Kashekim said. “Through the years, the power has already begun to fade. My burden would have become hers when the time was right, but now it falls to you.”
Milo flinched when King Kashekim turned his face toward him. He swallowed.
“Me? Are you sure?” Milo asked, chuckling soberly. “You did, uh… hear everything I did, right?”
“You sought Atlantis to learn our history,” King Kashekim said. “I spent centuries preserving our way of life, blind to how it was killing us. But Kida knew the truth. That is why she brought you to the city. She saw something in you… you , Milo Thatch, that would save her people and city.”
“I…” Milo looked at his feet, then squared his shoulders. “I’ll do everything I can, Your Majesty. It’s the least I can do.”
“I do not ask you to do this alone, Milo Thatch,” King Kashekim said. “Kneel.”
Confused, Milo did as he was told. He was wholly unprepared for the king to lean forward and drop his crystal necklace over Milo’s head!
“What-” Milo touched the small, slightly warm crystal. “What are you doing, Your Majesty? You need the crystal!”
“They are a means to concentrate the Heart’s energy, yes, but the people of Atlantis don’t need their crystals to live. It will protect you, so you may bring my daughter back.”
“I- Yes, yes, I’ll bring Kida back, if I could just…” Milo blinked and face-palmed. “The fish!”
“The what?” Sweet asked.
“The fish… statues… flying things,” Milo said, hands flapping as he thought fast. “Kida and I figured out how to activate them with crystals. We can take those to go after Rourke!”
“Salus,” King Kashekim said, turning his face toward the scout, “Go with them.”
“Your Majesty, I should stay here with you,” Salus said.
King Kashekim shook his head. “The danger has left the city. Go. Help them bring Kida back.”
Salus hesitated, then bowed low. “Yes, Your Majesty.” He sprinted toward the door, calling over his shoulder to Milo, “I will gather the scouts! They know the tunnels best, and will be able to move quickly.”
“Yes, I’ll just-” Milo stopped himself.
Milo turned away, then spun back and dropped to one knee to bow to the king. Beside him, Sweet did the same.
“I’ll do everything in my power to bring Kida back,” Milo said.
“As will I. And while I know it’s useless now, I apologize for my involvement with this,” Sweet said, more solemn than Milo had ever heard him.
“There are many things even I should have done differently,” King Kashekim said, then sighed. “Now go. Kida’s time grows short.”
Milo and Sweet rose and ran outside. There, the rest of the crew was waiting, nervously eyeing the excited Atlanteans.
“Hey, uh, Milo, how worried should we be about that?” Vinny asked, jutting a thumb at the Atlanteans.
Milo shook his head. “They’re going to help us go after Rourke.”
Mole crossed his arms. “I suppose you’ve learned to fly?”
Milo grinned. “Actually, yeah. Come on, let’s- oh, has anyone seen Miguel?”
Everyone shook their heads. While Milo wanted to tell Miguel about his and Sweet’s theory about Tulio’s betrayal, there wasn’t any time to waste searching. If Milo was right, if they could succeed, he could bring Tulio back, and everything would be fine. Though Milo had a feeling there would be some more yelling involved, and possibly a brief spar.
Milo shook himself back to the present issue and raised his hands. He yelled, “Everyone who wants to go after Kida and the Heart, find a fish statue!”
A few of the younger Atlanteans -young adults and several children Milo knew would have to be coaxed away soon enough- scattered, but the others stood looking at Milo in confusion. This included the small crew. Sweet and Salus glanced at each other, shrugged, and headed out.
“What the labradoodle are you talking about? Hows fish goin’ to get us outta here?” Cookie demanded.
“Just find one!” Milo said, flapping his hands at the lingering crew. “I’ll show you!”
“Okay,” Vinny said, shrugging. He walked away, saying, “I’m gonna find something sporty… like a tuna.”
Milo started to follow, then paused when Altivo nudged his shoulder. The stallion stared at Milo with a drooping head and lowered ears, looking very much like a moping puppy.
“Go find Miguel, Altivo,” Milo told him.
Altivo snorted and didn’t move. Milo wondered if Altivo had already tried, and been sent away.
“Well, you can’t come with us…”
Milo trailed off, trying to picture a horse balancing on one of the flying fish. Altivo had plenty of talents, but riding a flying fish wouldn’t be one of them. Milo started to walk away, then paused at a thought.
“Stay with King Kashekim,” Milo said, rubbing under Altivo’s ears. “He probably wishes he could come with us to rescue Kida, too.”
Altivo perked up, then bobbed his head. Milo had by now stopped being surprised at how human Altivo could be. Besides, there were more important things to figure out at the moment. While Altivo headed into the throne room, Milo ran down the path to where he’d seen some of the flying fish earlier. Atlanteans were gathered around them already, waiting for instruction.
“Alright, everyone!” Milo said, straddling the nearest flying fish and narrating each action as he did it. “Put the crystal in the slot, and your hand on the pad. Half-turn the crystal right, then a quarter-turn left. Keep your hand on the pad, and gentle commands to move the fish!”
The flying fish under Milo hummed to life and rose slightly off the ground, tearing free the vines and moss that had grown over it. Atlanteans gasped in awe, then scattered to the other flying fish.
In moments, a dozen of the flying fish were in the air. More than a few of them shot backward and one spun upside-down -the pilot managed to avoid falling with an impressive maneuver of using the head of his hammerhead shark-like ride to land on its “stomach”- but the Atlanteans were quick learners. As another dozen flying fish and sharks rose, the first to mount their flying fish were zipping across the city. Milo was pleased to see the rest of the crew on flying fish as well.
Milo turned his flying fish toward where the bridge had been, but paused when Sweet called his name. Milo moved his flying fish in quick, jerky movements.
“What’s wrong?” Milo asked. “We need to hurry!”
“Rourke and his crew aren’t going anywhere anytime soon,” Sweet pointed out. “Everyone needs to be comfortable with their fish before we go after them.”
“Oh… right,” Milo said sheepishly. “How was Rourke planning on getting out, anyway?”
“Best guess, he’s going to find a way out through the volcano,” Sweet said. “Some mortars survived the fall, unfortunately, and Audrey was thinking the balloon would be salvageable, not to mention the planes.”
“The- the what?!” Milo exclaimed.
Salus flew his flying fish -which actually resembled a real flying fish- over. “What’s wrong?”
“Rourke and his crew have their own flying machines,” Milo said weakly.
“With so few of them, they won’t have a reason to launch the planes. Hopefully,” Sweet reassured them both.
“Still, we’ve got no firepower against their guns and-and, planes and mortars!” Milo exclaimed.
“Now, those last two need time to prepare,” Sweet said. “We go in fast and catch them off-guard, grab Kida, and get back.”
“Easy,” Milo said sarcastically.
“Surprise is on our side,” Sweet said. “They’ll never know what hit them. Salus, is there anything we can use to carry the container holding Kida and the Heart back?”
Salus shook his head. “We have ropes, but those are only made of cotton. We’d need too many to hold something that large and heavy.”
“We’ll find something in the caravan,” Sweet said. He winced. “I don’t like it, but there’s chains in all the trucks. We won’t need many, by my guess, just a few.”
“I can do that,” Milo volunteered. “I’ll be looking for Tulio, anyway.”
Sweet nodded. “I’ll help you, because we’ll have to be fast. Rourke won’t be expecting us, but he’ll recover fast and get the planes in the air.”
“Can we stop his flying machines from getting into the air at all?” Salus asked.
“Maybe,” Sweet said, not looking convinced. “It depends if Rourke had the catapults set up while he was here in the city. At the very least, a couple planes might launch before we can disable the catapults, assuming any of us can figure out how to.”
“Because Audrey’s the only one who knows how they work?” Milo guessed.
“And Vinny’s out of dynamite,” Sweet finished.
The trio glanced at the Italian. Right on cue, Vinny’s flying fish -a tuna, of course- jerked to a halt. Vinny fell forward, catching himself with one hand.
As soon as he did, his flying fish’s mouth glowed blue, then spat out a laser of blue light! It shot across the sky to hit the far wall, throwing smoke and bits of stone into the air.
Everyone froze, then joyous shouts rose from the Atlanteans. It took Milo a second to realize they were yelling about having a way to destroy the invaders.
Milo felt a sudden wave of nausea. While Rourke and his soldiers -and-and possibly Tulio and Audrey- had been fine with killing an entire city to satisfy their greed, Milo didn’t want to see anyone get hurt or killed.
Sunzu, flying a fish exactly like Salus’, rose in the middle of the excited Atlanteans and silenced everyone with a sharp whistle. She looked sternly across them all.
“Remember, the mountain sleeps! If any of your attacks hits the wall, you may awaken it!”
Everyone subsided, thankfully. Milo glanced at Sweet, who was watching him sympathetically.
“I know you don’t want anyone to get hurt,” Sweet said. “I don’t, either, Atlantean or soldier.”
“It’s been thousands of years since Atlanteans spilled human blood,” Salus added, leaning back a bit in his seat. “Of the fighters we have now, only Sunzu and I have seen real battle. My sister and I will watch our people, make sure they focus on getting Kida home.”
Milo nodded, grateful. “That’s all we need to do, really. Once we get Kida over to the city, Rourke and his soldiers won’t have a way to get her back if we can ground all their planes.”
“It’s a plan, then,” Sweet said. He glanced at the flying fish. “Salus, how long will the flying fish last? I saw your crystals fade.”
Salus shrugged. “Perhaps we should leave now, just in case.”
“Agreed. It looks like everyone nearly has the hang of flying, anyway,” Sweet said. “Milo?”
“I-I’m ready if you are,” Milo said, perfectly happy to leave the battle plans to the two older, much more experienced men.
“Salus, can you take the lead?” Sweet requested. “I plan on staying on the edge of the fight as much as I can, unless someone is injured. Without knowing how much energy is left in your crystals, you shouldn’t waste energy on healing wounds that can wait, but I can start treatment.”
“Of course,” Salus said. “I’ll get my sister and divide our fighters between us. And your companions, where do you want them?”
“Mole and Cookie can be with the rest of the fighters, and Packard’s riding with Cookie,” Sweet said. “Milo, Vinny should go with you. Some of his explosives were left at the bottom of the volcano, and he might be able to grab some to use just in case.”
Milo nodded. “Okay, then should we… Miguel?”
Sweet and Salus followed Milo’s gaze. Miguel and Jaius had joined them, both astride their own riding fish. Miguel’s looked somewhat like a long, thin catfish, with stubby whiskers, while Jaius’ was definitely a swordfish.
Spotting them, Miguel waved and flew up toward them. “What’s the plan?”
“You should stay here,” Milo said.
Miguel shook his head with a scowl. “I’ll go crazy if I’m not doing something. I’m worried about…”
When Miguel hesitated, Milo asked, “You’re thinking about Tulio?”
“He can’t have done this by his own choice!” Miguel said vehemently. “Jaius said the king was hurt, and Tulio swore he’d never let that happen again.”
Milo opened his mouth to reassure Miguel, then his words sank in. “Wait, what do you mean, ‘again’?”
Miguel blinked. “I didn’t say that.”
“Uh, yeah, you did.”
Miguel stubbornly shook his head.
Milo rubbed his forehead, frustrated. “Miguel, if you know something about Tulio that’s going to change what we think about his motivations-”
“Tulio saw a king be murdered when he was a kid!” Miguel snapped.
Milo flinched. “He… what?”
“It’s a very long story, and Tulio won’t like that I said even that much,” Miguel said, scowling. “The point is, Tulio hates people like Rourke. There’s no way he’d ever help him! There has to be something else!”
“Sweet said Tulio had a panic attack,” Milo said slowly. “Something about being underground.”
“Yeah, Tulio hates being underground almost as much as king killers.”
“Something about being buried alive as a kid?” Milo prodded.
Miguel narrowed his eyes. “How’d you find out about that?”
“Tulio told Sweet and Audrey after he had a panic attack, and Sweet told me a little bit ago,” Milo said.
“Well, that’s all you need to know,” Miguel said shortly. His expression softened at Milo’s incredulous look. “It happened years ago. Neither of us like to remember those days, so there’s no point in telling the full story. All that matters is that, right now, Tulio must just be doing whatever he can to avoid being stuck underground.”
Realizing he was going to have to accept his limited knowledge, Milo nodded. It was good enough for him, anyway, that Miguel could vouch for Milo and Sweet’s theory.
Turning to the older men, Milo summarized, “Miguel’s coming with us. He agrees that Tulio is only helping Rourke because being underground scares him so much. He’s desperate to get back to the surface.”
“Will he fight us?” Salus asked.
Milo started to shake his head, then hesitated. “I want to say that he won’t, but…”
“If he’s scared enough, he’s not going to care who’s blocking his path,” Sweet filled in. “You’d best leave Tulio to Miguel or me. If Miguel can’t get through to him, well, I’ve dragged people out of fights before.”
Looking at Sweet’s huge frame, Milo didn’t doubt it. He’d already proven his ability to restrain Tulio on the day their two caravans met, anyway.
“And Audrey?” Milo asked.
Sweet frowned. “She’s coming with us, too, whether she likes it or not. I don’t know what her reasons are, but I know her father wouldn’t approve.”
“Wasn’t he…?” Milo trailed off uncertainly.
“Manny always tended to focus more on machines than people, but he wouldn’t have allowed Audrey to join the expeditions if he knew just how bad Rourke’s gotten over the last few years,” Sweet said.
Sweet winced while he said it. Milo guessed Sweet was regretting going along with it himself, and couldn’t manage to feel any sympathy. Sweet knew what he was doing; from the sounds of it, Audrey hadn’t.
“But why now?” Milo mused quietly, rubbing his jaw. “She’s… rough, but she’s not heartless. Why would she go along with Rourke?”
“Either she’s been hiding something, or she’s like Tulio,” Sweet said. “Scared.”
“So, if possible, you want Tulio and the girl to be fetched without harm,” Salus said.
Milo and Sweet nodded. At Miguel’s worried look, Milo passed along their decision. Miguel’s expression relaxed.
“Jaius and I can look for Tulio and Audrey,” Miguel suggested.
Milo looked at Sweet. “Miguel is offering for him and Jaius to go after Tulio and Audrey.”
Sweet considered it, then nodded. “Tell him to stick close to Jaius or you, unless he picks up Audrey. Whatever happens out there, it’s going to happen fast, and Miguel and Tulio need to have someone who can translate if orders change.”
Milo nodded and again turned to Miguel. He briefly considered asking Miguel to stay behind to avoid any confusion in relaying directions, then admitted to himself that Miguel would probably pick up on any changes during the ambush quicker than Milo himself, language barrier or no. He’d seen how fast Miguel could think on his feet and adapt.
“When do we leave?” Miguel asked once Milo had translated.
“Once everyone’s settled and in their groups.” Milo swallowed and looked across the chasm. “Then we’re going after Kida and the Heart.”
Sweet wasn’t worried about Miguel as they raced down the tunnel. He had chosen to stick close to Jaius in the center of the rear group of Atlanteans. He was going to keep an eye on Milo, flying between Vinny and Sunzu in the front group.
Milo was going to run out of adrenaline very soon, and Sweet wanted to make sure he didn’t get hurt or left behind. Preferably, Milo would’ve stayed in the city, anyway, but he felt he had to do something to make up for leading the caravan to Atlantis.
Everyone zipped along on their fish, keeping as close to the tunnel floor as possible. It wasn’t long before they left behind the lava’s light. And while the carved patterns on the flying fish began to glow enough for them to see their surroundings, Sweet knew the blue light could very well give them away.
From ahead, there was the loud rumble of an explosion. Voices rose from the Atlanteans, but were quickly silenced by hard looks from Salus and Sunzu.
Then the flying fish raced over the top of the sloping tunnel, and Rourke’s camp spread before them. The flying fish dropped sharply, but Sweet knew they’d been spotted.
Rifles were raised and soldiers bolted for the catapults. At a shout from Salus, the Atlanteans broke formation to scatter. Without surprise on their side, their best chances were to move fast and confuse the soldiers.
Sweet’s eyes scanned the camp. His heart sank when he saw soldiers already scrambling onto the small biplanes that were, in fact, already loaded onto the catapults.
“Watch out for the planes!” he shouted as the first plane was launched.
Flying fish peeled away from the plane, while those in the rear group dove for the catapult. Their laser blasts hit the ground uselessly. Gunfire forced them away as well, and a second plane joined the first.
Milo and Vinny dove for the camp, but couldn’t get close enough to dismount and find chains without getting shot. Miguel and Jaius skimmed the camp, shouting in Spanish, before a mortar nearly hit them and forced them to dodge around some jutting boulders.
Things were already falling apart fast.
With the soldiers focusing on the Atlanteans who had already passed, Sweet realized he had a shot at sneaking in. Dropping low, he raced toward the nearest catapult.
A soldier spotted him and shouted. Moving faster than Sweet realized was possible, the catapult was spun around. Sweet jerked his flying fish away as a biplane was launched directly at him. His flying fish jolted when the biplane hit the tail, but both of them tore away from each other with minimal damage.
“Sweet!” Salus shouted, pulling alongside Sweet. “Look!”
Sweet’s breath caught when he saw the balloon rising from the center of the camp. It was already fully inflated and starting to rise toward the circle of light above. His eyes scanned the balloon for a weak point.
“Aim for the chains!” Sweet decided quickly. “We have to break the container free before the balloon gets too high, otherwise Kida or the Heart could be hurt, or, worst case scenario, hit the volcano floor in the right spot to make this volcano blow its top!”
“Oh, great, that’s just great,” said Vinny’s voice.
“If you have a plan, now’s the time to share it!” Sweet said, looking over at Vinny.
“Yeah,” Vinny snorted. “Don’t get shot!”
Sweet didn’t have time to respond to Vinny’s contribution before the three of them had to dodge away from yet another biplane being launched. Sweet scowled, knowing they had to get rid of the catapults now .
Sweet looked down, right in time to see shouting soldiers throwing themselves off the catapult and biplane they’d just loaded. Before Sweet could wonder for long, the catapult flung the biplane, not into the air, but horizontally. The biplane crashed into one of the wrecked trucks, exploding into shards. The catapult itself seemed to explode, as if it couldn’t take the force of the launch, throwing wooden beams in all directions and scattering soldiers.
“What-” Sweet started.
A small figure darted away from the cover of a boulder near the wrecked catapult. Sweet squinted. Audrey?
Audrey ran toward the second catapult, but a line of bullets and lasers from a nearby dogfight of biplanes and flying fish cut her off. She dove and tumbled beside the cover of a wrecked truck, poking her head out to look in the direction of the second catapult.
Sweet fought the urge to dive down and grab the girl. There were too many biplanes over the second catapult, trying to protect it from whatever had destroyed the first one.
Except, Sweet had been watching the first catapult. Nothing had hit it, and its destruction was too… complete to be only a malfunction of the catapult. Unless it had been assembled wrong, but Audrey would never-
Audrey darted away from her cover to scramble into the nearby digger. It started up, and half of Sweet’s mind wondered what she was going to do with a digger in a sky battle.
The other half started putting pieces together fast and decided Audrey was the bravest idiot he’d encountered in a long time.
“Audrey!” Sweet shouted, mostly to try and draw some of his allies’ attention to the girl to cover her.
The digger began moving toward the second catapult. Was Audrey really going to keep half the fleet from being launched? With fewer planes in the sky, they might have a chance!
Light flashed from the platform at the base of the balloon. Sweet looked sharply over to see Rourke holding a flare gun, the source of the light. He loaded another flare and lowered the flare gun to point at… the digger.
“Move, Audrey, move!” Sweet shouted pointlessly.
The flare arched through the battlefield to bounce harmlessly against the top of the digger. But Sweet quickly saw the flare hadn’t been an attack.
It had been a signal.
Two biplanes broke away from their fights and dove toward the digger. Gunpowder flashed in the guns mounted on the biplanes, peppering the ground with bullets, moving closer to the digger, closer, until…
Boom!
The digger jolted as the engine exploded, sending it toppling onto its side in a cascade of smoke and twisted metal.
“Audrey!” Sweet shouted, his voice breaking.
Forgetting the dogfights overhead, Sweet dove down to the wreckage. He landed as close as he dared and leaped off his flying fish, right as a scrawny figure tumbled out the shattered windshield.
Audrey, gloves missing and clothing torn, was wiping soot from her face when Sweet grabbed her. She yelped and swung her elbow back, but Sweet dodged. He quickly tried to get her to sit down, but Audrey shoved his hands away.
“Get off, I’m not hurt!” Audrey snapped.
“After an explosion like that, you’re lucky to be alive!” Sweet said, holding Audrey still to check her eyes, all over her head, under the cuts in her coveralls. “What were you thinking, taking the biggest target out there? Why didn’t you leave the digger when the flare hit it? Obviously it was a signal, and do you have any dizziness? Nausea? Also, what were you thinking, siding with Rourke?!”
Audrey snorted and again tried to shove away from Sweet. But Sweet wasn’t going to put up with any resistance, and again grabbed her.
“Sweet, we’re sitting ducks down here!”
“You should’ve thought of that before you got in that truck back in Atlantis!” Sweet flung up a hand, frustrated with Audrey. “Why, Audrey, why? What would your father say? And what would he say if you didn’t come back at all?”
“Sweet,” Audrey groaned dramatically, “I’m not hurt, so let’s get out of here!”
“That’s impossible, and you haven’t answered any of my questions!” Sweet said.
“‘I’m fine’ covers all the questions about what hurts, and as for everything else, Tulio’s loco , that’s why!”
“What?” Sweet’s hands stilled as he realized there really weren’t any injuries on the girl. “Why Tulio?”
“It was his plan to play along with Rourke, so at least some of us could be on this side of the bridge when it got blown up!” Audrey exclaimed, rolling her eyes as if Sweet was being dense.
Sweet blinked. Tulio hadn’t been panicking, he’d been planning. Planning better than most of the others, apparently.
“We were going to just sabotage the balloon, but then you guys showed up with your… your fish,” Audrey said, gesturing to Sweet’s flying fish, “And we had to adapt.”
“To destroying the catapults. But-” Sweet rubbed his eyes and looked at Audrey's sooty body and torn clothes over again. “Explain later. I’m getting you out of here, because after a wreck like that, you’re not fine. Once the shock wears off-”
“For the last time, Sweet!” Audrey exclaimed. She shoved her hand into her pocket and pulled something out. “I’m just fine! Look! Tulio gave me this before following Rourke onto the balloon.”
Sweet glanced down, then did a double-take. His mouth opened, but for once, he couldn’t form any words.
Because in Audrey’s outstretched hand was an Atlantean crystal.
Notes:
Whooo, this chapter was fun! :D I liked writing Sweet being a Dad and Audrey making him speechless.
Fun fact, Miguel's flying fish is a spined loach!
Up next, Audrey hijacked an entire chapter, which will cover everything that happened since Tulio touched Heart-Kida!
Chapter 18: The Other Side of Betrayal
Notes:
Hopefully the scene jumps aren't too choppy, but there were certain parts that didn't really need to be rewritten, so it jumps between scenes a bit, starting off with Tulio touching Heart-Kida! While this chapter wasn't in the original plan, it ended up working out pretty well to explain what was going on behind the scenes. Plus Audrey's such a fun character perspective to use!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Of all the things one could do when confronted with… whatever it was Kida was now, touching what looked like a body made out of liquid mercury seemed like the worst of ideas. It was a thought that was instantly validated when Tulio fell to his knees, screaming.
“Tulio!”
Audrey shoved past Rourke, who barely glanced at Tulio before focusing again on Kida, and skidded to her knees beside Tulio.
Tulio was hunched over himself in a fetal position, clutching his hand to his chest. His scream trailed off into a groan, but he didn’t respond to Audrey saying his name.
Giving up on getting Tulio’s attention with her voice, Audrey forced her hands between Tulio’s arms to grab the wrist of his uninjured hand. Tulio flinched and tucked his injured hand into his vest.
“I won’t touch it, but I need to see what’s wrong, Tulio,” Audrey said, worry making her voice fierce.
“I… I didn’t think…” Tulio murmured, his voice and eyes distant.
Audrey eyed him worriedly, wondering if he was going into shock. She looked over her shoulder toward the lift, then scowled when she spotted Rourke and Helga following Kida onto the lift. If either of them cared that Tulio was on the ground in agony, they weren’t showing it.
Tulio took a deep, gasping breath. Audrey whipped back to him, and was relieved that he was focusing on her.
She couldn’t help yelping, though, when Tulio abruptly stood.
“Hey, hey, sit down before you fall down!” Audrey ordered, jumping to her feet.
“It’s fine,” Tulio said, his voice still distant. “It just surprised me.”
Tulio brushed past Audrey and walked toward the lift, despite the fact that it was already rising out of reach. Audrey watched it warily, hoping it would come back down for them, then turned her attention back to Tulio.
“Show me your hand,” Audrey ordered.
Tulio stopped where the lift had been, then looked down at Audrey. She didn’t like how pale Tulio was, nor the fact that he didn’t say anything.
“Tulio, what happened?” Audrey asked.
Tulio muttered something under his breath, not sounding entirely present yet. Audrey’s brows rose when she caught something that sounded like “deal with the devil.”
“Tulio, if you don’t listen to me, I’m siccing Sweet on you once we’re back up there.”
“It’s fine,” Tulio mumbled.
“Gee, sound a little more convincing next time.”
“It is,” Tulio said, giving her a slightly baffled look.
“If it is- just show me your hand!” Audrey snapped.
Tulio tilted his head. The lights of the chamber reflected in his eyes, giving Audrey a chill as she remembered how Kida’s eyes had glowed before she’d gone and… what, been absorbed into the Heart?
Tulio shifted a moment later, and the illusion of light in his eyes was broken. Audrey sighed, only to gasp sharply when Tulio silently unfolded his hand.
“That, uh…”
Audrey had seen her fair share of burns, but the blisters on Tulio’s palm made her avert her eyes. She yanked the bandana out of her pocket and held it out to Tulio.
“At least cover it up!” Audrey said fiercely.
Tulio took the bandana, then looked up. Again, the light caught in his eyes.
Between the glow and the utter lack of expression on Tulio’s face, Audrey had to suppress a shudder. Had the Heart done something to Tulio as well?
Even as Audrey climbed behind the wheel of the truck, one thought pounded at her conscience.
“Papi would be disappointed,” Audrey thought. “Papi and Mama would never approve of this, why am I helping Rourke kidnap Kida and steal the Heart. We need the money, but Papi would never- he’d never-”
A part of her wondered if her papi already knew, though. After all, he’d worked with Rourke for years , then he’d given his blessing for Audrey to take his place, but…
“But Papi would never let someone get hurt like this!”
But at the same time… what if she didn’t return home? What would Papi and Mama think then? Would Rourke tell them that she’d chosen to stay behind, or would he simply tell them that she’d been lost in the creature’s attack? Would he tell them anything at all?
She had to go home… for her family… and yet…
Audrey looked in the mirror in time to see Rourke punch Milo. Milo , who was about as threatening as his cat, who was so small that his feet actually left the ground as he fell backward.
Audrey knew that Rourke thought Milo was a coward. Admittedly, Audrey had thought the same thing a few times. But what was more cowardly than attacking someone who couldn’t fight back?
Audrey’s hand was halfway to the door handle when Tulio grabbed the wrist of her other hand. She jumped and glared at him.
“Wait,” Tulio muttered.
Audrey yanked her wrist free. “Why should I? Maybe you’re okay with betraying your friends, but-”
“I said wait,” Tulio hissed. “Look straight ahead, don’t move, and just listen if you want to save them.”
Audrey didn’t like being given orders, but she followed Tulio’s directions. “How?”
“I’m still working on it. But for now, don’t give Rourke any reason to doubt your loyalty.”
Vinny climbed out of the truck beside them. Audrey watched him go to Milo’s side and help him to his feet. She averted her eyes when Milo lifted his glaring gaze to sweep across the caravan.
“I’m getting out of this truck if you don’t give me one good reason why I should stay,” Audrey hissed back.
“Rourke’s going to destroy the bridge, right? Once he does that, nobody’s going to be able to leave the city,” Tulio murmured. “At the very least, we can stick with Rourke until we’re on the surface, then we can get someone to help them.”
“How? Short of flying, there won’t be any crossing that chasm without a bridge,” Audrey said, watching Cookie and Mole follow Vinny.
“I said I’m working on it.”
“And Milo said the Atlanteans will die without the Heart.”
Tulio was silent, waiting for Packard to pass his open window. He took a deep breath.
“I said I’m still working on it, Audrey. Just trust me. I don’t want to leave Miguel and Milo behind, and I’m definitely not going to have the death of an entire city on my conscience for the rest of my life,” Tulio muttered.
“We need a plan,” Audrey said, staring straight ahead while Rourke started yelling at the crew who’d joined Milo.
She was vaguely glad Sweet had stayed behind in the throne room. She understood now why Sweet seemed to be silently disapproving of Rourke so often. Attacking the blind old king had been the final straw, though, and Sweet had turned his back on the crew, not even reacting to Tulio being burned and so pale when they had returned from the chamber. If, for some reason, Sweet had rejoined the crew at the bridge… well, Audrey had a feeling he’d have dragged her out of the truck while scolding her about her decisions.
Not that Audrey wasn’t already second-guessing her own decisions. Rourke’s decision to take the Heart and abandon the Atlanteans was so wrong it left a sour taste in her mouth at the thought of how she’d very nearly joined his cause.
Of how she still was part of Rourke’s crew, technically.
“I swear we’ll do everything we can to get them to safety,” Tulio said, as if he could read Audrey’s thoughts. “Normally I wouldn’t force you, but… well, I need someone to tell me what’s going on with Rourke and his men. That and Rourke wouldn’t let me stay if he didn’t have anyone to translate.”
“You promise we’ll come back?” Audrey asked as Rourke started his truck.
“I swear we will,” Tulio murmured fervently.
Audrey averted her eyes from the mirror, doubting her ability to stay put if she caught another glimpse of Milo’s angry disappointment. She didn’t want to leave Tulio because he was right about Rourke, but…
Tulio’s hand squeezed hers. “I swear, Audrey. We’ll have them safe in no time.”
“Okay, okay, stop being so sappy,” Audrey muttered, pulling her hand free to place on the wheel.
Tulio’s shoulders twitched with a silent laugh.
“How bad is the burn?” Audrey asked quietly as she pulled their truck onto the bridge.
“Just a moment. Keep driving,” Tulio said.
Without explanation, Tulio turned around and draped his body over the back of the seat. Audrey could hear him shifting the extra chains around in the back of the truck, but didn’t dare take her eyes off the narrow bridge.
“What are you doing?” Audrey asked.
Tulio sat facing forward again with a satisfied noise. “Just making sure it’s still back there.”
“What’s still back there?”
“Just a little something I found while we were working earlier,” Tulio said, a grin in his voice. “Listen, unless a better plan comes up… Rourke plans to use the balloon to get Ki… the Heart out, right?”
“Yeah, so?”
“And those… planes, you said?”
“Some of the soldiers and sailors will use the planes to keep the balloon as light as possible, why?”
“Can you fly the planes?”
“Can I-” Audrey looked at Tulio. “There’s no place in Atlantis big enough to land a plane, never mind how long it would take to evacuate the city with a plane!”
“I didn’t say that was the plan,” Tulio said, sounding amused.
“So what is the plan?”
“Worst case scenario,” Tulio said slowly, “The absolute last resort… I take a plane and crash it into the balloon.”
Audrey gaped at Tulio for a second, then jerked her attention back to the bridge. “That’s- you’re crazy, Tulio, you’d be killed in the wreck!”
“No… no, I don’t think so…”
“Uh-huh. Do you have special immortal powers you’re hiding?” Audrey asked sarcastically.
“...of a sort.”
They reached the end of the bridge, so Audrey was able to look to the side long enough to give Tulio a properly exasperated look. Her annoyance melted away when she saw Tulio was holding out an Atlantean crystal!
“Where… who-”
“It’s Kida’s, I think,” Tulio interrupted, tucking the crystal back into an inner pocket of his vest. “It was there after I…”
“You what? I want an explanation for that, too, Tulio,” Audrey said.
“The Heart wants to go back to its people,” Tulio said after a moment.
“ ...what?”
“I don’t know.” Tulio rubbed his forehead. “It was weird, and I don’t… I don’t really remember everything that happened when I touched Kida. But the Heart, it’s… alive somehow. And it wants to go home.”
“Uh-huh.” Audrey wondered if Tulio had gone crazy from touching Kida -the Heart? Audrey still had no idea- or if he’d hit his head somewhere on the journey. “Whatever that means, so what if you’ve got a crystal. I thought only Atlanteans could use them.”
“No, they’ll work for us.”
“How do you know?”
Instead of answering, Tulio unwrapped the bandana from around his hand. Audrey opened her mouth to tell him to stop, then fumbled to a stop when he tilted his palm toward her.
Tulio’s hand was completely healed!
The escape was moving faster than Audrey had anticipated.
Apparently, Rourke had left a couple soldiers behind to start setting up the mortar and finding the best spot on the far-off ceiling to blast. They’d even gotten the catapults halfway assembled, a process Audrey had been planning to use as a stalling tactic.
Tulio and Audrey glanced nervously at each other from behind the wrecked truck they were using as cover when the mortar was launched. If they were lucky, the mortar would miss, or it wouldn’t have enough firepower, or-
The mortar hit right on target. Even before the dust cleared, Audrey could see a circle of light overhead.
Tulio’s shoulders slumped with a sigh. Audrey glanced at him in time to see guilt flash across his face.
“What’s wrong?” Audrey asked.
“Nothing…” Tulio said, unconvincingly. He added quietly, “Forgot how good the sky looked.”
Audrey snorted, amused despite herself. Tulio shot her a look. Audrey shrugged.
“What’s the plan now?” Audrey asked, sobering.
“...you know the best plan is to let Rourke take Kida,” Tulio said quietly.
“I thought saving Kida was the goal,” Audrey hissed back.
“The goal is to save everyone if we can,” Tulio said, looking resigned. “If we let Rourke take Kida, if we let him think he’s won, then we’ll be on the surface and with civilization. We can get help for the city that way.”
“There has to be a way that doesn’t mean leaving Kida with Rourke, and whoever he sells her to, though!”
“We’re running out of time!”
“Audrey!” Rourke called.
Gesturing to Tulio to wait, Audrey hopped to her feet, “Yes, Commander?”
“Get to work on the catapults,” Rourke said. “We need planes in the air to make sure we’re clear above.”
Audrey glanced at the soldiers working on the catapults. “Looks like they’ve got the catapults taken care of. I’ll help with the balloon.”
If she could be close to the balloon, Audrey knew of a dozen ways she could keep it grounded without immediately tipping off Rourke. All she needed-
“I gave an order, Audrey. Catapults,” Rourke barked, then turned away.
“Yeah, yeah,” Audrey muttered, then glanced at Tulio. She quickly lifted her head back up. “Tulio?”
“Yeah?”
"I think Rourke forgot you were here.”
Tulio blinked. “Really?”
“He just told me to go work on the catapults, but he didn’t mention you.”
“Then go!” Tulio said, waving Audrey away. “Stall if you can, but don’t do anything that’ll get Rourke’s attention. I’ll… well, I’ll figure it out, go!”
“Okay, okay,” Audrey said.
Audrey ran for the nearest catapult and promptly started scolding the nearest soldier for attaching the wrong rod. It was the right rod, but everyone had learned long ago to not argue with Audrey.
Audrey did what she could, messing up the catapult’s assembly as much as she could without being too obvious, but the soldiers were moving fast. It wasn’t long before the first catapult was completed, and Audrey knew people would start getting suspicious if the second didn’t follow suit pretty soon. She focused on getting the catapult set up, but left as many screws and bolts loose as she could without being noticed.
Across the camp, the hot air balloon was fully laid out and the burner was roaring to life. Audrey’s one consolation was that Rourke, Helga, and the soldiers around the balloon were too focused on the balloon to pay much attention to her or Tulio.
While she worked, Audrey kept an eye on Tulio when she could. He slowly made his way across camp, avoiding being spotted by any of the soldiers, Rourke, or Helga. Once he reached the truck Audrey had been driving out of Atlantis, he scrambled into the back.
Audrey glanced away, then back when a round brown shape was tossed from the back. She squinted, then turned away, hiding a laugh as she realized it was Ladron. When and how had he snuck into the truck?
The last screw had just been tightened and a biplane was being rolled into position when there was a shout. Audrey looked toward the speaker and saw a rifle being lifted. Following the point of its barrel, Audrey’s mouth fell open.
Atlanteans, several dozen of them, had arrived. They were riding on, somehow, stone flying fish!
“Move!” someone shouted.
Audrey whirled on the speaker, then had to throw herself to the ground when the biplane was launched, whistling past a foot away from her head.
“Hey, watch where you fire those things!” Audrey yelled.
“Then get out of the way!” came the brusque response.
Audrey rolled out of the way, seeing she couldn’t do anything else to stop the biplanes from launching. She frowned as a second biplane was successfully launched. Apparently, her efforts hadn’t been enough.
Something knocked against her boot, drawing Audrey’s attention. She looked down as Ladron uncurled. The armadillo rubbed his snout, then turned and trundled away from the catapult. Audrey followed him behind a boulder, where Tulio was crouching with a satchel slung over one shoulder.
“Did you know about those?” Audrey asked, gesturing as a flying fish chased a plane overhead. She squinted, briefly distracted. “Wait, was that Vinny?”
“If I’d known about them, do you think I’d have played along with Rourke for so long?” Tulio asked, rolling his eyes. “We’re going to have a lot of explaining to do.”
“What do you want to do?” Audrey asked. “Think they’d shoot us if we surrendered?”
“Probably not. I hope,” Tulio said. He peered over the boulder. “But they aren’t winning yet. Look.”
Audrey rose halfway. She gasped when she saw the balloon rising. Rourke and Helga stood in the basket, watching soldiers scramble to finish securing the container holding Kida to the chains on the underside.
“They’ll keep Rourke from launching,” Audrey said with more confidence than she felt.
Tulio hesitated, then shook his head. “The planes are being launched too fast, and none of the Atlanteans look like they’ve figured out how to aim that… light ammo?”
“Lasers,” Audrey supplied.
“That. Maybe, if their laser attacks could cut the chains, then it would be fine, but the planes are harrying them too much and…” Tulio trailed off, then his eyes narrowed. “Audrey, see if you can destroy the catapults.”
“Sure, easy, I’m going to just run out into the middle of the battle and sabotage the catapults while they’re being used,” Audrey snorted.
Tulio raised an eyebrow at her and shot her a grin. “I thought you liked a challenge.”
Audrey scowled at the obvious goad, but, well… she wasn’t going to argue. Besides, this was for Kida .
“I’m on it,” Audrey said, dropping her toolbox and withdrawing a wrench. “But what are you going to be doing?”
“Plan B,” Tulio said, patting the bag.
“Tulio, we’re way past Plan B at this point,” Audrey said.
Tulio shrugged and reached into his pocket. “Plan B sounds better than Plan K. At least, that’s what Miguel would say.”
Audrey had to laugh. “If we go with that plan, Plan K will be a much better name for it, trust me.”
“Why…”
Tulio trailed off, his eye roll telling Audrey that he’d caught onto her point. He didn’t continue arguing, which, given how quickly planes were being launched and the balloon was inflating, was probably the best choice. Maybe the debate was a waste of time, but Audrey was panicking just a little bit internally, and the rambling words admittedly helped.
Tulio took out Audrey’s bandana, which had been balled up in his vest pocket. He unrolled the bandana and took out the crystal, then held it out.
“What? Me?” Audrey asked.
“You’re the one who’s going to be getting up close to those things,” Tulio said, jutting a thumb at the nearest catapult as it flung another biplane into the air. “This will keep you safe. Or, at least, heal you if something goes wrong.”
“And what about you?” Audrey asked as Tulio hopped to his feet.
“I’ll be over there,” Tulio said. He ignored Audrey’s real question in favor of shoving Ladron under the cover of the boulder with his foot.
“Tulio,” Audrey said, grabbing Tulio’s wrist.
Tulio shot her a grin. “I’ll be fine, Audrey. As soon as you can, get into the air. Get to Sweet, Milo, or Miguel, if any of them are up there, and tell them to get ready to catch.”
“Get ready to catch what?” Sweet asked once he’d reassured himself that Audrey wasn’t dying and was herding her onto his fish.
“Well, the general plan all along- oh, wait!”
Audrey slid past Sweet and ran back to the boulder where she’d initially taken cover after removing a dozen bolts from the catapult. She reached into the gap under the boulder and felt around until her hands landed on Ladron’s bumpy body. She dragged out the shaking armadillo and thrust him into Sweet’s hands to avoid him grabbing her again because she really was fine and could walk on her own, thanks.
“The general plan all along,” Audrey resumed as she and Sweet ran back to his fish, “Was to get Kida back, right? Well, Kida’s off the ground and getting higher with every second, so I’m going to assume he means the container holding Kida. And possibly Tulio, depending on how mad Rourke is.”
“If Rourke catches him, getting thrown out of the basket might be the least of Tulio’s concerns,” Sweet said as they both climbed onto his fish.
“Tulio will be fine. Something tells me he’s gotten out of worse situations before,” Audrey said.
“When this is all over, I’m locking Tulio and Miguel in a closet until they explain what they did before meeting Milo,” Sweet said, shaking his head. “Hold on.”
Audrey did as she was told, gaping as the flying fish rose vertically. “How- how are these things flying?”
“Atlantean magic,” Sweet said. When Audrey shot him an unimpressed look over her shoulder, Sweet shrugged. “The Atlanteans activated the fish with their crystals, and they’re all silent.”
“While you get Tulio and Miguel’s life story, I’m dismantling one of these,” Audrey said.
“Unless I need you to translate.”
“Nah, get Milo for that. He barely knows them, too, so I’m sure he doesn’t know. I think… Milo’s not so naive that he’d have worked with Tulio and Miguel if he’d known from the start that they were con men, would he?”
“Milo?”
Audrey rolled her eyes. “Right. Hey, what’s the plan here?”
Sweet kept the fish going until he was directly under the container holding Kida. It wasn’t high off the ground yet, maybe ten feet, so the space was a bit tight. By pure luck, nobody had noticed them.
Sweet reached into his doctor’s bag he had stashed between his feet and pulled out… a saw.
“What’s that for?” Audrey asked.
“This thing can cut through a femur in twenty-eight seconds,” Sweet said. “Probably less, if need be.”
“And how do you plan on getting close enough to Rourke to use it?” Audrey asked drily.
“I’m not using it, you are. And not on Rourke, but those chains,” Sweet said, holding out the saw to Audrey. “I’ll brace you.”
“I- what? You know what, never mind,” Audrey said, shaking her head. It wasn’t like Sweet’s plan was any worse than her and Tulio’s. “Just don’t drop me!”
Audrey hopped onto the head of the flying fish, saw in hand, as Sweet skimmed the flying fish up to the chains holding the container in place. She grabbed the nearest chain and set to work.
The teeth of the saw screeched against the chains, but the sound was largely covered by the dogfights going on around them. Audrey hacked at the chain with all her strength, throwing up sparks, but doing little else.
“I thought you said this could cut through a femur in twenty-eight seconds!” Audrey snapped when all her effort only produced scratches on the chains.
“Less talk, more saw!” Sweet said.
Audrey was about to ask Sweet if he wanted to switch places, only for him to suddenly stand up. Releasing his grip on her ankles, Sweet wrapped an arm around her middle and yanked her back, the flying fish shooting backward at the same time.
Before Audrey could protest being grabbed, a metal ballast dropped past. She swallowed, knowing that if Sweet and the fish hadn’t moved, it would’ve landed on her head.
Audrey looked up and met Rourke’s scowling face. She smirked at him, wondering how the man had ever thought she was on his side.
Sweet pulled them away before Rourke could try anything else. Rourke shoved away from the side of the basket.
“Audrey!”
Audrey looked up and waved at Miguel’s shout. He and Jaius joined them. Audrey hurriedly filled them in on her and Tulio’s foiled plans. Jaius seemed surprised at the whole scam, but Miguel only gave a quick sigh of relief before nodding as though he’d known all along what Tulio and Audrey had been up to.
“Tulio’s on the balloon now,” Audrey said. “He’s got some ideas on how to get Kida free, but, well… it depends on how long it takes Rourke to notice him.”
Miguel looked toward the balloon. His lips pressed into a hard line. “I only see Tulio, Rourke, and Helga on the balloon. Rourke has to know Tulio’s there.”
“Then we’ve gotta move fast, because Tulio’s bound to be getting Plan K ready as we speak.”
“Plan K?” Miguel repeated.
“You’ll see if he has to resort to it. For now, we need a way to get that container back to Atlantis once it’s freed.” Turning back to Sweet, Audrey pointed and said, “Land over there. That truck’s got the spare chains.”
Sweet led the way to the truck Audrey had pointed to. The three flying fish landed, and everyone dismounted to drag chains from the back of the truck.
“We’ll only need three, max,” Audrey said when Sweet went back for a fourth.
Sweet shook his head and pointed at the balloon. “Mole said that an explosion could set off the volcano. The whole thing could be fragile enough that something heavy enough, landing from high enough, will set it off as well.”
Audrey looked from the ground, to the balloon, then back to Sweet. “So when Tulio said to get ready to catch…”
Sweet finished, “We might have to keep that thing from hitting the ground.”
“Uh, to add to that,” Jaius spoke up tentatively. “Does anyone have a way to warn Milo that the container can’t be allowed to drop? Or that Tulio’s on the balloon as well?”
“No, we don’t have any radios with us,” Audrey said. “Why?”
Jaius pointed to something beyond the balloon. “Because it looks like Milo’s about to solve the balloon problem!”
Wondering why Jaius sounded so upset -there was still time to grab Tulio and, hopefully, the container with Kida- Audrey turned. She stiffened.
Milo was about to solve the balloon problem alright. By crashing his flying fish into the balloon!
“Of all the idiotic- who left Milo alone out there?!” Audrey demanded.
Sweet swiftly hooked the chain around the tail of his fish, talking faster. “Four chains will have to do! Everyone, mount up, we’ve gotta catch them!”
Notes:
Whether or not he's been influenced by Miguel and Tulio, Milo's determined to use himself as a battering ram. He shouldn't have been left unattended!
Chapter 19: It's Not the Fall That Kills You
Notes:
Finally! I've been anticipating posting this chapter for ages~
That being said, the next two chapters are where the blood warning comes into play. I intentionally kept the descriptions mild so I could keep a lower rating, but figured I should throw that out there!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
“Alright, Milo, any last words?” Milo asked himself rhetorically, then decided that, yeah, he did. “I really wish I had a better plan than this!”
Milo turned his flying fish into a dive. It was a desperate, last ditch of a plan that Milo knew could very well end up with him falling to the ground below, but, well, he’d fallen from further up the wall, so he would be fine.
Probably.
But… Milo had to do something. It was his fault Kida and the Heart had been stolen, his fault the Atlanteans would die, even his fault that so many people in the expedition had died before their journey even began.
His fault. And he had one chance to fix it.
Milo flung himself off the fish moments before it crashed into one of the smaller balloons. Milo’s hands flailed outward, and he had a heart-stopping moment when he thought he’d jumped too soon, then he slammed into the balloon’s netting. The air was knocked out of him briefly, but he managed to wrap both hands into the netting, as well as tangle one leg in the netting. Mostly by accident.
Milo gulped air, then chuckled awkwardly to himself. That had been… so reckless, but no more reckless than diving to the bottom of the ocean with two near-strangers. Maybe. He was getting distracted.
Milo turned from the netting to focus on the wall across from him. He grinned when he noted that the balloon was descending. As he’d predicted minutes before, the container holding Kida was nearly too heavy for the balloon. It kept the balloon from ascending too rapidly, and it meant the slightest loss of lift would cause the balloon to drop.
Milo turned further. He smiled when he saw Sweet - with Audrey!- Jaius, and Sunzu flying nearby with chains wrapped around the tails of their fish. He waved a hand cheerfully at them, a little giddy with relief that his messy plan was working.
The others waved back. Milo grinned further, then his waving faltered. They weren’t just waving. There was something a bit frantic in their gesturing. Not to mention, where was Miguel?
Audrey stood up, not reacting when Sweet reached one hand back to grab her pantleg. She waved her arms over her head and pointed broadly at the balloon. Confused, Milo looked down.
Right in time to watch Rourke throw Helga overboard.
Milo jerked reflexively, accidentally loosening one arm and causing himself to slip. He clamped his hand over a yelp, his whole body shaking as he watched Helga fall.
Helga’s arms snapped out, grabbing a bar just below the basket. With an impressive show of gymnastic contortion, Helga got herself swung back up and over the basket. Rourke didn’t have time to react before Helga’s feet slammed into his face.
Milo winced, then shook himself and looked for the best place to wait. With Rourke and Helga in the basket, climbing down seemed like a bad idea.
Before he could find somewhere to wait, Helga spun on her heel, lifting the other foot to kick Rourke in the face. But Rourke moved impossibly fast, catching Helga’s foot before it could connect. Then he twisted her leg, making Helga jerk to the side. She hit the railing with enough momentum that she fell over the side, this time angled so she was unable to catch anything.
“Nothing personal!” Rourke’s mocking voice rose up to Milo.
Why? Milo wanted to scream the question at Rourke, but he could barely breathe. He wanted to look away, but his whole body was frozen as Helga fell toward the rocky ground below.
Then a flying fish shot into view. Miguel reached out, then he and the fish lurched sideways as Helga’s fall was abruptly halted.
Milo let out a heavy breath. Although Helga had been a part of kidnapping Kida and leaving the city of Atlantis to die, it didn’t mean Milo wanted her to die .
Milo looked away as Miguel, with Helga hanging from his fish by one arm, made his way to the ground. He winced as he noticed the balloon slowly rising again, the loss of Helga -and a number of supply barrels and ballast weights now littering the ground below- enough to allow the balloon to rise again.
Milo shook his head. Could he get someone else to mimic his maneuver? If another of the smaller balloons was destroyed, it should be enough to drop the balloon gently to the ground, unless Rourke had anything else to toss overboard.
Milo looked down, and locked eyes with Tulio.
What?
When had Tulio gotten on board?!
Tulio was getting tired of his friends flinging themselves off moving objects and getting tangled in the rigging. It felt a lot like something that should only happen once in a lifetime, or at least if it was to be repeated, it would happen to the same person twice. But no. Tulio had lunatics with no sense of self-preservation for friends.
Tulio looked quickly away from Milo. Rourke already knew Tulio was on board, and he didn’t want to draw the man’s attention to Milo.
Tulio glanced downward. Helga was on the ground by now.
He’d seen the regret on her face when Kida had merged with the Heart. He’d seen she was disgusted with Rourke’s attitude. She just apparently hadn’t been regretful or disgusted enough to leave Rourke’s cause. Still, she hadn’t deserved to die from Rourke’s selfish act. Tulio briefly wondered what Atlantean prisons looked like, if they even had one.
Tulio turned his gaze to the more pressing matter on the other side of the basket. Rourke glared back.
Rourke hadn’t noticed Tulio in the basket until they were fully launched. After some frustrated looks and yells Tulio returned with only blank stares, Rourke had chosen to ignore Tulio. He’d stood guard at the controls for the balloon’s fire, though. Tulio didn’t know how to work the flames and, anyway, he had a better plan, if Rourke would keep his gaze away long enough for Tulio to finish.
Rourke glared at Tulio through the chains and ropes in the center of the basket. While he and Helga had been throwing barrels from the basket, Tulio had caught Rourke heading toward him, and had made sure to keep the center of the basket between them, not knowing what Rourke was capable of.
So in the end, Rourke had chosen to throw Helga overboard, a move that had caught Tulio entirely off-guard. If possible, his disgust of Rourke’s methods had intensified, and Tulio realized he was in a very dangerous position.
Tulio eyed Miguel’s flying fish. Would the fish hold Miguel, Tulio, and Milo? If so, then “Plan K” was going to work a lot better than Tulio had initially planned. If he could get Plan K to work…
Rourke drew his gun again, and Tulio stepped back so there was a mass of chains between the two of them. Rourke couldn’t get a clear shot, and Tulio knew he didn’t want to leave the controls. They were at an impasse.
Then there was a shout from above. Tulio looked quickly up as Milo swung down from a half-severed line of rigging. Tulio’s eyes widened when he crashed into Rourke, knocking the bigger man into the railing and causing him to drop his gun. Milo fell to the floor of the basket, and Tulio made a break for the two of them.
Rourke recovered quickly, regaining his balance and kicking Milo in the stomach. Milo rolled across the basket floor, managing to snag Rourke’s gun along the way. Tulio rammed into Rourke’s shoulder, staggering him enough for Tulio to duck down and grab Milo’s arm to yank him up.
“Just so you know-” Tulio started.
“Joining Rourke was a con because you were scared, I know,” Milo gasped out as he staggered after Tulio.
“No, because I had a plan to get Kida and the Heart back,” Tulio snorted.
Well, something more like two dozen plans, but Milo didn’t have to know that. Then again, as the one who had willingly crashed into the balloon, he probably wouldn’t judge.
Rourke yelled. Tulio glanced back to see him grab an ax from the supplies. He swung it, stretching his arm out so the blade was aimed right for Tulio and Milo’s heads!
“Duck!”
Tulio dropped, grabbing Milo’s arm and dragging him down as well. The ax clanged off the chains, bouncing sideways over Tulio’s back to hit the railing hard enough to knock one of the supports from the basket’s sides. Milo’s arms flung out when he hit the floor, and Rourke’s gun clattered into the mess of chains. Tulio yanked Milo back to his feet, and the two rushed away from Rourke.
“Do you have a plan?!” Tulio demanded, because Plan K was still a terrible idea.
“I was hoping the balloon would just fall?” Milo said, wincing.
“Are you hurt?”
“No, just running out of ideas.”
Milo yelped as the ax narrowly missed them, instead cutting through the railing. With two broken sections, the railing fell outward. The railing fell between the spinning blades, which hit the railing and cut into them, then halted in an ear splitting screech.
“And room!” Milo added as they scrambled away from the opening.
“We’re going to have to jump!” Tulio said, scanning the air. “On three!”
“What?” Milo asked.
Rourke lifted the ax and stalked closer. Tulio’s breath caught at the fury in his eyes.
Tulio swiveled to face Milo. “Three!”
Tulio thrust his hands into Milo’s chest. Milo yelled in panic as he tumbled head-over-heels over the railing, falling between the jammed blades, past the container-
And right into Miguel. Tulio hadn’t had time to warn Miguel, so the fish dipped as he tried to regain control while also keeping Milo from sliding off the side.
Tulio’s eyes darted away from them for an instant. He was beside the control box for the flames. Rourke roared and swung again, and Tulio quickly jumped backward.
“Audrey!” Tulio yelled, dodging away from another swing of the ax. His eyes darted toward where he’d seen her and Sweet last, and was relieved she was close enough to look up at his shout. “Plan K! Get ready to catch Kida!”
Audrey yelled at the others around her, then to Tulio, “What about you?!”
“Miguel will catch me!” Tulio yelled back.
Another glance told Tulio that Miguel had his fish under control again. He was racing back up to the balloon, his face intent. On the other side, Audrey was climbing onto the tail of the fish to grab the hook at the end of the chain there. Jaius was calling more of the Atlanteans to help him with another chain.
Another dodge from the ax -and Tulio was getting really tired of the ax- brought Tulio far enough along the basket so he couldn’t see Audrey’s group anymore. Miguel was doggedly trying to get his flying fish close enough for Tulio to jump as well, though Tulio was quickly running out of time.
The ax swung again. Rourke, not stopping himself in time, was briefly halted when the ax blade slashed halfway through the railing and got stuck. Tulio scurried backward, worriedly watching Miguel struggle to follow his retreat. Milo grabbed Miguel’s arm, and Miguel dove to avoid a plane chasing after a flying fish.
For a moment, Tulio found his gaze on the ground. It was far below now, too far to jump, and getting further.
But it was still close enough for Tulio to see Helga standing with one hand raised over her head, the other arm hanging loose at her side. Tulio squinted, trying to figure out what she was holding in her upraised hand.
Then fire bloomed from it, shooting up quickly and aiming for…
Tulio threw himself backward as the ball of fire shot past and hit one of the smaller balloons, blowing it to pieces. The force of the explosion sent the whole basket swinging, and Tulio barely grabbed the railing to avoid toppling out of the basket.
Time to go. Now!
Rourke had just pulled the ax free when the flare exploded against one of the smaller balloons. The explosion caused the whole balloon and basket to swing, throwing Rourke to the basket’s floor. The ax spun out of his grasp, but when Rourke reached for it, he instead spotted his gun in the chains near his hand. He hardly cared how it had gotten there as he snatched it up and rose to his knees.
Rourke’s mouth twisted when he saw fire had caught on the rigging. The balloon fabric wouldn’t burn, but if the rigging became too destroyed or if the fire got too close to the gas tanks…
And on top of all that, Rourke realized they were again dropping.
Rourke nearly roared in frustration at his plan failing, then his eyes fell on Tulio thrusting himself from the railing across from Rourke. He didn’t look at Rourke, instead focusing intently on something within the chains. Did he really think he could disconnect the container that way?
Rourke’s plan had been working perfectly, right up until Tulio had “betrayed” Milo and Miguel. Rourke hadn’t kept a close enough eye on Tulio after that point, focused as he was on getting the Heart outside, and now he realized it had been a mistake. This, his plan failing, Rourke was only too willing to blame entirely on Tulio.
Almost without thinking, Rourke raised his gun.
Tulio’s eyes were on the chains, his expression tight. As Rourke pulled back the hammer on his pistol, Tulio noticed him. Tulio’s eyes darted to Rourke, who felt distinct pleasure at the fear that filled Tulio’s eyes as he realized his mistake.
Tulio stepped back, but it was too little, too late.
Bang!
Tulio’s head jerked back. His hands raised sharply as he staggered backward, hitting the railing hard enough for the damaged railing to snap. One hand reached out as the railing fell away, but again, Tulio hadn’t moved fast enough.
Without a sound, Tulio toppled off the balloon.
Rourke stared at where the other man had been. The only sounds were the gunfire of the biplanes and crackling of the flames eating away at the rigging.
Rourke’s mouth lifted up in a smirk. However things played out, he felt a dig of pleasure of having gotten rid of one of his problems.
But the balloon was still sinking, and it wouldn’t be long before Tulio’s friends realized he was gone and stepped into his place of ruining Rourke’s chances at getting rich. Rourke looked for some other way to lighten the balloon, but he and Helga had already thrown off anything that wasn’t attached.
Rourke returned to the control box and turned up the flames as high as they would go. It might be enough. If Rourke could halt or at least slow his descent long enough for his soldiers to chase off the Atlanteans, then he’d regroup and figure out another way to get outside.
It occurred to Rourke that he should check what Tulio had been doing. If he’d sabotaged the chains in any way, it could lead to the container being dropped, then Rourke would really be delayed.
Keeping close to the center of the basket, Rourke walked around to where Tulio had spent much of the flight, including the last moments before falling. He expected to find damaged chains, as it would’ve been impossible to unclip the chains from the basket.
Instead, he found all the chains intact. Wires were looped and coiled around the chain links in a snarled mess. And in the middle were sticks of dynamite, all strapped together with a black box. The box had a clock attached to it, with the hour and minute hands pointed at the twelve, and the second hand just moving past the eleven.
Rourke had five seconds to curse Tulio -and Vinny’s obsession with bombs- before the second hand ticked neatly into place.
Ka-boom!
Milo and Miguel had lost sight of Tulio for mere seconds when fire bloomed across the balloon.
“Tulio!” Miguel yelled. He yanked the flying fish up, careless when they zipped between a biplane and another flying fish. “Milo, do you see him?!”
“No, not yet,” Milo said, eyes darting.
The fire had been a flare, Milo thought. The crack, a moment later, had been a gunshot, but Milo didn’t explain that. Tulio was too slippery to get shot, Milo knew. He’d be up on the balloon still, surely…
Except when Milo looked at the basket, he only saw Rourke fiddling with the control box. He didn’t seem to care about the flames spreading across the rigging.
“Tulio!” Milo shouted with Miguel.
Though he didn’t want to, Milo leaned over to look down. There was too much smoke and wreckage on the ground below, so there wouldn’t be any spotting Tulio’s blue shirt even if he was down there.
Just below Milo and Miguel’s fish, Audrey had finished clipping the second hook from the chain on Sweet’s fish to the ring at the top of the container. Jaius and Sunzu were attaching another chain to Sunzu’s fish to help, but unless they could detach the container from the balloon, their efforts were useless.
An explosion cut off Milo’s thoughts. His head shot up, eyes widening when something exploded in the mess of chains just below the balloon. He had a glimpse of Rourke falling to the basket floor, then the last chain snapped, and shouts came as the container suddenly dropped.
Milo looked back down, feeling a little like a bobblehead as he tried to watch everything all at once. He sighed in relief when the chains held, though the sudden weight caused all three flying fish to get pulled downward.
Milo lifted his head, turning his attention to finding Tulio. Then he found a more pressing issue, of course.
The flames on the rigging had only been fanned higher by the explosion. The flames raced down the ropes and toward the control box, where Milo knew the gas canisters were stored.
“Miguel,” Milo breathed.
“I don’t see him!” Miguel cried. He was leaning frantically side-to-side, jerking the flying fish around dizzily. “Milo, I don’t see Tulio!”
“Move,” Milo said, terror reducing his voice to a whisper.
Miguel twisted. “What? Why?”
“M-move!” Milo forced his tone upward, screaming at everyone in general, “It’s going to blow, everyone get out of the way!”
Fire touched the first tank. When Miguel didn’t react, Milo threw his body sideways, prompting the flying fish to veer to the side. The pilots holding the container regained enough control to swing their fish and the container out from under the balloon.
Boom!
The force of the explosion flattened Milo and Miguel against the fish, as well as threw the flying fish into a crazy spiral. Milo clenched his eyes shut until Miguel got the fish under control, and only then dared to look. He promptly wished he hadn’t.
The balloon and rigging had entirely been engulfed in flames. Burning strips of rope and balloon covered the basket. The whole thing was plummeting toward the ground.
“Tulio,” Miguel said in a choked whisper.
“Milo!”
Milo tore his eyes from the burning wreckage at Sweet’s yell. Sweet’s fish was being pulled side to side by the swinging container as he, Jaius, and Sunzu tried to balance it between them. Audrey was leaning dangerously backward, staring downward.
“Where’s Tulio?” Sweet asked.
“He…”
Milo couldn’t force the words out, not before the burning balloon struck the ground with enough force that the air seemed to sway. Milo gasped and grabbed onto the fish, then Miguel shoved the flying fish into a dive.
“Milo! Miguel!” Sweet shouted.
Hot air rushed up, pushing the flying fish’s nose upward. Milo blinked as the sudden wave of heat made his eyes water, then his mouth went dry at the sight of cracks, glowing orange, spreading outward from the crash site.
“The volcano!” Mole yelled from somewhere overhead. “She awakes!”
“Everyone, back to Atlantis!” Salus yelled, waving at his scouts.
Biplanes and flying fish spun away from each other, heading in opposite directions.
“ Tulio!” Milo yelled. “Tulio, where are you?!”
He’d fallen. He had to have. Fallen from the balloon or with it, Milo realized it didn’t make much difference. It was too high, the balloon had fallen too fast…
Still, he couldn’t help but look for his friend.
A metallic snap cut through the rumbles. Milo and Miguel jerked sideways when the container fell past them, crashing to the ground below.
“What the-”
Milo looked up. The flying fish were above them, their chains still connected to the ring from the top of the container. It swung at Milo, who ducked to avoid getting hit. The flying fish began to lower, and it sounded like Audrey was trying to convince Sweet to let her climb to the ground to reconnect the chains.
Moving without thinking, Milo reached out and grabbed the chains. Miguel realized what he was doing as Milo swung off the fish’s back.
“Look for Tulio!” Milo yelled at him. Then, directing his voice upward, he yelled, “Keep going, and I’ll get the chains around the container!”
“There’s not enough time!” Sweet yelled back. “Get back on the fish!”
“I’m not leaving Kida! Not after all this!” Milo yelled back.
Not after Tulio’s sacrifice.
Despite Sweet’s protests, the fish were still dropping steadily. The air became hotter as the cracks spread further. Milo glanced down, relieved the container was still sitting on solid ground. For now.
Miguel’s flying fish dove beside the container as Milo’s feet touched it. Milo looked up at him even as he slid to the shaking ground.
“Miguel, look for Tulio!” Milo said.
Tears were streaming down Miguel’s face as he answered, “It’s too late, Milo. I’m not going to lose you, too.”
“Enough with the tears! Let’s move her!”
Milo and Miguel both jerked around at Tulio’s voice. He was just rounding a boulder, looking utterly unimpressed with the pair mourning him.
But, while Tulio was trying to play off what had just happened, he was limping, heavily favoring his right foot. His clothes were torn and covered in dirt and soot, and there was blood on his left temple and cheek.
“Tulio?!” Miguel exclaimed.
“You’re not getting rid of me so easily, now let’s go!”
Milo shook himself as Tulio grabbed a chain. Both of them looped the chains around the protruding top of the container, then stepped back as the flying fish pulled out the slack.
“Okay!” Miguel said, fear evident in his face and voice as he reached down. “We’ve got Kida, now let’s-”
A fissure burst open, blowing steam in Miguel’s face. He backed off with a sputter. The ground shook, and Milo fell to his knees. He yelped and scrambled to lift his hands from the burning ground. With nothing else to grab, he caught hold of the chains around the container. Tulio skittered up alongside Milo to grab the chain as well.
The container was heaved into the air just before the ground gave way. Milo clenched his eyes at the hot rush of air, and turned his face toward the sky before opening them.
“Come on!” Miguel said, bringing his fish closer to the swaying container.
Tulio reached out, but the container swung backward again, out of reach of Miguel’s grasp. Tulio’s body thudded against the container, and he released a sharp gasp.
“There’s no time!” Tulio called out. “Just go! G-go!”
Tulio tried to not be sick as the container was hauled out of the cave, but everything was kind of spinning, and it was making him nauseous. It took him a long moment to realize the container was twirling at the end of the chains, which made it all worse. He groaned when he bumped the container, and his fingers briefly slipped. Tulio tried to tighten his grip, but his fingers felt clumsy.
“Are you okay?” Milo asked.
“Never been better!” Tulio lied.
Milo let go of the chain with one hand, reaching toward a crystal hanging around his neck -and when had Milo gotten that? - and almost slipped when the container was jerked to the side. Milo yelped and scrambled to grab the chain again, and Tulio didn’t let out his breath until Milo was secure again.
Well, as secure as they could be while racing a wave of lava through a tunnel with only a chain to hold onto.
“Forget it!” Tulio snapped before Milo could try again.
Milo didn’t look convinced. “Your head-”
“At least wait til we land!”
Milo blinked, and Tulio snorted that waiting apparently hadn’t occurred to him.
Another swing of the container broke one of Tulio’s hands free. He slammed against Milo, who promptly let go long enough to loop his arm around Tulio’s, then grabbed the chain again. Tulio blinked hard, trying to focus on clenching his fingers around the chain.
Shouts arose from around them. Tulio looked up as the tunnel walls fell away. He was confused as to why the shouts were sounding increasingly alarmed.
“Hang on!” Miguel shouted. “The fish, they’re- we’re going to crash!”
The fish were what? Tulio forced his focus onto the nearest flying fish in time to see it abruptly dip, the panic on the flier’s face making it clear that the drop hadn’t been intentional.
“Hold on!” Miguel yelled as his fish dropped… and kept falling!
“Miguel!” Tulio yelled.
There was a slam of metal against stone, then the container stopped sharply. Before Tulio could figure out what had happened, he’d already gone flying off the container. He tumbled awkwardly through the air alongside Milo, already knowing that landing was going to hurt.
Tulio felt his feet hit the ground, then he suddenly found himself on his back. He blinked, then automatically tried to sit up, only to freeze with a gasp when pain shot through his chest.
Yeah, bones were definitely broken now.
“Tulio, wait!”
Tulio looked around, moving just his head. Miguel was scrambling out of his flying fish and Milo was tripping over his feet as he ran for the container. The rest of the crew who had sided with the Atlanteans were there, though half of them had been thrown from their fish. Sweet was already beside Audrey, who was waving him off despite the scratches on her hands and face.
“Tulio!” Miguel said, dropping beside him.
“Don’t be so loud, I don’t want Sweet to see,” Tulio grumbled, though he knew he couldn’t exactly hide his injuries. He gingerly touched the gash on his temple, courtesy of Rourke’s bullet. “Help Milo with Kida.”
“Tulio-”
“What?” Tulio snapped, lowering his hand.
“Look!”
Confused at what could have grabbed Miguel’s attention, Tulio looked down. Suddenly, he couldn’t breathe, and Tulio realized that was probably a bigger deal than he had been pretending to himself.
Tulio cleared his throat. “Sweet?”
Tulio tried to keep his voice level and calm, but it came out a little too loud and forced. It might’ve been a bit of squawk, admittedly.
Whatever his voice did, it brought Sweet’s head up. He looked across at Tulio, already grabbing his bag and opening his mouth in question.
Tulio answered silently by lifting his vest, revealing the spike of black stone protruding from his side.
Notes:
I should... probably stop impaling characters.
Side and kind of fun note, but the bomb Tulio uses was stashed away (and forgotten) back in chapter nine!
Chapter 20: What the Heart Wants
Chapter Text
He couldn’t feel it. He couldn’t feel the rock. He couldn’t really feel anything wrong in his chest now that he wasn’t moving, or his leg, twisted so oddly now that he was looking, but nothing hurt, why did nothing hurt-
“Miguel, I… I think I need to lay down,” Tulio whispered.
“Yes, yes, just-” Miguel swallowed hard and his shaking hands steadied to carefully support Tulio’s shoulders. “Just move slowly.”
Sweet dropped down beside Miguel and took over holding Tulio semi-upright. Using hand and head gestures, Sweet instructed Miguel to help Tulio get his vest off. Then Sweet eased Tulio to the ground. Miguel balled up Tulio’s vest to pillow his head, wincing every time Tulio did.
“It, uh… it doesn’t hurt, Miguel,” Tulio said.
“I don’t think…” Miguel gave a forced smile. “Good, Tulio! That’s good!”
“What’s good?” Audrey asked, joining them.
Tulio frowned, confused when he saw the scratches still on her face. Hadn’t he given her the crystal…
Tulio’s eyes widened. “Audrey, the crystal!”
“It isn’t-” Audrey broke off as Sweet spoke to her. She frowned at Sweet and pointedly walked around the doctor to kneel on Sweet’s other side, at Tulio’s head. “Sweet seems to think that I can’t handle seeing your injury, but someone’s gotta translate, and I’ve seen worse.”
The statement might’ve been more convincing if Audrey hadn’t paled when she looked down, or if the last word hadn’t been a squeak. She dug into her pocket to take out the crystal, which she pressed into Tulio’s hand.
Tulio forced his fingers to tighten around the crystal, but he couldn’t help noticing that the glow was gone. Would it still… no, Tulio felt nothing from the crystal. He took a haggard breath, pain briefly spiking in his lungs.
Sweet spoke, and Audrey translated with carefully averted eyes, “Sweet said he’s going to cut away your shirt so he can check the wound. As long as it’s not too deep, he can stitch you up, and you’ll be as good as new, Tulio!”
Audrey finished off the statement with false cheer. Tulio couldn’t find himself to be too hopeful, though. Audrey must’ve seen it in his face.
“Sweet’s the best doctor there is,” Audrey said firmly. “You’re in good hands, and if Sweet says you’ll be fine, then you will be!”
“Audrey…”
“Tulio?” Miguel grabbed Tulio’s empty hand and squeezed it. “Try to be a little more optimistic! I know you don’t like doctors, but it’ll be fine!”
Tulio rocked his head slightly. He licked his dry lips before explaining, “When I fell… I landed on my back.”
Milo’s hands and arms stung from their rough landing, but he was scrambling to his feet even before he came to a full stop. A glance told him Miguel was on his feet and going to check on Tulio. Since the Spaniards were -mostly- alright, Milo ran to the container holding Kida.
Milo scanned the container, but quickly realized there wasn’t any easy way to open it. All the sections were bolted together. Getting dropped twice meant there were some gaps in the sections, but Milo saw in a moment that the metal around the screws was too damaged to unscrew the bolts.
“Kida?” Milo said.
Milo looked at one of the windows on the container, stiffening when he saw it was dark. It had been glowing with Kida’s -the Heart’s?- light when they left Atlantis, glowing along with the crystals, so if the light was out…
Milo looked over when someone offered him a spear. He took the spear, then looked at Salus’ darkened crystal. He numbly lifted the crystal the king had given him. It was dark as well.
“What’s this mean?” Milo asked.
Salus shook his head. He lifted a second spear he held in his other hand.
“I don’t know, but we need to get the princess out of there.”
Milo steadied himself and nodded. He and Salus jammed the spears into the gap, then pulled and shoved in opposite directions. The metal screeched open a bit, then stopped.
Milo leaned his body back, but the opening wasn’t widening. He climbed onto the top of the container to put his whole weight against the spear.
As he did, Milo glanced toward where he’d seen the Spaniards last. He blinked in confusion when he saw Tulio on the ground, surrounded by Miguel, Audrey, and Sweet.
…there was blood on the ground.
Metal shrieked, then Milo tumbled to the ground, the spear clattering down beside him. He scrambled to his feet, looking toward Tulio, then into the now-open container. He jerked backward as a large, faintly glowing, crystal shot out of the opening to hover twenty feet over their heads. Inside the container was Kida, unmoving.
“Kida!” Milo yelped.
Milo slid down to Kida’s side. He breathed a sigh of relief when he saw she was breathing steadily. He touched her gently, and Kida’s head twitched toward him.
Something rumbled. He stood up to look toward the sound.
Lava was spewing out of the tunnel they’d escaped through moments before. But cracks were spreading around the tunnel opening, lava oozing through. Rocks and entire boulders were breaking off the wall.
“What’s-”
“The fissure, it is about to eject its pyroclastic fury!” Mole wailed.
Milo stared at him. His mind was racing in too many directions. Tulio was hurt, Kida was unconscious, the Heart was right there yet none of the crystals were working and now-
“Milo!” Vinny yelled, “The volcano’s about to blow!”
Of course it was.
“Salus, we need to…” Milo gestured helplessly. “Is there anywhere everyone can hide?”
“Maybe the lakes, but if lava covers the entire city…” Salus trailed off, not needing to finish his prediction.
Milo looked up at the Heart. “I thought it would protect the city and people!”
“It wants to.”
Milo spun at Tulio’s voice.
Tulio was looking at him, but still laying on his back. Sweet was trying to work around… was that a rock in Tulio’s side?
“But I made a bargain with the Heart,” Tulio said. Ignoring the ripple of shock among his listeners as Jaius translated, he continued, “If we could get the Heart back to Atlantis, it wouldn’t take Kida as a sacrifice.”
“But… then…” Milo knelt again as Kida stirred. “Why won’t it protect us now?”
Tulio shrugged, but Milo was putting the pieces together himself. Between what he’d read on the murals and what the king had told him, the Heart got its power from the people of Atlantis. But he’d learned from Kida earlier that during the Great Flood, a vast majority of Atlanteans were lost. With such a small number of Atlanteans, the Heart’s power was probably incredibly low.
But even then, why were the crystals not working? The Heart hadn’t done anything major since merging with Kida, unless the merge or flying fish took much more power than Milo would have guessed.
Milo looked again at the far wall. He squinted at a flicker of blue across one of the cracks, like a single thread holding a seam together.
“We don’t have much time,” Milo told Salus. He pointed to the thread he’d seen. “The Heart can’t stop the volcano from erupting, but I think it’s trying to buy us some time.”
“To do what?!” asked a nearby Atlantean. “The fish won’t fly anymore, and there’s nowhere we can hide from lava!”
Milo shook his head. He had no ideas on what to do to save the city, or how to help Tulio and Kida. For an instant, Milo wished he’d never left the basement of the museum, but he firmly shook the thought off. What was done was done, and bemoaning his decisions wasn’t going to save anyone.
“Milo?”
Milo looked quickly down, relief flooding him when he saw Kida’s eyes were open.
“Kida,” Milo said, a breathless laugh escaping him. Without thinking, he hugged her. “I’m so glad you’re alright!”
Something on the far wall cracked loudly, and Milo winced.
“For now,” Milo amended.
Kida blinked, then sat up. Milo yelped and tried to make her stay down, but Kida resolutely got to her feet. She looked at the glowing wall, then at Tulio on the ground, to Milo, then down. She opened one clenched hand, and Milo was confused by the tiny bracelet in her hand as well as the way Kida’s face softened as her fingers tightened back around it. She touched where her crystal normally hung, then looked at the crystal Milo was wearing.
“How did you get that?” Kida asked.
“It’s your dad’s. He’s okay,” Milo hurried to say. He explained everything that had happened as quickly as he could, ending with his theory about the Heart trying to protect them. “It just doesn’t have the power it needs, I think, not without…”
While Milo explained, he kept glancing toward Tulio. Understanding, Kida walked alongside Milo while they went to join the others around Tulio. Milo couldn’t bear to look at the wound, so he focused on Sweet. But seeing the doctor’s grim look and sweaty temples didn’t help, so he turned his attention to Tulio’s pale face, watching him while Audrey translated for the Spaniards.
“Milo, the mural!” Kida exclaimed. At Milo’s confused look, she quoted, “A ‘sacrifice must be given,’ and the ‘princess heeds the call’ would bring ‘a new age of light’! Milo, it wasn’t a retelling or prophecy of the city sinking, it was this!”
Milo shook his head, then hesitated. Everything was lining up, the mention of fire and death referring to either the volcano or guns or both. Even Tulio, paying for his bargain with the Heart with the blood of his injuries.
“But, that would mean…” Milo trailed off. “Kida.”
“Someone tell Kida that I almost died to save her, so I’d appreciate if she didn’t waste it,” Tulio grunted, closing his eyes while Sweet worked on the wound.
“I’m not wasting anything,” Kida said. “But for my people-”
“Not happening,” Tulio interrupted.
Jaius stared at Kida. “Kida, when did you learn this dialect?”
“What-” Kida stopped, her eyes widening in confusion.
“Since the Heart’s chamber,” Tulio said through grit teeth. He breathed out, and only Sweet’s hand on his shoulder kept him from moving. “She spoke to me in Spanish there.”
“Yeah, she called him a child of ash,” Audrey said. “But I thought that was the Heart, and… what did she mean, Tulio? And she said something to you in Atlantean, it sounded like. What was that?”
“I’ll make you all a deal,” Tulio said, his eyes opening in a squint to grin at those surrounding him. “We get through this without Kida dying, and I’ll explain everything the Heart said to me. It… it doesn’t matter anymore.”
“Tulio,” Miguel said, brows furrowing in worry.
“It doesn’t. They can’t find me now.”
Milo wondered if Tulio remembered that nobody but him knew the two of them were from the past. Because if he started referring to that, everyone would just think he was getting delusional.
“I want to know, too, but we’ve got bigger problems for the moment,” Jaius reminded them.
At the same time, Vinny yelled, “I, uh, don’t want to rush you, but are you going to share the plan?”
Milo pressed a hand to his forehead. “There isn’t a plan, Vinny! Unless you have some way to contain that!”
Milo flung a hand to gesture at the wall oozing lava. Worried murmurs spread through the Atlanteans, but there wasn’t any way to stop the volcano without Kida sacrificing herself.
“The Heart can protect us, though, can’t it?” Jaius asked.
Milo shook his head. “It doesn’t have the power it needs. It gets its energy from-from everyone here, I guess, but it’s too weak to completely hold the volcano back!”
“Can’t it just… take the energy from us?” Jaius asked.
“For this kind of feat it needs… well, a sacrifice,” Milo said, figuring there was no point in dancing around it.
Sunzu -as well as several other warriors in earshot- promptly stepped forward. Milo quickly shook his head.
“The king said it had to be royal blood. That’s why it took Kida first, but Tulio convinced it to not keep her,” Milo said.
“I can still choose this,” Kida said firmly.
“But-”
“For my people,” Kida interrupted Milo, “I can do this.”
“Kida, no, I’ll do it,” Jaius said, quickly going to kneel beside Kida. “The people need you. Your dad needs you.”
“No, Jaius, I can’t make you do this!”
“Didn’t you hear me?” Jaius gave a shaky smile. He stood up. “You’re not making me do anything. I’m choosing this, Kida.”
“Jaius!” Kida cried, jumping to her feet.
Jaius looked away, up toward the Heart. He frowned briefly and lifted his hand.
Milo scrambled to his feet. “No, no, there has to be another way. The Heart knows it needs something in order to protect itself and the people. If it was one of you, wouldn’t it have taken you already? Like it did to you before, Kida?”
“It didn’t take me against my will,” Kida said, watching Jaius. “I chose it.”
For a moment, Milo couldn’t speak. He looked down and couldn’t help noticing how much paler Tulio had gotten. The hand Miguel wasn’t holding was laying limply across his chest. Sweet had cut his shirt away from the mess of cuts on his body, and the stone was still in Tulio’s side, why hadn’t Sweet removed it yet?
“Jaius, if you were really choosing to be the sacrifice, you wouldn’t still be here,” Tulio said.
Jaius whirled around. “But I do!”
“Jaius… there’s nothing wrong with wanting to live,” Tulio said. He let out a tired breath and tried to shift, but a warning sound from Sweet made him still. “The Heart, it… it knows things. It knows you aren’t ready.”
“How do you know that?” Miguel asked Tulio, looking concerned.
Tulio’s shoulders lifted in a small shrug. “It knew about my, ah… my past. You’re the only one I’ve told, Miguel, so… I don’t know, it makes sense.”
Milo didn’t really understand, but he didn’t ask Tulio to elaborate. Tulio was panting after the final sentence.
Sweet finally looked up from Tulio’s side. He glanced at Miguel, then said in a low voice toward Milo, “I’m not going to lie. It’s not looking good.”
“I said you’re the best doctor around,” Audrey said with a stiff smile. “Don’t make a liar out of me.”
“Audrey, even if we were in the best hospital with the best staff and tools, this would be touch-and-go, and I’m not so sure I’d be able to save that leg. The best I can do here is staunch the bleeding and hope those Atlantean crystals get going soon and heal the internal wounds like they did for the king,” Sweet said.
Milo couldn’t figure out why Sweet sounded so upbeat while he gave his grim diagnosis, then realized Tulio and Miguel were closely watching him. He didn’t want them to know how bad Tulio was!
The realization chilled Milo, but he managed a smile. It was important that the two of them remained hopeful, especially Tulio. Tulio was strong enough to hang on until the crystals were working again, Milo knew. But if Tulio stopped fighting for even a moment…
Light pulsed. Milo looked sharply up as Jaius yanked his hand against his chest, his expression turning terrified and ashamed.
“Jaius-” Kida started.
“It’s not him,” Tulio interrupted.
“Yeah, Kida’s eyes glowed when the Heart chose her,” Audrey said.
Everyone looked at the Heart. The Heart’s light pulsed, then faded. The volcano’s rumbling grew louder as chunks of stone broke free and more streams of lava spilled down the wall.
Then, over it all, came a distant whinny.
“Altivo?” Miguel said questioningly, looking toward the call.
Milo looked up in time to see Altivo burst out of the throne room. His mouth fell open as the stallion raced down the stone path, hooves flying and mane and tail streaming back like a flag.
On his back was the king.
“Father?” Kida said.
King Kashekim was leaning across Altivo’s neck, both knees against Altivo’s right shoulder to accommodate the robe. His face was so intent that Milo briefly forgot the elderly king was blind.
Atlanteans scattered out of the way as Altivo approached. Altivo skidded to a halt near the group, tossing his head with a snort.
King Kashekim slipped his knees out from the sash -it appeared to be one that had covered the king’s couch- tied around Altivo’s shoulders and stomach, then dropped to the ground. He held out one hand as Kida rushed to him, and wrapped her in a one-armed hug.
“Father, I’m glad you’re alright,” Kida said in Atlantean. “But why did you come down here? You would be safest in the throne room, surely, come!”
“No, Kida,” King Kashekim said, not letting Kida move him. “I’m right where I need to be.”
Milo, doing his best to not eavesdrop, glanced up. He and Kida gasped at the same time.
King Kashekim’s eyes were no longer white, but glowing a gentle blue. His face turned up toward the Heart, then down to Kida as he wrapped his other arm around her.
“My daughter,” King Kashekim said gently.
“N-no, Father!” Kida shook her head. “No, we’ll find another way to save the city!”
“There’s no time, Kida,” King Kashekim said. “It’s my time. The Heart has chosen me.”
Tears filled Kida’s eyes. She bit her lip as she looked down, then back into her father’s face.
“Are you sure, Father?” Kida asked softly. “I can still-”
King Kashekim silenced Kida by pressing a finger to her lips. Then he hugged her once more, tears streaming from his own eyes.
“I only asked the Heart for the time to say good-bye, Kida,” King Kashekim said.
“I’m scared, Father,” Kida whispered.
“Don’t be.” King Kashekim said. “You’ve grown so much, my daughter. You will be a brilliant queen. You have strength and vision. I’m so proud of the woman you’ve become.”
Kida smiled shakily, then threw her arms around King Kashekim’s neck. He squeezed her once more, then gently untangled himself from her hug. Kida stepped back, wrapping her arms around herself. Sunzu was at her side a second later, putting one arm around Kida’s shoulders.
King Kashekim took one step away, then began to lift into the sky. Milo stared, awed, as the king rose higher and higher, until he was directly below the Heart.
Light flashed so intensely that Milo had to turn his face away. When he could look again, King Kashekim was gone and the Heart was glowing so brightly Milo could barely look at it.
Milo felt a wave of something almost electric pass over him. His skin tingled, then the crystal he still held seemed to pulse. Milo looked down and opened his hand to find the crystal was glowing.
And so was the ground!
Previously unnoticeable patterns lit the stone now. The light spread across the platform, and beyond until the statues at the highest point of the city had lit up.
Milo was still staring when the ground in front of the throne room exploded outward. Scattered exclamations of shock came from the Atlanteans as huge stones, carved with the likeness of faces Milo quickly guessed to belong to previous kings, shot through the dust to encircle the rising Heart.
The ground rumbled, and Milo again spun to the far wall. His mouth dropped open as the wall crumbled and lava spewed from more and more spots.
Closer, the lakes surged, then huge stone figures rose from the water. Milo recognized them from the mural with the Heart.
“Reminds me of Tzekel-Kan's jaguar,” Tulio said lowly.
“I don’t think these are going to eat us,” Miguel cheerfully put in.
The stone figures marched to the edges of the city, moving painfully slowly as the wall began to melt with heat. And even when they arrived, what were they-
The first of the figures stopped, standing on the very edge of the city. It clapped its massive hands together. When it pulled them apart, a shimmering blue substance appeared, spreading rapidly to meet the edge of the substance that the next figure had just formed. A chunk of burning stone was spat from the wall to strike the substance, but it bounced harmlessly off and fell away.
It was a shield?!
“Jaius.”
Sweet’s voice pulled Milo from his shock. Milo turned back to his friends, trusting the stone figures’ shield to protect them from the coming eruption.
Sweet had his hands over the cloth around the stone. Tulio had his face turned away, focusing on Miguel’s hand in his. Jaius took a moment to turn from the eruption.
“It’s time to get this rock out of Tulio,” Sweet explained. “How much can those crystals of yours heal?”
“Uh, this is…” Jaius looked nervously at Tulio. “I-I don’t know, I’ve never seen something like this before.”
Sweet looked down at Tulio, then back up. “I need one of your healers to help me.”
“I’ll help,” Kida said, taking the king’s crystal from Milo and kneeling back beside Tulio.
“Are you sure?” Sweet asked with a glance at the Heart above.
“I am,” Kida said firmly. “There is nothing I can do about the eruption. My f- my father is protecting his people one last time.” With only one falter, Kida pressed onward, “Besides, I learned how to heal internal wounds from my father, something none of our other healers learn, so let’s not waste any more time.”
Sweet nodded, seeming impressed, then the two of them went to work. Milo wanted to stay and be supportive, but…
“Milo, Audrey, stand back for a moment,” Sweet said. “Don’t give me that look, Audrey, we need room to work. Jaius, get some water and cloths.”
Jaius, looking a little sick, took off. Salus and Sunzu took Milo and Audrey’s places as they backed away, though Audrey stayed as close as she could without getting in the way.
“Audrey,” Sweet went on as he opened his bag, “Ask Tulio if he has any allergies.”
Milo looked at Miguel as Audrey translated, holding back a wince.
“Milo, I see that look,” Sweet said, making Milo jump. “And it’s not the first time I’ve seen it, either. I don’t know what you three are hiding, but now’s not the time for secrets. If Tulio is allergic to anything in the painkillers or antibiotics, it could kill him.”
“Uh, no, it’s not, uh… that,” Milo said haltingly.
There wasn’t nearly enough time to try to explain the time displacement, but Sweet needed him to say something .
“Where Miguel and Tulio come from is… it’s…” Milo faltered again.
“Milo,” Sweet said with a warning look.
“It’s not modern… er, they didn’t use modern medicine,” Milo said in sudden inspiration.
“Why wouldn’t they- never mind,” Sweet said.
“Sweet, Tulio said he isn’t hurting,” Audrey said urgently.
“Could still be shock,” Sweet said, pulling a needle and bottle from the bag.
“It’s us,” Salus said. He looked over at Sweet. “We can mask the pain while you take the stone out.”
“The crystals can give him strength as well,” Kida said.
“Kida, he’s not Atlantean,” Salus warned.
Kida considered Tulio. “He has the Heart’s favor.”
“Wha- what’s that mean?” Milo asked.
“It means the Heart will aid those who help to protect the city,” Kida said.
Boom!
Milo spun away from the others, his mouth falling open as the far wall exploded outward. Milo reflexively flinched at the wave of lava that rushed toward the city. He barely dared to breathe when it hit the barrier, then split like water against a stone. The lava rose higher and higher against the barrier, covering the city with an orange glow.
A shout from Tulio grabbed Milo’s attention. His breath caught when he saw Tulio writhing, and everyone around him trying to hold him still.
“Almost- come on, Tulio, just hold on,” Sweet said tersely. “I’ve almost got it out!”
“Please stop moving,” Miguel pleaded as he held Tulio’s shoulder down.
Tulio shuddered and twitched. Salus had to grab Tulio’s other arm before he could hit Sweet. The glow of Salus’ crystal flickered.
Without thinking, Milo dropped to his knees and pinned Tulio’s arm down, allowing Salus to turn his full attention back to his crystal. Milo carefully kept his gaze on Tulio’s pale, clenched face. Miguel was murmuring to Tulio, his expression tense but calm.
“Just a little longer,” Milo said nervously, not knowing how much longer Sweet actually needed.
Tulio’s eyes fluttered open. He slurred, “It burns.”
“I thought you said he wouldn’t feel anything!” Audrey snapped at Salus.
“He shouldn’t be able to!” Salus said sharply.
Miguel looked briefly up, asking tersely, “What’s wrong, Audrey?”
When Audrey shortly explained their problem, Miguel paled.
“It might be a memory,” Miguel whispered.
A memory about something burning… Milo flinched as he remembered the burn scars on Tulio’s stomach.
“A memory of what?” Audrey asked, but received no answer.
“You’re doing fine,” Kida soothed Tulio. “Just hold on. Keep talking.”
Tulio grunted. “Tali…?”
Miguel jolted forward, all traces of calm vanishing. “No, no, Tulio, Talesa’s not here, remember? It’s Kida!”
“Who’s Talesa?” Audrey asked. Miguel shot her a look, and Audrey explained, “Last time Tulio didn’t know where he was, I had to figure out what he thought was happening so I could calm him down, alright?”
“I know what’s happening, and what Tulio thinks is happening,” Miguel said fiercely.
“Shoulda… stayed out of the… the armory,” Tulio panted, giving a weak, dazed grin.
“Tulio! Look at me!” Miguel said, leaning sharply over Tulio.
“Got it!” Sweet said, and the stone was dropped to the ground.
Milo reflexively looked over, then averted his eyes. He had a glimpse of Tulio’s wound glowing blue, but it was too dark to make out any details, thankfully.
Wait. Dark?
Milo looked up. Lava covered the barrier now, but it was darkening as it cooled. The light steadily faded until the only light was the glow of the Atlantean crystals and the dully glowing Heart.
Milo eyed the Heart, wondering how long it could maintain the barrier. And what would happen if it failed too soon.
In the darkness, Tulio gasped.
Milo looked down. “Tulio?”
The crystals of the three Atlanteans around Tulio were giving off a dull glow, but Milo’s eyes hadn’t adjusted from the brightness of the lava. He could only see that Tulio's eyes were open. Then he spotted Miguel’s eyes widening.
“Audrey,” Miguel said, the calm in his voice betrayed by the worry in his eyes, “We need light.”
“Light?” Audrey repeated, confused. Then her own eyes widened. “Because of the b-”
“And we’re currently under a ceiling of rock, yes,” Miguel said forcefully. His eyes snapped up. “Jaius, how bright can you make your crystal?”
Jaius, bucket in one hand, stopped and stared at the sudden question, but answered. “Pretty bright, why?”
“Because we need-”
A moan from Tulio made Miguel break off. Milo hurried to Jaius.
“Tulio’s scared of the dark,” Milo said, figuring it was as close to reality as he could get without the whole explanation.
And he honestly wouldn’t have been surprised if Tulio was afraid of the dark, considering he was the first to build a fire in the morning and usually slept with a flashlight at his side.
Another groan came from Tulio. A startled yelp came from Miguel when Tulio abruptly twisted to the side. Salus grabbed his arm to steady him, only for Tulio to give a shout.
“I won’t!” Tulio cried, eyes rolling wildly around. “Please, no! Please, Pero!”
“No, no, no!” Miguel leaned directly into Tulio’s face. “Pero’s not here, Tulio! He can’t take you now, it’s safe, Tulio.”
Tulio jerked away from Miguel with a panicked cry. He thrashed when Sweet grabbed him.
“I won’t, I won’t!” Tulio wailed.
Light flared from Jaius’ crystal. Milo squinted in the sudden brightness, then he startled when he saw the tears streaming from Tulio’s eyes.
Miguel managed to wrestle Tulio’s shoulders back against the ground, spouting apologies the entire time. He glanced at Audrey.
“Tell me they’re almost done!”
Audrey tore her gaze from the panicking Tulio. “Sweet, how’s it going?”
“If he can calm down, we’ll be fine,” Sweet said, grunting as he tried to hold Tulio still. “Normally I’d be worried about stitches, but- Kida, will your healing hold?”
“The scars will hold,” Kida said, her voice strangely grim. But then she finished, “But Tulio’s strength will not.”
“Here!” called someone.
Milo looked up as several Atlanteans brought out lightglobes. The stands were placed around the group, giving enough light that Milo almost felt like he was on the surface again.
Tulio abruptly stopped fighting, and everyone faltered at his stillness. Miguel jerked back, and only the Atlanteans kept their crystals pressed against Tulio’s body.
“Gone, they’re all gone,” Tulio murmured. “Everyone, everything, what have I… what have I done?”
“You didn’t do anything,” Miguel said, laying a careful hand on Tulio’s shoulder. “It’s okay, Tulio. You’re safe now.”
Tulio’s eyes slid over to Miguel. Finally, his eyes seemed to focus, but he was still so pale and his breathing didn’t sound right.
“I’m so tired,” Tulio murmured.
“Tulio.” Sweet touched Tulio’s arm, waiting for Tulio to look at him. “Audrey, tell him to keep talking. We aren’t done yet.”
“Sweet said to stay awake,” Milo interpreted instead, kneeling beside Miguel. “Come on, Tulio. Kida and Sweet have you all fixed up now, but you need to stay awake for a little bit longer.”
Tulio stared at Milo for a moment, then a tired sigh escaped him. He closed his eyes, but opened them again when Milo gave a startled gasp.
“The crystals can’t heal everything,” Tulio said.
“Th-there’s limits, yes,” Jaius said, kneeling as well. “But your doctor took care of your wound quickly and- and Kida’s the best healer in the city!”
Tulio’s breath hitched. He drew in a ragged breath and looked over at Sweet, who had moved away from Tulio’s side and to his leg. His leg, which looked so… so twisted and wrong.
Milo swallowed hard and looked at the new scars on Tulio’s side. The wounds had been sealed up, but… his side looked wrong. The knotted scars couldn’t hide the… the pit , for lack of a better word, that remained in Tulio’s side.
“I’m sorry,” Tulio whispered.
“What are you-” Milo shook his head. “No, I’m sorry, Tulio. You didn’t want to go after Atlantis. You shouldn’t have been here. You wouldn’t be here if I hadn’t… I’m sorry, Tulio.”
Tulio rocked his head. He drew in a strained breath, then said, “I wouldn’t’ve come if I… didn’t really want to… the chance at adventure, it was…”
Tulio seemed to lose his train of thought. His eyes slid between Audrey, Sweet, and the four Atlanteans around him.
“You did your best,” Tulio murmured. “You did everything you could…”
“And it’ll be enough, Tulio!” Miguel said firmly. He brushed Tulio’s sweaty hair out of his face. “While you rest, we’ll find a way to the surface. You’ll recover under the sun, I’ll make sure of it!”
“Miguel-”
“I promise!” Miguel swallowed hard. His voice was desperate. “I promised to protect you, didn’t I? You know I don’t break my promises!”
“You did protect me,” Tulio murmured.
Salus and Sunzu exchanged a sorrowful look, then closed their fingers around their crystals and stood up. Kida kept her crystal in place against Tulio’s chest as she turned her eyes up to the Heart.
Hooves on stone made Milo look up. He’d nearly forgotten Altivo, but the stallion was walking slowly to join them. He lowered his head to sniff Tulio, then snorted. His ears going flat, Altivo laid as near to Tulio’s head as he could manage without laying on him. Ladron tumbled off Altivo’s back to bump into Tulio’s shoulder.
Tulio lifted his clenched fist. Altivo didn’t move at first, then he pressed his head against Tulio’s arm with a heavy, whuffling sigh. Ladron chittered, then squirmed underneath Tulio’s upraised arm.
Tulio looked at Milo. “This city… these people… don’t let anyone think… you’re crazy or… or useless, Milo. You’re the… the smartest man I know. And… Miguel-”
Miguel shook his head. His eyes shone with unshed tears as he struggled to smile.
“Rest, Tulio. It’s all going to be okay.”
Tulio chuckled wearily. “Miguel, you made my life… an adventure.”
“It has been, it has! And once you’re better, we’ll have many more!” Miguel rubbed his eyes and gave a shaky smile. “Just rest, Tulio. Everything is going to be fine now.”
Tulio smiled, his expression the most serene Milo had seen yet on his face.
Then his arm trembled and lowered to rest against his chest. Miguel put his other hand on Tulio’s, softly telling Tulio to rest.
Overhead, something began to rumble. Milo didn’t move, though, keeping his eyes fixed on Tulio’s face as he took a laborious breath, then another. His eyes fluttered shut as he exhaled. Tulio’s fingers slackened until the crystal, dull and streaked with red, fell to the ground.
And then Tulio was gone.
Notes:
-booking it to my bunker- Until next week!
Chapter 21: Friends Never Say Good-Bye
Notes:
...yeah, the chapter title came from the song in El Dorado.
A quick warning before this chapter starts!
I didn't know if/how to tag for possible triggers, but the characters are carrying Tulio's body around for a fair amount of this chapter. If this would be difficult/distressing for you to read, you might want to skip down to the last page of this chapter or just send a comment, and I'll happily send you a quick summary of what happened in this chapter!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
“T…Tulio?” Milo whispered.
Milo touched Tulio’s arm, already knowing he’d get no response. On Tulio’s other side, Audrey put her hand to her mouth. Tears were already trickling down her cheeks, and she gave no resistance to Sweet wrapping an arm around her. Kida pulled her father’s crystal against her chest.
Miguel was the only one who didn’t move. His eyes were fixed on Tulio’s face.
“It shouldn’t have been you,” Miguel whispered, his voice so low Milo barely heard him. “I’m so sorry, Tulio. I couldn’t-”
Miguel broke off with a choke. The tears finally fell, streaming down his cheeks and dripping off his chin onto Tulio’s forehead.
Without thinking, Milo shuffled to Miguel’s side. Not sure if Miguel would accept any sort of comfort, Milo put a hand on Miguel’s shoulder. Miguel twitched, but didn’t pull away.
After a moment, Miguel slumped against Milo’s side. Milo wrapped his arms around Miguel to keep him from sliding to the ground.
“Why Tulio?” Miguel mumbled, sounding like he was talking to himself. “He did enough, he struggled enough, why… he deserved some peace.”
“He doesn’t… have to fight anymore,” Milo said, uncertain if they were the words Miguel even wanted to hear.
Miguel didn’t seem to hear him, anyway. He rubbed his eyes, but the tears kept flowing. Audrey wiped her eyes with her handkerchief, then silently held it out. Miguel took it to wipe his eyes as well.
“He had the favor of the Heart.”
Milo looked over at Kida’s statement in Atlantean. She seemed to be puzzling over something as she stared at Milo.
Milo lifted one shoulder in a shrug. He found himself answering in Atlantean as well, “The Heart, it… can’t fix everything.”
“Can’t fix…” Kida trailed off, then stood and went to Jaius. “Jaius, did Aunt Melein ever tell you about the day you were born?”
Jaius blinked, clearly confused by the question. “I… sort of? Everyone knows the story, right?”
Sunzu looked at Kida. “Princess, it wouldn’t work. He’s not Atlantean.”
“But he has the favor of the Heart,” Kida said, glancing at the Heart. “Sunzu, you were there, correct?”
Sunzu shook her head. “Only the king, queen, and Melein were present.”
Sensing whatever they were discussing was extremely important to what had just happened, Milo looked between them and Miguel. He gestured to Sweet and Audrey. The pair rose to join Milo and Miguel. Miguel didn’t seem to notice when Sweet took Milo’s place, and Milo rose to his feet.
“Kida, what’s going on?” Milo asked.
“She’s looking for miracles,” Sunzu said disapprovingly.
“When Jaius was born to my aunt Melein, he was stillborn,” Kida explained. “Aunt Melein took him to my parents, begging for a miracle for her firstborn child. Mama and Father took Melein and Jaius into the throne room, and nobody saw them for a week.”
Milo looked between Kida and Jaius. What Kida was saying finally clicked, but…
“The King and Queen had ways to bring someone back from the dead?” Milo whispered, despite knowing none of the crew would understand him.
“I know of it working only one other time,” Sunzu said. “Both times were before the city sank, Princess, when the Heart was strong. Besides that, only the King and Queen knew how to do it,” Sunzu said. She shook her head with a regretful expression. “I’m sorry, but the ceremony has been lost.”
“Ceremony…” Milo repeated slowly. Something nagged at the back of his mind, then he jolted. “The Tears!”
“Our crystals?” Kida asked.
“No, no, there should be-” Milo dug into his satchel and pulled out the Journal, but found he couldn’t remember where the page he remembered was. He searched frantically as he explained, “I forgot until just now, but the Shepherd mentions some sort of ceremony the king performed for healing. He presented the injured to the Tears of the Heart, and if they were judged worthy, they’d be healed.”
“If that’s true, then Tulio should’ve been healed because he does have the Heart’s favor,” Kida said.
“Yes, but here’s the thing, in the passage I read, the Tears are described as a pool.”
“A pool… near the Heart?” Kida stiffened. “Sunzu, is the throne room still intact?”
Sunzu looked up the path. “It appears to be from here, why?”
“The chamber where we found the Heart, there was a pool underneath. The water appeared to be coming from the Heart itself!” Kida said.
“The Tears of the Heart?” Milo gasped, barely daring to believe it.
“The king did take Jaius somewhere within the throne room,” Sunzu allowed.
“Do you want to try?” Milo asked Kida.
Kida nodded firmly. “We have nothing to lose, but everything to gain. Will Miguel allow it, though?”
“I’ll check.” Milo kneeled beside Miguel and touched his arm. “Miguel? Miguel, look at me.”
Miguel dragged his eyes over to Milo’s.
“Kida thinks there’s still a way to save Tulio,” Milo said.
Miguel’s brows clenched. “Nothing can bring someone back from the dead.”
“It’s worked before. Sunzu said it might not work,” Milo admitted. “But it’s a chance.”
Miguel stared at Milo silently. Milo bit his lip, wondering if Miguel was even understanding what he was saying.
Then Miguel pulled away from Sweet and staggered to his feet, using Sweet’s shoulder for support. Audrey scrambled to her feet.
“I’d like to say Tulio and I have run bigger gambles, but, well,” Miguel flung his arms out to gesture at Tulio with a laugh that was more than a little hysterical.
“Milo, what’s going on?” Sweet asked as he stood.
Milo had a flash of frustration that there wasn’t a language in their group that everyone spoke, but pushed it aside.
“There might be a way to save Tulio,” Milo said.
Sweet raised an eyebrow, but only asked, “Where?”
“Under the throne room, if it’s still standing,” Milo said, wincing at the thought.
Sweet nodded, then bent down and picked up Tulio. Miguel flinched and reached out, then stopped with a strange look. Milo winced and shrugged, having almost told Sweet to be careful himself.
“Hurry!” Kida said before turning to run up the path.
Milo hurried after her. For the first time, he looked beyond the city.
The barrier was gone, as was the hardened lava. Milo only vaguely remembered hearing crumbling rock, and guessed it had been broken and slid off the barrier. The ancient machines still stood on the borders of the city, and Milo realized the lake levels had gone down. As they ran higher, dodging craters caused by a few boulders that had pelted the city before the barrier had fully formed, Milo could make out the tops of buildings and statues, slimed green with algae from the lake waters.
The crew left the plaza, following behind Milo and Audrey. Atlanteans were already making their way into the drained lake beds while others went to rubble from the eruption, though a few joined the crew in heading up the path.
The path was gone near the throne room. Milo felt a flash of fear that they wouldn’t be able to reach the pool through the throne room, then Kida called from where she’d climbed up a boulder.
“This way!”
Milo climbed onto the boulder alongside Kida, and was relieved to see the throne room was still intact.
Miguel climbed onto the boulder, then he and Kida took Tulio from Sweet so he could climb up. They maneuvered Tulio down the other side in the same manner.
“The lift is over here,” Audrey said, going to stand near the center of a rune carved in the floor. “But it’s pretty small.”
The group looked at each other. Milo knew Miguel would be going to the pool, and obviously Tulio as well.
“Milo, Miguel, and I will take him down first,” Kida said, holding out her arms toward Sweet. “The rest of you can follow next.”
Sweet nodded and stepped toward the lift.
“It’ll start as soon as you step on it,” Audrey warned.
Miguel was shifting from foot to foot, anxiety clear on his face. Milo quickly translated the plan while Sweet and Kida tried to figure out the best way Kida could hold the taller man. Miguel nodded, then silently joined Kida. Between the two of them, they were able to hold Tulio’s body upright. They stepped backward onto the lift, and Milo hopped on as it began to descend.
As it sank, Milo felt something bump against his leg. He looked down to see Ladron had rolled onto the platform as well. The armadillo unrolled, then cuddled against Miguel’s leg.
Miguel trembled.
“Do you need me to take Tulio?” Milo asked.
“No, no…” Miguel exhaled shakily. “Kida, be honest. How likely is this to work?”
“If the Heart can do anything to help him, it will,” Kida said.
“That wasn’t really an answer…” Miguel made a brief effort to smile, but quickly gave up.
The trip felt painfully long before the narrow tunnel opened into a high chamber. One wall was rubble that trailed into the pool in the center of the chamber, but otherwise the walls were perfectly smooth. A pale blue light filled the chamber, though Milo couldn’t see where exactly it was coming from.
Miguel and Kida carried Tulio between them to the edge of the pool, then laid him down. Kida got up to walk alongside the pool before she seemed to find what she was looking for halfway to the wall. She returned to Miguel, and the two of them again lifted Tulio. Milo trailed them as they carried Tulio to the pool’s edge, feeling a little useless just then.
“Here, there’s a ledge just under the water,” Kida said as she stepped into the water. “Be careful. You don’t want to fall in."
Milo almost asked why not, but changed his mind. Kida and Miguel seemed to be locked in immense concentration as they lowered Tulio into the pool. When they removed their hands, Tulio remained floating between them.
“Now what?” Miguel asked after a moment of silence.
Kida looked at Milo, who could only stare helplessly back.
“The Shepherd never explained the ceremony in the Journal,” Milo said.
“And Father never told me about this chamber, never mind how to bring someone back to life,” Kida said.
“Would it… would it even work without the Heart?” Miguel asked falteringly.
Nobody answered him. Nobody knew the answer, aside from the glaring truth in front of them.
“Well?!” Audrey shouted as she appeared suddenly at Milo’s side.
Milo jumped and Audrey’s voice echoed through the room. Sweet joined them more slowly, giving Audrey a disapproving look that was ignored. Vinny and Jaius walked up as well, silently joining the group. Some minutes later, Mole, Packard, Cookie, Salus, and Sunzu joined them.
The slightest noise echoed loudly, so everyone heard when Miguel suddenly sniffed. His head dropped into his hands, his sniff turning into a sob. He dropped to his knees at the edge of the pool, splashing an unresponsive Tulio.
Kida lowered her head, grabbing her elbows as her shoulders rose. “I’m sorry, Miguel. I didn’t mean to raise your hopes for nothing.”
Miguel shook his head. “No… no, Kida, you… we tried everything. He just… Tulio, you deserved to be happy!”
Miguel pounded a fist in the water, splashing himself in the face. He jerked back with a gasp, swiping furiously at his face. Milo dropped beside him, worried by the sobs jerking Miguel’s body.
“Breathe, Miguel, it- no, it’s not okay, but please, Miguel, breathe,” Milo said.
Miguel turned his tortured eyes to Milo. “Why Tulio?”
“He…” Milo sat beside Miguel. “I don’t know, but… Tulio knew what he was doing. He… Tulio was a hero. He saved the city.”
“What’s the point of being a hero if you die?” Miguel asked bitterly. He shook his head before Milo could figure out an answer. “Tulio, you always said I was the idiot, you were the brains. But it was always you behind our schemes, our cons, once you learned to have fun, you old worrywart. I…” Miguel sniffed, tears dripping off his chin to plop into the water. “You and your schemes made my life rich. I… I’m going to miss you, Tulio.”
Miguel put his hand on Milo’s shoulder and heaved himself to his feet. Milo waited for Sweet to reach out to steady Miguel before standing. Letting Miguel lean against him, Milo started toward the lift.
The floor trembled. Miguel stumbled, and Milo hurriedly steadied him before wondering what could have shaken the floor. Hopefully it wasn’t another eruption, otherwise…
A noise like a dozen whispering voices came from behind. Miguel froze. Milo’s shoulders jumped up when he heard King Kashekim and Kida’s voices among them. A bright glow came from behind them as the voices grew louder but no more distinct. Milo hesitantly turned his head, and his gasp made Miguel’s head jerk around as well.
The pool was glowing blue, blindingly bright. Milo squinted, barely able to see Tulio. His arm tightened around Miguel’s side. He tried to get Miguel moving toward the lift again, wondering if Tulio’s body was going to be taken by the Heart somehow, but Miguel was as stiff as a rod and Milo wasn’t strong enough to budge him. Reluctantly, he stopped trying and looked back as well.
The voices swelled louder, twining together in a rising cacophony of noise. The light grew so bright Milo had to close his eyes. He could barely hear Kida yelling at everyone to look away.
Then, the noise stopped and the glow behind Milo’s eyelids vanished. As the ringing faded from his ears, Milo blinked his eyes open.
Everyone was where Milo had last seen them, aside from Kida. She was in front of Miguel, her hands covering Miguel’s eyes until he shook them off. He squinted at Kida, his pupils so shrunk by the light that they were mere dots.
“What happened?” Miguel asked.
“Sweet, Miguel had his eyes open,” Kida said worriedly.
“Answer me, what was that?” Miguel insisted. He tried to move away, but this time it was Milo who planted his feet and refused to move. “Where’s Tulio? Is he still…?”
Milo glanced at the pool. Audrey was closest to the pool, glancing between Miguel and Tulio’s body.
“Yeah…” Milo said.
“Hold still,” Sweet said, touching Miguel’s shoulder. He lifted one of Miguel’s eyelids. Then, fending off Miguel’s hands, he checked Miguel’s other eye. “We’ll have to wait to make sure there’s no permanent damage. Milo, ask him if-”
“Sweet?” Audrey said, her voice weirdly high-pitched.
“What’s going on? Do I want to know?” Miguel asked, his voice pitching upward in a panic.
“Nothing’s happening,” Milo soothed. He gently turned Miguel toward the lift. “We’ll go back up, and you can lay down. Sweet’s going to check your eyes soon. Can you see?”
“Ye- no, I… everything’s blurry.”
Milo kept his fear in check. “Okay, we’ll, uh… get you somewhere dark. You shouldn’t have looked back.”
“I couldn’t help it. I just wanted to see Tulio one more time…” Miguel trailed off as he slumped against Milo’s shoulder.
“Everyone, stop,” Sweet said.
Milo kept walking. “Tell us later, Sweet, please. Miguel needs to get out of here, I think.”
Sweet didn’t answer, so Milo took that as permission to keep going. He wondered why Sweet had said that, anyway, when it was clear Miguel needed rest.
“Milo!”
Milo stiffened at Sweet’s call. “Just a minute, Sweet. We’re-”
“Tulio’s breathing and he’s got a pulse again!” Audrey called.
Milo stumbled in shock at the same time Miguel ripped himself free as he spun on his heel. Milo fell to his knees, then twisted.
Sweet and Kida were kneeling beside Tulio’s body. Sweet had his stethoscope against Tulio’s chest, nodding furiously in agreement with Audrey.
“It healed him!” Kida said excitedly. “Come look!”
Miguel dashed clumsily over to the pool, dropping beside Sweet. Milo scrambled to his feet to follow, legs shaking and barely daring to look even after Sweet and Kida’s assurances.
Tulio’s chest was rising and falling with slow, even breaths. His face was a healthy color again. There were scars on his side, but they looked older, blending with the burn scars on his stomach. The flesh didn’t seem so sunken, either.
“He… how? Are you sure?” Milo asked Sweet, because if he was getting Miguel’s hopes up again just to lose Tulio again-
“His pulse is strong,” Sweet said. He’d put aside his stethoscope to run his hands down Tulio’s body and limbs. “I’m not seeing any signs of internal bleeding, and his broken bones are mended. I don’t know how to explain it, Milo, but Tulio’s going to be okay!”
Milo exhaled shakily. He ran his hand through his hair as he looked at Miguel’s fearful face.
“Sweet said he’s fully cured,” Milo said. “Tulio’s going to be okay!”
“Oh.” Miguel smiled shakily. He’d become as pale as a sheet. “That’s great.”
Then Miguel’s eyes rolled up and he toppled forward. Kida barely caught him before he could fall into the water.
Notes:
He lives!
As predicted by AlicornGem88, this story is half Disney and only villains die in Disney movies. :D
Okay, two more chapters to go! This chapter was fairly short, but I think the next chapter is the longest chapter of this fic. And yes, this is now a series~
Chapter 22: Broken Past, Mended Future
Notes:
Buckle up, this chapter's a long one! :D It kicks off a week after the eruption.
A quick warning, but this chapter does include mentions of child death. There's no details, but it's in here.
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Miguel woke up in Jaius’ house with no memory of getting there. He blinked blearily before rolling onto his side and wrestling his arms free to shove the blankets to the floor.
As had become his ritual, Miguel laid for a moment, looking first at his hands, then the far wall, then the far cavern ceiling beyond the broken roof. He smiled when he could see them all clearly.
Sweet had initially had concerns that Miguel’s vision would be permanently damaged by the Pool’s light, especially after a full day had passed and Miguel’s vision had remained blurry. Not even Kida knew how to heal eye injuries and Milo hadn’t found anything in the Journal, so everyone feared Miguel was going to have to live with weakened vision.
As he sat up, he felt a light thump on his chest. He looked down, then raised a hand to briefly touch the crystal that hung around his neck. His smile broadened.
Kida had reverently offered Miguel and the crew their own crystals two days after the city had been saved. Within hours, Miguel’s vision had returned to normal, if not stronger than before. Miguel often thought it seemed like an apology from the Heart.
Still feeling tired, Miguel rubbed his eyes, then looked around. The house was empty, though he could hear voices outside.
“How long did I sleep?” Miguel mumbled as he slid out of bed.
Miguel tugged his clothes straight and tried to untangle his hair as he stepped outside. He smiled and waved at the children playing with Ladron nearby, but kept moving.
Miguel had just reached the path when Altivo trotted up beside him. He looked up, grinning when he saw Audrey astride the stallion.
“About time you woke up, sleepy-head,” Audrey teased.
“How-”
“Sweet carried you to bed. Again.” Audrey reached down. “Come on up.”
Miguel hopped up without Audrey’s help, knowing he’d only pull her off Altivo if he tried. Audrey snorted, then nudged Altivo into a trot.
Miguel took a deep breath and shook his head, waking himself up fully to look around.
It seemed like every time he passed through the city, there was another structure that had been repaired or another statue raised with the aid of the flying fish. Atlanteans called out to Miguel and Audrey as they passed, as did the crew.
Miguel caught a flash of blue as Vinny turned. Kida never did explain how the crystals were made, but she had made it clear that the crystals had been formed specifically for each of the crew as she’d placed the crystals around their necks. She’d said the crystals would only work for the person who’d received it, unless the crystal was intentionally given to someone else to use.
Each of the crew had received a single crystal, with Sweet being the exception. Kida had presented Sweet with a second crystal. Though she hadn’t known who it belonged to yet, she had said there was someone on the surface who would receive it. Sweet had gotten a weird look on his face when Kida explained, but had only taken the crystal and safely stashed it in his doctor’s bag.
Altivo passed a plaza, where a huge flying shark was being cleaned up. The shark was larger than the submarine Miguel and his friends had used, and the mouth opened to allow entrance into the large “stomach.” Outside the shark was a pile of gold statues and ornaments.
The gold had been discovered in the half-drained lakes. The soft metal had been discarded long ago, as it was useless for tools. Kida and the city had generously given much gold to each of the crew, since it would be more useful to the crew on the surface.
Half the gold piled in front of the shark wasn’t for the crew, though. Kida knew she wanted her people to eventually go to the surface. When that happened, they’d need money for a variety of things like trade. Milo also had vague plans about the Atlanteans purchasing their own land, though nobody was sure yet if it would work. Sweet had accepted the responsibility of selling the gold and keeping charge of the funds while plans were made.
A little beyond the shark was the submarine that Audrey had called an Aqua-Evac. Scouts had retrieved it, as the plan was to take the Atlantean vehicles to the surface, then swap into the expedition’s submarine to rendezvous with the ship. After all, they didn’t want word of the Atlantean tech to spread until the Atlanteans themselves were ready to show themselves to the world.
The vehicles and gold were left behind, then Altivo was slowing on the repaired path outside the throne room.
Kida had moved much further down the hill, now residing in one of the many rooms of the old palace where the murals about the Heart were currently being restored. The throne room had been cleaned up, and now served another purpose.
Altivo stopped just inside the room, and Miguel looked toward Milo, Kida, and Salus. They were surveying a large stone that had been carried into the room. Lines had been drawn on the stone with chalk, outlining the solemn face of King Kashekim, which would be carved into the stone so the king could join the past kings with the Heart.
Miguel wasn’t sure yet how that worked, but supposed there was a way that the finished carving would be lifted into the sky like the other carvings that hovered in a large ring around the Heart over the city.
Milo spotted Miguel. He said something to Kida, who nodded, then hurried over to Altivo. Miguel smiled at the disapproval on Milo’s face. He couldn’t pull off the look nearly as well as Sweet or Kida.
“Miguel, Sweet said you had to wait for at least eight hours. Did you even sleep?”
“I don’t know how to read your clocks,” Miguel said with a shrug. He hopped off of Altivo, pretending his body didn’t ache when he landed. “And yes, I slept.”
“For six hours,” Milo said critically.
Miguel shrugged. “I want to see Tulio.”
Milo’s attempt at being tough crumbled. Miguel glanced past him at Kida, relieved when he found her watching with only amusement. If Kida got involved, there wouldn’t be any visiting Tulio yet.
“Fine,” Milo allowed with no more resistance. “But when Sweet sends you back to bed, don’t say I didn’t warn you.”
Miguel held back a grin at the consternation in Milo’s voice. He knew Milo was just worried about him. Miguel also knew that if there was any danger to him, Kida would’ve stepped in.
“You do need to make sure you get enough rest, though,” Milo said, ever the worrier.
“I’ll be fine, Milo. But…” Miguel hesitated, then pushed on when Milo tensed, “When you and Kida are done up here, come down to the pool. It’s time I told you everything.”
“Everything? What do you-” Milo’s eyes widened. “Wait, do you mean about you and Tulio?”
“Tulio, mainly,” Miguel said. “Everything I told you about myself is true, nothing exciting here!”
Milo smiled and shook his head. “Sure, you’ve only been conning people since you were a baby.”
Miguel flashed a smile. “That much was true. Everything else… well, Tulio’s never liked to talk about it.”
“If Tulio doesn’t want us to know, we’d understand,” Milo said.
“No, he said you’d hear the story, and you will,” Miguel said. “Besides, I already asked him again, and he still wants you to know. He’s right, that it doesn’t matter anymore.”
Milo and Audrey gave Miguel confused looks.
“You’ll understand once I explain,” Miguel said. “Audrey, do you know where Jaius is?”
“He’s already down at the pool, why?”
“Because Tulio wants him and you to hear the story, too.” Miguel stepped away. “I’m going to see Tulio now.”
“I’ll come with you,” Audrey said quickly. At Miguel’s look, she said with a grin, “I just want to see who wins.”
“A penny says I do,” Miguel said, matching her grin.
“You don’t even have a penny,” Audrey snorted. “Or pennies for the last three times you lost this same bet.”
Miguel shrugged. “I don’t plan on losing this one.”
“Neither do it. It’s a bet!”
Milo shook his head at them. Miguel grinned as he and Audrey stepped onto the lift.
His humor faded as they lowered into the pool’s chamber. In moments, the dark shaft was replaced by the pale blue light of the pool, which had been named the Pool of Tears by Kida and Milo.
Given how many tears had been shed in the chamber, Miguel thought it was a fitting name.
Miguel took a deep breath and tried to not shiver. The air was cold and heavy, and Miguel sincerely hoped Tulio would be able to be moved soon.
Miguel was pulled from his thoughts when the lift settled at the bottom and he was confronted with Sweet.
“You should still be in bed,” Sweet said.
Miguel gave Audrey a look. “Did you teach him how to say that?”
“Eh, he picked up most of it just from listening to Milo scold you,” Audrey said. She said something to Sweet that made the man briefly smile before he responded. “Sweet said you can stay as long as you don’t faint again.”
“I didn’t faint,” Miguel said, widening his eyes comically.
“Miguel,” Audrey said, uncharacteristically solemn.
“Fine, I promise,” Miguel sighed.
Miguel was putting his first faint to shock of Tulio being revived, but he couldn’t really blame that for fainting on the following two days. After that time, Sweet had been a lot more firm in making sure Miguel got sleep.
“Wait, has Sweet been here since last night?” Miguel asked.
“Yeah, why?”
“Six hour shifts is the rule.” Miguel gave an over-the-top sigh. “How can Sweet expect me to follow his rules if he won’t?”
Smirking, Audrey translated. Sweet looked mildly offended, but mostly amused. Miguel nodded to them, then rounded Sweet. Again, his good humor faltered as he walked to the edge of the Pool and kneeled.
Tulio looked so peaceful laying on the ledge, still partially submerged. His eyes remained closed, but he was breathing easily. His wounds were gone, the scars hidden underneath the Atlantean robe.
Miguel took a moment, listening to his friend breathe. Tulio was healed, yes, but he’d spent the first four days in a coma. In the last three days, he’d woken occasionally, but he was often confused or distressed by the stone walls and ceiling. The Atlanteans guessed that the power of the Heart was helping Tulio sleep until he was fully recovered, so he wouldn’t reinjure himself.
“Has he woken up recently?” Miguel asked softly, his voice echoing.
“Briefly,” Jaius said, sitting a respectful distance away. “He seemed to know what was going on this time. We got him to eat some, and even got him on his feet for a bit.”
Miguel nodded, not trusting himself to speak past the lump in his throat.
“...and his leg?” Miguel asked, glancing to the side when Audrey sat beside him.
“Sweet was right,” Jaius said carefully.
Miguel closed his eyes and tried to match Tulio’s breathing.
“At least he’s still alive,” Miguel eventually whispered.
Miguel opened his eyes right as Tulio did.
“Tulio, you’re awake!” Miguel yelped joyfully.
“How can I sleep with the noise,” Tulio mumbled with a slight grin.
“Sorry,” Miguel said, though he was too grateful about Tulio being awake to be that sorry.
Tulio’s eyes briefly wandered the chamber before darting back to Miguel. While Miguel was relieved Tulio was lucid, his heart ached at the repressed fear in Tulio’s gaze.
“Have you told them?” Tulio asked slowly.
Miguel shook his head. “Maybe the tale should wait until we’re on the surface.”
Tulio’s shrug sent ripples through the Pool. “Now is good.”
“Tulio!”
Miguel turned at Milo’s call. He waved him and Kida over, then turned a weak smile to Tulio.
“I guess we might as well tell them.”
Tulio’s brows clenched. “Miguel, what’s wrong? Are you sick?”
“No… ” Miguel trailed off.
“It’s the Heart,” Audrey put in. At Miguel’s look, she said, “What? He’s going to find out one way or another.”
“We don’t know for sure yet,” Miguel argued.
“It would be some pretty strange coincidences if it wasn’t,” Milo pointed out.
Miguel sighed. Tulio’s brows furrowed deeper.
“What?” Tulio asked.
“So, you know the Heart has been healing you. Or, the Pool,” Milo faltered, pointing toward the Pool and vaguely over his shoulder. “Either way, the energy has to come from somewhere. Usually, the holder of the crystals provides what energy is needed, and it’s usually too small to really notice. But healing fatal injuries, and the following recovery, those need a lot more consistent energy. Energy you quickly ran out of. So it’s been sapping from whoever’s close to you. Or maybe the Pool. We’re not actually sure which.”
Tulio looked sharply amongst the group.
“We stay with you in shifts,” Milo hurried to reassure Tulio. “Nobody stays longer than six hours. Well, most of us.”
At Tulio’s raised eyebrow, Miguel grumbled, “Sweet stays longer than he should, too.”
“The first couple days required the most energy,” Kida supplied when Tulio’s eyes narrowed. “Once you were out of danger, the Heart didn’t need as much energy, just enough to hasten the healing process and keep your sleep restful.”
Tulio sighed and shifted. “...did Sweet tell you about my leg?”
“J-Jaius just did,” Miguel stammered. “I… it…”
“We’ll figure it out,” Tulio murmured.
For a moment, Miguel thought Tulio was going back to sleep. But Tulio only laid with his eyes closed for a moment before opening them again. With a determined frown, Tulio lifted his head and shoulders.
“Tulio!” Milo yelped, “You should keep resting.”
“I’m not tired,” Tulio grumbled. “Miguel, help me.”
Smiling slightly, Miguel helped Tulio sit up. Tulio shook his head and wearily reached up to push his sopping hair out of his face.
Sweet said something to Audrey, who translated, “Sweet said that if you want to get out of the Pool, he can carry you.”
Tulio made a face, which only made Miguel perk up. After days of Tulio being too out of it to understand anything going on, seeing him alert enough to be annoyed at everyone trying to take care of him was an immense relief.
“I’m not awake yet,” Tulio grumbled. “I feel like I’ve slept for a week.”
Miguel blinked, then opened his mouth, but Tulio interrupted him, flapping his hand at him.
“It was a joke, Miguel. I know I’ve been sleeping for a week.”
Miguel laughed, but it was a little forced. Tulio rubbed his neck, then tucked his hand into the robes over the scars.
“Where’s my clothes?” Tulio asked before Miguel could think of something to say.
Realizing Tulio was starting to shiver in the cool air, Miguel turned to where Tulio’s mended clothes had been set in preparation for him to be ready to leave. He found Jaius already holding out the clothes, along with a couple of towels.
“Thanks,” Tulio said.
He gave everyone a darting look, and Miguel gestured for them to turn around. Tulio didn’t like others seeing his scars. This usually included Miguel, but Tulio didn’t protest when Miguel helped him dry off, since he was still unsteady.
“Milo,” Tulio said while easing off the robe and looking everywhere but the fresh scars, “ Everyone except Sweet can understand Spanish, so someone’s going to have to translate for him. But before we start, you need to explain when we came from.”
“You mean ‘where,’ right?” Audrey asked.
“He means when,” Miguel said.
“Uh… is now the time?” Milo asked hesitantly.
“It is. If they don’t know -or won’t believe- that part, they’ll never believe the whole story,” Tulio said.
Everyone glanced at each other, confused. Milo nodded, then began hesitantly in English.
Predictably, the non-Atlantean’s voices reflected disbelief. Audrey glanced at Sweet, twirling one finger beside her head. Sweet, thankfully, only looked thoughtful. Kida and Jaius continued to look confused.
“So, you’re four hundred years old?” Kida asked.
Miguel shook his head. “No, twenty-five. Or something close.”
“But, Milo said…”
Jaius snapped his fingers. “That’s why you asked about time travel!”
“We did?” Tulio asked, brows furrowing.
“I did, shortly after we arrived,” Miguel explained. “You were sleeping. I was wondering if there would be a way for the Atlanteans to send us home.”
“...can they?”
Kida and Jaius glanced at each other, then shrugged.
“Much knowledge of the power of the crystals and Heart have been lost for centuries,” Kida explained. “And while I’ve learned some things since bonding with the Heart, time travel isn’t one of them.”
Tulio shrugged. “We didn’t have a whole lot waiting for us, anyway.”
“How did you-” Audrey flailed her hands, clearly stuck between disbelief and wanting to not think the trio was crazy, “Come here? To this time?”
“We fell into a glowing pool,” Miguel said, shrugging. “We know as much as you do about that.”
Audrey shook her head.
“Hey, Audrey,” Tulio said, his tone wry, “You saw me come back from the dead. Traveling forward in time isn’t the same, but… well, magic exists.”
Audrey snorted, but didn’t argue any further. Sweet seemed accepting, or at least willing to hear the rest of the story.
“Do you want me to tell them?” Miguel asked as Tulio sat cross-legged beside the Pool, now in his own clothes.
“No.” Tulio’s eyes closed, but his voice was strong. “I’ll tell them. Come on, everyone.”
Everyone slowly settled on the floor, sitting in a half circle around Miguel and Tulio.
“The best place I can figure out to start at is that my grandfather was Henry the Fourth of Castile,” Tulio said.
Tulio paused while Milo translated for Sweet. Milo trailed off as he turned slowly back to Tulio. At the same time, disbelief returned to Audrey’s face.
“You’re joking,” Audrey said.
“Yes, Audrey, I kept you in suspense to joke about my family,” Tulio said drily.
“That’s ridiculous, though,” Audrey said uncertainly.
“You’re a prince!” Milo yelped excitedly.
“Technically,” Tulio said. He opened his eyes. “But I doubt I’m in any history books.”
Milo’s excitement faltered. Jaius, looking confused, translated what was being said to Sweet. Sweet’s brows rose.
“My pa was King Henry’s illegitimate child,” Tulio said. “King Henry never claimed Pa as his son, but there was enough evidence to prove it. Pa said King Henry probably never claimed him because there was already enough debate over his daughter Joanna or his half-sister Isabella being his successor.”
“Pa and his mom were thrown out,” Tulio went on. “For some time, Grandmother tried to get King Henry to claim Pa as his son, but, well… it didn’t work. They were homeless and traveled for a time, and eventually ended up working in the house of Aunt Isabella’s family.”
Audrey looked like she wanted to ask something, but Milo frantically waved at her to be silent. Miguel nodded in agreement. The story had just begun.
The corner of Tulio’s mouth lifted up. “Most likely, Aunt Isabella’s father wanted to keep them close, since they were another way to discredit King Henry and increase the chances of Aunt Isabella becoming his successor. After Aunt Isabella’s father died, though, her mother didn’t take much interest in Pa and Grandmother.”
“Pa wasn’t much younger than Aunt Isabella… they were very close, and grew closer over the years. Pa never wanted to become king, and eventually, Grandmother gave up trying. Pa was well-educated, growing up with Aunt Isabella, and often advised her when she later became queen. She always sought advice from Pa and… and Pero.”
Tulio’s eyebrows creased. “Pero was a third son of a lesser noble, and he met Pa and Aunt Isabella when Aunt Isabella’s family was moved to Segovia. He didn’t have much in his future, and sought knightship. He was another close friend of Pa’s, and the two of them decided to become knights so they could protect Aunt Isabella.”
Tulio stopped and didn’t say anything for a long time. Just as his audience started shifting like they thought the tale was over, Tulio opened his eyes.
“I’m ready to get out of here,” Tulio whispered.
“The Atlanteans are finishing up cleaning and repairing some flying fish to take us all to the surface,” Miguel said, instantly understanding what Tulio wanted. “Would you feel better outside the Pool’s chamber until then?”
Tulio nodded mutely. Milo spoke quickly to Sweet, and everyone backed off while the bigger man leaned forward. Tulio shook his head.
“I’m walking,” Tulio said.
“But…” Miguel looked at Tulio’s legs.
“Sweet said it’d be best to start slow, so I will,” Tulio said. “Just to the lift. Then we can sit on one of the benches outside.”
Miguel hesitated uncertainly, but when Milo translated, Sweet nodded. Tulio was already sitting up on his own, anyway, so Miguel took one of Tulio’s arms while Sweet took the other. The two of them gently helped Tulio rise to his feet, then stood balancing Tulio between them.
“This feels so wrong,” Tulio said dully.
“At least you’re upright,” Miguel said, unable to form a joke.
Everyone’s gazes moved down as soon as Tulio was upright. Though Tulio was steadily straightening his body with Miguel and Sweet’s help, his right foot dangled three inches off the ground and was turned slightly inward.
The Heart’s healing had been complete, but imperfect. The bones in Tulio’s leg and foot had been shattered after taking a fair amount of impact when Tulio had fallen from the balloon. The Heart had fused all the bones together instantly. He had no pain and the muscles worked fine, but the leg had healed to be shorter than the left.
Miguel knew the healing had been a lot more complete on Tulio’s side, since Sweet and Kida had done most of the initial fixing there. Though, according to Audrey, Sweet had already commented a couple times that at least Tulio didn’t really need his appendix.
“Sweet wants to know if you can straighten your foot,” Audrey asked.
“Can’t really move my ankle,” Tulio muttered.
Miguel watched Tulio twitch his foot. He got the foot pointed in the right direction, but the trembling showed the effort it took to hold the foot in position. Milo and Sweet talked back-and-forth for a bit.
“Sweet thinks some of your ankle bones might be fused together,” Milo said. “He’ll know more once you’re on the surface and can get an X-ray.”
“Aren’t you coming?” Tulio asked at the same time Miguel asked, “What’s an X-ray?”
“I’ll go out with you, just… not for long,” Milo answered Tulio hesitantly. He smiled brightly. “But the scouts have found an easy passage to get in and out of the city. We’d planned to get you outside as soon as we could, and I’ll join a second expedition outside soon after for a longer visit on the surface.”
Miguel looked away. Of course Milo would want to stay in the city. But Tulio needed to get to the surface again, and Miguel wasn’t sure Tulio would be able to bring himself to visit the city himself. He was trying to accept that their friend -so close to them both, despite it being only a few weeks since they’d met- would be unreachable.
“Audrey’s already said you can stay with her family,” Milo went on when neither Spaniard responded. “At least until you can find your own place, since you’ll have plenty of gold to support yourself.”
Predictably, Tulio perked up. “Gold?”
Miguel laughed. “Yes, Tulio. It turns out Atlantis has a ton of gold, but it was useless to them down here, so it was forgotten about for centuries.”
“Who forgets gold?” Tulio asked under his breath. He looked again at Milo. “When do we leave?”
“Tomorrow,” Milo said. “As long as you’re feeling up to it.”
“The sooner I can see the sun, the better,” Tulio said with a sigh. “So? Are we moving or what?”
Tulio was nonchalant, but he would’ve fallen at the first step if it hadn’t been for Sweet. He jerked his bad leg up, staring at his bare foot like it had insulted him.
Miguel bit his lip, then whispered,
“Go on, try again.”
It took a few halting steps before Miguel realized he had to loosen his grip on Tulio. With the extra movement, Tulio was able to move a little more steadily. His gait looked awkward, his body lurching sideways every other step.
“Special shoes,” Milo said suddenly.
Everyone stopped to look at him.
“We can make a special shoe,” Milo explained. “A shoe with a thicker sole. I think it… well, I don’t know why it wouldn’t work.”
“It would at least put my feet at the same level,” Tulio grunted.
Miguel squeezed Tulio’s arm briefly. He knew how much Tulio hated to even appear helpless. Watching Tulio’s awkward steps, Miguel’s throat tightened at another thought.
Would Tulio ever be able to
run
again?
Miguel didn’t dare voice his thoughts. If Tulio hadn’t already asked that question of himself… well, Miguel wasn’t going to be the one to suggest it.
Tulio was clearly exhausted by the time they reached the lift. He leaned more heavily on Miguel as the lift carried them to the throne room, and he barely glanced around the room.
Miguel and Sweet got Tulio sitting down. Tulio leaned against the table, panting from the effort. When the others emerged from the lift a few minutes later, Tulio hadn’t caught his breath.
Miguel was about to suggest finding another way to get Tulio down the slope, when the rather obvious answer came skidding up to them with squeals to tell everyone just how offended Altivo was about being left behind. Miguel absently reached up, but Altivo thrust him aside with his nose so he could sniff Tulio over.
Tulio snorted. “Miguel, when are you going to tell the horse that he’s not a dog?”
Altivo snorted and stepped back. He stepped importantly around the bench. Tulio shook his head, then glanced around.
“Everyone who wants to hear more of the story, sit down,” Tulio said.
Milo’s brows creased. “Is now a good time? If you’re tired, you can keep resting some more.”
“I’m tired, but sleep won’t help this,” Tulio said wrily.
“You can’t catch your breath if you’re talking,” Kida pointed out with a smile.
“Oh, hush, all of you, or else I’m not finishing.”
Everyone hurriedly found a seat on benches and tables. Altivo settled himself at Tulio’s feet like a dog.
Tulio fingered the crystal around his neck as he restarted, “Pa married Ma not long after Aunt Isabella married Uncle Ferdinand, and soon after, both couples had children. Myself, of course, and my cousin, Alexos, who everyone called Alex. I have no siblings, but Alex’s sister, Talesa, was born two years later.”
“We grew up as close as siblings. Alex and I were known as the twin terrors. We were forever sneaking into the kitchens for snacks or the armory to try on armor or the war room to study the maps. We got in trouble with our parents almost daily, but the servants and knights would only laugh.”
“Tali -that was our nickname for Talesa- was following us as soon as she could crawl. But she never got in trouble.” Tulio smiled, his eyes fixed on a far point. “No, she took to scolding us like our parents. She became our little nurse, too, as our constant scrapes distressed her. The servants called her ‘little mother.’”
“When Alex became old enough to begin his lessons, I studied alongside him. The tutors always said that they preferred to have me in the room, where they could keep an eye on me as well. I had a habit of trying to ‘rescue’ my cousin from lessons, you see.”
The amusing story brought smiles to the listeners’ faces, including Miguel’s. But Tulio’s face remained solemn.
“By the time I was born, Pa’s relation to King Henry had been all but forgotten. Grandmother’s few supporters had long since moved onto other claims. So Pa was… to most people inside and outside the court, a peasant who had somehow worked his way into the knights and as a close advisor. To most people… but not my Aunt Isabella.”
“I found out, much later, that Aunt Isabella had set me as third in line for the throne.”
Tulio said this very casually, and he didn’t pause in his narrative. Everyone quickly silenced their shocked murmurs to keep listening.
“It was a very close-guarded secret. As far as I know, only Pa, Ma, and Pero knew, outside of Aunt Isabella and Uncle Ferdinand.”
“We had a happy life.” Tulio’s voice cracked here. “Ma took us to the theater and Grandmother told us stories. Pa and Pero taught us sword-fighting. I pledged that I would be the best knight in the castle, so I’d always be able to defend Alex.”
Tulio got quiet again. His head tilted back, then his eyes squeezed shut.
Knowing what was coming next, Miguel glanced at the others. Tulio had their rapt attention, and they seemed to barely be breathing.
“We need another breather,” Miguel murmured.
Tulio twitched and blinked his eyes open. For a few seconds, his eyes were blank until he blinked again.
“Do you want to finish somewhere more comfortable?” Miguel suggested. Tulio still looked a little blank. “Jaius set up beds for us in his house.”
Tulio looked relieved at the suggestion of a break. He nodded and started to stand.
“Ride on Altivo,” Miguel urged as Milo told Sweet the change in plans.
Tulio mounted Altivo, then held on while the stallion lurched to his hooves. Everyone else stood hurriedly. Jaius darted to the closed doors and opened them enough to peek outside, then turned back with a grin.
Tulio was suspicious. “What’s out there?”
“Atlantis,” Jaius said, then thrust the doors fully open.
Cheers filled the room. Tulio rocked back, narrowly catching his balance. Miguel rolled his eyes, equally amused and exasperated that the people couldn’t wait any longer.
“What is this?” Tulio asked, too caught off-guard to mask his shock.
“We had our parade a few days ago,” Miguel explained, taking Altivo’s halter. “Now it’s your turn.”
“Parade?”
“Thanks for saving the city,” Kida explained. She stepped closer. “Sunzu and Salus must have told the people that you were recovered. If it’s too much, I’ll ask them to leave.”
Miguel waited while Tulio thought. Generally, Tulio didn’t like so many eyes on him unless he and Miguel were in the midst of a distraction. But after El Dorado, both of them had gained an appreciation of parades. After all, people shouting your praises was many times better than them yelling about the money they’d been conned out of.
“It’s fine,” Tulio said.
Altivo tossed his head, and Miguel let him have it. He stood back with a grin as Altivo pranced out of the throne room. The Atlanteans cheered and Tulio sat up straight. His hands remained clenched around the reins and Altivo’s mane. Miguel and Sweet walked on either side of Altivo, watching Tulio.
When Tulio’s head began to droop midway down the slope, Sweet spoke quietly to Kida. Kida waved for Sunzu and Salus, and the three of them scattered. The Atlanteans had probably been warned ahead of time, because the procession halted almost immediately. Tulio’s audience left the crowd behind, though the Atlanteans’ voices followed them as Altivo headed further down the path.
A small half-smile remained on Tulio’s face. Miguel was relieved that the respite had cheered Tulio. He almost suggested Tulio leave the rest of the story untold, but Tulio, as if suspecting Miguel’s thought, lifted his chin.
“The tale isn’t over yet,” Tulio said stubbornly.
“Let’s go inside first,” Jaius said.
Tulio slid off of Altivo’s back. He staggered, clearly forgetting about his leg, and would have fallen if Miguel hadn’t caught his arm.
“Easy,” Miguel murmured.
Miguel and Sweet helped Tulio inside Jaius’ house, then sat him on Miguel’s unmade bed. He was clearly tired, as he didn’t resist the pillows being piled behind him so he could recline comfortably or the blankets draped across his lap.
“Ready?” Miguel asked.
Tulio hummed quietly. “Yes.”
Miguel nodded to the others, and everyone sat on the benches or floor. Their attention was unwavering, but a solemn air had settled on everyone. They all knew the worst part of Tulio’s tale had yet to begin.
Tulio jumped right into the tale. “It was my twelfth birthday. We were celebrating in the tower, one of my favorite places, when there was… there was shouting and fire. Someone yelled that the bridge was being overrun.”
“Uncle Ferdinand and Pero ran, telling our mothers to take us somewhere safe. I had my new sword, a gift from Pa, but Alex’s sword was still in the armory. I wanted to join Pa and the knights. Pa told me to protect my mother, aunt, and cousins. Then he left and… and I never saw him again.”
Miguel squeezed Tulio’s hand. Tulio swallowed hard and resolutely continued.
“The castle defenses had already been breached. Clearly, everything had been planned well in advance. They were the soldiers and nobles who had resisted Aunt Isabella taking the throne, and they had all banded together. They wanted her off the throne and her heirs out of the way… permanently.”
“We sought refuge in one of the inner rooms, where there were no windows and doors could be barred. We expected to only have to wait for the castle’s soldiers to prevail against the invaders. But every corner we turned, there was fighting. There wasn’t any place safe in the castle, not anymore. Apparently more of Aunt Isabella’s soldiers were loyal to other nobles than she’d realized.”
“There were a few secret tunnels within the castle. Alex and I knew them all, of course. When it became clear we would have to leave the castle, the closest tunnel was in the ballroom. As we drew close, we heard shouts. I told Alex to stay with our mothers and Tali while I investigated from the balcony.”
Tulio was quiet for a long moment.
“I saw the soldiers first. Bernal and Millan. They had drilled with Alex and I just the day before. They were the strongest of the soldiers, but Aunt Isabella and Uncle Ferdinand trusted them to take care of us as much as they trusted Bernal and Millan to stand guard at the throne room.”
“...the attackers had overwhelmed them. A dozen soldiers stood against Uncle Ferdinand. The largest of the soldiers, a mountain of a man with a battleaxe, disarmed Uncle Ferdinand. Demanded that Uncle Ferdinand kneel.”
“‘I will not die on my knees before a coward,’” Tulio said, his voice ringing boldly in the room. Then it broke and became so quiet it was barely audible. “And so he died on his feet, with his chin held high.”
Tulio’s words stuttered, but he pushed onward, his voice low enough that everyone leaned closer.
“I didn’t tell the others what I’d seen… I think Ma and Aunt Isabella knew, though. I led them out another way, and we fled the castle to the cottage where Grandmother lived. It was more than a cottage; she had land and soldiers loyal to her and her family. This included Aunt Isabella’s family, so we sought refuge there. I stood at the door of the house, ready to defend my family.”
Tulio’s breath trembled. His grip on Miguel’s hand was so tight that his knuckles were white.
“Grandmother’s soldiers were strong and loyal, but few. Fires were built in front of all of the land’s exits, so… so nobody could escape.”
“In my dreams,” Tulio said, his voice haunted, “I can still hear their shouts. ‘Burn them out! No survivors to rise against us!’ ‘Find the children!’ I can hear Grandmother and Aunt Isabella pleading for our lives. Their silence is heavier, though. And then Ma…”
“I couldn’t let her face the soldiers alone. I left Alex and Tali hidden in the cellar while I ran to protect Ma. The soldier with the axe was there. I unsheathed my sword and ran at him. I remember Ma screaming, the soldier batting away my sword like it was a toy, how the firelight reflected on his axe when he raised it.”
Tulio closed his eyes and was quiet for a long moment. He trembled once, then wiped his eyes and kept talking.
“The next thing I knew, I was on the floor. I was bleeding and pinned by a burning timber across my stomach. The soldier with the axe was gone and… and so was Ma.”
“Then… then I heard Tali screaming. Alex yelling. I’d never heard him so scared before. I could barely move, but I turned as well as I could and…” Tulio gripped the blanket in a white-knuckle grip. “She was only nine , and still the soldier, he…”
Tulio’s head dropped back against the pillows, tears spilling freely down his cheeks. Miguel squeezed his hand, knowing nothing could soften the painful memories.
“I should’ve died that night,” Tulio eventually whispered. “I didn’t expect to wake up, but I did. I woke up to Grandmother’s quilt covering my face and, when I got it off, to the stone ceiling of the family crypt.”
A low, sort of keen came from deep in Tulio’s throat. His eyes squeezed shut, this memory finally too much after everything he’d just relived.
“That’s enough,” Miguel whispered, his own voice choked.
“Pero,” Tulio whispered, his voice dazed.
“There’s no Pero here,” Miguel soothed. “You rest now, Tulio.”
“Pero,” Tulio murmured with a raspy inhale, “The traitorous snake, he declaimed his loyalty to Uncle Ferdinand to save his skin… he saved my life… came to the crypt in the night… told me to be quiet… my family was dead, but I… I’d live… I was… grateful, but Pero, he… he wanted a puppet ruler… won’t…”
Tulio’s grip on the blanket slackened as his breathing evened out. Exhausted by the tale, Tulio fell asleep. Miguel watched him, hoping the crystal would help his sleep remain peaceful.
When Tulio seemed deep in sleep, Miguel looked at the others. Tears were spilling from everyone’s eyes. Most of them looked horrified.
“Pero saved Tulio’s life, but he’d saved himself by pledging his loyalty to the usurpers…” Miguel said slowly, clarifying the last part of the story. “When he found Tulio had survived the attack, he had the children laid in the crypt and publicly agreed to the usurpers’ story that they’d been killed by accident in the takeover. Secretly, he treated Tulio, intending to spirit him away once Tulio was healthy enough. Then, once Tulio was grown, he’d intended to present him as a challenger to whoever was sitting on the throne at the time, elevating his own status by being Tulio’s right-hand man.”
“Tulio heard Pero’s plan one night… not wanting to be involved in Pero’s plan -or any sort of politics again- he snuck off. I don’t know how long he traveled before he reached the town that I’d lived in at the time. I found him one night, half-dead from an infection in his wounds, and, well…” Miguel shrugged as he wiped his eyes. “The rest is history. Any questions?”
Everyone just stared at him. Undoubtedly they had many questions, but where to start was the first one, Miguel guessed.
Unsurprisingly, the Atlanteans looked the most confused. After living eight thousand years in peaceful harmony with each other, Miguel wouldn’t have been surprised if the very concept of a coup was entirely foreign to them. Sweet and Audrey looked thoughtful, and Milo’s expression was mournful.
“How did you find out?” Milo eventually asked.
“He couldn’t really hide it,” Miguel said. “His clothes were rich, so I knew he was nobility right away. Plus he was always hiding from the soldiers. I’d heard about the coup, and guessed Tulio had escaped from the fighting. I got the full story bit by bit over the following weeks.”
Jaius translated for Sweet. Sweet said something that made Milo nod.
“He’s lucky you found him,” Milo said. “Most people would’ve turned him over to the soldiers.”
Miguel shrugged. “We were both just kids who wanted to be left alone. We left town as soon as Tulio was able to travel, and we just… kept moving. I don’t know when Pero stopped hunting for Tulio. We spent a lot of time outside of towns, where we wouldn’t be found, so I never heard news about what happened to Pero. It’s just as well, for Tulio’s sake.”
Everyone again looked at Tulio. The crystal was glowing and Tulio thankfully looked like he was sleeping peacefully.
“Has he been reliving those days every night?” Kida asked after a moment.
Miguel nodded grimly. Kida stood abruptly.
“Now that Tulio’s healed enough to move,” Kida said in explanation, “I’ll see to it that your group will be able to head to the surface in the morning.”
Miguel smiled his thanks. Kida left, and the others were quick to follow. Miguel remained where he was. If Tulio woke up again before it was time to leave, Miguel didn’t want him to wake up alone.
Tulio woke up to the sound of excited chatter. He blinked his eyes open, then frowned at the stone ceiling.
“Tulio?”
Tulio turned his head toward Miguel’s voice. Miguel and Jaius were watching him, both looking a little worried.
“I’m fine,” Tulio said, sitting up to prove it. He looked down, a little surprised. “Better than fine, actually. I feel great.”
“The crystal,” Jaius guessed.
Tulio shrugged, not elaborating that a dreamless sleep was probably the main reason. He glanced toward the door, where he could hear a lot of activity.
“Your timing is perfect,” Miguel said, standing. “Everyone’s loading up the last of our supplies so we can leave.”
“Finally,” Tulio grumbled, tossing the blankets aside.
Ladron tumbled out of the blankets. The armadillo unrolled and blinked sleepily at Tulio.
“Jaius, go see if Altivo’s still outside,” Miguel requested.
Jaius nodded and headed out of the house, scooping up Ladron as he went. Miguel helped Tulio with his jacket and shoes, then shook his head when Tulio started to rise.
“Wait until Jaius gets back, and we’ll both help you,” Miguel said.
“How did you get so bossy?” Tulio asked with a snort.
“You’ve only just gotten healed. The last thing you need to do is fall and hit your head again.”
Miguel gave the warning with a theatrical amount of sternness, but his eyes held very real worry. Tulio stayed put.
Jaius returned a moment later. “Altivo’s ready.”
Tulio accepted the pair’s help. While the sole of his right shoe had been thickened with a piece of wood attached to the bottom, Tulio’s bad foot was still slightly off the ground as well as turned inward. Walking was awkward and unsteady, so Tulio was only too happy to mount Altivo. Once Tulio was steady, Miguel and Jaius mounted as well, and Altivo loped toward the sound of voices.
Tulio looked around. The city was brighter, lit by the Heart floating overhead. Structures had been cleaned, moss and vines heaped outside of homes. When he looked down the slope, Tulio saw the city had doubled in size after many of the lakes had drained to reveal more buildings.
“ It’s already changed so much,” Tulio said in surprise.
“It’s because of the expedition,” Jaius said. “Kida’s agreed to take a scouting party to the surface along with your group. The change has motivated the people to clean the city.”
“And Milo’s been searching for murals,” Miguel added.
Jauis laughed. “That is also true. He’s teaching us so much already.”
Tulio smiled, but lowered his head. He remembered that Milo was planning to stay behind in the city.
As they approached the stone plaza, Tulio saw a new bridge had already been stretched across the chasm. Several flying fish were gathered, as well as a massive shark. The crew’s submersibles were just being loaded into the shark.
At Tulio’s confused look, Miguel explained, “Sweet is predicting we’ll have to travel some way to meet up with the ship. Once we’re on the surface, we’ll use our vehicles. There’s no sense in too many people seeing the Atlantean fish yet, after all.”
Tulio nodded at the sense of it.
“Tulio!”
Audrey’s excited yell made Tulio smile. She rushed out of the shark, waving. The crew and Atlanteans in hearing looked over and cheered.
“That’s a bit much, isn’t it?” Tulio asked, feeling a little awkward.
“Not at all. You saved Kida, the Heart, and the city,” Jauis said.
“You almost got a second parade,” Miguel added.
Milo ran out of the smallest submersible -the very one the threesome had used, actually- with a huge grin on his face. He ran over as Altivo stopped.
“Tulio! How do you feel?” Milo asked, his expression worried.
“Much better, but ready to be out of here,” Tulio said. He glanced back at Jaius. “No offense.”
“None taken,” Jaius chuckled. He jumped to the ground and gave Milo a mischievous look. “Are you ready to show Tulio the surprise?”
“I think I’m done with surprises for the next ten years,” Tulio said, only half-joking.
“This is a good surprise, I promise,” Milo said. He looked over at a call from Sweet. “And once we’re done, everyone’s ready to head to the surface.”
“Finally!”
Tulio held on while Altivo lowered himself to the ground, then slid off. Miguel and Jaius helped him toward their submersible.
“Are we riding this to the surface?” Tulio asked with a wince.
“It won’t take long,” Milo promised. “And Jaius and I will ride with you to the shore as well. Kida, Salus, and Sunzu are going to carry it.”
The three Atlanteans were working nearby, attaching chains to the submersible and their flying fish. Kida smiled and waved as they passed.
“In here,” Milo said, ducking into the submersible.
“This thing holds a lot of memories,” Tulio said drily. He waved off Milo’s concerned look. “Could be worse, but I could’ve never predicted…”
Tulio trailed off, staring past Milo. The scholar grinned, then shifted aside.
“I’m definitely still asleep, right?” Tulio asked everyone in general.
“What makes you say that?” Miguel asked with an amused grin.
“Because there’s gold in the hold.”
And not just a little bit of gold. A waist-high heap of golden plates, goblets, decorative spears, vases, and even golden coins were spilling over each other in the hold.
“That’s our share,” Miguel said.
Tulio looked quickly at him. “Our share ?”
Miguel laughed. “It turns out Atlantis was full of treasures after all! They’d just been forgotten in the lake beds!”
“How do you forget gold?” Tulio asked, looking at Jaius.
Jaius, looking amused, shrugged. “It was too soft of metal to use, so we think they were set aside in a place that later became a lake. Even now, gold serves us no purpose, but a way to repay everyone for their help. I’m told gold is very important on the surface.”
“That’s an understatement,” Tulio said, his eyes drawn back to the gold.
Tulio could’ve kept staring at the gold, but Audrey poked her head in and said that everyone was ready to go. The thought of getting to the surface instantly pulled Tulio’s attention from the gold.
“Well, what are we waiting for? Let’s go!”
Notes:
About half of Tulio's story is actually historically accurate, primarily in the beginning and how much debate there was over the throne.
Up next is an epilogue/teaser! It'll take place after a time lapse!
I mainly mention this because while it's mentioned how the reunion went with Mr. Whitmore, having the actual reunion didn't seem to work with either chapter, but I'm thinking of a bonus chapter for the reunion and maybe more details of the days immediately afterward.
Anyway, until next Thursday!
Chapter 23: Epilogue: To Xibalba
Notes:
Well. Here it is, the final chapter of this leg of the journey!
Before I start, I'd like to give a special thanks to Anomaly, the person who first asked what would happen if Milo, Miguel, and Tulio went on an adventure together. Kudos and cookies to Xie for being my rubber duck to bounce plot of off so many times. Next up is AlicornGem88 and PenDragon_Pie, who's reviews have delighted me and inspired more than a few bonus scenes throughout this story. And finally, many thanks for all the people who's also reviewed, left kudos, or just plain read! You all have been great during this two-year project, and I look forward to the next one~
Now, without further ado-
Wait, a couple more ados, because this fic takes place a year after the final chapter. The events of the second Atlantis movie have already passed, so Atlantis is currently on the surface and Tulio briefly references one of the events from the movie. This chapter functions as both an epilogue and teaser for the next story, so let's goooo!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Tulio didn’t notice the silence until Altivo stopped. He looked ahead through the trees, feeling Miguel shift in his spot behind him.
The jungle looked exactly the same in all directions: trees, vines, and a lot more trees. Meandering paths of wildlife led through the brush, disappearing as randomly as they appeared. Altivo himself had been plowing a new trail when he’d halted.
“What do you think?” Tulio asked Miguel.
Paper rustled as Miguel checked their hand-drawn map. Tulio nudged Altivo into motion again, knowing their map was hardly the most accurate. The original had, after all, been only vague directions and landmarks, and their current map had been drawn from his and Miguel’s memory. He glanced back.
Milo, Kida, Jaius, Audrey, and Mr. Whitmore were all following on their own mounts, while a half dozen pack horses followed in a line. Sweet, riding a massive horse suiting the larger man, tailed the expedition. All were silent, having been signalled for silence many times since setting out at dawn two hours before.
Milo, meeting Tulio’s eye, pushed his mount to join them. Even though the expedition had been two weeks on horseback, Milo was still a little awkward in the saddle. His mount, a steady mare named Sylves, only twitched her ears when Milo had to resettle himself again.
“Does anything look familiar?” Milo asked.
“It’s been four hundred years,” Tulio said, shaking his head. “Nothing looks familiar.”
“All of the landmarks have been here,” Miguel said, face buried in the map. He looked up and pointed across a ditch. “That ridge, we need to get to the top.”
Tulio craned his neck to check the map. “Why?”
“It looks right,” Miguel said with a mischievous grin. “Altivo, go!”
Tulio quickly turned back around as Altivo leaped forward. There were yelps of protest from the others as Altivo slid down the muddy slope, then plunged through the brush on the far side. As nimble as a mountain goat, Altivo bounded up the hillside of uneven stone. He stopped at the top, and Tulio glanced down.
Kida and Jaius were helping Milo find the best way down the first slope. Audrey and Mr. Whitmore’s mounts were picking their way through the brush, and Sweet was pushing the pack animals down the ditch to where the hillside was less steep.
“Tulio,” Miguel whispered.
Tulio looked at Miguel and, finding his gaze on the far side of the ridge, turned in the other direction. He blinked.
“Well,” Tulio muttered, unconsciously reverting back to Spanish, “What do you know?”
“El Dorado,” Miguel said gleefully. He waved a hand at their companions and raised his voice. “Come on, it’s right here!”
Altivo snorted and stomped. Tulio glanced down, confused by Altivo’s restlessness, then back to the far side of the ridge.
Tulio remembered stumbling along this ridge in a heavy fog, but today the sky was clear enough to see how the ground fell sharply away just ahead of Altivo’s hooves. At the base of the drop was a small valley of dirt and scattered stone. On the far edge of the clearing was a waterfall, cascading into a narrow river that flowed along the edge of the valley.
Audrey and Mr. Whitmore joined them. Audrey looked eagerly into the valley, then frowned.
“I told you to not eat those mushrooms, Miguel,” Audrey snorted. “You’re seeing things.”
Mr. Whitmore didn’t comment right off. Tulio watched him study the valley.
Mr. Whitmore liked to play the part of an eccentric old man, but Tulio and Miguel had been living at his mansion for the last year. Tulio knew him well enough by now to know he accepted Miguel’s word, and was looking for the explanation himself. After all, Mr. Whitmore was well aware of the pair’s dramatic reveals.
Tulio wouldn’t ever forget their first meeting with Mr. Whitmore. Alone, leg in a cast, and leaning over the railing of his huge ship, the little man had voiced his disapproval of the crew for nearly an hour, all the while refusing to allow the crew on board. Tulio, trying to rest in the Aqua-Evac’s hold, had gone outside with Miguel’s help to investigate why the Aqua-Evac wasn’t moving and had listened to Mr. Whitmore’s tirade for five minutes before going to Audrey for an explanation. Once Audrey had explained who Mr. Whitmore was -and how everyone had thought he was dead - Tulio had drily suggested that someone either fetch Milo or find a picture that proved Milo had survived the expedition safe and sound.
Luckily, Milo and the crew’s Atlantean guides hadn’t ventured far from the volcano tube the crew had used to escape to the surface. Using a radio Audrey had rigged together before leaving Atlantis, Milo had been called. Mr. Whitmore had gotten his first look at the flying fish, and remembering Mr. Whitmore’s wide-eyed expression still made Tulio smile.
“It’s there, isn’t it?” Mr. Whitmore asked, bringing Tulio’s mind back to the present.
Tulio shrugged as he looked for a way for Altivo to descend. “Unreachable, but yes.”
“It’s strange that the mural is gone,” Miguel said.
“Mural?” Audrey repeated.
“The carving of El Dorado’s gods,” Miguel explained. “Chief Tanni always said that as long as El Dorado stood, so would the marker.”
“We blocked their only way in and out of the city,” Tulio pointed out. “There’s no way for them to repair it.”
If this was the entrance to El Dorado. They could be in the completely wrong area, after all.
“So how are we going to get inside?” Audrey asked.
Tulio smiled at her impatience. “Wasn’t the expedition to find the gate to El Dorado, not the city itself?”
Audrey made a face at Tulio as Milo and the Atlanteans joined them. Even Milo looked a little disappointed.
“This is the spot?” Milo asked.
“It should be,” Tulio said, turning his focus to finding a path for Altivo to take down the valley wall.
Sweet called out from his spot further east on the ridge. The pack horses had found a narrow pathway and were already descending into the valley, lured by the sounds of water. The rest of the crew turned their mounts to follow.
Tulio gazed around, letting Altivo have his head. He felt tense, his stomach twisted in knots. He knew Miguel was uneasy, too. Neither of them had been able to eat anything that morning, and even Miguel had been snapping at Milo for silence.
They were so close to where their journey began. Tulio didn’t know if the thought of entering El Dorado or finding the gateway impassable was more nerve-wracking. He reached up to squeeze the Atlantean crystal hanging around his neck, feeling the comforting pulse of warmth against his palm.
All too soon, the pathway leveled out. Tulio pulled Altivo to a halt halfway across the clearing, letting the other horses pass to join the pack horses and Sweet’s horse, Rosie, at the river. Tulio and Miguel stared silently at the waterfall.
“Think there’s still legends of us in the city?” Miguel asked after a moment.
Tulio didn’t answer. He swung himself off of Altivo’s back, landing on his left foot and balancing himself on Altivo’s side. He kept studying the waterfall until Sweet came over and held out Tulio’s cane.
“Thanks,” Tulio murmured.
The cane, like Mr. Whitmore’s, had been carved by Jaius and preserved by Kida with the method Milo had helped her recover from Atlantean history. Various Atlantean creatures and machines were carved into the dark wood. The handle of Tulio’s cane was a horse’s head and Mr. Whitmore’s cane sported a coelacanth head, and both had tiny sapphires for eyes.
Once Tulio had his cane and was standing on his own, Miguel turned Altivo away. The pair headed toward the waterfall.
“How’s the leg?” Sweet asked.
“It’s fine,” Tulio said.
Surgery hadn’t been an option in Tulio’s awkwardly healed leg, so his ankle had remained crooked. Walking too much sometimes pained him, but he’d spent most of the expedition on Altivo’s back.
Altivo picked his way through the river. He hesitated at the waterfall, then plunged through. Milo gave a little yelp of surprise that made Audrey laugh. Audrey tried to convince her horse into the water, but Nero balked.
Mr. Whitmore joined Tulio and Sweet, leaving his horse, Zeus, at the water. Contrary to his age and his own recently healed leg, Mr. Whitmore’s steps were sprightly. Mr. Whitmore often said the Atlantean crystal -gifted to him by Kida for his aid in discovering Atlantis- made him feel twenty years younger.
“So, Tulio, how’s it feel to be back?” Mr. Whitmore asked.
“I’ll let you know if Miguel finds an open gate,” Tulio said.
“You don’t think he will?” Sweet asked.
“We found the last landmark three days ago,” Tulio said, glancing at the waterfall. “It’s a big jungle.”
“Sounds like you don’t want to find El Dorado,” Sweet commented.
“I’m trying to not get my hopes up in case we can’t find the city of gold,” Tulio said drily. “We found El Dorado by accident last time, and we put a lot of effort -and gold- into hiding the city. Even if this is the right waterfall, there might not be a way inside.”
Mr. Whitmore gave Tulio a knowing look. “Yet here you are.”
“If we can’t find El Dorado, nobody will be able to,” Tulio pointed out. He frowned slightly. “It’s a big jungle, but with modern machines, I don’t think El Dorado could go unfound for much longer.”
A moment of silence passed. Tulio’s comment wasn’t anything new to the group. Milo had made the very same comment two months prior, and that’s what had prompted this journey.
“...Miguel’s been in there long enough,” Tulio eventually said. “I should go check on him.”
Tulio managed two steps before his cane slipped. He hurriedly caught himself, waving off Sweet.
“I’m fine, I just…” Tulio trailed off.
Tulio dropped to his knees and brushed his hand across the space his foot had skidded. Sharp ridges emerged in the dirt. Another few swipes of his hand, and Tulio had uncovered half of a face carved into stone.
A very familiar face.
“This is it,” Tulio muttered. Then, louder, “This is it!”
By then, everyone else aside from Miguel had joined them. With everyone’s efforts, the carving of El Dorado’s two gods on their horse was uncovered.
“Is this-” Milo started.
Tulio mutely nodded. Milo scrambled to his feet, saying he had to get his camera.
Tulio stared at the mural, then turned to Mr. Whitmore. “Can you really protect the city like you have the Atlanteans?”
“You know I don’t make promises I can’t keep, Tulio,” Mr. Whitmore said with a chuckle. “Amazing what can be hidden with enough money and contacts. The people of El Dorado will be safe.”
“Tulio!”
Everyone jumped at Miguel’s yell. Tulio twisted in time to see Altivo burst through the waterfall. The others scattered as Altivo galloped up, skidding to a halt beside Tulio. Miguel thrust out a dripping hand. Tulio grabbed it without hesitation and swung up onto Altivo’s back, cane slipping from his hands.
“Woah, Miguel!” Audrey yelled. “Where’s the fire?”
Miguel didn’t answer. He yanked Altivo around and dug his heels in. Altivo leaped forward with a squeal. Tulio could only grab onto Miguel and duck his head when Altivo raced through the waterfall.
Tulio lifted his head, blinking water out of his eyes. Unsurprisingly, they were in a tunnel behind the waterfall.
But the rubble from the collapse was gone. Stones -possibly bricks, though Altivo was moving too fast for Tulio to be sure- were stacked in a wall Altivo easily cleared. Beyond the wall, the riverbed was dry.
“Miguel,” Tulio said tersely.
“Just wait,” Miguel interrupted.
Altivo’s path was barely lit by Tulio and Miguel’s crystals, which had begun to glow as sunlight was left behind. Gradually, the tunnel lightened, then Altivo turned a corner to bright sunlight. Tulio squinted, feeling Altivo slow. As Tulio blinked his eyes back into focus, Altivo stopped. Tulio’s mouth fell open.
The water reservoir, shaped like a giant cup, was the first thing Tulio saw. He remembered vividly the sight of the reservoir toppling toward their ship during the escape from El Dorado. It must have been too heavy or awkward to move, as it was still laying beside the entrance.
Tulio’s gaze moved slowly toward the city. He remembered, even more vividly, his first sight of El Dorado. Buildings and streets of gold, of bright and cheerful patterns painted into walls, of golden vases and bowls holding shining baubles, of the very clothing worn by the people decorated with golden thread and gold beads. He remembered how the city had appeared to shine brighter than the sun.
Today, dull gray stone met them.
The canals were dry and dusty. The buildings seemed fewer now, and smaller. Or maybe the lack of extravagance made them feel smaller. Not a single person was in sight. The entire city felt… hollow.
Tulio and Miguel looked at each other, then Tulio kicked Altivo forward. The stallion leaped into a gallop with a snort. The city passed in a blur of gray. Tulio looked back to the cloud of dust Altivo was leaving in his wake.
Altivo slowed as he approached one of the larger buildings. The doorway was broad and tall, easily allowing Altivo into the room that had been Chief Tannabok’s meeting room.
The room was stark and bare. Drapes, rugs, pillows, and even furniture were gone. The windows opened to the empty, ugly city.
“What happened here?” Tulio whispered through the lump in his throat.
“I don’t…” Miguel pulled Altivo around. “There has to be someone or something here to tell us. Come on!”
Altivo galloped from the room. They passed through the marketplace of empty stalls and in front of forlorn houses. Reaching the temple, Altivo turned and galloped up the stairs. He didn’t hesitate or miss a single step, only stopping when he reached the top.
Again, the decorations and furniture were gone. When Altivo slowly walked to the edge of the empty pool, Tulio inspected the walls more closely. He could see flecks of color, as though the paintings had been rubbed off or had faded away. He looked deeper into the temple.
While the gold and paintings were gone, some carved murals still remained. Tulio’s gaze landed on a familiar carving. It had been done while they were playing gods, as it depicted Miguel twisted upside-down as he kicked a ball.
“...that was some game,” Miguel said, also staring at the mural.
“Tulio! Miguel!”
The faint yells reminded Tulio of their company. Altivo turned with a snort and carried the Spaniards back to the entrance.
From the top of the temple, the city’s entrance could be seen. The rest of the expedition had gathered outside the tunnel.
Tulio opened his mouth, but couldn’t form words. He instead lifted a hand and waited for Milo to point toward them.
Altivo slowly descended the stairs. By the time he reached the bottom, the others had arrived at the temple.
“Have you seen anyone?” Milo asked.
Tulio shook his head and dropped to the ground. Thankfully, Audrey had grabbed Tulio’s cane, which she handed over. Tulio leaned heavily on the cane as he looked around, as if he could’ve missed an entire city of people.
“Did they move?” Audrey suggested.
“There’s no reason they should’ve moved,” Miguel said. He was still on Altivo’s back, also scanning the abandoned city. “Once the tunnel was blocked, there was no way in the city.”
There was a long silence. Kida eventually pointed out the obvious.
“El Dorado isn’t underground. The tunnel behind the waterfall was the only easy way in, yes, but mountains can be climbed.”
“And the tunnel was purposefully cleared,” Tulio added flatly. “But was it before or after someone entered the city?”
“Are you sure someone invaded El Dorado?” Jaius asked.
“The people had lived here for centuries. There’s no reason they should’ve left,” Miguel said.
“There’s no records of the people,” Milo said nervously. “A city this size… there would’ve been records or stories.”
“A sickness wiped out the city?” Audrey offered with a wince.
“No, there would’ve been remains, even after a couple hundred years,” Sweet said.
“And the gold still would’ve been here,” Miguel said. “Tulio and I weren’t exaggerating about the city of gold, you know. These buildings had been made of gold bricks and gold had paved the walkways. That gold went somewhere.”
“And the paintings,” Miguel added. “The paintings in Atlantis survived thousands of years underwater, but all these faded in four hundred years?”
“They were invaded,” Tulio said. Everyone looked at him. “That's the only explanation. Someone came and took all of the gold. The paintings were ruined to uncover any gold that might’ve been hidden underneath. Probably made the people their slaves.”
Tulio turned and limped away, no destination in mind. He moved slowly, studying the houses he passed for some other clue of what could have happened to the city.
Tulio and Miguel hadn’t spent long in the city, but they had been the happiest days of Tulio’s life since meeting Miguel. Sure, they’d been playing a con, but it had been a harmless con and everyone had been happy!
Eventually, Tulio found himself on the edge of the city, on a path alongside the whirlpool thought by the people of El Dorado to lead to Xibalba. Tulio started to turn away, then paused and looked down again.
There wasn’t any water in the city, but the whirlpool remained!
“Where’s that water coming from?” Tulio wondered to himself.
Chittering made Tulio look down. He raised an eyebrow when he saw Ladron climbing onto his boot. Last he’d seen him, the armadillo had been burrowed in the pack of vegetables.
“What do you want?” Tulio asked Ladron.
Ladron chittered, then looked down the path. Tulio turned and saw Miguel and Altivo headed toward him.
Miguel’s smile was subdued as he said, “This spot brings back memories, huh?”
“Mostly bad ones,” Tulio said.
Miguel shrugged with a nod. He looked at the whirlpool for a moment before speaking.
“Have you thought about what it would be like to go back?”
“Every day,” Tulio admitted. He rubbed the crystal. “But there wasn’t anything for us there. Then. We’re building a life here, though.”
“I guess I’m just missing the constant adventure,” Miguel said.
“Oh, the mess with ‘Odin’ last month wasn’t enough for you?” Tulio asked flatly.
Miguel laughed at the memory. “Life won’t be dull around the Atlanteans, that’s for sure.”
“When Kida…” Miguel trailed off. “Tulio, your crystal!”
Tulio looked down and saw light coming from between his fingers. “I told you life wouldn’t be dull anymore.”
Miguel lifted his own crystal as it began to glow. Calls from the others made the Spaniards glance down the path.
Something made Tulio turn. His gaze fell down to the whirlpool. A blue glow was growing deep within it.
Altivo squealed and pawed the ground. Miguel caught his reins and murmured soothingly, but he was also looking at the whirlpool.
Tulio and Miguel continued along the path until he reached the platform protruding over the whirlpool. What remained, at least. It looked like the platform hadn’t been touched after it had broken during the confrontation with Tzekel-Kan and his jaguar.
Miguel walked right to the edge, but Tulio stayed back a few steps. He hadn’t had any issues recently with his balance, but he wasn’t taking any chances of accidentally falling. Especially since Ladron was still digging his claws into his boot.
“Tulio? Miguel?”
Tulio turned toward Audrey. He noticed immediately that her crystal was glowing as well.
“Hey, what did you two do?” Audrey asked, jogging over.
“We didn’t do anything,” Tulio said, amused. “Is everyone’s crystals glowing?”
“Sweet’s and mine are, at least. He went to find Kida and Jaius,” Audrey said.
“Do you think it would take us back?” Miguel asked suddenly, turning to them.
Tulio blinked. “What?”
“That whirlpool, it looks exactly like the one that brought us here,” Miguel said.
“Don’t go jumping down and seeing where it takes you,” Audrey said sarcastically.
“Tzekel-Kan survived it somehow,” Miguel said, though he backed away from the jagged edge.
Tulio was about to comment when he was struck by a sudden memory. He turned the crystal over in his hand.
“It’s not too late to go home,” Tulio muttered.
Audrey frowned. “What?”
“That’s what the Heart told me, back in Atlantis,” Tulio said.
“I thought you’d made that up for the argument,” Miguel said.
Tulio shook his head. “The Heart needed too much power to send us back. The king’s sacrifice was enough to send us back or save the city… I think.”
“You think?” Audrey repeated.
“I didn’t really converse with the Heart,” Tulio said. “It was more of a sense… either way, when we were still in this time after a few weeks, I forgot about it, really.”
Most of Tulio’s memories of their time in Atlantis were a blur. Everyone knew he didn’t like to talk about it -for plenty of reasons- so while Tulio and Audrey looked surprised that he’d forgotten , neither commented. Tulio was grateful for it.
“But that makes you think that’s the Heart’s magic?” Audrey asked, pointing down.
“It’s got to be Atlantean,” Tulio said. He shook his head. “We should find Kida.”
“Agreed, this is just creepy,” Audrey said as she began to back away.
At that moment, the rest of the expedition crew arrived at the end of the pathway. Everyone’s crystals were glowing, and Milo and Kida looked concerned.
“There’s Kida,” Tulio said, relieved. “Let’s go.”
Miguel looked once more at the whirlpool, then nodded. He’d taken a step toward Tulio when the platform began to shake.
“The universe really hates us,” Tulio muttered, then yelled, “Run!”
Using his head, Altivo tossed Audrey onto the air. Miguel darted closer and Tulio hop-skipped forward, trying to move fast as Altivo turned back toward them. Audrey hit the ground with a grunt and rolled onto the solid walkway.
A crack appeared between the platform and walkway. Everyone else began yelling, and Tulio became sharply aware of how slowly he was moving when the platform tilted.
Altivo slid between the Spaniards. Both grabbed him from either side, and Altivo turned while the two of them scrambled to climb onto his back.
There was an earsplitting crack, then the platform tilted further. Altivo trumpeted, his hooves skittering backward. Vines tore under his hooves.
Audrey was on her feet, reaching out and yelling their names. Sweet was at her side a moment later, already uncoiling a rope.
Altivo kicked forward, nearly losing the Spaniards. Tulio tangled his fingers on one hand in Altivo’s mane, and tightened the other hand around Miguel’s wrist. The two of them were halfway on Altivo’s back when there was another sharp crack .
And then they were falling.
Tulio gave Miguel an exasperated look. Miguel grinned nervously back. Then the two of them swung onto Altivo’s back, Miguel in the front and Tulio in the back. Catching a glimpse of Ladron still clinging to his boot, Tulio grabbed the armadillo and let him cling to the front of his shirt while he leaned forward to grab Miguel. Air rushing against their faces, they all looked up.
The rest of the expedition, the friends they’d made after being dumped into a strange world, were all leaning over the edge of the walkway. That was the last thing Tulio saw before glowing water closed over his head.
Instantly, Tulio felt himself yanked backward. He grabbed tighter onto Miguel as Altivo bucked and kicked. Tulio looked up, but he was surrounded by liquid light. He had to close his eyes against the brightness, trying to not breathe as he was bounced against Miguel and Altivo.
A startled noise from Miguel made Tulio open his eyes. The light was nearly gone. They were being tugged around by an invisible current. In the swirling water, it took Tulio a moment to notice what had caught Miguel’s attention.
A large, feline form was rushing around them. Tulio had a fleeting thought that it was Tzekel-Khan’s jaguar, sunk to the bottom of the whirlpool.
Tulio looked in the direction he thought was up. Altivo was kicking hard, but the current was relentless.
Miguel gave a gurgling yell. Tulio looked sharply down in time to see the feline form reappear. This time, it was close enough for Tulio to see it wasn’t stone. Its body was sleek and black, and its spots seemed to be made of stars. Ice-blue eyes glared into Tulio’s.
Tulio and Miguel ducked as the jaguar swept past. They looked up, then at each other. The surface didn’t seem far. Depending on where they were, if they could get to the surface, they could get out of the water to face the strange jaguar.
Darkness blurred in the corner of Tulio’s vision. He twisted, instinctively lifting the cane.
The jaguar hit the cane without slowing, slamming into Tulio. The last of his air escaped in a flurry of bubbles. He reached out with his free hand, felt Miguel’s fingers brush his, then he was off of Altivo’s back, being pulled away by the powerful paws.
Miguel twisted, frantically scanning the water. In seconds, Tulio had been pulled away by the strange beast. Miguel’s lungs felt ready to burst, but all he could do was look around.
Altivo lurched into motion. Miguel barely noticed the water suddenly lightening before he and Altivo were abruptly thrust from the water. Miguel sucked in air, coughed, then gasped another lungful.
Already, Miguel was looking around. He expected stone walls, but there was nothing. No walls, no shore, nothing but water. A low wave splashed him in the face, and Miguel spit out salty water. He was reminded of being stranded in the ocean in a rowboat with Tulio and Altivo.
As soon as he had air to spare, Miguel yelled, “Tulio!”
Miguel ducked back underwater and looked around. There was no sign of Tulio or the jaguar. He could feel the pull of an invisible current. He surfaced again and shook the water from his eyes.
“Tulio!”
Miguel treaded water until Altivo swam closer. Miguel got onto Altivo’s back, letting Altivo keep them afloat while he scanned the area.
In the distance was a low shape, possibly land. Miguel thought that might’ve been the way the jaguar had dragged Tulio, but he wasn’t sure.
“Tulio!”
Miguel didn’t get any answer, no matter how much he strained his ears. Not having any other options, Miguel turned Altivo toward the shape and urged him onward.
“Let’s go, Altivo,” Miguel said, rubbing the stallion’s neck. “We’ll find Tulio… we will… we have to.”
Miguel kept dismounting to swim underwater and yelled across the waves until his voice was hoarse. Still, he didn’t stop until Altivo lurched out of the water. Miguel grabbed Altivo’s mane to keep from falling, then looked ahead in surprise.
They’d reached a low, sandy beach. The beach sloped gently up toward trees and thick brush.
“Tulio!” Miguel yelled. “Tulio, answer me, please!”
Miguel’s only answer was the howling wind. He shivered, chilled.
“Come on, Tulio, where are you?” Miguel whispered, his voice rough.
Miguel looked down the beach, then froze.
Rising from the water was a huge, white rock. There was a deep hollow on the side of the rock and a hook on the front, like an oversized beak. Altogether, the rock created the illusion of -because it couldn’t be real, right?- of a two-hundred-foot-long skull.
“Where,” Miguel rasped, “And when are we?”
Elsewhere…
Deep below the surface was a bubble of air, resting on the ocean floor. It swayed gently with the currents, but never popped or shrank. It bobbed silently in place, just waiting.
A feline with stars dotting her pitch-black coat slipped through the bubble wall, which sealed seamlessly behind her. Her ears were pricked nervously forward as the feline stepped into the center of the bubble. The feline was, in fact, a jaguar of the stars. Larger than any natural feline, she easily carried Tulio’s limp form in her jaws.
The jaguar lowered her head to set Tulio in the center of the bubble. Tulio’s cane clattered down beside him. She backed away, her head lowering and ears going back.
From the shadows beyond the boundaries of the bubble appeared a woman. She didn’t walk so much as float across the bubble, the edges of her long dress disappearing into wispy tendrils. Eris, goddess of Discord, wore a casually arrogant frown as she surveyed the jaguar’s offering for a long moment.
No mortal human could’ve survived the length and depth of the trip to the bubble, yet Tulio still breathed. Eris knew at a glance that it wasn’t by Tulio’s own power. She leaned down and rolled him over, and the glowing crystal hanging around his neck confirmed her suspicions.
“After all this time,” Eris murmured, staring at the crystal, “A piece of the Heart. Very good, Felis.”
Felis’ ears pricked at the praise, but she didn’t otherwise move from her submissive posture.
Eris reached toward the crystal, which flared briefly. Eris’ expression soured, then she straightened.
“So close, and yet…”
A hacking sound made Eris turn in time to see Felis spit out Ladron. The armadillo bounced once, then unrolled, stumbling sideways.
“Oh,” Eris said, her lip curling, “It’s you.”
Ladron scurried over to Tulio and huddled inside his vest.
“Felis.”
Felis lowered her head almost to the ground, but came closer. Eris looked thoughtfully between Felis and the crystal.
“This could work… yes,” Eris said with a satisfied smile.
Eris leaned down. Ignoring how the crystal flared, Eris’ fingers feathered over Tulio’s forehead. His face clenched and he twisted with a groan. Eris straightened and dismissively flicked her hand. Felis picked up Tulio and his cane in her mouth again.
“Go to Syracuse,” Eris ordered Felis. “It’s been long enough since Sinbad foiled my plans for the Book of Peace that their guard will be low. Especially now.” Eris smiled again. “I wonder, did Marina really think Thrace would take her breaking the engagement so easily?”
“Chaos,” Eris mused, “But, such dull chaos. Their efforts are waning. War won’t come unless the prince dies.”
Eris threw her head back and laughed. Felis sat and curled her tail over her paws, waiting for her directions. In her jaws, Tulio had become silent.
“Two birds with one stone, Felis,” Eris cackled. “Go, find the Book of Peace and take it. Destroy anyone who stands in your way. Then, go after the prince, if he isn’t already guarding the Book himself. Even now, Proteus will try to protect the Book.”
Eris stared into the dark water. Visions flitted through bubbles, showing Eris the events of three locations.
Miguel and Altivo paced along a shore. Miguel’s crystal bounced against his shirt as he called out over and over.
“If this one fails,” Eris said slowly, then looked at the other two images.
In one, Sinbad and Marina stood at the wheel of the Chimera. Marina was laughing at something while Sinbad studied a map with his brows furrowed. Spike bounced around them, barking inaudibly. In the background, the rest of the crew seemed to be celebrating.
In the other, Proteus and King Dymas sat on a stone bench on a balcony overlooking the sea. Proteus, staring across the ocean, had elbows on his knees and chin resting on his interlaced fingers. King Dymas said something to Proteus, a deep frown drawing down his features. Proteus shook his head wearily, then gave a cough that shook his body.
“So noble, to not trouble your friends,” Eris sneered. “Oh, well, it will make this that much easier.” She frowned at Felis. “What are you waiting for? Go!”
Felis turned away, but halted when Eris spoke again.
“Wait.”
Felis looked at Eris.
“If you must choose between the Book or the prince,” Eris said slowly, “Kill the prince.”
Felis growled in pleasure, then leaped out of the bubble. She was soon gone in the shadows.
“War is easy. All it takes is a nudge, and the people are at each other’s throats… unless someone interferes,” Eris said, thinking out loud. She looked at the image of Sinbad. “My careful plan, ruined by you black-hearted pirate suddenly finding his conscience. Well, let’s see how your conscience feels when Proteus is dead and it’s all your fault.”
Notes:
And here we have it! If you didn't recognize the characters in the last bit, they're from Sinbad: Legend of the Seven Seas, with the exception of Felis, who's an OC. This is the world that the next story will take place, in the upcoming Beyond the Seven Seas!
But I can't leave you with just that, of course. ;)
The details of Beyond the Seven Seas is still being hammered out with the plan to start writing for this year's NaNo, but it will take place about a year after the events of the Sinbad movie. Miguel and Tulio have been separated with no way of knowing where the other is, but fate's still going to be bringing them back together! Of course, with Miguel joining Sinbad's crew in the midst of an unchartable sea and Tulio facing accusations of treason in Syracuse with Ladron and Proteus being his only allies, this reunion is going to be a little bit tricky. Throw a cursed Tulio, sick Proteus, and a demon from Sinbad and Kale's past and, well, the result can only be typical levels of chaos for Miguel and Tulio.Until the next ramble, Griffin, out!

Pages Navigation
Xie_Ice on Chapter 1 Sat 04 Nov 2023 04:50PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 1 Sat 04 Nov 2023 07:59PM UTC
Comment Actions
BluTaiger on Chapter 1 Sat 30 Dec 2023 02:22AM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 1 Sat 30 Dec 2023 02:04PM UTC
Comment Actions
BluTaiger on Chapter 1 Sat 30 Dec 2023 07:22PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 1 Sun 31 Dec 2023 09:12PM UTC
Comment Actions
BluTaiger on Chapter 1 Mon 01 Jan 2024 02:02PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 1 Mon 01 Jan 2024 02:29PM UTC
Comment Actions
AlicornGem88 on Chapter 1 Wed 10 Jan 2024 03:21AM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 1 Wed 10 Jan 2024 04:13AM UTC
Comment Actions
Cao_the_dreamer on Chapter 1 Mon 01 Apr 2024 11:27AM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 1 Mon 01 Apr 2024 12:55PM UTC
Comment Actions
gwencarson126 on Chapter 1 Thu 18 Jul 2024 01:21PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 1 Thu 18 Jul 2024 01:28PM UTC
Comment Actions
gwencarson126 on Chapter 1 Thu 18 Jul 2024 02:23PM UTC
Comment Actions
Teddywise01 on Chapter 1 Tue 27 Aug 2024 05:44PM UTC
Last Edited Tue 27 Aug 2024 05:46PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 1 Tue 27 Aug 2024 08:37PM UTC
Comment Actions
gwencarson126 on Chapter 2 Wed 28 Aug 2024 04:47PM UTC
Comment Actions
Cao_the_dreamer on Chapter 2 Wed 28 Aug 2024 04:49PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 2 Wed 28 Aug 2024 08:44PM UTC
Comment Actions
Teddywise01 on Chapter 2 Fri 30 Aug 2024 07:40AM UTC
Last Edited Fri 30 Aug 2024 07:40AM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 2 Fri 30 Aug 2024 08:49PM UTC
Comment Actions
Teddywise01 on Chapter 2 Sat 31 Aug 2024 04:14AM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 2 Sat 31 Aug 2024 12:32PM UTC
Comment Actions
AlicornGem88 on Chapter 3 Wed 04 Sep 2024 02:28PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 3 Thu 05 Sep 2024 02:46AM UTC
Comment Actions
Teddywise01 on Chapter 3 Fri 06 Sep 2024 01:18AM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 3 Fri 06 Sep 2024 12:37PM UTC
Comment Actions
Emylle_Dias_King on Chapter 3 Tue 01 Oct 2024 03:27AM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 3 Tue 01 Oct 2024 12:31PM UTC
Comment Actions
Emylle_Dias_King on Chapter 3 Tue 01 Oct 2024 08:59PM UTC
Comment Actions
Iamhereforthefanficsletssssgoooo on Chapter 3 Fri 18 Oct 2024 07:29PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 3 Fri 18 Oct 2024 08:29PM UTC
Comment Actions
AlicornGem88 on Chapter 4 Thu 24 Oct 2024 04:39PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 4 Thu 24 Oct 2024 08:40PM UTC
Comment Actions
Xie_Ice on Chapter 4 Fri 25 Oct 2024 04:02AM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 4 Fri 25 Oct 2024 12:49PM UTC
Comment Actions
PenDragon_Pie on Chapter 4 Sat 26 Oct 2024 10:26AM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 4 Sat 26 Oct 2024 01:19PM UTC
Comment Actions
AlicornGem88 on Chapter 5 Fri 01 Nov 2024 02:41PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 5 Sat 02 Nov 2024 01:52AM UTC
Comment Actions
PenDragon_Pie on Chapter 5 Fri 01 Nov 2024 10:46PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 5 Sat 02 Nov 2024 01:55AM UTC
Comment Actions
Kittypelt on Chapter 5 Fri 01 Nov 2024 11:01PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 5 Sat 02 Nov 2024 01:55AM UTC
Comment Actions
Teddywise01 on Chapter 5 Sat 02 Nov 2024 12:25AM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 5 Sat 02 Nov 2024 01:55AM UTC
Comment Actions
PenDragon_Pie on Chapter 6 Mon 11 Nov 2024 12:33PM UTC
Comment Actions
GriffinStone on Chapter 6 Mon 11 Nov 2024 02:54PM UTC
Comment Actions
Pages Navigation